Nortel Networks Server NN43001 106 User Manual
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services  
Fundamentals — Book 2 of  
6 (C)  
NN43001-106  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Revision History  
May 2008  
Standard 01.06. This document is up-issued to update the current behavior  
of CLID with HOLD/RETRIEVE functionality for ISDN interfaces (CR  
Q01809278-01).  
Standard 01.05. This document is up-issued to add information on  
CDP/UDP Calls to the Call Forward to Trunk Restriction chapter in Book 2.  
July 2007  
Standard 01.04. This document is up-issued to revise the 500 Telephone  
Features and Bandwidth Management Support for Network Wide Virtual  
Office chapters in Book 1 and revise the Conference Warning Tone  
Enhancement chapter in Book 2.  
June 2007  
Standard 01.03. This document is up-issued to revise the Software  
Licenses chapter in Book 6.  
June 2007  
Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued to revise the Network Music  
feature implementation in Book 5.  
May 2007  
Standard 01.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication  
Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document is renamed Features and  
Services Fundamentals (NN43001-106) and contains information previously  
contained in the following legacy documents, now retired:  
•
•
•
Features and Services: Book 1 of 3 (A to C) (553-3001-306B1)  
Features and Services: Book 2 of 3 (D to M) (553-3001-306B2)  
Features and Services: Book 3 of 3 (N to Z) (553-3001-306B3)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Revision History  
This document also includes the following updates:  
•
Corrections to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on page 534  
(Book 5) and to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on page 540  
(Book 5) to address CR Q01527854.  
•
Updated the description of EXTT prompt in LD 15 on page 338 (Book 6)  
to address CR Q01272661.  
July 2006  
Standard 17.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following changes:  
•
•
•
Addition of M3900 Full Icon Support feature on pages 797 to 800 (Book  
2).  
Addition of M3900 Set-to-Set Messaging feature on pages 801 to 806  
(Book 2).  
Addition of M3900 series digital telephone feature reference on pages  
341, 342 of the Personal Directory chapter (Book 3).  
April 2006  
Standard 16.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following  
changes:  
•
•
•
Addition of keycode commands for CP PIV on pages 595 to 610 (Book  
2).  
Addition of IPMG on CS1000E to the following: operating parameters on  
page 364 (Book 3); and LD 97 on page 379 (Book 3).  
Additions to the following: Call Redirection by Day on page 848 (Book1);  
the CRDAY prompt on page 852 (Book 1); and Call Redirection by Time  
of Day on page 858 (Book 1).  
•
•
•
Addition of Flexible Feature Codes to list on pages 371 to 376 of Flexible  
Feature Codes chapter (Book 2).  
Correction to Message Intercept for Set Status Lockout on pages  
982-983 (Book 2).  
Correction to SECA001 alarm message on page 402 (Book 1).  
January 2006  
Standard 15.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following changes  
in content:  
•
•
Addition of Converged Office feature on page 1247 (Book 1); changes  
to interactions with Call Forward All Calls on pages 647, 648, 721, 725  
(Book 1), and 521 (Book 2).  
Addition of IP Phones to supported sets referenced in Selectable  
Conferee Display and Disconnect on pages 667 to 700 (Book 3).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Revision History  
5
August 2005  
Standard 14.00. This document is up-issued to support Communication  
Server 1000 Release 4.5.  
September 2004  
Standard 13.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server  
1000 Release 4.0.  
October 2003  
Standard 12.00. This document is issued to support Succession 3.0.  
November 2002  
Standard 11.00. This document is up-issued to support Meridian 1 Release  
25.40 and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise (CSE) 1000,  
Release 2.0. This is book 1 of a 3 book set.  
January 2002  
Standard 10.00. Up-issued to include content for Meridian 1 Release 25.40  
and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000, Release 1.1.  
April 2000  
Standard 9.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for Release  
25.0x. Document changes include removal of: redundant content;  
references to equipment types except Options 11C, 51C, 61C, and 81C; and  
references to previous software releases.  
June 1999  
Issue 8.00 released as Standard for Generic Release 24.2x.  
October 1997  
Issue 7.00. This is the Release 23.0x standard version of this document.  
Certain application-specific features have been removed from this document  
and have been placed in their appropriate Nortel Networks technical  
publications (technical documents). Automatic Call Distribution features can  
be found in Automatic Call Distribution Feature description 553-2671-110;  
Call Detail Recording features can be found in Call Detail Recording  
Description and formats 553-2631-100; Primary Rate Interface features can  
be found in International ISDN PRI Feature description and administration  
553-2901-301; R2MFC and MFC features can be found in Multifrequency  
Compelled Signaling 553-2861-100; and DPNSS1 features can be found in  
DPNSS1 Features and Services 553-3921-300.  
August 1996  
Issue 6.00. This is the Release 22.0x standard version of this document.  
The features Automatic Number Identification, Automatic Trunk  
Maintenance, Multi Tenant Service, Radio Paging and X08/11 Gateway  
have been incorporated into this document. Accordingly, the following  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
Revision History  
Nortel Networks technical publications have been retired to reflect this  
change: 553-2611-200, 553-2751-104, 553-2831-100, 553-2721-111 and  
553-2941-100.  
December 1995  
Issue 5.00. This is the Release 21.1x standard version of this document.  
July 1995  
Issue 4.00. This is the Release 21 standard version of this document.  
October 1994  
Issue 2.0. This is the Release 20.1x soak version of the document.  
July 1994  
Issue 1.0. This is the Release 20.0x standard version of this document.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Contents  
New in this release  
45  
49  
Other 45  
Revision History 45  
How to get help  
Getting help from the Nortel web site 49  
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 49  
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 49  
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 50  
Features and Software options  
51  
89  
Call Forward All Calls  
Contents 89  
Feature description 89  
Operating parameters 90  
Feature interactions 91  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 91  
Attendant Alternative Answering 91  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 91  
Attendant Break-In 91  
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls 91  
Attendant Busy Verify 91  
Attendant Overflow Position 92  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 92  
Call Forward and Busy Status 92  
Call Forward by Call Type 92  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation 92  
Call Forward External Deny 92  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 92  
Call Forward, Internal Calls 93  
Call Forward No Answer 93  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 93  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD 93  
Call Page Network Wide 93  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 93  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Contents  
Calling Party Name Display Denied 94  
Calling Party Privacy 94  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting Redirection  
Camp-On  
Camp-On, Station 94  
China - Attendant Monitor 94  
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward 94  
Enhanced Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward 94  
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring 95  
Enhanced Flexible Feature - Outgoing Call Barring 95  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 95  
Conference 95  
Display of Calling Party Denied 95  
Do Not Disturb 96  
DPNSS1 Diversion 96  
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines 96  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 96  
Flexible Feature Codes 96  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 97  
Group Call 97  
Group Hunt 97  
Hunting 97  
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions 97  
Idle Extension Notification 97  
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement 98  
ISDN QSIG Call Completion 98  
ISDN QSIG Name Display 98  
Make Set Busy 98  
Message Registration 98  
Multi-Party Operations 98  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime 98  
Network Intercom (Hot Type D and Hot Type 1 Enhancements) 99  
Network Individual Do Not Disturb 99  
Night Service Enhancements 99  
Paging 99  
Periodic Pulse Metering 99  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 99  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks 99  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 99  
Ring Again on No Answer 99  
Special prefix SPRE access codes 100  
Total Redirection Count 100  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
9
Trunk Access Codes 100  
User Selectable Call Redirection 100  
Feature packaging 100  
Feature implementation 100  
Task summary list 100  
Feature operation 103  
Call Forward and Busy Status  
Contents 105  
105  
Feature description 105  
Busy Status 106  
Call Forward Status 106  
Operating parameters 106  
Feature interactions 107  
Attendant and Network-Wide Remote Call Forward 107  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 107  
Autodial 107  
Call Forward All Calls 107  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 107  
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network-Wide) 107  
Calling Party Privacy 107  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 108  
Network Intercom 108  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 108  
Feature packaging 108  
Feature implementation 108  
Task summary list 108  
Feature operation 110  
Call Forward Status 110  
BFS lamp or LCD states 110  
Call Forward Busy  
Contents 113  
113  
Feature description 113  
Operating parameters 113  
Feature interactions 113  
Attendant Alternative Answering 113  
Attendant Busy Verify 113  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 114  
Call Forward All Calls 114  
Calling Party Privacy 114  
Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones 114  
Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones 114  
Camp-On, Station 114  
China - Attendant Monitor 114  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Contents  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 115  
Departmental Listed Directory Number 115  
Dial Access to Group Calls 115  
Call Forward Busy 115  
Dial Access to Group Calls  
Group Call 115  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 115  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 115  
Group Hunt 115  
Hot Line 115  
Hunting 116  
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions 116  
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement 116  
Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments 116  
Network Intercom 116  
Night Service 116  
Recorded Announcement for Call Diverted to External Trunks 116  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 116  
Total Redirection Count 116  
Trunk Barring 117  
Feature packaging 117  
Feature implementation 117  
Task summary list 117  
Feature operation 118  
Call Forward by Call Type  
Contents 119  
119  
Feature description 119  
Operating parameters 120  
Feature interactions 121  
Attendant 121  
Attendant Alternative Answering 121  
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls 121  
Automatic Timed Recall 121  
Call Forward All Calls 121  
Call Forward No Answer 121  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 122  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD 122  
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide 122  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 122  
Calling Party Name Display Denied 122  
Calling Party Privacy 122  
Call Transfer  
Network Call Transfer 123  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 11  
Call Waiting Redirection 123  
Conference 123  
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 123  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement 123  
ISDN Semi Permanent Connections for Australia 124  
Message Center 124  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 124  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 124  
Trunk Barring 125  
Feature packaging 125  
Feature implementation 125  
Task summary list 125  
Feature operation 127  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
Contents 129  
129  
Feature description 129  
Operating parameters 130  
Feature interactions 131  
Call Forward All Calls 131  
Call Forward, Remote 132  
Meridian Mail 132  
Feature packaging 132  
Feature implementation 132  
Task summary list 132  
Feature operation 134  
16-Button DTMF telephone 135  
Deactivating Multiple Appearance DN 135  
Call Forward External Deny  
Contents 137  
137  
Feature description 137  
Operating parameters 138  
Feature interactions 138  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 138  
Call Forward All Calls 139  
Calling Party Privacy 139  
Network Call Forward 139  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 139  
Trunk Barring 139  
Feature packaging 139  
Feature implementation 139  
Task summary list 139  
Feature operation 140  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Contents  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Contents 141  
141  
Feature description 141  
Operating parameters 143  
Feature interactions 143  
Automatic Timed Reminders 143  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 143  
Call Forward All Calls 143  
Call Forward by Call Type 144  
Call Forward No Answer 144  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 144  
Call Waiting Redirection 144  
Calling Party Privacy 144  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing 144  
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing 145  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer 145  
Group Hunt 145  
Hunting 145  
Message Centers 145  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 146  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 146  
Slow Answer Recall 147  
Total Redirection Count 147  
Trunk Barring 147  
Feature packaging 147  
Feature implementation 147  
Task summary list 147  
Feature operation 149  
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
Contents 151  
151  
Feature description 151  
Operating parameters 152  
Feature interactions 153  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 153  
Attendant Administration 153  
Attendant Alternative Answering 153  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 153  
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls 153  
Attendant Overflow Position 153  
Automatic Call Distribution 154  
Automatic Set Relocation 154  
Automatic Timed Recall 154  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 13  
Automatic Timed Reminders 154  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 154  
Call Forward All Calls 154  
Call Forward by Call Type 154  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 154  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 155  
Call Page Network Wide 155  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 155  
Call Waiting 155  
Call Waiting Redirection 155  
Calling Party Privacy 155  
Camp-On 156  
China - Attendant Monitor 156  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 156  
Dial Access to Group Calls 156  
Departmental Listed Directory Number 156  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing 156  
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer 157  
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines 157  
Group Call 157  
Group Hunt 157  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement 157  
Hot Line 157  
Hunting 158  
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions 158  
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement 158  
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide 158  
Meridian Mail Operator Revert 158  
Multi-Party Operations 159  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime 159  
Network Intercom 159  
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number 159  
Night Service enhancements 160  
Periodic Pulse Metering 160  
Recall to Same Attendant 160  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks 160  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 160  
Ring Again on No Answer 160  
Slow Answer Recall for Transferred External Trunks 160  
Total Redirection Count 160  
Trunk Barring 161  
Feature packaging 161  
Feature implementation 161  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 Contents  
Task summary list 161  
Feature operation 164  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD  
Contents 165  
165  
Feature description 165  
Operating parameters 165  
Feature interactions 165  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward by Call Type 165  
Feature packaging 166  
Feature implementation 166  
Feature operation 166  
Call Forward to Trunk Restriction  
Contents 167  
167  
Feature description 167  
Operating parameters 167  
Feature interactions 167  
CDP/UDP Calls 167  
Feature packaging 168  
Feature implementation 168  
Feature operation 168  
Call Forward, Internal Calls  
Contents 169  
169  
Feature description 169  
Operating parameters 170  
Feature interactions 171  
Attendant Administration 171  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 171  
Attendant Busy Verify 171  
Attendant-Extended Calls 171  
Attendant Night Service 171  
Attendant Overflow 171  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward Reminder Tone 171  
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide 172  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 172  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 172  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting Redirection 172  
Calling Party Privacy 172  
Camp-On 173  
China - Attendant Monitor 173  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 173  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 15  
Do Not Disturb  
Hunting 173  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 173  
Network Intercom 173  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 173  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks 173  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console 174  
Remote Call Forward 174  
Trunk Barring 174  
Feature packaging 174  
Feature implementation 174  
Task summary list 174  
Feature operation 175  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone 175  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephone 176  
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)  
Contents 177  
177  
Feature description 177  
Operating parameters 178  
Feature interactions 178  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) 178  
Call Forward Activation from any Feature  
Call Forward and Busy Status 178  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation 178  
Calling Party Privacy 179  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 179  
Outpulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO) 179  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs) 179  
Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward 180  
Traffic Measurements 180  
Feature packaging 181  
Feature implementation 181  
Task summary list 181  
Set-based configuration 182  
Attendant-based configuration 183  
Feature operation 185  
Network Wide Set-based Remote Call Forward 185  
Attendant-based Remote Call Forward 185  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Contents 187  
187  
Feature description 187  
Operating parameters 188  
Feature interactions 188  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Contents  
Attendant Blocking of DN 188  
Automatic Call Distribution 188  
Attendant Barge-in  
Attendant Busy Verify  
Attendant Break-in 188  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) 189  
BRIT 189  
Call Forward-older features 189  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 189  
Call Transfer 189  
Call Waiting 189  
Call Waiting Redirection 189  
Camp-on 190  
Digital Private Network Signaling System One (DPNSS1) 190  
Direct Inward System Access 190  
Do Not Disturb 190  
Flexible DN  
External Flexible DN 190  
Group Call 190  
Group Hunt 190  
Hunt 190  
Hunt DN/External Hunt DN 190  
Idle Extension Notification 191  
Intercept Computer Call Forward 191  
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operations 191  
Last Number Redial 191  
Multiple Appearance Multiple Call Arrangements (MCAs)  
Multiple Appearance Single Call Arrangements (SCAs) 191  
Primary Line Directory Number (PLDN) 191  
Phantom TN 191  
Priority Override 191  
Radio Paging 191  
Ring Again  
Network Ring Again 191  
Ring Again No Answer  
Network Ring Again No Answer 192  
Single Digit Access 192  
Semi-automatic Camp-On 192  
Speed Call 192  
Feature packaging 192  
Feature implementation 192  
Task summary list 192  
Feature operation 194  
Standalone 194  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 17  
Network 194  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
Contents 195  
195  
Feature description 195  
Operating parameters 196  
Feature interactions 196  
Attendant Administration 196  
Attendant Break-In 196  
Camp-On, Forced  
Override, Enhanced  
Override, Priority 196  
Call Hold, Deluxe 196  
Calling Line Identification 196  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 196  
Call Party Name Display 196  
Call Transfer 196  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls 197  
Calling Party Privacy 197  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 197  
Mixed DNs 197  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 197  
Music, Enhanced 197  
Predictive Dialing 197  
Feature packaging 197  
Feature implementation 197  
Task summary list 197  
Feature operation 199  
Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement  
Contents 201  
201  
Feature description 201  
Operating parameters 202  
Feature interactions 203  
Automatic Call Distribution 203  
Automatic Hold 203  
Multi-Party Operations 203  
Conference (A03/A06, C6A) 204  
Exclusive Hold 204  
Permanent Hold on an analog (500/2500 type) set 204  
Switch Hook Flash 204  
Transfer (TRN) 205  
Feature packaging 205  
Feature implementation 205  
Task summary list 205  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 Contents  
Feature operation 207  
Call Hold, Permanent  
Contents 209  
209  
Feature description 209  
Operating parameters 209  
Feature interactions 210  
Attendant Break-In 210  
Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) 210  
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall 210  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 210  
Calling Party Privacy 210  
Camp-On, Forced  
Override, Enhanced  
Override, Priority 211  
China - Attendant Monitor 211  
DECT and DCS telephones 211  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 211  
Predictive Dialing 211  
Privacy 211  
Feature packaging 211  
Feature implementation 212  
Task summary list 212  
Feature operation 212  
Call Park  
Contents 215  
215  
Feature description 215  
Operating parameters 216  
Feature interactions 217  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1 217  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar 217  
Access Restrictions 217  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 218  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 218  
Attendant Break-In 218  
Automatic Call Distribution 218  
Automatic Redial 218  
Attendant Consoles 218  
Autodial  
Speed Call 218  
Automatic Timed Reminders 218  
Busy Lamp Field 218  
Call Detail Recording (CDR) 219  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 219  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 19  
Call Forward 219  
Call Page Network Wide 219  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 219  
Call Party Name Display 219  
Call Pickup 219  
Call Pickup Network Wide 219  
Call Transfer  
Conference 219  
Call Waiting 220  
Centralized Attendant Service 220  
China - Attendant Monitor 220  
Conference 220  
Console Presentation Group Level Services 220  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 220  
Display of Calling Party Denied 220  
Do Not Disturb 221  
Generic XFCOT Software Support 221  
Group Call 221  
Held Call Clearing 221  
Hot Line 221  
In-Band Automatic Number Identification 221  
INIT ACD Queue Call Restore 221  
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operation 222  
Make Set Busy 222  
Multi-Tenant Service 222  
Music 222  
Network Intercom  
Private Line Service 222  
Periodic Pulse Metering 222  
Privacy Override 222  
Privacy Release 223  
Recall After Parking 223  
Traffic measurements 223  
Feature packaging 223  
Feature implementation 223  
Task summary list 223  
Feature operation 225  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
Contents 227  
227  
Feature description 227  
Operating parameters 227  
Feature interactions 228  
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication 228  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20 Contents  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) 228  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
Call Hold, Permanent 228  
Call Park 228  
Camp-On 228  
Feature packaging 228  
Feature implementation 228  
Feature operation 229  
Call Party Name Display  
Contents 231  
231  
Feature description 231  
Call Party Name Display assignment 232  
Call Party Name Display composition 232  
Display Devices and Capabilities 233  
Operating parameters 234  
Feature interactions 235  
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall 235  
ACD Routing by DNIS 235  
Attendant Recall 235  
Attendant Recall with Splitting 235  
Autodial  
Speed Call 235  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Dialed Number Identification Services  
(DNIS) 236  
Automatic Wake Up 236  
Call Hold, Deluxe 236  
Call Park 236  
Call Pickup 236  
Call Pickup Network Wide 236  
Call Transfer 236  
Calling Party Privacy 237  
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) 237  
Conference 237  
Dial Intercom 237  
Dialed Number Identification Service 237  
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access Signaling  
System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working 237  
Display Key 237  
End-to-End Signaling 238  
ISDN 238  
ISDN QSIG Name Display 238  
Listed Directory Number 238  
Manual Signaling (Buzz) 238  
Meridian Hospitality Voice Services 238  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 21  
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration 238  
Meridian 911 238  
Network Intercom 239  
Override 239  
Slow Answer Recall 239  
Voice Call 239  
Feature packaging 239  
Feature implementation 239  
Task summary list 239  
Enable CPND and add names to the CPND data block 240  
Change or remove names in the CPND data block 243  
Print entries from the CPND data block 244  
Add or change CPND name entry for a telephone 244  
Feature operation 245  
Call Pickup  
Contents 247  
247  
Feature description 247  
Operating parameters 248  
Feature interactions 248  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 248  
Attendant Alternative Answering 248  
Attendant Overflow Position 248  
Automatic Call Distribution 248  
Call Park 248  
Calling Party Privacy 248  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls 248  
Call Pickup, Directed 248  
Conference 249  
Dial Intercom 249  
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access Signaling  
System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working 249  
Display of Calling Party Denied 249  
Flexible Feature Codes 249  
Group Call 249  
Hot Line 249  
ISDN QSIG Name Display 249  
Multi-Party Operations 250  
Network Intercom 250  
Periodic Pulse Metering 250  
M3900 (Single Site) Virtual Office 250  
Feature packaging 250  
Feature implementation 250  
Task summary list 250  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22 Contents  
Feature operation 252  
Call Pickup, Directed  
Contents 253  
253  
Feature description 253  
Operating parameters 254  
Feature interactions 254  
Automatic Call Distribution 254  
Call Pickup 254  
Flexible Feature Code 254  
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service 254  
Feature packaging 254  
Feature implementation 254  
Task summary list 254  
Feature operation 256  
Call Redirection by Day  
Contents 259  
259  
Feature description 259  
Operating parameters 260  
Feature interactions 260  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 260  
Calls to Idle Stations: 260  
Calls to Busy Stations: 260  
Call Forward No Answer 261  
Call Forward All Calls 261  
Call Waiting Redirection 261  
Hunting 261  
Hunting by Call Type 261  
Group Hunting 261  
Multiple Appearance DN, Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime 262  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer 262  
User Selectable Call Redirection 262  
Feature packaging 262  
Feature implementation 262  
Task summary list 262  
Feature operation 266  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Contents 267  
267  
Feature description 267  
Operating parameters 268  
Feature interactions 268  
Calls to Idle Stations: 268  
Calls to Busy Stations: 268  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 23  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward, Internal  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC 268  
Call Forward by Call Type  
Hunting by Call Type 268  
Call Forward No Answer 269  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 269  
Call Waiting Redirection 269  
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime 269  
Hunting 269  
User Selectable Call Redirection 269  
Feature packaging 269  
Feature implementation 270  
Task summary list 270  
Feature operation 272  
Call Transfer  
Contents 273  
273  
Feature description 273  
Restricted Call Transfer 273  
Operating parameters 274  
Feature interactions 274  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 274  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar 274  
Attendant Break-In 274  
Automatic Redial 275  
Call Forward by Call Type 275  
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide 275  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 275  
Call Hold, Deluxe 275  
Call Page Network Wide 275  
Call Party Name Display 275  
Call Pickup Network Wide 275  
Call Transfer 276  
Calling Party Name Display Denied 276  
Calling Party Privacy 276  
Charge Account and Calling Party Number 276  
Charge Account, Forced 276  
China - Attendant Monitor 276  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 277  
Conference 277  
Dial Intercom 277  
Display Calling Party Denied 277  
Dial Access to Group Calls 277  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 Contents  
Group Call 277  
Group Hunt 278  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement 278  
Held Call Clearing 278  
Hold 278  
In-Band Automatic Number Identification 278  
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion 278  
ISDN QSIG Name Display 278  
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks 278  
Meridian 911 279  
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon 279  
Message Registration 279  
Multi-Party Operations 279  
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements 279  
Music, Enhanced 279  
Network Intercom 279  
Off-Hook Alarm Security 279  
On Hold on Loudspeaker 280  
Periodic Pulse Metering 280  
Predictive Dialing 280  
Privacy Override 281  
Station Activity Records 281  
Supervised Analog Lines 281  
China-Supervised Analog Lines 281  
Three-Party Service 281  
Trunk Barring 281  
Trunk to Trunk Connection 282  
Feature packaging 282  
Feature implementation 282  
Task summary list 282  
Feature operation 283  
Call Waiting Redirection  
Contents 285  
285  
Feature description 285  
Operating parameters 286  
Feature interactions 286  
Automatic Timed Reminders  
Automatic Timed Recalls 286  
Basic Rate Interface 286  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward, Internal 286  
Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type 286  
Call Forward/Hunt Override via Flexible Feature Code 287  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 25  
Call Forward No Answer 287  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level 287  
Call Redirection by Time of Day 287  
Call Pickup Network Wide 287  
Call Waiting 287  
Camp-On 287  
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer 288  
Distinctive Ringing/New Distinctive Ringing  
Call Forward No Answer 288  
Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing 288  
Hunting 288  
Internal or Station-to-Station Call Waiting 288  
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration 288  
Message Center 288  
Message Waiting 289  
Multi-Party Operations 289  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 289  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime 289  
Network Call Forward No Answer 290  
Network Call Redirection 290  
Night Restriction Classes of Service 290  
Night Service  
Night Service Enhancements 290  
Voice Mail 290  
Feature packaging 290  
Feature implementation 290  
Task summary list 290  
Feature operation 293  
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
Contents 295  
295  
Feature description 295  
Internal Call Waiting 296  
Call Waiting Flexible Feature Codes 296  
Operating parameters 296  
Feature interactions 297  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 297  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 297  
Attendant Break-In 297  
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators 297  
Attendant Queuing 298  
Automatic Line Selection 298  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Waiting. 298  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26 Contents  
Call Forward Busy - proprietary telephones 298  
Call Forward Busy - Analog (500/2500 type) telephones 298  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 298  
Call Forward, Internal Calls 298  
Call Forward No Answer 298  
Call Park 298  
Call Pickup Network Wide 298  
Call Waiting Redirection 298  
Camp-On 299  
Camp-on, Station 299  
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control 299  
Dial Intercom 299  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 299  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing 299  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 299  
Flexible Feature Code enhancement 299  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 299  
Group Hunt 299  
Hunting 299  
Idle Extension Notification 300  
ISDN Night Service 300  
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion 300  
Message Center 300  
Multi-Party Operations 300  
Multi-Party Operations 300  
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service 301  
Night Restriction Classes of Service 301  
Night Service Enhancements 302  
On Hold on Loudspeaker 302  
Ring Again 302  
Station Camp-on 302  
Feature packaging 302  
Feature implementation 302  
Task summary list 302  
Feature operation 303  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls  
Contents 305  
305  
Feature description 305  
Operating parameters 305  
Feature interactions 306  
Automatic Hold 306  
Call Hold, Deluxe 306  
Held Call Clearing 306  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 27  
Feature packaging 306  
Feature implementation 307  
Task summary list 307  
Feature operation 308  
Simple Call - Meridian 1 Proprietary Sets 309  
Simple Call - Analog (500/2500 type) Sets 309  
Conference Call 309  
Transfer Call 310  
Call on Hold 310  
Called Party Disconnect Control  
Content 311  
311  
Feature description 311  
Operating parameters 311  
Feature interactions 312  
Automatic Answerback 312  
Conference 312  
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) - Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) 312  
Malicious Call Traced - Enhanced 312  
Meridian 911 312  
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon 312  
Periodic Clearing Enhancement 313  
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music 313  
Feature packaging 313  
Feature implementation 313  
Feature operation 313  
Calling Party Name Display Denied  
Content 315  
315  
Feature description 315  
Operating parameters 317  
Feature interactions 317  
Attendant Consoles 317  
Call Forward  
Call Transfer 317  
Calling Party Privacy 317  
Conference 317  
ISDN QSIG Name Display 317  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers 318  
Office Data Administration System (ODAS) 318  
Feature packaging 318  
Feature implementation 318  
Task summary list 318  
Feature operation 319  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28 Contents  
Calling Party Privacy  
321  
323  
Calling Party Privacy Override  
Content 323  
Feature description 323  
Outgoing calls 324  
Incoming calls 325  
Tandem Calls 325  
Operating parameters 326  
Feature interactions 327  
Attendant Consoles 327  
Autodial 328  
Automatic Call Distribution 328  
Automatic Call Distribution MAX 328  
Basic Rate Interface 328  
Call Detail Recording 329  
Call Pickup Network Wide 329  
Call Hold 329  
Call Forward All Types  
Hunt  
Network Hunt 329  
Call Pickup 330  
Call Transfer 330  
Calling Line Identification Restriction 330  
Calling Party Privacy 331  
Conference 332  
Display of Calling Party Denied 332  
E.164 ESN Numbering Plan Enhancement 332  
Feature Group D 332  
Hot Line 332  
Last Number Redial 333  
Incoming Trunk Programmable Calling Line Identification 333  
ISDN Signaling Link 333  
Malicious Call Trace 333  
Meridian 911 333  
Meridian Interactive Voice Response 333  
Meridian Link 333  
Meridian Mail 334  
Meridian MAX 334  
Network Call Redirection 334  
Network Message Center 334  
Network Ring Again 334  
Nortel Symposium Call Center 334  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 29  
Private Line Service 334  
Remote Virtual Queuing 335  
Ring Again - Busy Trunk 335  
Speed Call  
System Speed Call 335  
Stored Number Redial 335  
Trunk Anti-Tromboning 335  
Trunk Optimization Before Answer 335  
Virtual Network Services 336  
VISIT 336  
Feature packaging 336  
Feature implementation 336  
Task summary list 336  
Feature operation 339  
Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing  
Contents 341  
341  
Feature description 341  
Operating parameters 342  
Feature interactions 342  
342  
Feature packaging 343  
Feature implementation 343  
Feature operation 343  
Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
Contents 345  
345  
Feature description 345  
Operating parameters 346  
Feature interactions 346  
Attendant Break-in 346  
Centralized Multiline 346  
Make Set Busy 346  
Network Camp-On 346  
Operator Call Back 346  
Single Call Ringing and Non-ringing 347  
Station Camp-On 347  
Feature packaging 347  
Feature implementation 347  
Feature operation 347  
Camp-On  
Content 349  
349  
Feature description 349  
Operating parameters 349  
Feature interactions 350  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30 Contents  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number 350  
Attendant Break-In 350  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward, Internal Call 350  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code 350  
Call Forward No Answer 350  
Call Park Network Wide 350  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks 350  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting Redirection 350  
Camp-On, Station 350  
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control 351  
Enhanced Override  
Forced Camp-On  
Priority Override 351  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering 351  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number 351  
Generic XFCOT Software Support 351  
Group Hunt 351  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation 352  
Hunting 352  
Idle Extension Notification 352  
Multi-Party Operations 352  
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements 352  
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service 352  
On Hold on Loudspeaker 352  
Override - Forced Camp-On and Priority Override  
Override, Enhanced 352  
Periodic Pulse Metering 352  
Source Included when Attendant Dials 353  
Uninterrupted Line Connections 353  
Warning Tone 353  
Feature packaging 353  
Feature implementation 353  
Task summary list 353  
Feature operation 354  
Camp-On, Forced  
Content 357  
357  
Feature description 357  
Operating parameters 358  
Feature interactions 359  
Attendant Break-In 359  
Attendant Calls 359  
Automatic Call Distribution 359  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 31  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
Call Hold, Permanent  
Hold 360  
Camp-On 360  
Conference calls 360  
Data calls 360  
Do Not Disturb 360  
Make Set Busy 360  
Multi-Party Operations 360  
Night Restriction Classes of Service 360  
Operator Call Back 361  
Override 361  
Feature packaging 361  
Feature implementation 361  
Task summary list 361  
Feature operation 363  
Forced Camp-On with an analog (500/2500 type) telephone 364  
Forced Camp-On with a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone 365  
Camp-On, Station  
Contents 367  
367  
Feature description 367  
Operating parameters 368  
Camp-On indication 368  
Feature interactions 368  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Waiting  
Hunting 368  
Camp-On 368  
Dial Impulse Set 369  
Network Attendant Service 369  
Feature packaging 369  
Feature implementation 369  
Feature operation 370  
Standalone case 370  
Network case 370  
Recall timing on Camp-On calls 371  
Card LED Status  
Contents 373  
373  
Feature description 373  
Operating parameters 373  
Feature interactions 374  
Feature packaging 374  
Feature implementation 374  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32 Contents  
Task summary list 374  
Feature operation 374  
Centralized Multiple Line Emulation  
Contents 375  
375  
Feature description 375  
Operating parameters 375  
Feature interactions 376  
Digit Display 376  
Feature packaging 376  
Feature implementation 376  
Task summary list 376  
Feature operation 377  
Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Contents 379  
379  
Feature description 379  
Operating parameters 380  
Feature interactions 381  
Autodial Tandem Transfer 381  
China - Attendant Monitor 381  
Collect Call Blocking 381  
Conference 381  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 381  
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced 381  
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music 381  
Secrecy 381  
Feature packaging 382  
Feature implementation 382  
Task summary list 382  
Feature operation 385  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones 385  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones 385  
Attendant Consoles 385  
Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
Contents 387  
387  
Feature description 387  
Operating parameters 388  
Feature interactions 389  
Attendant Barge-In  
Attendant Busy Verify 389  
Call Transfer 389  
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring 389  
Conference 389  
Music, Enhanced 389  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 33  
Override 390  
Ring Again 390  
Speed Call 390  
Telephone keys 390  
Feature packaging 390  
Feature implementation 391  
Task summary list 391  
Feature operation 392  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones 393  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones 394  
Attendant Consoles 396  
Charge Account, Forced  
Contents 397  
397  
Feature description 397  
Operating parameters 398  
Feature interactions 398  
Autodial  
Speed Call 398  
Authorization Code Security Enhancement 399  
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS) 399  
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) 399  
Call Detail Recording 399  
Call Transfer  
Conference 399  
Last Number Redial 399  
Pre-translation 399  
Scheduled Access Restrictions 399  
Stored Number Redial 400  
Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR) 400  
Feature packaging 400  
Feature implementation 400  
Task summary list 400  
Feature operation 402  
Charge Display at End of Call  
Contents 403  
403  
Feature description 403  
M2317 charge display 404  
Modular Set charge display 404  
Operating parameters 404  
Feature interactions 404  
Feature packaging 404  
Feature implementation 405  
Task summary list 405  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34 Contents  
Feature operation 405  
China - Attendant Monitor  
Contents 407  
407  
Feature description 407  
Attendant Monitor Function 407  
Operating parameters 408  
Feature interactions 408  
Attendant Barge-In 408  
Attendant Break-In 408  
Attendant Busy Verify 409  
Automatic Call Distribution 409  
Call Forward All Calls 409  
Call Forward Busy 409  
Call Forward, Internal Calls 409  
Call Forward No Answer 409  
Call Hold, Permanent 409  
Call Park 409  
Call Trace 409  
Call Transfer 410  
Centrex Switchhook Flash 410  
Conference 410  
Do Not Disturb 410  
Make Set Busy 410  
Malicious Call Trace 410  
Multiple Appearance DN 410  
Override 410  
Override, Enhanced 411  
Privacy Release 411  
Private Line 411  
Feature packaging 411  
Feature implementation 411  
Task summary list 411  
Feature operation 412  
Monitor a DN 412  
Monitor a Trunk 413  
China - Busy Tone Detection  
Contents 415  
415  
Feature description 415  
Operating parameters 415  
Feature interactions 416  
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks 416  
Feature packaging 416  
Feature implementation 416  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 35  
Task summary list 416  
Feature operation 418  
China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Contents 419  
419  
Feature description 419  
Busy Number Redial 419  
Customer Call Forward 420  
Outgoing Call Barring 420  
Operating parameters 420  
Feature interactions 421  
Busy Number Redial 421  
Customer Call Forward 421  
Outgoing Call Barring 422  
Feature packaging 424  
Feature implementation 424  
Task summary list 424  
Busy Number Redial 425  
Customer Call Forward 427  
Outgoing Call Barring 428  
Feature operation 431  
Busy Number Redial 431  
Customer Call Forward 431  
Outgoing Call Barring 431  
China - Supervised Analog Lines  
Contents 433  
433  
Feature description 433  
Battery Reversal Supervision 433  
Hook Flash Disconnect Supervision 434  
Operating parameters 434  
Feature interactions 435  
Call Transfer 435  
Conference 436  
Multi-Party Operations 436  
Feature packaging 436  
Feature implementation 436  
Task summary list 436  
Feature operation 437  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Contents 439  
439  
Feature description 439  
Operating parameters 440  
Feature interactions 440  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36 Contents  
Call Diversion (Call Transfer, Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward Busy, Call  
Forward, Internal Calls, Call Forward No Answer, Hunting) 440  
Conference 440  
Digitone Receiver Pads 441  
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling Pads 441  
Multi-Party Operations 441  
Feature packaging 441  
Feature implementation 441  
Task summary list 441  
Feature operation 443  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements 445  
Contents 445  
Feature description 445  
ANI Definition 445  
Shared functionality 446  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation introduction 446  
CIS Gateway Enhancements introduction 446  
ANI Digits Manipulation feature functionality 446  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation examples 448  
Example 1 - DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI 448  
Example 2 - DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI 448  
Gateways Enhancement feature functionality 448  
Operating parameters 455  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation operating parameters 455  
CIS Gateways Enhancements operating parameters 455  
Feature interactions 456  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature interactions 456  
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature interactions 457  
Feature packaging 457  
Feature implementation 458  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature 458  
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature implementation 466  
Feature operation 471  
CIS ANI Reception  
Contents 473  
473  
Feature description 473  
Automatic ANI request 474  
Solicited ANI request 475  
ANI Gateways 478  
ANI Digits Display 479  
ANI Digits in CDR 480  
Operating parameters 480  
Feature interactions 480  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 37  
CIS Digital Trunk Interface and CIS Multifrequency Shuttle (MFS) 480  
Malicous Call Trace (MCT) 480  
Feature packaging 480  
Feature implementation 481  
Task summary list 482  
Feature operation 485  
CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection  
Contents 487  
487  
Feature description 487  
Operating parameters 490  
Feature interactions 490  
CIS 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (CIS DTI2) 490  
Feature packaging 490  
Feature implementation 491  
Task summary list 491  
Feature operation 492  
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
Contents 493  
493  
Feature description 493  
Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS sets 496  
Date and time stamp information 497  
Calling number information 497  
Calling name information 498  
Network engineering for CLASS sets 499  
Operating parameters 513  
Feature interactions 514  
Attendant Call Extension 514  
Automatic Wake Up 514  
Blind Transfer 514  
Call Forward All Calls 514  
Call Forward, Internal 514  
Call Transfer 514  
Calling Line Identification Restriction for ISDN BRI sets 514  
Conference/No Hold Conference 514  
Dial Intercom 515  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 515  
Display of Calling Party Denied 515  
Distinctive Ringing 515  
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) Enhancement 515  
Group Call 515  
Hotline 516  
Hunt 516  
Incremental Software Management 516  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38 Contents  
Feature Group D 516  
In-Band ANI 516  
Integrated Services Digital Network 517  
Meridian 911 517  
Private Line Service 517  
VIP Automatic Wakeup 518  
Virtual Network Services (VNS) 518  
Feature packaging 518  
Feature implementation 519  
Task summary list 519  
Feature operation 522  
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator  
Contents 523  
523  
Feature description 523  
Operating parameters 527  
Feature interactions 528  
Attendant Console 528  
Call Party Control Incoming 528  
Make Set Busy 528  
Meridian Mail 528  
Message Waiting 528  
Permanent Hold 529  
Set Relocation 529  
Feature packaging 529  
Feature implementation 529  
Task summary list 529  
Feature maintenance and diagnostics 530  
Feature operation 531  
CLID Name Enhancement and CLID B  
533  
535  
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)  
Contents 535  
Feature description 535  
Operating parameters 538  
Feature interactions 539  
Attendant Call Extension 539  
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery 540  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 540  
Information Notification Service for Japan 540  
Private Line Service 540  
Feature packaging 540  
Feature implementation 540  
Feature operation 541  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 39  
Collect Call Blocking  
Contents 543  
543  
Feature description 543  
Operating parameters 545  
Feature interactions 546  
Automatic Answerback 546  
Automatic Call Distribution 546  
Automatic Call Distribution Interflow 546  
Automatic Call Distribution Night Call Forward 546  
Automatic Call Distribution Night RAN Route Announcement 546  
Automatic Call Distribution Overflow 547  
Autoterminate 547  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Sets 547  
Central Answering Position 547  
Centralized Attendant Service 547  
Centrex Switchhook Flash 547  
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced 547  
Meridian Mail 547  
Network Automatic Call Distribution 548  
Pilot DN 548  
Private Line Service 548  
Recorded Announcement 548  
Tandem to Unsupervised Trunk 548  
Trunk Hook Flash 548  
Feature packaging 548  
Feature implementation 549  
Task summary list 549  
Feature operation 553  
Conference Warning Tone Enhancement  
Contents 555  
555  
Feature description 555  
Operating parameters 556  
Feature Interactions 556  
Tones and Cadences 556  
Feature packaging 556  
Feature implementation 556  
Task summary list 556  
Feature operation 558  
Conference  
Contents 559  
559  
Feature description 559  
Operating parameters 560  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40 Contents  
Feature interactions 561  
500/2500 Line Disconnect 561  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1 561  
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall 561  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar 561  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN 561  
Attendant Barge-In  
Attendant Busy Verify 562  
Attendant Break-In 562  
Attendant Console 562  
Attendant Overflow Position 562  
Autodial Tandem Transfer 562  
Automatic Redial 562  
B34 Codec Static Loss Plan Downloading  
B34 Dynamic Loss Switching 562  
Call Forward All Calls 563  
Call Forward by Call Type 563  
Call Page Network Wide 563  
Call Park 563  
Call Party Name Display 563  
Call Pickup 563  
Call Pickup Network Wide 563  
Call Transfer 563  
Called Party Disconnect Control 564  
Calling Party Name Display Denied 564  
Calling Party Privacy 564  
Camp-On, Forced 564  
Centrex Switchhook Flash 564  
Charge Account and Calling Party Name 564  
China - Attendant Monitor 564  
China - Supervised Analog Lines 565  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan 565  
Controlled Class of Service 565  
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced 565  
Dial Access to Group Calls 565  
Dial Intercom 566  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion 566  
End-to-End Signaling 566  
Group Call 566  
Held Call Clearing 566  
Hot Line 566  
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion 566  
ISDN QSIG Name Display 566  
In-Band Automatic Number Identification 567  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 41  
Malicious Call Trace 567  
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced 567  
Meridian Mail Conference Control 567  
Meridian 911 567  
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon 567  
Message Registration 568  
Multi-Party Operations 568  
Multi-Party Operations - Call Join 568  
Multi-Party Operations -Three-Party Service  
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements 568  
Music 568  
Music, Enhanced 568  
Network and Executive Distinctive Ringing 568  
Network Intercom 568  
No Hold Conference 568  
Off-Hook Alarm Security 569  
On Hold on Loudspeaker 569  
Override 569  
Override, Enhanced 569  
Paging 569  
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) 569  
Privacy Override 569  
Recorded Announcement Trunk 569  
Recorded Telephone Dictation 569  
Ring Again 570  
Station Activity Records 570  
Trunk Access from any Station 570  
Trunk Barring 570  
Trunk to Trunk Connection 570  
Feature packaging 570  
Feature implementation 571  
Task summary list 571  
Feature operation 572  
Console Operations  
Contents 575  
575  
Feature description 575  
Console Presentation 575  
Queue Thermometer 576  
Operating parameters 576  
Console Presentation 576  
Feature interactions 576  
Console Presentation 576  
Feature packaging 576  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42 Contents  
Feature implementation 577  
Task summary list 577  
Console Presentation 577  
Queue Thermometer 577  
Feature operation 577  
Console Presentation Group Level Services  
Contents 579  
579  
Feature description 579  
Operating parameters 580  
Feature interactions 580  
Attendant Administration 580  
Attendant Secrecy 580  
Attendant Supervisory Console 580  
Call Park 580  
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number 581  
Night Key for Direct Inward Dialing Digit Manipulation 581  
Feature packaging 581  
Feature implementation 581  
Task summary list 581  
Feature operation 583  
Context-sensitive soft keys  
Feature description 585  
585  
Soft keys configuration 585  
Operating parameters 587  
Feature restrictions 588  
Feature interactions 588  
Feature packaging 588  
Feature implementation 588  
Feature operation 589  
Using call features 590  
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys 592  
Controlled Class of Service  
Contents 595  
595  
Feature description 595  
Operating parameters 595  
Feature interactions 596  
Authorization Code 596  
Conference 596  
Flexible Feature Codes 596  
Hot Line 596  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 596  
Room Status 597  
Scheduled Access Restrictions 597  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents 43  
Station Category Indication 597  
Feature packaging 597  
Feature implementation 597  
Task summary list 597  
Feature operation 599  
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced  
Contents 601  
601  
Feature description 601  
Operating parameters 601  
Feature interactions 602  
Attendant Administration 602  
Attendant Supervisory Console 602  
Authorization Codes 602  
Conference 602  
Coordinated Dialing Plan 602  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number 602  
Pre-translation 602  
Feature packaging 602  
Feature implementation 602  
Task summary list 602  
Feature operation 605  
Converged Office  
607  
609  
Corporate Directory  
Contents 609  
Feature description 609  
Operating parameters 610  
Call Server memory requirements 610  
Feature interactions 611  
Call Transfer  
Conference 611  
Feature packaging 611  
Feature implementation 611  
Feature operation 612  
Special characters 613  
Search/Edit screen features 613  
Corporate Directory views 613  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 Contents  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
45  
New in this release  
There have been no updates to the document in this release.  
Other  
Revision History  
May 2008  
Standard 02.04. This document has been up-issued to add information on  
CDP/UDP Calls to the Call Forward to Trunk Restriction chapter.  
December 2007  
July 2007  
Standard 02.03. This document has been up-issued to support  
Communication Server Release 5.5.  
July 2007 Standard 01.04. This document is up-issued (revising the 500  
Telephone Features and Bandwidth Management Support for Network  
Wide Virtual Office chapters in Book 1 and revising the Conference  
Warning Tone Enhancement chapter in Book 2).  
June 2007  
June 2007  
May 2007  
Standard 01.03. This document is up-issued (revising the Software  
Licenses chapter in Book 6).  
Standard 01.02. This document is up-issued (revising the Network Music  
feature implementation in Book 5).  
Standard 01.01. This document is up-issued to support Communication  
Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document is renamed Features and  
Services Fundamentals - Book 2 of 6 (NN43001-106-B2) and contains  
information previously contained in the following legacy documents, now  
retired:  
•
•
•
Features and Services Fundamentals - Book 1 of 6 (NN43001-106-B1)  
Features and Services Fundamentals - Book 2 of 6 (NN43001-106-B2)  
Features and Services Fundamentals - Book 3 of 6 (NN43001-106-B3)  
This document also includes the following updates:  
•
Corrections to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on page  
534 (Book 5) and to Trunk Route Optimization - Before Answer on  
page 540 (Book 5)  
•
Updated the description of EXTT prompt in LD 15 on page 338 (Book  
6)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
46 New in this release  
July 2006  
Standard 17.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following  
changes:  
•
•
•
Addition of M3900 Full Icon Support feature on pages 797 to 800  
(Book 2)  
Addition of M3900 Set-to-Set Messaging feature on pages 801 to 806  
(Book 2)  
Addition of M3900 series digital telephone feature reference on pages  
341, 342 of the Personal Directory chapter (Book 3)  
April 2006  
Standard 16.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following  
changes:  
•
•
•
Addition of keycode commands for CP PIV on pages 595 to 610 (Book  
2)  
Addition of IPMG on CS1000E to the following: operating parameters  
on page 364 (Book 3); and LD 97 on page 379 (Book 3)  
Additions to the following: Call Redirection by Day on page 848  
(Book1); the CRDAY prompt on page 852 (Book 1); and Call  
Redirection by Time of Day on page 858 (Book 1)  
•
•
•
Addition of Flexible Feature Codes to list on pages 371 to 376 of  
Flexible Feature Codes chapter (Book 2)  
Correction to Message Intercept for Set Status Lockout on pages  
982-983 (Book 2)  
Correction to SECA001 alarm message on page 402 (Book 1)  
January 2006  
Standard 15.00. This document is up-issued to reflect the following  
changes in content:  
•
Addition of Converged Office feature on page 1247 (Book 1); changes  
to interactions with Call Forward All Calls on pages 647, 648, 721,  
725 (Book 1), and 521 (Book 2)  
•
Addition of IP Phones to supported sets referenced in Selectable  
Conferee Display and Disconnect on pages 667 to 700 (Book 3)  
August 2005  
Standard 14.00. This document is up-issued to support Communication  
Server 1000 Release 4.5.  
September 2004  
Standard 13.00. This document is up-issued for Communication Server  
1000 Release 4.0.  
Standard 12.00. This document is issued to support Succession 3.0.  
October 2003  
November 2002  
Standard 11.00. This document is up-issued to support Meridian 1  
Release 25.40 and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise  
(CSE) 1000, Release 2.0. This is book 1 of a 3 book set.  
January 2002  
Standard 10.00. Up-issued to include content for Meridian 1 Release 25.40  
and Succession Communication Server for Enterprise 1000, Release 1.1.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other 47  
April 2000  
Standard 9.00. This is a global document and is up-issued for Release  
25.0x. Document changes include removal of: redundant content;  
references to equipment types except Options 11C, 51C, 61C, and 81C;  
and references to previous software releases.  
June 1999  
Issue 8.00 released as Standard for Generic Release 24.2x.  
October 1997  
Issue 7.00. This is the Release 23.0x standard version of this document.  
Certain application-specific features have been removed from this  
document and have been placed in their appropriate Nortel Networks  
technical publications (technical documents). Automatic Call Distribution  
features can be found in Automatic Call Distribution Feature description  
553-2671-110; Call Detail Recording features can be found in Call Detail  
Recording Description and formats 553-2631-100; Primary Rate Interface  
features can be found in International ISDN PRI Feature description and  
administration 553-2901-301; R2MFC and MFC features can be found in  
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling 553-2861-100; and DPNSS1 features  
can be found in DPNSS1 Features and Services 553-3921-300.  
August 1996  
Issue 6.00. This is the Release 22.0x standard version of this document.  
The features Automatic Number Identification, Automatic Trunk  
Maintenance, Multi Tenant Service, Radio Paging and X08/11 Gateway  
have been incorporated into this document. Accordingly, the following  
Nortel Networks technical publications have been retired to reflect this  
change: 553-2611-200, 553-2751-104, 553-2831-100, 553-2721-111 and  
553-2941-100.  
December 1995  
July 1995  
Issue 5.00. This is the Release 21.1x standard version of this document.  
Issue 4.00. This is the Release 21 standard version of this document.  
Issue 2.0. This is the Release 20.1x soak version of the document.  
Issue 1.0. This is the Release 20.0x standard version of this document.  
October 1994  
July 1994  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48 New in this release  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
49  
How to get help  
This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.  
Getting help from the Nortel web site  
The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel  
Technical Support web site:  
http://www.nortel.com/support  
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and  
tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:  
•
•
download software, documentation, and product bulletins  
search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base  
for answers to technical issues  
•
•
sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation  
for Nortel equipment  
open and manage technical support cases  
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center  
If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support  
web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over  
the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.  
In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).  
Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the telephone  
number for your region:  
http://www.nortel.com/callus  
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code  
To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an Express  
Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your Nortel  
product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go to:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
50 How to get help  
http://www.nortel.com/erc  
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller  
If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor  
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor  
or reseller.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
51  
Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
75  
5
1.5 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface  
PBXI  
•
•
Hong Kong Digital Trunk Interface  
Reference Clock Switching (See also packages  
129, 131, and 154)  
144  
129  
14  
10  
16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Telephone  
16-Button Digitone/Multifrequency Operation  
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface  
ABCD  
DTI2  
•
•
DID Recall features on DTI2 for Italy – DID  
Offering  
•
•
DID Recall features on DTI2 for Italy – DID Recall  
Italian Central Office Special Services (see also  
packages 131, and 157)  
•
•
•
Italian Periodic Pulse Metering  
Pulsed E&M DTI2 Signaling  
Reference Clock Switching (see also packages  
75, 131, and 154)  
•
•
•
R2MFC 1.5 Mbps DTI  
2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface  
2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface Enhancements:  
— Alarm Handling on DID Channels  
— Alarm Handling on Incoming COT/DID Calls  
— Call Clearance  
— Clock Synchronization  
— DID Call Offering  
— Disable Out-of-Service Alarm State  
— Fault Signal  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
52 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
— Incoming Seizure  
— Outpulsing Delay  
— Release Control  
— Signal Recognition  
— Trunk Entering Alarm Status/Trunk Pack  
Exiting Alarm Status  
— 64 Kbps Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)  
Handling  
154  
18  
14  
1
PRI2  
2.0 Mb/s Primary Rate Interface  
•
Reference Clock Switching (see also packages  
75, 129, and 131)  
2500 Set Features  
SS25  
•
•
Call Hold, Permanent  
2500 Set Features  
73  
4
500 Set Dial Access to Features  
SS5  
•
•
500 Set Features  
500/2500 Line Disconnect  
236  
20  
AC15 Recall  
ACRL  
•
•
•
•
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1  
Access Restrictions  
388  
256  
148  
25.40  
21  
ACD/CDN Expansion  
ACD/CDN Expansion  
Administration Set  
Set-based Administration Enhancements  
Advanced ISDN Network Services  
ACDE  
ADMINSET  
NTWK  
•
•
13  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 53  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
•
Advice of Charge – Charging Information and  
End of Call for NUMERIS Connectivity (see also  
package 101)  
•
Advice of Charge Real-time Supplementary  
Services for NUMERIS and SWISSNET (see also  
package 101)  
•
•
•
Alternative Conference PAD Levels  
Alternative Loss Plan  
Alternative Loss Plan for China  
349  
170  
25  
14  
Analog Calling Line Identification  
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)  
Aries Digital Sets  
ACLI  
ARIE  
•
•
•
Meridian Communications Adapter  
Meridian Modular Telephones  
Attendant Administration  
Attendant Administration  
Attendant Alternative Answering  
54  
AA  
1
•
174  
15  
AAA  
•
•
Attendant Alternative Answering  
Attendant Barge-In  
Attendant Announcement  
Attendant Announcement  
Attendant Break-In/Trunk Offer  
384  
127  
AANN  
BKI  
25.40  
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Break-In  
Break-In busy Indication and Prevention  
Break-In to Inquiry Calls  
Break-In to Lockout Set Denied  
Break-In with Secrecy  
China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator  
Break-In (see also Package 131)  
•
Network Individual Do Not Disturb (see also  
packages 9, and 159  
•
•
•
•
Attendant Busy Verify  
Attendant Call Selection  
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication  
Attendant Consoles  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
•
•
Attendant Delay on Hold  
Attendant Display of Speed Dial or Autodial  
Attendant Forward No Answer  
134  
AFNA  
14  
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Forward No Answer  
Attendant Forward No Answer Expansion  
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators  
Attendant Interpositional Transfer  
Attendant Lockout  
56  
1
Attendant Overflow Position  
AOP  
•
•
•
•
Attendant Overflow Position  
Attendant Position Busy  
Attendant Recall  
Attendant Recall with Splitting  
253  
20  
Attendant Remote Call Forward  
ARFW  
•
Call Forward, Remote (Network and Attendant  
Wide)  
•
•
•
•
Attendant Secrecy  
Attendant Splitting  
Attendant Trunk Group Busy Indication  
Audible Reminder of Held Calls  
Autodial Tandem Transfer  
Autodial Tandem Transfer  
258  
ATX  
20  
•
5
1
Automated Modem Pooling  
Automatic Answerback  
78  
47  
AMP  
AAB  
•
•
Automatic Answerback  
Automatic Call Distribution Answer Time in Night  
Service  
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Call Delays (see also  
package 40)  
Automatic Call Distribution Call Priority (see also  
package 40)  
Automatic Call Distribution Call Waiting Thresholds  
(see also packages 40 and 41)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 55  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Calls on Hold (see also  
package 40)  
Automatic Call Distribution Dynamic Queue  
Threshold (see also package 40)  
178  
43  
15  
1
EOVF  
LMAN  
Automatic Call Distribution Enhanced Overflow  
Automatic Call Distribution Enhanced Overflow  
Automatic Call Distribution Load Management  
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Load Management  
Reports  
289  
42  
23  
1
Automatic Call Distribution Night Call Forward  
without Disconnect Supervision  
ADSP  
ACDC  
•
Call Processor Input/Output)  
Automatic Call Distribution Package C  
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Report Control (see  
also package 50)  
500/2500 Line Disconnect  
51  
114  
50  
2
12  
2
Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary  
Link Processor  
LNK  
•
ACD Package D Auxiliary Processor Link  
Automatic Call Distribution Package D, Auxiliary  
Security  
AUXS  
ACDD  
•
ACD-D Auxiliary Security  
Automatic Call Distribution Package D  
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Report Control (see  
also package 42)  
Automatic Call Distribution Threshold Visual  
Indication (see also packages 40 and 41)  
155  
45  
13  
1
ACNT  
ACDA  
Automatic Call Distribution, Account Code  
Automatic Call Distribution Activity Code  
Automatic Call Distribution, Package A  
Automatic Call Distribution  
•
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
41  
1
ACDB  
Automatic Call Distribution, Package B  
•
Automatic Call Distribution Call Waiting Thresholds  
(see also packages 40, and 131)  
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Least Call Queuing  
Automatic Call Distribution Threshold Visual  
Indication (see also packages 40, and 131)  
116  
111  
12  
10  
Automatic Call Distribution, Priority Agent  
Automatic Call Distribution Priority Agent  
PAGT  
TOF  
•
Automatic Call Distribution, Timed Overflow  
Queuing  
•
•
•
•
ACD Timed Overflow  
Automatic Gain Control Inhibit  
Automatic Guard Detection  
Automatic Hold  
3
1
Automatic ID of Outward Dialing  
AIOD  
AINS  
200  
16  
Automatic Installation (Option 11 only)  
•
Automatic Installation  
Automatic Line Selection  
Automatic Line Selection  
Automatic Number Identification Route Selection  
Automatic Number Identification Route Selection  
Automatic Number Identification  
72  
13  
12  
4
1
1
LSEL  
ANIR  
ANI  
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Number Identification  
Automatic Number Identification on DTI  
Automatic Preselection of Prime Directory Number  
Automatic Re-dial  
304  
102  
ARDL  
AWU  
22  
10  
•
•
Automatic Re-dial  
Automatic Timed Reminders  
Automatic Wake-Up  
Automatic Wake Up  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 57  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
Auxiliary Processor Link  
109  
APL  
10  
•
•
•
Auxiliary Processor Link  
Auxiliary Signaling  
B34 Dynamic Loss Switching (see also packages  
164 and 203)  
99  
57  
10  
1
Background Terminal  
Background Terminal Facility  
Basic Alternate Route Selection  
BGD  
•
BARS  
•
Network Alternate Route Selection/Basic  
Alternate Route Selection Enhancement – Local  
Termination (see also package 58)  
25  
40  
1
1
Basic Authorization Code  
Basic Authorization Code  
Basic Automatic Call Distribution  
BAUT  
BACD  
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Alternate Call Answer  
Automatic Call Distribution Call Delays (see also  
package 131)  
•
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Call Priority (see also  
package 131)  
Automatic Call Distribution Call Waiting Thresholds  
(see also packages 41, and 131)  
Automatic Call Distribution Calls on Hold (see also  
package 131)  
Automatic Call Distribution Dynamic Queue  
Threshold (see also package 131)  
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution Enhancements  
Automatic Call Distribution in Night Service  
Automatic Call Distribution Threshold Visual  
Indication (see also packages 41, and 131)  
•
INIT Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Queue Call  
Restore  
0
1
1
Basic Call Processing  
Basic Queuing  
BASIC  
BQUE  
28  
•
Basic Queuing  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
Basic Rate Interface  
216  
BRI  
18  
•
Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate  
Interface (see also packages 216, and 235)  
Basic Routing  
Basic Routing  
Boss Secretary Filtering (FFC activation)  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering  
BRI line application  
14  
BRTE  
FTCSF  
BRIL  
1
•
198  
235  
15  
18  
•
•
Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate  
Interface (see also packages 216, and 233)  
•
ISDN Basic Rate Interface Connected Line  
Presentation/Restriction  
•
•
Bridging  
Busy Lamp Field Array  
367  
25  
Business Network Express  
BNE  
•
•
•
Business Network Express/EuroISDN Call  
Diversion  
Business Network Express/EuroISDN Explicit Call  
Transfer  
Business Network Express/Name and Private  
Number Display  
Busy Tone Detection  
294  
BTD  
21  
•
•
•
China Phase II – Busy Tone Detection  
Busy Tone Detection for Asia Pacific and CALA  
Call Capacity Report  
393  
259  
151  
5
3.0  
20  
13  
1
UUI  
Call Center Transfer Connect  
Call Center Transfer Connect  
Call Detail Recording Enhancement  
Call Detail Recording Enhancement  
Call Detail Recording Expansion (7 digit)  
Call Detail Recording Expansion  
Call Detail Recording on Teletype Terminal  
CDR on TTY  
Call Detail Recording Queue Record  
ACD CDR Queue Record  
•
CDRX  
CDRE  
CTY  
•
•
•
83  
3
CDRQ  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 59  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
CLNK  
Release  
6
4
1
1
Call Detail Recording, Data Link  
Call Detail Recording  
CDR  
•
•
•
Call Detail Recording  
Call Detail Recording Enhancement  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming  
Calls  
•
Call Detail Recording with Optional Digit  
Suppression  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Detail Recording 100 Hour Call  
NPI and TON in CDR Tickets  
Call Forward and Busy Status  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Forward by Call Type  
Call Forward External Deny  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No  
Answer  
•
•
•
•
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD  
Call Forward to Trunk Restriction  
Call Forward, Break-In & Hunt Internal/External  
Network Wide  
•
Call Forward, Internal Calls  
247  
307  
306  
33  
19  
22  
22  
2
Call ID (for AML applications)  
Call Identification  
Call Page Network Wide  
Call Page Network Wide  
Call Park Network Wide  
Call Park Network Wide  
Call Park  
CALL ID  
PAGENET  
CPRKNET  
CPRK  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Park  
Recall after Parking  
Call Pickup  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
298  
21  
CPIO  
Call Processor Input/Output (Option 81)  
•
•
•
Call Processor Input/Output)  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Call Transfer  
225  
19  
Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)  
CWNT  
•
•
Call Waiting Notification (Meridian 911)  
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
117  
310  
13  
22  
CBC  
Call-by-Call Service  
Call-by-Call Service  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls  
•
CPCI  
•
China Phase III - Called Party Control on Internal  
Calls  
•
Called Party Disconnect Control  
118  
95  
13  
10  
Calling line Identification in Call Detail Recording  
Calling Line Identification in Call Detail Recording  
Calling Party Name Display  
CCDR  
CPND  
•
•
•
Call Party Name Display  
DNIS Name Display (see also packages 98, and  
113)  
•
Calling Party Name Display Denied  
301  
21  
Calling Party Privacy  
CPP  
•
•
•
•
Calling Party Privacy  
Camp-On  
Camp-On  
Camp-on to Multiple Appearance Directory  
Number  
•
•
Capacity Expansion  
Card LED Status  
26  
27  
1
1
Centralized Attendant Services (Main)  
Centralized Attendant Services - Main  
Centralized Attendant Services (Remote)  
CASM  
CASR  
•
•
•
Centralized Attendant Services – Remote  
Centralized Multiple Line Emulation  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 61  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
23  
1
CHG  
Charge Account for CDR  
•
Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
24  
1
CAB  
Charge Account/Authorization Code  
•
•
Charge Account/Authorization Code Base  
Charge Display at End of Call (see also package  
101)  
285  
21  
CHINA  
China Attendant Monitor Package  
•
•
China – Attendant Monitor  
China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator  
Break-In (see also Package 127)  
•
•
China Number 1 Signaling Enhancements  
China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements  
(see also packages 49, 113, and 128)  
292  
333  
332  
290  
77  
21  
23  
23  
21  
8
China Toll Package  
China Phase II – Toll Call Loss Plan  
CLASS Calling Name Delivery  
CLASS  
CLASS Calling Number Delivery  
CLASS  
Collect Call Blocking  
Collect Call Blocking  
Command Status Link  
Command Status Link  
CHTL  
CNAME  
CNUMB  
CCB  
•
•
•
•
CSL  
•
326  
23  
CISMFS  
Commonwealth of Independent States  
Multifrequency Shuttle Signaling  
•
CIS Multifrequency Shuttle Signaling  
221  
Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks  
CIST  
21  
•
Commonwealth of Independent States Digital  
Trunk Interface  
•
•
Three-Wire Analog Trunk – CIS  
24  
24  
24  
Commonwealth of Independent States Automatic  
Number Identification (ANI) Digits Manipulation  
and Gateways Enhancements  
•
Commonwealth of Independent States Automatic  
Number Identification (ANI) Reception  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
•
Commonwealth of Independent States Toll Dial  
Tone Detection  
•
•
Conference  
Conference Warning Tone Enhancement for Italy  
169  
172  
81  
14  
15  
7
Console Operations  
Console Operations  
Console Presentation Group  
Console Presentation Group Level Services  
Controlled Class Of Service  
Controlled Class of Service  
Coordinated Dialing Plan  
Coordinated Dialing Plan  
Core Network Module  
COOP  
CPGS  
•
•
CCOS  
•
59  
1
CDP  
•
299  
21  
CORENET  
•
•
Core Network Module  
CP3  
381  
25  
Corporate Directory  
Corporate Directory  
CDIR  
•
85  
8
CSL with Alpha Signalling  
CSLA  
CCR  
215  
17  
Customer Controlled Routing  
•
•
Customer Controlled Routing  
MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications  
(see also packages 128, and 214)  
•
Dataport Hunting  
CP Pentium® Backplane for Intel® Machine  
Deluxe Hold  
368  
71  
25  
4
CPP_CNI  
DHLD  
•
•
Call Hold, Deluxe  
Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement  
5
1
76  
21  
Departmental Listed Directory Number  
Dial Intercom  
DLDN  
DI  
•
•
•
Dial Intercom  
Distinctive Ringing for Dial Intercom  
Dial Pulse/Dual-tone Multifrequency Conversion  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 63  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
Dial Tone Detector  
138  
DTD  
10  
•
•
Dial Tone Detection  
Flexible Dial Tone Detection  
98  
10  
Dialed Number Identification System  
DNIS  
•
•
Dialed Number Identification Services  
Dialed Number Identification Services Length  
Flexibility  
•
Dialed Number Identification Services Name  
Display (see also packages 95, and 131)  
•
•
7 Digit DNIS for MAX  
N Digit DNIS  
24  
1
Digit Display  
Digit Display  
19  
DDSP  
•
180  
124  
1
Digit Key Signaling  
DKS  
16  
Digital Access Signaling System 2  
DASS2  
•
Analog Private Network Signaling System  
(APNSS) (see also packages 190, 122, and 123)  
•
DASS2/DPNSS1 – Integrated Digital Access (see  
also packages 122, and 123)  
231  
16  
Digital Private Network Signaling Network Services  
(DPNSS1)  
DNWK  
•
•
Attendant Call Offer  
Attendant Timed Reminder Recall and Attendant  
Third Party Service  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Back when Free and Next Used  
D-channel Handler Interface Expansion  
Extension Three-Party Service  
Loop Avoidance  
Redirection  
Route Optimization  
Step Back on Congestion  
Diversion  
Night Service  
Route Optimization/MCDN Trunk Anti-Tromboning  
Inter-working  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
325  
23  
DMWI  
Digital Private Network Signaling System 1  
Message Waiting Indication  
•
DPNSS1 Message Waiting Indication  
123  
16  
Digital Private Network Signaling System 1  
DPNSS  
•
•
Analog Private Network Signaling System  
(APNSS) (see also packages 190, 122, and 124)  
DASS2/DPNSS1 – Integrated Digital Access (see  
also packages 122, and 124)  
•
•
Digital Trunk Interface Enhancements  
Digitone Receiver Enhancements: – Digitone  
Receiver Timeout Enhancement  
•
Digitone Receiver Enhancements: – Quad Density  
Digitone Receiver Card  
Direct Inward Dialing to TIE (Japan only)  
176  
22  
DTOT  
DISA  
16  
1
•
•
Direct Inward Dialing to TIE  
Direct Inward Dialing to TIE Connection  
Direct Inward System Access  
•
•
•
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
Direct Inward System Access  
Direct Inward System Access on Unsupervised  
Trunks  
250  
115  
21  
12  
Direct Private Network Access  
Direct Private Network Access  
Directed Call Pickup  
DPNA  
DCP  
•
•
•
Call Pickup, Directed  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing  
Directory Number Expansion (7 Digit)  
150  
DNXP  
13  
•
•
Directory Number Expansion  
Directory Number  
— Flexible Attendant Directory Number  
— Listed Directory Numbers  
— Single Appearance Directory Number  
— Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
— Prime Directory Number  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 65  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
•
•
Diskette Overflow Warning  
Display of Calling Party Denied  
Distinctive Ringing  
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing  
Do Not Disturb, Group  
Do Not Disturb Group  
Do Not Disturb, Individual  
74  
16  
9
DRNG  
DNDG  
DNDI  
4/9  
1
•
•
1
•
•
Do Not Disturb  
Network Individual Do Not Disturb (see also  
packages 127, and 159)  
•
Electronic Brandlining  
331  
23  
ESA_CLMP  
Emergency Services Access Calling Number  
Mapping  
•
Emergency Services Access (See also packages  
329 and 330)  
330  
329  
23  
23  
Emergency Services Access Supplementary  
ESA_SUPP  
ESA  
•
Emergency Services Access (See also packages  
329 and 331)  
Emergency Services Access  
•
Emergency Services Access (See also packages  
330 and 331)  
•
•
•
End of Selection  
End of Selection Busy  
End-of-Dialing on Direct Inward/Outward Dialing  
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement  
10  
1
End-To-End Signaling  
EES  
EAR  
•
•
Attendant End-to-End Signaling  
End-to-End Signaling  
214  
17  
Enhanced ACD Routing  
•
•
Enhanced Automatic Call Distribution Routing  
MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications  
(see also packages 128, and 215)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
215  
18  
ECT  
Enhanced Call Trace  
•
•
Customer Controlled Routing  
MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications  
(see also packages 128, and 214)  
173  
288  
15  
21  
ECCS  
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service  
Enhanced DPNSS Services  
DPNSS_ES  
•
DPNSS1 Executive Intrusion  
Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway  
Enhanced DPNSS1 Gateway  
Enhanced Hot Line  
284  
70  
20  
DPNSS189I  
HOT  
•
4/10  
•
•
•
•
Hot Line  
Network Intercom  
Enhanced input/output buffering  
Enhanced Maintenance (Patching)  
119  
133  
12  
20  
Enhanced Music  
Music, Enhanced  
Enhanced Night Service  
EMUS  
ENS  
•
•
•
•
Enhanced Night Service  
Enhanced package printout  
Equal Access Compliance  
309  
261  
22  
20  
Euro ISDN Trunk - Network Side  
EuroISDN Trunk - Network Side  
Euro ISDN  
MASTER  
EURO  
•
•
•
ISDN – Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
ISDN BRI and PRI Trunk Access for Europe  
(EuroISDN)  
•
EUROISDN Continuation  
323  
185  
87  
22  
16  
7
Euro Supplementary Service  
EuroISDN Call Completion Supplementary Service  
Executive Distinctive Ringing  
Executive Distinctive Ringing  
Fast Tone and Digit Switch  
Fast Tone Digit Switch  
ETSI_SS  
EDRG  
•
•
FTDS  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 67  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
223  
17  
FCC68  
FCC Compliance for DID Answer Supervision  
•
Federal Communications Commission Compliance  
for DID Answer Supervision  
158  
17  
Feature Group D  
FGD  
•
•
Feature Group D (Inbound to Meridian 1)  
Federal Communications Commission Compliance  
for Equal Access  
•
•
•
•
First-Second Degree Busy Indication  
First-Second Degree Busy Indication, ISDN  
Flexible Attendant Call Waiting Thresholds  
Flexible Busy Tone Timer  
Fiber Network  
365  
61  
FIBN  
25  
1
Flexible Call Back Queuing  
FCBQ  
•
Flexible Call Back Queuing  
Flexible Direct Inward Dialing  
Flexible Direct Inward Dialing  
Flexible Feature Codes  
362  
139  
24  
15  
FDID  
FFC  
•
•
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature  
Code  
•
China Number 1 Signaling – Flexible Feature  
Codes  
•
•
Dial Access to Group Calls (see also package 48).  
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer  
Timer  
•
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on  
Private Lines  
•
•
•
Flexible Feature Codes  
Automatic Wake FFC Delimiter  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
160  
14  
Flexible Numbering Plan  
FNP  
•
•
•
•
•
Alternative Routing for DID/DOD  
Flexible Numbering Plan  
Special Dial Tones after Dialed Numbers  
Flexible Numbering Plan Enhancement  
Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
125  
16  
FTC  
Flexible Tones and Cadences  
•
•
•
Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control  
Reverse Dial on Routes and Telephones  
Tones and Cadences  
52  
1
Forced Charge Account  
Charge Account, Forced  
French Type Approval  
FCA  
•
197  
15  
FRTA  
•
•
Camp-on to a Set in Ringback or Dialing  
Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward  
Dialing  
•
•
Group Hunt Queuing (see also package 120)  
Group Hunt Queuing Limitation Enhancement  
(see also package 120)  
•
Loopback on Central Office Trunks  
404  
405  
48  
4.0  
4.0  
1
Geographic Redundancy Primary system  
Geographic Redundancy Secondary system  
Group Call  
GRPRIM  
GRSEC  
GRP  
•
Dial Access to Group Calls (see also package  
139).  
•
•
Group Call  
Group Hunt Queuing Limitation (see also package  
120)  
120  
15  
Group Hunt/DN Access to SCL  
PLDN  
•
•
Group Hunt Queuing (see also package 197)  
Group Hunt Queuing Limitation (see also package  
131)  
•
Group Hunt Queuing Limitation Enhancement  
(see also package 197)  
•
•
•
•
•
Group Hunt  
Speed Call Directory Number Access  
Handset Volume Reset  
Handsfree Download (Meridian Digital Telephones  
Held Call Clearing  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 69  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
H323 Virtual Trunk  
399  
H323_VTRK  
3.0  
•
•
IP Peer Networking Phase 2  
Branch Office  
195  
55  
18  
1
HiMail Fax Server  
History File  
FAXS  
HIST  
•
History File  
218  
166  
208  
18  
16  
17  
Hold in Queue for IVR  
IVR  
HOSP  
HSE  
Hospitality Management  
Hospitality Screen Enhancement  
•
•
•
Hospitality Enhancements: Display Enhancements  
Hunting By Call Type  
Hunting  
— Circular Hunting  
— Linear Hunting  
— Secretarial Hunting  
— Short Hunting  
— Data Port Hunting  
— Trunk Hunting  
•
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement  
113  
12  
Incoming DID Digit Conversion  
IDC  
•
China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements  
(see also packages 49, 128, and 131)  
•
DNIS Name Display (see also packages 95, and  
98)  
•
•
Incoming DID Digit Conversion  
Incoming Trunk Programmable Calling Line  
Identification  
•
•
Incremental Software Management  
Input/Output Access and System Limits  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
Integrated Digital Access  
122  
IDA  
16  
•
Analog Private Network Signaling System  
(APNSS) (see also packages 190, 123, and 124)  
•
DASS2/DPNSS1 – Integrated Digital Access (see  
also packages 123 and 124)  
•
•
DPNSS1 Satellite  
DASS2/DPNSS INIT Call Cutoff  
35  
2
IMS  
Integrated Message System UST and UMG are part  
of IMS Package.  
•
Integrated Messaging System Link  
153  
13  
Integrated Services Digital Network Application  
Module Link for Third Party Vendors  
IAP3P  
•
•
Application Module Link  
Network Application Protocol Link Enhancement  
233  
161  
18  
14  
Integrated Services Digital Network BRI Trunk  
Access  
BRIT  
•
Integrated Services Digital Network Basic Rate  
Interface (see also packages 216, and 235)  
Integrated Services Digital Network Supplementary  
Features  
ISDN INTLSUP  
•
Call Connection Restriction (see also packages  
146 and 147)  
•
•
•
•
Direct Inward Dialing to Network Calling  
Incoming Digit Conversion Enhancement  
Network Time Synchronization  
X08 to X11 Gateway  
147  
13  
Integrated Services Digital Network Signaling Link  
ISL  
•
Call Connection Restriction (see also packages  
146 and 161)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 71  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
145  
13  
ISDN  
Integrated Services Digital Network  
•
Backup D-Channel to DMS-100/250 and AT&T  
4ESS  
•
•
•
Call Pickup Network Wide  
D-Channel Error Reporting and Monitoring  
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)  
Primary Rate Interface  
•
Network Name Display (Meridian 1 to  
DMS-100/250)  
•
•
•
Total Redirection Count  
T309 Time  
Integrated Voice and Data  
143  
10  
Intercept Computer Interface  
ICP  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory  
Intercept Computer Enhancements  
Intercept Computer Flexible DN Length  
Intercept Computer Interface  
Intercept Computer Meridian Mail Interactions  
Intercept Computer Network Screen Activation,  
Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions  
•
Intercept Treatment Enhancements  
Intercept Treatment  
Intercept Treatment  
Inter-Exchange Carrier  
Inter Exchange Carrier  
Internal CDR  
11  
INTR  
IEC  
1
•
149  
108  
167  
13  
10  
18  
•
ICDR  
GPRI  
•
Internal Call Detail Recording  
International 1.5/2.0 Mb/s Gateway  
•
•
Radio Paging  
International Meridian 1  
255  
20  
International nB+D  
ISDN PRI D70 Trunk Access for Japan (nB+D)  
INBD  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
146  
13  
PRA  
International Primary Rate Access (CO)  
•
•
•
Call Connection Restriction (see also packages  
147 and 161)  
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate  
Access  
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate  
Access Central Office Connectivity to Japan D70  
International Primary Rate Access  
202  
IPRA  
15  
•
•
•
•
•
Integrated Services Access/Call by Call Service  
Selection Enhancements  
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate  
Access to 1TR6 Connectivity  
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate  
Access to NUMERIS Connectivity  
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate  
Access to SwissNet 2 Connectivity  
Integrated Services Digital Network Primary Rate  
Access to SYS-12 Connectivity  
131  
295  
9
International Supplementary Features  
IODU/C  
IP Expansion  
IP Expansion  
SUPP  
IPEX  
•
25.40  
•
403  
313  
4.0  
22  
IPMG  
ISPC  
IP Media Gateway  
ISDN Semi-Permanent Connection  
•
•
ISDN Semi-Permanent Connections for Australia  
Italian Central Office Special Services (see also  
packages 129, and 157)  
97  
9
Japan Central Office Trunks  
Japan Central Office Trunk  
Japan Digital Multiplex Interface  
Japan Digital Multiplex Interface  
Japan Telecommunication Technology Committee  
Japan TTC Common Channel Signaling  
Japan Tone and Digit Switch  
Japan Tone and Digit Switch  
JPN  
JDMI  
JTTC  
JTDS  
•
136  
335  
171  
14  
23  
14  
•
•
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 73  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
Last Number Redial  
90  
LNR  
8
•
Last Number Redial  
Latin American Spanish  
Latin American Spanish  
Limited Access to Overlays  
279  
164  
20  
16  
MLMS_SPL  
LAPW  
•
•
B34 Dynamic Loss Switching (see also packages  
131 and 203)  
•
•
•
Faster I/O  
Limited Access to Overlays  
Limited Access to Overlays Password  
Enhancement  
•
Teletype Terminal Access Control in  
Multi-Customer Environment (see also  
package 131)  
105  
137  
10  
10  
Line Load Control  
LLC  
•
•
Line Load Control  
Line Lockout  
Local Steering Code Modifications  
LSCM  
•
•
Local Steering Code Modifications  
Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy and MFE  
Signaling Treatments  
•
•
•
•
LOGIVOX Telephone  
Loop Start Answer Supervision XUT  
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks  
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks (Incoming Calls)  
400  
88  
4.0  
7
Location Code Expansion  
M2000 Digital Sets  
LOCX  
DSET  
•
•
•
Distinctive Ringing for Digital Telephones  
M2317 Telephones  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number  
140  
91  
15  
9
DCON  
DLT2  
M2250 Attendant Console  
Digital Attendant Console  
M2317 Digital Sets  
M2317 Digital Sets  
•
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
7
89  
TSET  
M3000 Digital Sets  
•
M3000 Telephones  
M3900 Full Icon Support  
M3900 Full Icon Support  
M3900 Phase III Virtual Office Enhancement  
Virtual Office Enhancement  
397  
387  
3.0  
ICON_ PAC  
KAGE  
•
25.40  
VIR_OFF_  
ENH  
•
M3900 Ring Again  
396  
249  
M3900_RGA  
_PROG  
3.0  
25  
M911 Enhancement Display  
M911 ENH  
•
10/20 Digit ANI on 911 Calls  
Maid Identification  
210  
17  
MAID  
17  
1
•
•
Maid Identification  
Make Set Busy and Voice Call Override  
MSB  
MCT  
Make Set Busy  
•
•
•
Make Set Busy  
Make Set Busy Improvement  
Malicious Call Trace on Direct Inward Dialing  
107  
10  
Malicious Call Trace  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Enhanced Malicious Call Trace  
Malicious Call Trace  
Malicious Call Trace DN/TN Print  
Malicious Call Trace Idle  
Manual Line Service  
Manual Service Recall to Attendant  
Manual Signaling (Buzz)  
Manual Trunk Service  
MAT 5.0  
296  
MAT  
22  
•
Meridian 1 Attendant Console Enhancements (see  
also package 76)  
Meridian 1 Companion Option  
Nortel Networks Integrated DECT  
MCDN End to End Transparency  
240  
348  
19  
24  
MCMO  
MEET  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 75  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
204  
15  
XCT0  
Meridian 1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS  
•
Meridian 1 Enhanced Conference, TDS and MFS  
243  
19  
Meridian 1 Fault Management  
ALRM_FILTER  
•
•
Alarm Management  
Meridian 1 Initialization Prevention and Recovery  
303  
314  
248  
22  
22  
19  
Meridian 1 Microcellular Option  
Meridian 1 Mobility Multi-Site Networking  
Meridian 1 Packet Handler  
MMO  
MMSN  
MPH  
•
Meridian 1 Packet Handler  
205  
15  
Meridian 1 Superloop Administration (LD 97)  
XCT1  
•
•
Extended DID/DOD Software Support – Europe  
Extended Flexible Central Office Trunk Software  
Support  
•
Extended Tone Detector and Global Parameters  
Download (see also package 203)  
•
Generic XFCOT Software Support  
Meridian 1 XPE  
203  
XPE  
15  
•
•
B34 Codec Static Loss Plan Downloading  
B34 Dynamic Loss Switching (see also packages  
131, and 164)  
•
•
•
Extended Multifrequency Compelled  
Sender/Receiver  
Extended Tone Detector and Global Parameters  
Download (see also package 205)  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Software Support  
Enhancements  
224  
19  
Meridian 911  
M911  
•
•
Meridian 911 Enhancements – Call Abandon  
Meridian 911 Enhancements – MADN Display  
Coordination  
179  
209  
16  
16  
HVS  
MLM  
Meridian Hospitality Voice Service  
Meridian Hospitality Voice Services  
Meridian Link Modular Server  
Meridian Link Enhancements  
•
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
96  
9
SLST  
Meridian SL-1 ST Package  
•
Meridian SL-1 ST Package  
Message Intercept  
Message Intercept  
Message Waiting Center  
163  
46  
15  
1
MINT  
MWC  
•
•
•
•
Message Waiting Lamp Maintenance  
Message Waiting Unconditional  
Meridian Mail Trunk Access Restriction  
Message Waiting Indication Inter-working with  
DMS  
219  
MWI  
19  
•
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) Inter-working  
31  
1
Mini CDR  
MCDR  
MOBX  
MOSR  
Mobile Extensions  
Mobility Server  
412  
302  
5.50  
22  
•
Modular Telephone Relocation  
128  
9
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling  
MFC  
•
•
•
•
China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements  
(see also packages 49, 113, and 131)  
China Number 1 Signaling – Active Feature Dial  
Tone (see also package 126)  
China Number 1 Signaling – Audible Alarm (see  
also package 126)  
China Number 1 Signaling – Vacant Number  
Announcement (see also package 126)  
•
•
India Phase 2  
R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC)  
DID/DTMF DOD  
•
•
•
•
R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC)  
Selective Route To Attendant  
MFC Inter-working with AML Based Applications  
(see also packages 214 and 215)  
R2 Multifrequency Compelled Signaling Timer  
Control  
Semi-Compelled MFC and Calling Name  
Identification Charges  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 77  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
135  
10  
MFE  
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel  
•
Multifrequency Signaling for Socotel  
Multi-Language I/O Package  
Multi-language TTY Input/Output  
Multi-Language Wake Up  
211  
206  
16  
16  
MLIO  
•
MLWU  
•
•
Multi-language Wake Up  
Multi-Party Operation Enhancements  
141  
20  
Multi-Party Operations  
MPO  
•
•
•
•
Attendant Clearing during Night Service  
Multi-Party Operations  
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime  
Multiple Console Operation  
297  
2
21  
1
Multiple Queue Assignment  
Multiple Queue Assignment  
Multiple-Customer Operation  
Multiple Customer Operation  
Multiple-Tenant Service  
Multi-Tenant Service  
Multipurpose Serial Data Link Serial Data Interface  
Multipurpose Serial Data Link Serial Data Interface  
MQA  
CUST  
•
•
7
86  
TENS  
•
227  
228  
19  
19  
MSDL SDI  
MSDL STA  
•
Multipurpose Serial Data Link Single Terminal  
Access  
•
Single Terminal Access  
Multipurpose Serial Data Link  
Multipurpose Serial Data Link  
222  
18  
MSDL  
•
370  
242  
25  
19  
MSMN  
Multi-Site Mobility Networking  
Multi-User Login  
MULTI_USER  
•
Multi-User Login  
Music Broadcast  
Music Broadcast  
Music  
328  
44  
23  
1
MUSBRD  
MUS  
•
•
Music  
30  
1
CMAC  
N/W Communications Management Center  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
58  
1
NARS  
Network Alternate Route Selection  
•
Equi-distribution Network Attendant Service  
Routing (see also package 159)  
•
Network Alternate Route Selection/Basic  
Alternate Route Selection Enhancement – Local  
Termination (see also package 57)  
•
•
Network Anti-tromboning  
Virtual Network Services/Virtual Directory Number  
Expansion (see also package 183)  
159  
20  
Network Attendant Service  
NAS  
•
Equi-distribution Network Attendant Service  
Routing (see also package 58)  
•
Network Individual Do Not Disturb (See also  
packages 9 and 127).  
63  
207  
38  
1
15  
2
NAUT  
NACD  
MCBQ  
Network Authorization Code  
Network Authorization Code  
Network Automatic Call Distribution  
Network Automatic Call Distribution  
Network Call Back Queuing  
Network Call Back Queuing  
•
•
•
67  
32  
3
1
Network Call Transfer  
NXFR  
NCOS  
Network Class Of Service  
•
Network Class of Service  
175  
60  
16  
1
Network Message Services  
Network Priority Queuing  
NMS  
PQUE  
•
Network Priority Queuing  
Network Signaling  
Network Signaling  
Network Speed Call  
Network Speed Call  
Network Traffic Measurements  
Network Traffic Measurement  
37  
39  
29  
2
2
1
NSIG  
NSC  
•
•
NTRF  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 79  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
49  
2
NFCR  
New Flexible Code Restriction  
•
China Number 1 Signaling Trunk Enhancements  
(see also packages 113, 128, and 131)  
•
New Flexible Code Restriction  
234  
18  
FCDR  
New Format CDR  
•
•
Call Detail Recording Time to Answer  
CDR on Busy Tone  
324  
334  
22  
23  
Next Generation Connectivity  
NGEN  
NI-2 Call By Call Service Selection  
NI-2 CBC  
•
•
•
Night Restriction Classes of Service  
Night Service  
Night Service Enhancements – All Calls Remain  
Queued for Night Service  
•
•
Night Service Enhancements – Recall to Night DN  
Night Service Enhancements – Re-queuing of  
Attendant Present Calls  
•
Night Service Enhancements – Re-queuing of  
Attendant Present Calls  
385  
25.40  
NI-2 Name Display Service  
NI-2 Name Display Supplementary Service  
NDS  
•
311  
291  
22  
21  
Nortel Symposium Call Center  
NGCC  
NI2  
North America National ISDN Class II Equipment  
•
•
North American Numbering Plan  
Off-Hook Alarm Security  
394  
62  
3.0  
1
Observe Agent Security  
Observe Agent Security  
Off-Hook Queuing  
OAS  
OHQ  
•
•
Network Drop Back Busy and Off-hook Queuing  
(see also package 192)  
20  
1
ODAS  
Office Data Administration System  
•
•
Office Data Administration System  
Off-Premise Extension  
196  
20  
22  
On Hold On Loudspeaker  
On-Hook Dialing  
Open Alarms  
OHOL  
•
315  
OPEN ALARM  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
126  
14  
OPCB  
Operator Call Back (China #1)  
•
•
Busy Verify on Calling Party Control Calls  
China Number 1 Signaling – Active Feature Dial  
Tone (see also package 128)  
•
China Number 1 Signaling – Audible Alarm (see  
also package 128)  
•
•
China Number 1 Signaling – Called Party Control  
China Number 1 Signaling – Calling Number  
Identification on Outgoing Multifrequency  
Compelled Signaling  
•
•
•
China Number 1 Signaling – Calling Party Control  
China Number 1 Signaling – Flexible Timers  
China Number 1 Signaling – KE Multifrequency  
Compelled Tandem Signaling  
•
China Number 1 Signaling – Malicious Call Trace  
Enhancement  
•
•
•
China Number 1 Signaling – Off-hook Tone  
China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Call Identification  
China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator Call  
Back  
•
•
China Number 1 Signaling – Toll Operator Call  
Back Enhancement  
China Number 1 Signaling – Vacant Number  
Announcement (see also Package 128)  
1
1
Optional Features  
OPTF  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Autodial  
Call Forward All Calls  
Ring Again  
Speed Call  
Speed Call on Private Lines (see also package 0)  
Speed Call/Autodial with Authorization Codes (see  
also package 34)  
•
Speed Call Delimiter (see also package 34)  
5
79  
Optional Outpulsing Delay  
Optional Outpulsing Delay  
OOD  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 81  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
192  
18  
ORC_RVQ  
Originator Routing Control  
•
Network Drop Back Busy and Off-hook Queuing  
(see also package 62)  
•
•
Remote Virtual Queuing  
Out-of-Service Unit  
104  
184  
Outpulsing, asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#)  
Outpulsing of Asterisk (*) and Octothorpe (#)  
Overlap Signaling (M1 to M1 and M1 to 1TR6 CO)  
OPAO  
OVLP  
•
15  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Overlap Signaling  
Overlay 45 Limited Repeats  
Overlay Cache Memory  
Override  
Paging  
Partial Dial Timing  
PBX (500/2500) Telephones  
Periodic Camp-on Tone  
Periodic Clearing  
Periodic Clearing Enhancement  
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD,  
and Music  
398  
254  
3.0  
20  
Personal Call Assistant  
Personal Call Assistant  
Phantom TN  
PCA  
•
PHTN  
•
•
Phantom TNs  
Position Busy with Call on Hold  
101  
10  
PPM/Message Registration  
MR  
•
•
Advice of Charge Real-time Supplementary  
Services for NUMERIS and SWISSNET (see also  
package 131)  
Advice of Charge – Charging Information and  
End of Call for NUMERIS Connectivity (see also  
package 131)  
•
•
Message Registration  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
•
Predictive Dialing  
Pre-translation  
92  
PXLT  
8
•
•
Pre-translation  
Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward  
389  
186  
25.40  
20  
Priority Network Override  
Network Breaking and Force Disconnect  
Priority Override/Forced Camp-On  
PONW  
POVR  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Forced Camp-on and Priority Override  
Privacy  
Privacy Override  
Privacy Release  
Private Line Service  
401  
103  
4.0  
10  
Proactive Voice Quality Management  
Property Management System Interface  
PVQM  
PMSI  
•
•
Property Management System Interface  
Public Switched Data Service  
232  
263  
18  
20  
Pulsed E&M (Indonesia, French Colisée)  
Pulsed E&M DTI2 Signaling  
Q Reference Signaling Point Interface  
PEMD  
QSIG  
•
•
Integrated Services Digital Network QSIG Basic  
Call  
305  
316  
22  
22  
QSIG Generic Functional protocol  
ISDN QSIG Generic Functional Transport  
QSIG Supplementary Service  
QSIG GF  
QSIG-SS  
•
•
•
•
ISDN QSIG Call Completion  
ISDN QSIG Call Diversion Notification  
ISDN QSIG Path Replacement  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 83  
Package Name  
Radio Paging  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
187  
15  
RPA  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Radio Paging  
Radio Paging Product Improvements  
Recall to Same Attendant  
Recall with Priority during Night Service  
Recall With Priority during Night Service  
Recall With Priority during Night Service Network  
Wide  
327  
7
23  
1
Recorded Announcement Broadcast  
Recorded Announcement Broadcast  
Recorded Announcement  
Recorded Announcement  
Recorded Overflow Announcement  
RANBRD  
RAN  
•
•
36  
2
ROA  
•
•
•
Recorded Overflow Announcement  
Recorded Telephone Dictation  
Recovery of Misoperation on the Attendant  
Console  
•
•
•
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Reference Clock Switching  
Reference Clock Switching (see also packages  
75, 129, and 154)  
Remote IPE  
286  
192  
REMOTE_IPE  
RVQ  
•
Remote Intelligent Peripheral Equipment  
18  
9
Remote Virtual Queuing  
•
Network Drop Back Busy and Off-hook Queuing  
(see also package 62)  
•
Remote Virtual Queuing  
82  
Resident Debug  
RSDB  
RCK  
•
•
•
Restricted Call Transfer  
Ring and Hold Lamp Status  
Ringback Tone from Meridian 1 Enhancement  
193  
15  
Ringing Change Key  
Ringing Change Key  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Room Status  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
100  
10  
RMS  
•
Room Status  
162  
20  
SAR  
Scheduled Access Restrictions  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scheduled Access Restrictions  
Secrecy Enhancement  
Secretarial Filtering  
Seizure Acknowledgment  
Selectable Conferee Display and Disconnect  
Selectable Directory Number Size  
181  
15  
Semi-Automatic Camp-On  
SACP  
•
•
•
•
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
Attendant Idle Extension Notification  
Semi-Automatic Camp-On  
Serial Port Expansion  
191  
53  
15  
1
Series Call  
SECL  
SR  
•
Series Call  
Set Relocation  
•
•
•
•
Automatic Set Relocation  
Short Buzz for Digital Telephones  
Short Memory Test  
Single Digit Access to Hotel Services  
380  
228  
25  
19  
Set-to-Set Messaging  
Set-to-Set Messaging  
Single Term Access  
STS  
STA  
•
•
•
•
Single Term Access  
Slow Answer Recall Enhancement  
Slow Answer Recall for Transferred External  
Trunks  
•
Source Included when Attendant Dials  
406  
402  
4.0  
4.0  
SIP Gateway and Converged Desktop  
Soft Switch  
SIP  
SOFTSWITCH  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 85  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
252  
20  
KD3  
Spanish KD3 DID/DOD interface  
•
KD3 Direct Inward Dialing/Direct Outward Dialing  
for Spain  
•
•
•
•
•
Special Signaling Protocols  
Special Trunk Support  
Speed Call Directory Number Access  
Speed Call on Private Lines (see also package 1)  
Speed-Up Data Dump  
262  
251  
121  
80  
20  
20  
20  
7
SAMM  
SCDR  
SCMP  
SCI  
Standalone Meridian Mail  
Meridian Mail, Standalone  
Station Activity Records  
Station Activity Records  
Station Camp-On  
Station Camp-On  
Station Category Indication  
Station Category Indication  
•
•
•
•
106  
229  
10  
19  
Station Loop Preemption  
SLP  
Station Specific Authorization Codes  
SSAU  
•
•
Station Specific Authorization Code  
Station-to-Station Calling  
64  
93  
3
8
SNR  
SUPV  
SVCT  
Stored Number Redial  
Stored Number Redial  
Supervisory Attendant Console  
Supervisory Attendant Console  
Supervisory Console Tones  
System Capacity Enhancements  
System Errors and Events Lookup  
System Message Lookup  
•
•
189  
245  
20  
19  
•
SYS_MSG_  
LKUP  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86 Features and Software options  
Package Name  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
34  
2
SSC  
System Speed Call  
•
Speed Call/Autodial with Authorization Codes (see  
also package 1)  
•
•
•
•
Speed Call, System  
Speed Call Delimiter (see also package 34)  
Telephones (PBX)  
Teletype Terminal Access Control in  
Multi-Customer Environment (see also  
package 164)  
•
Telset Call Timer Enhancement  
Time and Date  
Time and Date  
8
TAD  
1
•
7
7
66  
65  
Tone Detector Special Common Carrier  
Tone Detector  
SCC  
TDET  
•
•
•
Tone Detector  
Tone to Last Party  
Tones, Flexible Incoming  
Traffic Monitoring  
168  
293  
TMON  
TAT  
Trunk Anti-Tromboning  
21  
20  
15  
•
Trunk Anti-Tromboning  
Trunk Barring  
Trunk Barring  
Trunk Failure Monitor  
132  
182  
TBAR  
TFM  
•
•
•
Trunk Failure Monitor  
Trunk Failure Monitor Enhancement  
157  
14  
THF  
Trunk Hook Flash (Centrex)  
•
•
Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Italian Central Office Special Services (see also  
packages 129, and 131)  
•
•
Trunk to Trunk Connections  
Trunk Traffic Reporting Enhancement  
110  
9.32  
Trunk Verification from Station  
TVS  
•
•
Trunk Verification from a Station  
Uninterrupted Line Connection  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features and Software options 87  
Package Name  
United Kingdom  
Number  
Mnemonic  
Release  
190  
16  
UK  
•
Analog Private Network Signaling System  
(APNSS) (see also packages 122 123, and 124)  
•
UK Analogue Hardware Support  
283  
20  
UIGW  
Universal ISDN Gateways  
•
•
•
Universal ISDN Gateway  
Variable Flash Timing and Ground Button  
Variable Guard Timing  
VIP Auto Wake Up  
Hospitality Enhancements: V.I.P. Auto Wake Up  
Virtual Network Services  
212  
183  
VAWU  
VNS  
17  
16  
•
•
•
Virtual Network Services  
Virtual Network Services/Virtual Directory Number  
Expansion (see also package 58)  
•
Voice Call  
382  
387  
25  
VIRTUAL_  
OFFICE  
Virtual Office  
•
•
•
•
Branch Office  
Emergency Services For Virtual Office  
Internet Telephone Virtual Office  
Virtual Office  
3.0  
VOE  
Virtual Office Enhancement  
•
•
•
Branch Office  
Emergency Services For Virtual Office  
Internet Telephone Virtual Office  
Voice Mailbox Administration  
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration  
X08 to X11 Gateway  
X08 to X11 Gateway  
Zone Call Admission Control  
Adaptive Network Bandwidth Management  
246  
188  
407  
VMBA  
L1MF  
ZCAC  
19  
15  
•
•
4.5  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88 Features and Software options  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
89  
Call Forward All Calls  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 89)  
"Operating parameters" (page 90)  
"Feature interactions" (page 91)  
"Feature packaging" (page 100)  
"Feature implementation" (page 100)  
"Feature operation" (page 103)  
Feature description  
Call Forward All Calls (CFW) automatically forwards incoming calls to  
another destination, within or outside the system. Only calls to the Prime  
DN or any single-appearance DN on the telephone are forwarded. Outgoing  
calls can still be placed from the telephone when Call Forward is active.  
Call Forward All Calls can be selectively activated depending on the source  
of the originating party. With the Internal Call Forward (ICF) feature, the  
user can cause only internal calls to be forwarded. The Call Forward  
Reminder Tone (CFRT) presents special dial tones on analog (500/2500  
type) telephones with CFW active. One tone indicates that CFW is active;  
a second indicates that there is a message waiting for the telephone with  
CFW active.  
Call Forward All Calls, as well as Internal Call Forward, is assigned on a  
per-telephone basis. Meridian 1 proprietary telephones must be equipped  
with separate key/lamp pairs to allow the activation and deactivation of  
each feature. Customers can specify the length of the destination number  
in LD 11. Options are 4, 8, 12, 16, 20, or 23 digits. If you enter another  
number for the length, the system rounds to the nearest acceptable choice.  
The default is 16 digits.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
90 Call Forward All Calls  
When you use Multiple Appearance DNs (MADNs), call redirection is  
determined based on the Terminal Number (TN) order in your DN block. To  
determine the TN order, print the DN block from LD 20 or LD 22 (TYPE =  
DNB). When a call comes in to an MADN, the system begins a search  
to determine how the call is handled. Using the TN list you printed, the  
system performs the following search, beginning at the bottom of the TN  
list, and working up.  
1. Searches for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call  
Forward All Calls activated.  
2. If there are no Prime DN appearances, the Call Forward All Calls cannot  
be activated.  
The search does not necessarily determine the lowest numerical TN. The  
search starts at the bottom of the TN list.  
Operating parameters  
The forwarding of a call depends on the access limitations assigned to the  
telephones and the trunks involved in the call. If call forwarding results in  
a connection that is not permitted by the assigned access limitations, the  
incoming call is not forwarded.  
The customer can specify which telephone determines the successful  
completion of the call: the originating telephone or the forwarding telephone.  
Internal Call Forward requires a programmable feature key. Therefore,  
Internal Call Forward is not supported on BRI telephones.  
LD 17 CFWS allows telephones to have their CFW status saved as part of  
the data dump routine and then reinstated following a SYSLOAD. For more  
information, refer to the Call Forward Save feature RL.  
Call Forward Reminder Tone does not apply to telephones that have a visual  
indication of active CFW status.  
The Reciprocal Call Forward All Calls option prevents the situation whereby  
an infinite loop is caused in a network-wide Call Forward configuration  
resulting from telephone A being call forwarded (all calls) to telephone B at  
another node, which in turn has been call forwarded back to telephone A.  
A check is provided using the Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer (FOPT),  
which prohibits any telephone from call forwarding more than one call off  
node for a period of 14 seconds.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 91  
The Flexible Orbiting Prevention Timer, previously fixed at 14 seconds, can  
be set during Service Change from 0 to 30 seconds (even numbers only). If  
a value of 0 is defined, then Orbit Prevention is disabled and call forwarding  
is not inhibited in any way.  
The Orbit Prevention protection, however, does not extend to all potential  
orbiting situations. Improperly engineered networking or multiple switching  
arrangements can produce orbiting.  
Feature interactions  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
Calls charged with Advice of Charge that are either transferred, extended or  
redirected to another telephone using Call Forward All Calls are charged  
against the last telephone that answers the call and the controlling telephone  
releases. Additionally, the last party that transfers or forwards a call to an  
ISDN Central Office trunk is charged for both connections.  
Attendant Alternative Answering  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over all other Call Forwarding  
features for a particular telephone. Calls forwarded by Attendant Alternative  
Answering (AAA) are subject to the Call Forwarding conditions on the AAA  
DN.  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override Call Forward All Calls.  
If the dialed DN of the telephone is idle, the DN can be blocked; if the DN  
is busy, busy tone is heard.  
Attendant Break-In  
The attendant can override call forwarding on a destination DN by pressing  
the Break-In key before dialing the destination DN. The attendant may not  
apply Camp-On to a telephone with Call Forward active.  
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls  
The operation of Call Forward All Calls is overridden on a analog (500/2500  
type) telephone that has inadvertently been placed on-hook during a  
Break-In conference to allow it to be re-rung by the attendant.  
If the controlling party goes on hook in a Break-In conference, and is being  
re-rung by the attendant, the ringing takes precedence over Call Forward All  
Calls that may be applied to the telephone.  
Attendant Busy Verify  
If the DN is call forwarded to the attendant console, the attendant will  
receive a click followed by silence.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
92 Call Forward All Calls  
Attendant Overflow Position  
If the telephone assigned an Attendant Overflow DN has activated the Call  
Forward All Calls feature, overflow calls are not rerouted to the telephone. If  
a analog (500/2500 type) telephone is forwarded, AOP is canceled.  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls  
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does not  
affect how the Call Forward All Calls feature operates; however, it does  
provide information about the answering party in the Call Detail Recording  
ID field if incoming calls have been redirected by any one of these features.  
Call Forward and Busy Status  
Call Forward All Calls must be assigned to Party A’s telephone to enable  
the Call Forward Status function, which allows party B to monitor and alter  
the Call Forward state of party A’s telephone.  
Call Forward by Call Type  
If a call is unanswered at the forwarded DN, the telephone that has Call  
Forward All Calls activated is checked for the Class of Service and the call  
forward DN. If a chain of call forwarding occurs, the Class of Service and the  
forward DN for Call Forward No Answer are obtained from the first telephone  
in the chain. This applies when FDN and HNT have been specified for Call  
Forward No Answer at the customer level.  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
If the Call Forward All Calls (CFW) DN of telephone A is the DN of telephone  
B and telephone A dials the CFW FFC to activate Call Forward All Calls,  
then telephone A’s calls are forwarded to telephone B. Telephone B can  
deactivate CFW on telephone A by dialing the Call Forward Destination  
Deactivation (CFDD) FFC.  
Call Forward External Deny  
This feature overrides other Call Forward All Calls parameters. For example,  
if Call Forward to Trunk Access Code (CFTA) is allowed for the customer,  
but Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled for the telephone, CFXD  
takes precedence and call forwarding to a trunk access code is denied.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
The Call Forward All Calls feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt  
Override Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 93  
Call Forward, Internal Calls  
If Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed (CFRA) is in effect, whenever  
an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with Internal Call Forward active  
goes off hook to originate a call, the telephone sounds the reminder  
tone. The reminder tone is either Call Forward Dial Tone (CFDT) or Call  
Forward/Message Waiting Dial Tone (CFMW).  
Call Forward No Answer  
Call Forward All Calls may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone  
that is different from the dialed DN. In this case, if the call is eligible for  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for  
the dialed DN, not the ringing DN.  
Suppose that party A calls party B, and party B has programmed Call  
Forward All Calls to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a  
No Answer call at party C to the FDN associated with party B, the dialed DN.  
After the call is forwarded, the MARP TN for the dialed DN controls the call  
redirection for Flexible Call Forward No Answer.  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the final (ringing) telephone in  
the chain to obtain Class of Service and forwarding DN information.  
First level treatment operates in the following manner. Suppose that Party A  
calls Party B, and Party B has programmed Call Forward All Calls to Party  
C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a No Answer call at Party C  
to the forwarding directory number associated with Party B, the dialed DN.  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD  
The Call Forward status of each telephone can be saved as part of the data  
dump routine and reinstated following a SYSLOAD operation.  
Call Page Network Wide  
Call Page Network Wide (PAGENET) does not block a telephone from  
being programmed to Call Forward All Calls to an external Paging trunk. At  
call termination time, calls that are forwarded to an external PAGENET  
uncontrolled trunk are not blocked. However, calls forwarded to an external  
PAGENET controlled trunk are given access denied intercept treatment  
at the Paging node.  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Call Forward All Calls has precedence over Call Redirection by Time of Day.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
94 Call Forward All Calls  
Calling Party Name Display Denied  
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and  
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating  
telephone. This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of  
Service of the calling telephone and the forwarding/transferring telephone.  
The name of the forwarding/transferring telephone is not displayed on the  
calling and terminating telephone.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has  
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for  
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating  
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the  
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting Redirection  
Camp-On  
Camp-On, Station  
Call Forward All Calls has precedence over Call Forward Busy, Call Waiting,  
Call Waiting Redirection, Camp-On and Station Camp-On.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,  
idle DN treatment is given.  
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward  
Enhanced Flexible Feature Codes - Customer Call Forward  
When Customer Call Forward (CCFW) is active CFWAC cannot be activated  
by Flexible Feature Code, but can be activated by SPRE. When CFWAC is  
active, CCFW cannot be activated.  
CCFW can be deactivated by deactivating CFWAC. CFWAC can only be  
deactivated by the CCFD FFC if the current CFW DN is the same as the  
current CCFW DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 95  
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring  
Enhanced Flexible Feature - Outgoing Call Barring  
When a telephone with Outgoing Call Barring active activates CFWAC with  
a new CFW DN, the CFW DN is tested against the current barring level. If  
the DN is not allowed to be dialed, it can also not be used as a Call Forward  
DN. This is to prevent a telephone from forwarding to a barred DN and then  
dialing its own DN to bypass the limitations.  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.  
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back  
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).  
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.  
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the  
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the  
forwarding or hunting call is answered.  
Conference  
On analog (500/2500 type) telephones, Call Forward All Calls can be  
activated or canceled during a conference call.  
Display of Calling Party Denied  
When a telephone activates any of the call forwarding features, the displays  
given on the calling telephone and the terminating telephone are in  
accordance with the Class of Service of the telephones involved in the call.  
If the terminating telephone has Dialed Name Display Denied (DNDD), the  
display on the terminating telephone reflects the name and number of the  
calling party and the name and the number of the forwarding telephone.  
If the terminating telephone has Dialed Name Display Allowed (DNDA), the  
display on the terminating telephone reflects the number of the calling party  
and the name and number of the forwarding telephone. In both cases, the  
terminating telephone’s display is in accordance with the DPD Class of  
Service options of the calling and forwarding telephones.  
For a MCDN ISDN call, the calling party’s Calling Line Identification (CLID)  
is replaced with the ISDN route access code (ACOD) and the route member  
number, and the calling party’s name is replaced by a string of four Xs (X  
X X X).  
The display given on the calling telephone of an internal call, which has  
been forwarded to a telephone within the same switch, includes the name  
and number of the terminating telephone along with the number of the  
forwarding telephone. If the DPD Class of Service options, which are  
specified for the terminating telephone, indicate that the display of the  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
96 Call Forward All Calls  
name and number of the terminating telephone be denied, then on the  
calling telephone, the name of the terminating telephone is replaced by a  
string of four Xs (X X X X). The number is replaced by dashes (- - - -). If  
the number of the terminating telephone is blocked from being displayed  
on the calling telephone, the number of the forwarding telephone is also  
blocked from being displayed on the calling telephone, regardless of the  
DPD Class of Service options of the forwarding telephone. Conversely, if  
the display of the terminating telephone’s number is allowed in the calling  
telephone, then the number of the forwarding telephone is also displayed  
on the calling telephone, irrespective of the DPD Class of Service options  
of the forwarding telephone.  
Do Not Disturb  
If activated, Call Forward All Calls will take precedence over Do Not Disturb  
busy indication.  
DPNSS1 Diversion  
Call Forward All Calls on unanswered calls are activated in the following  
order: Call Forward All Calls, Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer,  
Slow Answer Recall. For busy telephones the order is: Call Forward All  
Calls, Hunting, Calling Waiting/Camp On, Message Waiting Busy Forward,  
Call Forward Busy.  
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines  
For Call Forwarding, the COS and NCOS used for the forwarding call can be  
taken from either the forwarding telephone or from the forwarded telephone,  
depending on the option defined in the Customer Data Block.  
For example, telephone B call forwards all calls to an external trunk.  
Telephone A calls telephone B. If OPT = CFF in LD 15 (Call Forward  
forwarded to party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone B  
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk. If OPT = CFO (Call Forward  
originating party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone A  
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk.  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering  
Although Call Forward All Calls and Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial  
Filtering can be equipped on the same telephone, they cannot both be  
active at the same time. There is no precedence of one over the other; it is  
not possible to activate one if the other is active on the telephone.  
Flexible Feature Codes  
When Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) are configured for a customer, #1  
automatically becomes the FFC DN for both Call Forward Activate (CFWA)  
and Call Forward Deactivate (CFWD). When the same DN is used for both  
CFWA and CFWD, FFC toggles the call forward activated/deactivated state  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 97  
of the telephone. When call forward is activated for a telephone, entering #1  
automatically deactivates call forward, no matter what follows #1. When call  
forward is deactivated for a telephone, the result of entering #1 depends on  
what follows #1:  
•
•
•
If the telephone goes on hook immediately, Call Forward is activated for  
the telephone to its previous Call Forward number.  
If a valid DN is entered after #1, Call Forward is activated for the  
telephone to that valid DN.  
If an invalid DN is entered after #1, Call Forward remains deactivated for  
the telephone.  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number  
Voice calls directed to a dynamic voice/data Terminal Number are forwarded,  
if either of these features are enabled. Data calls, to a dynamic voice/data  
TN, are not forwarded.  
Group Call  
A Group Call to a telephone with Call Forward active is forwarded one step  
only. The Call Forward number must be a valid DN.  
Group Hunt  
When Group Hunting attempts to terminate on a DN which has CFW All  
Calls active, it will continue with the next DN in the group if the attempted  
DN is busy, or if the DN is idle and the response to the Call Forward Ignore  
(CFWI) prompt in LD 57 is "NO". If the attempted DN is idle and the  
response to the CFWI prompt in LD 57 is "YES", then Group Hunting will  
terminate and the stations associated with the DN is rung.  
Hunting  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Hunting.  
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions  
When a call redirected by Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,  
Call Forward Busy, or Hunt terminates on an Intercept Computer (ICP)  
position, a redirected message identification "50" is sent to the ICP  
computer, when the call is answered.  
Idle Extension Notification  
When an extension that is being supervised for Idle Extension Notification  
becomes idle, it has the ability to make outgoing calls. If Call Forward All  
Calls or Intercept Call Forward are activated at the extension before the  
attendant presses the SACP key to ring that extension, the attendant’s call  
is forwarded to the Call Forward destination. The attendant display will show  
both the call forward DN, as well as the original extension’s DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
98 Call Forward All Calls  
If the Call Forward DN is busy, SACP can be activated towards the Call  
Forward DN, if all the requirements for allowing Idle Extension Notification  
are met by this DN.  
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement  
When a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) call to station that is unrestricted from  
receiving DID calls (UDI Class of Service) is forwarded to a UDI station due  
to Call Forward All Calls or Call Forward Busy, the call is RDI-intercepted to  
the attendant. The attendant display shows the DN of the dialed party.  
If the call has been forwarded to the attendant, the Call Forward All  
Calls/Call Forward Busy ICI lights up, and not the RDI-intercept ICI.  
ISDN QSIG Call Completion  
When the Call Forward feature is activated on a local basis and an incoming  
Call Completion request is received, the Call Completion request is  
registered against the forwarded DN.  
ISDN QSIG Name Display  
When an incoming QSIG call, with name display presentation allowed Name  
Display, is forwarded locally, the calling party’s name information is displayed  
on the forwarding telephone. With presentation restriction, the calling party’s  
name information is not displayed to the destination telephone.  
Make Set Busy  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Make Set Busy.  
Message Registration  
The party that originates a call is charged. The charge cannot be moved to  
another party using Call Forward All Calls.  
Multi-Party Operations  
A telephone which has activated Call Forward All Calls can still initiate calls  
and become the controlling party of a consultation connection. In this case,  
if the telephone fails to operate, then Multi-Party operations while re-ringing  
the controlling party as a part of failed operation recovery ignores the Call  
Forward All Calls indication present on the controlling party.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime (MARP) affects  
how call redirection operation is defined. Refer to the MARP module in this  
document for details.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 99  
Network Intercom (Hot Type D and Hot Type 1 Enhancements)  
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,  
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call  
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the  
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.  
Network Individual Do Not Disturb  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Do Not Disturb Individual  
(DNDI) treatment.  
Night Service Enhancements  
Any call which has been presented to the Attendant Overflow Position  
cannot be removed from the console and re-queued by pressing the Make  
Set Busy (MSB) key. The call will only be removed if the Attendant Forward  
No Answer feature is active, and the Attendant Forward No Answer Timer  
has timed out. In this case, the call is re-queued and the Attendant Overflow  
Position is idled.  
Paging  
Calls that originate on a TIE trunk to a telephone that is redirected to a  
paging route are blocked.  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
Metered calls transferred or extended from one station to another using the  
Call Forward All Calls feature are charged against the last station at which  
the call is answered as the controlling station releases. The last party to  
forward a call onto a metered Periodic Pulse Metering trunk is charged.  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)  
Call Forward All Calls is used in conjunction with Remote Call Forward  
(RCFW) to redirect incoming calls from a phantom TN/DN to a valid DN.  
Call Forward cannot be overridden on phantom TNs. Overflow tone occurs  
if an override is attempted.  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks  
If a call is forwarded to an outgoing external Central Office (CO) route with  
the Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX)  
flag set, RANX is activated.  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.  
Ring Again on No Answer  
If an unanswered call is forwarded to another station by Call Forward All  
Calls, Ring Again on No Answer is applied to the originally dialed station.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
100 Call Forward All Calls  
Special prefix SPRE access codes  
SPRE access codes cannot be used as CFW DNs. If an attempt is made to  
program SPRE access code as a CFW DN, the overflow tone is given at  
the time of CFW activation.  
Total Redirection Count  
Call Forward All Calls redirection is limited to the value defined in the Total  
Redirection Count limit (if greater than 0). If this limit is exceeded, intercept  
treatment is given.  
Trunk Access Codes  
There is an option in LD 15 to allow or disallow telephones to program Call  
Forward All Calls to a Trunk Access Code. See "Call Forward All Calls"  
(page 89).  
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives  
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.  
User Selectable Call Redirection  
When CFW redirects a call from telephone A to telephone B, and telephone  
B does not answer, the Ringing Cycle Options of telephone B determines  
how long it rings. After the designated number of rings, the Flexible Call  
Forward No Answer of telephone A redirects the call.  
Feature packaging  
Internal Call Forward requires the 500 Set Dial Access to Features (SS5)  
package 73 for analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and the Flexible Feature  
Codes (FFC) package 139. Call Forward Reminder Tone is packaged with  
the Call Forward All Calls feature.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls." (page 101)  
Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls  
2. "LD 10 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward  
for analog (500/2500 type) telep" (page 101)  
Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for  
Meridian 1 proprietary telep" (page 102)  
Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for Meridian  
1 proprietary telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature implementation 101  
4. "LD 57 - Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward."  
(page 103)  
Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward.  
On an analog (500/2500 type) telephone, the user accesses the Call  
Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward features by dialing either the  
SPRE plus the feature code, or the appropriate Flexible Feature Codes  
(FFCs). On a digital telephone, the user accesses each feature using its  
feature key.  
LD 15 - Define Class of Service for Call Forward All Calls.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
RDR  
Call Redirection.  
Customer number.  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
0-31  
- OPT  
(CFO) CFF  
(CFO) = Calling party Class of Service is active during Call  
Forward All Calls.  
CFF = Forwarding party Class of Service is active during Call  
Forward All Calls.  
(PVCA) PVCD  
(NO) YES  
Prevention of reciprocal Call Forward (allowed) or denied.  
- CFTA  
- OPT  
(Deny) allow telephones to Call Forward All Calls to a Trunk  
Access Code.  
(CFRD) CFRA  
Call Forward Reminder Tone (denied) allowed for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones.  
In LD 56, the XCT Tone Code (XCAD) default value is set to 0. If the XCAD  
prompt is not changed in LD 56, an Analog 500-type telephone will not  
receive Call Forward Reminder Tone (CFRT) even if it has been enabled in  
LD 15 (OPT = CRFA).  
LD 10 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
500  
Terminal Number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
102 Call Forward All Calls  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
FTR  
CFW xx yyyy...y  
Allow Call Forward All Calls, where:  
xx = maximum number of digits in the CFW DN. Valid entries  
are any integer in the range of (4)-31. yyyy = number where  
calls are forwarded.  
YYYY cannot be entered from the maintenance terminal. When  
the telephone information is printed in LD 20, yyyy shows the  
call forward number.  
FTR  
ICF xx  
Allow Internal Call Forward, where:  
xx = maximum number of digits in the Forward DN. Valid entries  
are any integer in the range of (4)-31.  
LD 11 - Add/change Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal Number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx CFW yy  
zzzz...z  
Define Call Forward All Calls, where:  
xx = key number; M2317 must use key 22  
yy = maximum number of digits in the CFW DN.  
Valid entries for M2317 telephones are any integer in the range  
of (4)-23. For all other Meridian 1 proprietary type telephones,  
valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-31.  
zzzz = number where calls are forwarded.  
KEY  
xx ICF yy zzzz  
Define Internal Call Forward, where:  
xx = key number  
yy = maximum number of digits in the Forward DN.  
Valid entries are any integer in the range of (4)-31.  
zzzz = number where calls are forwarded.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 103  
LD 57 - Add/change Flexible Feature Codes for Internal Call Forward.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW CHG OUT  
FFC  
Description  
Add, change, or remove an FFC.  
Flexible Feature Code.  
TYPE  
CODE  
ICFA  
ICFD  
ICFV  
Access code for Internal CFW Activate.  
Access code for Internal CFW Deactivate.  
Access code for Internal CFW Verify.  
xxxx  
xxxx  
xxxx  
ICFA  
ICFD  
ICFV  
Internal CFW Activate Code (ICFD and ICFA may share the  
same code).  
Internal CFW Deactivate Code (ICFD and ICFA may share the  
same code).  
Internal CFW Verify Code.  
Feature operation  
To forward all calls from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:  
Step Action  
1
Press Forward.  
2
3
Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.  
Press Forward.  
—End—  
To forward internal calls only from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:  
Step Action  
1
Press Internal Call Forward.  
2
3
Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.  
Press Internal Call Forward.  
—End—  
To cancel Call Forward All Calls:  
Press Forward.  
•
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
104 Call Forward All Calls  
To cancel Internal Call Forward:  
Press Internal Call Forward.  
•
To forward calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:  
Step Action  
1
Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74  
or lift the handset and dial #1 (2500 telephone)  
or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Allowed FFC.  
2
3
Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.  
Hang up.  
—End—  
If you deactivate Call Forward, then reactivate without changing the number,  
calls is forwarded to the previously established CFW DN.  
To forward internal calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:  
Step Action  
1
Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914  
or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward FFC.  
2
3
Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.  
Hang up.  
—End—  
To cancel Call Forward All Calls:  
•
Lift the handset and dial SPRE 74  
or lift the handset and dial #1 (2500 telephone)  
or lift the handset and dial the Call Forward Deny FFC.  
To cancel Internal Call Forward:  
•
Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914  
or lift the handset and dial the Internal Call Forward Deny FFC.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
105  
Call Forward and Busy Status  
Contents  
The following are topics in this section:  
"Feature description" (page 105)  
"Operating parameters" (page 106)  
"Feature interactions" (page 107)  
"Feature packaging" (page 108)  
"Feature implementation" (page 108)  
"Feature operation" (page 110)  
Feature description  
The Call Forward and Busy Status feature was designed for an environment  
where Party A forwards calls to Party B for screening.  
When equipped with a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key-lamp or key-Liquid  
Crystal Display (LCD) pair, Party B can perform the following:  
•
•
•
monitor, activate, or deactivate Call Forward for Party A  
override Call Forward of Party A, in order to place a call to Party A or  
determine whether Party A is busy on a call  
The BFS key-lamp or key-LCD pair serves a dual purpose. The Busy Status  
function indicates to Party B, using lamp or LCD state, whether Party A is  
busy or not. The Call Forward Status function allows Party B to monitor and  
alter the Call Forward state of Party A. Therefore, the BFS lamp or LCD  
state of Party B may indicate that Party A is in any one of the following  
four possible states:  
•
•
Call Forward activated and not busy  
Call Forward activated and busy  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
106 Call Forward and Busy Status  
•
•
Call Forward deactivated and not busy or  
Call Forward deactivated and busy  
The BFS key also acts as an Autodial (ADL) key. To use the BFS key as  
an ADL key to call Party A, Party B goes off-hook and presses the BFS  
key for Party A.  
Busy Status  
The Busy Status portion of the feature indicates if Party A is busy for any of  
the following reasons:  
•
•
•
•
•
call active on a Directory Number (DN) key (SCR, SCN, MCR, or MCN)  
has Make Set Busy (MSB) activated  
has Do Not Disturb (DND) activated  
call active on a Group Call (GRC) key  
call active on a Private-line non-ringing (PVN) or Private-line Ringing  
(PVR) key  
•
•
•
Party A ringing  
if Party A is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and has call on Hold  
if Party A is an analog (500/2500 type) telephone and has a call on  
permanent Hold  
Call Forward Status  
The Call Forward portion allows Party B to monitor and alter the Call  
Forward state of Party A. Party A may be either an analog (500/2500  
type) telephone or Meridian 1 proprietary telephone and must have Call  
Forward All Calls equipped. The Call Forward and Busy Status feature  
introduces a modification to the Call Forward All Calls feature functionality.  
The modification is activated or deactivated on a customer-wide basis by  
the response to OPT in LD 15. The OPT responses are "FKD" (Forward  
Key Denied) and the default setting "FKA" (Forward Key Allowed).  
Operating parameters  
Party B must be using a Meridian Modular telephone. Party A may have an  
Meridian Modular or 500/2500-type telephone, with Call Forward All Calls  
(CFAC) equipped. The operating parameters are the same as for CFAC.  
A station may be monitored by a maximum of 16 other stations using the  
BFS key.  
The monitored and monitoring stations must all belong to the same  
customer.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature interactions 107  
Feature interactions  
Attendant and Network-Wide Remote Call Forward  
When the call forward status of a BFS station is changed from a telephone or  
attendant-based Remote Call Forward feature, the BFS lamp(s) associated  
with that station are updated accordingly.  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override these Call Forward  
and Busy Status. If the dialed DN of the telephone is idle, the DN can be  
blocked; if the DN is busy, busy tone is heard.  
Autodial  
Party A can use the Busy/Forward Status key as an Autodial key to dial  
Party B.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward All Calls must be assigned to Party A’s telephone to enable  
the Call Forward Status function, which allows Party B to monitor and alter  
the Call Forward state of Party A’s telephone.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Call Forward and Busy Status is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt  
Override Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.  
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network-Wide)  
When the call forward status of a BFS station is changed from a telephone or  
attendant-based Remote Call Forward feature, the BFS lamp(s) associated  
with that station are updated accordingly.  
Calling Party Privacy  
If an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the outgoing trunk route on the  
tandem node also has CCP provisioned.  
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing  
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the  
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (that is,  
at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating telephone. In  
this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN  
(such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
108 Call Forward and Busy Status  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering  
If the secretary telephone is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, or a  
compact digital telephone, it may be equipped with a Call Forward and Busy  
Status (BFS) key/lamp pair, to perform the following:  
•
•
•
•
monitor the status of the Call Forward feature on a boss telephone  
activate/deactivate the Call Forward feature on a boss telephone  
monitor whether or not a boss telephone is busy on a call, and  
override the Call Forward All Calls feature on a boss telephone, in order  
to place a call to the boss telephone.  
The above functions, however, can only be performed by the secretary  
telephone while it is in an unattended state, since BFS and Flexible Feature  
Code Boss Secretarial Filtering cannot be active simultaneously.  
Network Intercom  
In a Secretarial filtering scenario, the secretary’s Busy/Forward Status  
(BFS) lamp also will reflect that the boss’ telephone is busy if the boss is  
on a Hot Type I call.  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)  
When a user attempts to define a BFS key for a phantom TN, the system  
generates the following error message: "An invalid TN has been entered for  
the Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key."  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Activate the Call Forward and Busy Status mode of operation."  
(page 109)  
Activate the Call Forward and Busy Status mode of operation.  
2. "LD 11 - Assign a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key." (page 109)  
Assign a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key.  
3. "LD 20 - Print the BFS key type and related information." (page 109)  
Print the BFS key type and related information.  
4. "LD 21 - Print the OPT setting." (page 109)  
Print the OPT setting.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 109  
LD 15 - Activate the Call Forward and Busy Status mode of operation.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
RDR  
Call Redirection  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B  
...  
...  
NCOS  
- OPT  
(FKA) FKD  
Forward Key (Allowed) Denied — determines whether Call  
Forward keys on telephones for this customer are operational.  
LD 11 - Assign a Busy/Forward Status (BFS) key.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
...  
Response  
CHG NEW  
a...a  
Description  
Request: Modify or create data block.  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
...  
LANG  
KEY  
Key number (0-69), Busy/Forward Status (BFS), Terminal  
Number (TN) of telephone to be monitored.  
For Large Systems  
0-69 BFS l s c u  
0-69 BFS c u  
For Small Systems  
LD 20 - Print the BFS key type and related information.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
PRT  
Description  
Request: Print data block.  
Type of data block.  
xxxx  
...  
LD 21 - Print the OPT setting.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
PRT  
Description  
Request: Print data block.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CDB  
Type of data block: Customer Data Block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
xx  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
110 Call Forward and Busy Status  
Feature operation  
Call Forward Status  
With FKA, the default, selected Party A’s Call Forward (CFW) key-lamp or  
key-LCD pair operation is unaffected and depressing Party B’s BFS key will  
result in one of the following:  
•
•
•
If Party A does not currently have Call Forward activated, Party A has  
Call Forward activated to Party B’s DN and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD  
is activated.  
If Party A already has Call Forward activated to Party B’s DN, Party  
A has Call Forward deactivated and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD is  
deactivated.  
If Party A already has Call Forward activated to a DN other than Party  
B’s, Call Forward is left as is.  
With FKD selected Party A’s CFW key-lamp or key-LCD pair operation is  
modified so that the pair is usable as an indicator only, the key is disabled,  
and depressing Party B’s BFS key will result in one of the following:  
•
If Party A has Call Forward active to the DN of a BFS key equipped  
telephone other than Party B, Call Forward is left as is.  
•
If Party A has Call Forward active to a remote DN and Call Forward was  
activated by a remote FFC, the existing Call Forward DN is overridden  
and all new calls are forwarded to Party B’s DN.  
•
•
If Party A has Call Forward active to Party B’s DN, Party A’s Call  
Forward is deactivated and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD is deactivated.  
If Party A does not have Call Forward active, Call Forward is activated to  
Party B’s DN and Party A’s CFW lamp or LCD is activated.  
When the Boss telephone is call forwarded to one of the secretary DNs,  
then calling the Boss telephone from the secretary by using the BFS  
key overrides the call forward. If the secretary calls the Boss, and Boss  
telephone has been call forwarded to a DN which is not a secretary DN,  
then the call is forwarded.  
BFS lamp or LCD states  
Party B’s BFS lamp or LCD reflects the status of Party A’s telephone in  
terms of both the Busy or Idle and the Call Forward states. The following  
gives the possible BFS lamp or LCD states for the various states Party  
A can be in:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 111  
Party A’s Call Forward  
Party A’s  
telephone  
Deactivated  
Activated  
Wink = Fast Flash  
Flash  
Idle  
Dark  
Lit  
Busy  
Dark indicates lamp or LCD is off.  
Wink indicates lamp or LCD is winking at 60 impulses per minute (ipm)  
(0.875 seconds on, 0.125 seconds off).  
Lit indicates lamp or LCD is on  
Flash indicates lamp or LCD is flashing at 30 ipm (0.5 seconds on, 0.5 seconds  
off).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112 Call Forward and Busy Status  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
113  
Call Forward Busy  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 113)  
"Operating parameters" (page 113)  
"Feature interactions" (page 113)  
"Feature packaging" (page 117)  
"Feature implementation" (page 117)  
"Feature operation" (page 118)  
Feature description  
Call Forward Busy (CFB) automatically routes incoming Direct Inward  
Dialing (DID) calls to the attendant console when a telephone is busy.  
This capability is allowed or denied in the Class of Service (FBA/FBD) of  
the telephone.  
Operating parameters  
On incoming DID calls, Hunting takes precedence, followed by Call Waiting,  
then Call Forward Busy. In busy situations, the call hunts if the telephone  
has Hunting specified.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Alternative Answering  
If Call Forward Busy is allowed for the Attendant Alternative Answering  
(AAA) DN (and that DN is busy), a DID call is returned to the attendant and  
can again be eligible for AAA timing and operation.  
Attendant Busy Verify  
Attendant Busy Verify does not affect Call Forward Busy.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
114 Call Forward Busy  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls  
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does not  
affect how the Call Forward Busy feature operates; however, it does provide  
information about the answering party in the CDR ID field if incoming calls  
have been redirected by any one of these features.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Forward Busy.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has  
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.  
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing  
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the  
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for  
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating  
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the  
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones  
If Class of Service allows CFB and Call Waiting Allowed, and the telephone  
has a Call Waiting key, calls do not forward to the attendant when the  
telephone is busy and another call is waiting.  
Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
If a telephone has CFB and Call Waiting Allowed Class of Service, calls are  
forwarded to the attendant when the telephone is busy and has another  
call waiting.  
Camp-On, Station  
For DID calls only, Call Forward Busy takes precedence over Camp-On,  
Station.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,  
idle DN treatment is given.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 115  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.  
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back  
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).  
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.  
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the  
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the  
forwarding or hunting call is answered.  
Departmental Listed Directory Number  
Call Forward Busy operates like Call Forward to 0, and are routed to any  
idle attendant console in the customer group.  
Dial Access to Group Calls  
Call Forward Busy cannot be applied to a Group Call.  
Call Forward Busy  
Calls modified by Call Forward Busy are not given Distinctive Ringing as  
they terminate on the attendant console.  
Dial Access to Group Calls  
Group Call  
Call Forward Busy cannot be applied to Dial Access to Group Calls or  
Group Call.  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering  
Call Forward Busy to a boss telephone with filtering active is routed to the  
secretary telephone.  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number  
Voice calls directed to a call processing busy dynamic voice/data TN are  
redirected using Call Forward Busy provided this feature is configured for  
the TN. Data calls to dynamic voice/data TNs are not redirected.  
Group Hunt  
Group Hunting has priority over the Call Forward Busy feature.  
If the DN attempted for termination has FBA (Forward Busy Allowed) Class  
of Service, and if it is busy, then Group Hunting continues with the next  
DN in the group  
Hot Line  
Any Hot Line telephone can be assigned Call Forward Busy but it applies  
only to the two-way Hot Line capability.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
116 Call Forward Busy  
Hunting  
When a telephone is busy, an incoming call hunts only if Hunting is allowed  
for that telephone. If all the steps in the hunt group are busy, and Call  
Waiting is not allowed, the call forwards to the attendant console.  
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions  
When a call redirected by Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,  
Call Forward Busy, or Hunt terminates on an Intercept Computer (ICP)  
position, a redirected message identification "50" is sent to the ICP  
computer, when the call is answered.  
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement  
When a DID call to station that is unrestricted from receiving DID calls (UDI  
Class of Service) is forwarded to a UDI station due to Call Forward All Calls  
or Call Forward Busy, the call is RDI-intercepted to the attendant. The  
attendant display shows the DN of the dialed party.  
If the call has been forwarded to the attendant, the Call Forward All  
Calls/Call Forward Busy ICI lights up, and not the RDI-intercept ICI.  
Lockout, DID Second Degree Busy, and MFE Signaling Treatments  
Call Forward Busy takes precedence over lockout and second degree busy.  
Network Intercom  
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,  
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call  
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the  
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.  
Night Service  
When the system is in Night Service, DID calls forwarded by Call Forward  
Busy are routed to the specified night number. If the night telephone is busy,  
subsequent calls receive busy tone.  
Recorded Announcement for Call Diverted to External Trunks  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX) is  
activated if the call is forwarded to an outgoing external CO trunk with the  
RANX feature active.  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.  
Total Redirection Count  
Call Forward Busy redirections is limited to the value defined in the Total  
Redirection Count limit (if greater than 0). If this limit is exceeded, intercept  
treatment is given.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature implementation 117  
Trunk Barring  
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives  
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI)  
on attendant consoles." (page 117)  
Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) on  
attendant consoles.  
2. "LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 117)  
Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 118)  
Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
LD 15 - Add/change a Call Forward Busy Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) on attendant consoles.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
ATT_DATA  
Attendant console options  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B  
Add a Call Forward Busy ICI key; xx = 0-19.  
0-31  
- ICI  
xx CFB  
LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
500  
Terminal Number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
118 Call Forward Busy  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(FBD) FBA  
(Deny) allow Call Forward Busy.  
LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward Busy on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal Number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(FBD) FBA  
(Deny) allow Call Forward Busy.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
119  
Call Forward by Call Type  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 119)  
"Operating parameters" (page 120)  
"Feature interactions" (page 121)  
"Feature packaging" (page 125)  
"Feature implementation" (page 125)  
"Feature operation" (page 127)  
Feature description  
Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) routes calls receiving a no answer or busy  
signal to separately defined DNs based on the type of incoming call. The  
two types of incoming calls are internal and external.  
An internal call is defined as a station-to-station call, a Direct Inward System  
Access (DISA) call, or an incoming call over a trunk route class marked as  
internal. An external call is an incoming call over a trunk route class marked  
as external. The trunk route data block (LD 16) allows routes to be defined  
as internal or external for this feature.  
Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN), Attendant Recall (ATT), Call  
Forward denied for all telephones (NO), and Hunting (HNT). Call Forward  
by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled only when the FDN and HNT options are  
chosen.  
In LD 15 Call Forward No Answer is defined by FNAT for external non-DID  
calls and by FNAL for internal calls. FNAD continues to define Call Forward  
No Answer for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk calls.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
120 Call Forward by Call Type  
CFCT is allowed or denied for each telephone in LD 10 or LD 11 with  
Class of Service (CFTA/CFTD). If CFCT is allowed (CFTA), the forwarding  
destination is also defined in LD 10 or LD 11.  
Once enabled, CFCT requires no intervention. How the system initiates Call  
Forward by Call Type is described below.  
When a call is presented to a telephone, the telephone is checked for  
the appropriate Class of Service (Hunting Allowed (HTA), Call Forward  
No Answer (FNA), Call Forward by Call Type (CFTA). The incoming call is  
then checked to determine if it is a telephone, DISA, or trunk call. If it is a  
trunk call, the trunk route is checked to determine whether the call should  
be treated as an internal or external call. After these checks, internal calls  
are forwarded to the FDN or Hunt DN of the telephone. External calls are  
forwarded to the External Flexible DN (EFD) or External Hunt (EHT) DN  
of the telephone.  
The order in which the system handles no answer and busy calls is an  
important consideration when implementing this feature. The order of  
precedence is listed below.  
Calls to telephones that do not answer:  
•
•
•
•
Call Forward All Calls  
Message Waiting  
Call Forward No Answer  
Attendant Recall  
Calls to busy telephones:  
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forward All Calls  
Hunting  
Call Waiting or Camp-On  
Message Waiting Forward Busy  
Call Forward Busy  
Operating parameters  
Attendant Administration does not support the entry of the new EFD and  
EHT Class of Service required for Call Forward by Call Type.  
The following trunk routes can be defined as internal or external call types  
for CFCT: CO, DID, FX, ATVN, CCA, TIE, WATS, and CSA.  
Incoming DISA calls are always treated as internal calls irrespective of the  
trunk route class mark defined for the incoming trunk.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 121  
If an incoming call has been modified by Call Forward All Calls or Hunting,  
the Class of Service and forwarding DN are obtained from the dialed DN.  
This applies when Call Forward No Answer specified at the customer level  
is HNT or FDN.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant  
An attendant-extended call is classified internal or external by the originating  
telephone or class mark of the trunk type. This is the case whether or not  
the attendant has released before forwarding occurs.  
Attendant Alternative Answering  
If Call Forward by Call Type is enabled on the Attendant Alternative  
Answering (AAA) DN, calls are forwarded based on the Call Type of the  
originator.  
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls  
The operation of Call Forward by Call Type is overridden on a analog  
(500/2500 type) telephone that has inadvertently been placed on-hook  
during a Break-In conference to allow it to be re-rung by the attendant.  
Automatic Timed Recall  
Calls eligible for Flexible Call Forward No Answer treatment, and handled  
by Call Forward by Call Type, use the Call Forward No Answer timer in  
the Customer Data Block as the recall timer for attendant extended calls.  
Irrespective of the relative timeout for Automatic Timed Recall, the ringing  
continues as long as allowed by the Call Forward No Answer Timer.  
Call Forward All Calls  
If a call is unanswered at the forwarded DN, the telephone that has Call  
Forward All Calls activated is checked for the Class of Service and the call  
forward DN. If a chain of call forwarding occurs, the Class of Service and the  
forward DN for Call Forward No Answer are obtained from the first telephone  
in the chain. This applies when FDN and HNT have been specified for Call  
Forward No Answer at the customer level.  
Call Forward No Answer  
The sequence for forwarding unanswered calls is Call Forward All Calls,  
Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer, then Attendant Recall (if the call  
is attendant-extended). The same sequence is used when Call Forward by  
Call Type is active for the customer.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
122 Call Forward by Call Type  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
To implement CFCT for Second Level Call Forward No Answer eligible  
calls, the originating party’s call type is checked. If it is internal, the call is  
forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN). If it is external,  
the call is forwarded to the External Flexible DN (EFD).  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD  
The Call Forward status of each telephone can be saved as part of the data  
dump routine and reinstated following a SYSLOAD operation.  
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide  
If the Internal/External definition in LD 15 is set to YES, a call is treated as  
internal or external on a network wide basis.  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) takes precedence over Call Redirection  
by Time of Day.  
If Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward No  
Answer (CFNA) and Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD), unanswered  
internal calls receiving CFNA are routed to the Flexible CFNA DN, Hunt  
DN, Alternate Flexible CFNA DN or Alternate Hunt DNs. External calls are  
routed in the same manner.  
If CFNA is enabled with Hunting by Call Type and Call Redirection by Time  
of Day (CRTOD), unanswered internal calls are redirected to the Hunt DN  
or Alternate Hunt DN during the alternative time. External calls are routed  
in the same manner. The alternate time is defined on the called DN’s  
data block.  
Calling Party Name Display Denied  
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and  
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating  
telephone. This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of  
Service of the calling telephone and the forwarding/transferring telephone.  
The name of the forwarding/transferring telephone is not displayed on the  
calling and terminating telephone.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has  
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 123  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for  
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating  
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the  
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Call Transfer  
Network Call Transfer  
Calls modified by Call Transfer and Network Call Transfer receive CFCT  
treatment. If party A (telephone or trunk) calls party B, and B transfers to  
party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are obtained from party C.  
Call Waiting Redirection  
If Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward  
No Answer and Call Waiting Redirection, "no answer" internal calls receiving  
Call Waiting treatment are routed for CFNA treatment to the Flexible CFNA  
DN (FDN) or Hunt DN, and "no answer" external calls are routed for CFNA  
treatment to the External Flexible CFNA DN (EFD) or External Hunt DN  
(EHT).  
Conference  
Calls modified by Conference receive CFCT treatment for the conferenced  
telephone. If party A calls party B, and B tries to conference in party C,  
the forwarding DN and Class of Service are that of C. For example, Joan  
and Bob are in conversation, and they try to conference in Mack. Mack is  
not at his desk, so the attempted conference call is sent to the destination  
associated with Mack’s telephone.  
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)  
Eligibility of a DID call for Call Forward by Call Type is determined by  
allowing or denying the type of call in the Customer Data Block (FNAD  
prompt). The decision to treat a DID call as internal or external is made on  
a trunk route basis.  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement  
An external call is made to the PLDN. An idle group hunt list member  
station is rung but does not answer. If the member station has Call Forward  
No Answer (FNA) or Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of  
Service, then the call is transferred to the attendant after the number of ring  
cycles defined for Call Forward No Answer has been reached. If the call  
is an internal call, then the system searches for another idle group hunt  
list member.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
124 Call Forward by Call Type  
ISDN Semi Permanent Connections for Australia  
ISPC calls are handled according to the configuration of the route  
associated to the phantom trunk TN. This configuration is independent of  
the route associated to the real TN.  
Message Center  
Message Center uses the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) of the  
called telephone to route no answer calls. If CFCT is enabled, unanswered  
internal calls use the FDN to route a call. Unanswered external calls use the  
External Flexible DN (EFD) to route a call.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers  
Call redirection parameters like Call Forward No Answer are derived  
from the TN data block of the prime appearance of the called Multiple  
Appearance Directory Number. If there is more than one prime appearance,  
the parameters are selected from the last TN in the DN block.  
If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following  
information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection  
parameters for MADNs.  
The DN Block organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN  
with the highest numerical value (000-0-06-03) is placed at the beginning of  
the list. The list then continues in descending order with the lowest numerical  
TN (000-0-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change activity affects the  
organization of the DN list as described in the following paragraphs.  
•
If a telephone undergoes Service Change, its TN is moved to the  
beginning of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This  
telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another service  
change or a SYSLOAD.  
•
If a DN appears on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian  
1 proprietary telephones, the analog (500/2500 type) telephones are  
listed in numerical TN order at the top of the list. Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A  
Service Change to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone moves its TN to  
the beginning of the list. A Service Change to a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone moves its TN to the end of the list.  
•
A SYSLOAD restructures the list back to numerical TN order, with  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones at the top and Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be  
derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature implementation 125  
Trunk Barring  
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives  
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.  
Feature packaging  
Call Forward by Call Type is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer." (page 125)  
Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer.  
2. "LD 16 - Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward  
by Call Type." (page 126)  
Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward by Call Type.  
3. "LD 10 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 126)  
Enable Call Forward by Call Type for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
4. "LD 11 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 126)  
Enable Call Forward by Call Type for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
LD 15 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for a customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Call Redirection  
TYPE:  
CUST  
RDR  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System Media  
Gateway 1000B.  
- FNAD  
- FNAT  
(HNT)  
ATT  
NO  
Treatment for incoming DID calls.  
FDN  
(HNT)  
ATT  
NO  
Treatment for incoming external calls.  
FDN  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
126 Call Forward by Call Type  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
- FNAL  
(HNT)  
ATT  
NO  
Treatment for incoming internal calls.  
FDN  
- CFNA  
1-(4)-15  
Number of ringing cycles for CFNA.  
LD 16 - Define a trunk route as internal or external for Call Forward by Call Type.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ROUT  
CDB  
Customer Data Block.  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Route number  
0-511  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B  
Route class marked as (external) or internal.  
0-127  
RCLS  
(EXT) INT  
LD 10 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xxxx  
HUNT  
CLS  
Hunt DN for internal calls.  
(CFTD) CFTA  
(Deny) allow Call Forward by Call Type Telephone. Must have  
Hunting (HTA) and Call Forward No Answer (FNA) allowed.  
FTR  
EFD xxxx  
EHT xxxx  
FDN xxxx  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls. Hunt DN  
for external calls.  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls.  
LD 11 - Enable Call Forward by Call Type for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 127  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xxxx  
FDN  
CLS  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for internal calls.  
(CFTD) CFTA  
(Deny) allow Call Forward by Call Type Telephone. Must have  
Hunting (HTA) and Call Forward No Answer (FNA) allowed.  
xxxx  
EFD  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN for external calls.  
xxxx  
000  
HUNT  
Hunt DN for internal calls.  
Short Hunt for internal calls.  
xxxx  
000  
EHT  
LHK  
Hunt DN for external calls.  
Short Hunt for external calls.  
xx  
Last hunt key number for internal and external calls  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
128 Call Forward by Call Type  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
129  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 129)  
"Operating parameters" (page 130)  
"Feature interactions" (page 131)  
"Feature packaging" (page 132)  
"Feature implementation" (page 132)  
"Feature operation" (page 134)  
Feature description  
The existing Call Forward All Calls feature allows users to divert incoming  
calls from a telephone. The activation/deactivation of Call Forward All Calls  
must occur from the originating telephone. The Flexible Feature Codes  
and Remote Call Forward features allowed users the extended flexibility to  
activate/deactivate Call Forward All Calls from within the system, or outside  
the local network using Direct Inward System Access.  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation (CFDD) permits the call forwarded  
destination to deactivate the Call Forward All Calls functionality on the  
call forward station. As illustrated in Figure 1 "Call Forward Destination  
Deactivation Capability" (page 130), if telephone A is call forwarded to  
telephone B, then telephone B can deactivate call forward.  
This feature also allows a user to deactivate call forward by using Remote  
Call Forward deactivate Flexible Feature Code.  
In China, the Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature requires an  
octothorpe (#) as an end of dial delimiter when entering FFC’s to deactivate.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
130 Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
Figure 1  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation Capability  
Operating parameters  
The feature is applicable to all systems.  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation is only supported on Call Forward.  
This feature is not supported on Internal Call Forward.  
The existing Call Forward All Calls features allows users to program a  
call forward station within a system switch or Public Switching Telephone  
Network. The Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature is designed for  
stand alone application only. Therefore, both the destination and originator  
must belong to the same customer on the system.  
The call forwarded destination can deactivate the Call Forward All Calls  
functionality. However, the call forwarded destination cannot activate the  
call forward functionality from the originating telephone unless using the  
RCFA FFC.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature interactions 131  
CFDD can be activated on proprietary, ISDN Basic Rate Interface and  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones by dialing the CFDD FFC. 16-button  
Dual-Tone Multi-Frequency telephones can use one of the A,B,C or D  
function keys, configured as CFDD, or they can also dial CFDD FFC to  
use this feature.  
CFDD can be activated on Meridian proprietary, ISDN Basic Rae interface  
and Analog (500/2500 type) telephones by dialing the CFDD FFC. An  
analog 500-type telephone with a dial pulse Class of Service cannot dial  
an octothorpe (#) as the end of dial delimiter. To Activate CFDD, the call  
forwarded destination of an analog 500-type telephone has to dial the string  
of digits (as defined in LD 15) for the end of dial delimiter.  
An analog 500-type telephone with a dial pulse Class of Service cannot  
dial an octothorpe (#) as the end of dial delimiter. To activate CFDD on an  
analog 500-type telephone, the dial string digits (the STRG prompt in LD  
15) must be configured for the end of dial delimiter.  
If the string to indicate end of dialing (STRG prompt in LD 15) is defined,  
then analog (500/2500 type), 16-button DTMF, ISDN BRI and proprietary  
telephones must dial string digits as an end of dial delimiter to activate  
CFDD.  
In China, to activate CFDD a user must dial an octothorpe (#) as an end  
of dial delimiter. In this market, an analog 500-type telephone does not  
support this feature.  
An Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agent can only activate this feature  
from their personal Directory Number key. This feature cannot be activated  
on the ACD in calls key.  
If the call forward station has a Prime DN and Secondary DN defined,  
then the Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature only considers the  
Prime DN to forward a call. Therefore, during the feature operation, the call  
forwarded destination’s dialed DN of telephone A is compared with the call  
forward station’s Prime DN.  
Feature interactions  
Call Forward All Calls  
If a user’s call forwarded Directory Number (DN) is defined as DN of  
telephone B and telephone A dials the CFW FFC to activate call forward,  
then telephone A gets forwarded to telephone B. Telephone B can deactivate  
CFW on telephone A by dialing the CFDD FFC.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
132 Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
Call Forward, Remote  
Remote Call Forward (RCFW) and Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
(CFDD) provide the same functionality but are activated differently. CFDD  
does not require the call forward station’s control password to deactivate the  
call forward functionality on the call forward station.  
The call forwarded destination can use the Remote Call Forward  
deactivation FFC as well as CFDD to deactivate the Call Forward All Calls  
functionality on the call forward station.  
Meridian Mail  
Meridian Mail cannot deactivate the CFW functionality on the call forward  
station by using CFDD FFC.  
Feature packaging  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation (CFDD) requires Flexible Feature  
Code (FFC)/China Flexible Feature Code (CHFFC) package 139.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure Dial String in Customer Data Block." (page 132)  
Configure Dial String in Customer Data Block.  
2. "LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Call Forward Destination  
Deactivation." (page 133)  
Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Call Forward Destination  
Deactivation.  
3. "LD 18 - Configure Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC on  
16-button DTMF telephone." (page 134)  
Configure Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC on 16-button  
DTMF telephone.  
The Call Forward All Calls feature is configured in LD 10 for Analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones and LD 11 for proprietary telephones.  
LD 15 - Configure Dial String in Customer Data Block.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data block.  
Flexible Feature Code gate opener.  
Customer number  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FFC  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 133  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
0-31  
Range for Small System Media  
Gateway 1000B.  
...  
- FFCS  
- - STRL  
- - STRG  
YES  
1-3  
Change end of dialing digits.  
Number of digits to indicate end of dialing.  
xxx  
String to indicate end of dialing. Outpulsing of Asterisk (*) and  
Octothorpe (#) (OPAO) package 104 is required to out-pulse  
(*) and (#) in the string.  
The asterisk (*) used to introduce a pause while out-pulsing  
digits is supported on analog and DTI trunks, but not supported  
on ISDN trunks. On ISDN trunks, if the OPAO feature is  
enabled, the asterisk (*) is outpulsed as a called party digit.  
LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Call Forward Destination Deactivation.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
TYPE  
CUST  
FFCT  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Codes data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
xx  
(NO) YES  
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.  
YES = confirmation tone is required.  
CODE  
DEAF  
xxxx  
Deactivate Feature.  
- DEAF  
CODE  
Enter Flexible Feature Code on a telephone.  
Call Forward All Calls Activate Code.  
Enter Flexible Feature Code to activate.  
Call Forward All Calls Deactivation Code.  
Enter Flexible Feature Code to deactivate.  
Call Forward All Calls Verify Code.  
Enter Flexible Feature Code to verify.  
Call Forward All Calls Destination Deactivation Code.  
Enter Flexible Feature Code.  
CFWA  
xxxx  
- CFWA  
CODE  
CFWD  
xxxx  
- CFWD  
CODE  
CFWV  
xxxx  
- CFWV  
CODE  
CFDD  
xxxx  
- CFDD  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
134 Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
LD 18 - Configure Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC on 16-button DTMF telephone.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW CHG  
ABCD  
Description  
Add, or Change 16-button data block.  
16-button data block.  
TYPE  
TBNO  
DFLT  
PRED  
1-254  
Number of ABCD Table to be added or changed.  
Number of default function table.  
1-254  
YES  
Function table is changed for pre-dial.  
NO = default mnemonics are used.  
- A  
- B  
...  
CFDD  
CFWA  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC assignment of key.  
Call Forward All Call Activation FFC assignment of key.  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation FFC function can be assigned to any A, B, C or D key of the  
16-button DTMF telephone.  
ISDN BRI telephones can deactivate the Call Forward All Call feature. To  
set up the digital subscriber loop and terminal service profile for a BRI  
telephone refer to Overlay 27.  
Feature operation  
To enable the Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature, complete the  
following:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Go off-hook on the "call forward to" Directory Number of the call  
forwarded telephone and listen for dial tone.  
Dial the CFDD FFC followed by DN of the call forward originator  
and end of dial delimiter.  
Response provided.  
—End—  
The following responses are provided to the user of the call forwarded  
destination.  
1. If originator’s call forward DN is the same as active DN of destination  
then the call forward feature on originator is deactivated. If the  
confirmation tone in LD 57 is enabled, then a confirmation tone or  
speech is provided to the destination telephone. Otherwise, silence  
is provided.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 135  
2. If the originator’s call forward DN does not match the active DN of  
the destination, then an overflow tone is provided to the destination  
telephone.  
3. If the Call Forward All Calls functionality on the originator telephone is  
already deactivated, then an overflow tone is provided to the destination  
telephone.  
4. If the originator does not have call forward all calls defined, then an  
overflow tone is provided to the destination telephone.  
16-Button DTMF telephone  
To activate CFDD on this telephone, the user must press one of the ABCD  
function keys that is defined as CFDD FFC, followed by DN of call forward  
telephone and end of dial delimiter.  
Deactivating Multiple Appearance DN  
The Call Forward Destination Deactivation feature operation remains the  
same. However, if the call forward station is a Multiple Appearance DN  
(MADN) telephone, then the station’s Prime DN is considered to find the  
Call Forward All Calls functionality for deactivation.  
If more than one MADN call forward stations have Call Forward All Calls  
defined and the call forward DN on one or more MADN call forward stations  
matches the active DN of telephone B, then the call forward functionality on  
one or more MADN call forward stations is deactivated.  
Any one of MADN call forwarded destination station is allowed to deactivate  
the call forward function on the call forward station by using the CFDD FFC.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
136 Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
137  
Call Forward External Deny  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 137)  
"Operating parameters" (page 138)  
"Feature interactions" (page 138)  
"Feature packaging" (page 139)  
"Feature implementation" (page 139)  
"Feature operation" (page 140)  
Feature description  
This enhancement provides the option to restrict, on a per-telephone basis,  
the DN that can be programmed for Call Forward All Calls to internal DNs  
only. Internal DNs are defined as:  
•
•
•
•
DNs that terminate on an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
DNs that terminate on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
DNs that terminate on a data terminal defined in LD 10 or LD 11  
Attendant DNs or Centralized Attendant Service (CAS) local attendant  
DNs  
•
•
Listed DNs (LDNs)  
Message Center DNs as defined in LD 23  
External DNs include (but are not limited to) trunk access codes,  
Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) steering codes, Basic and Network  
Alternate Route Selection (BARS/NARS) access codes, Electronic Switched  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
138 Call Forward External Deny  
Network (ESN) Location Codes, non-message center Automatic Call  
Distribution (ACD) numbers, Call Park numbers, and Direct Inward Services  
Access numbers.  
When Call Forward External Deny is enabled for a telephone:  
•
A user trying to forward calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
to an external DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is not call  
forwarded.  
•
A user trying to forward calls from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
to an external DN receives overflow tone and the lamp associated with  
the Call Forward key of the telephone flashes. The telephone is not  
call forwarded.  
•
•
A user trying to forward calls from a Meridian digital or a display  
telephone to an external DN receives overflow tone. The telephone is  
not call forwarded and the following message is displayed on M2317  
telephones:  
— Release and try again  
A user trying to forward calls from a data module to an external DN does  
not receive overflow tone. Calls are not forwarded and the following  
message is displayed on M2317 telephones:  
— Invalid data forward number  
Operating parameters  
External DNs cannot be used with Call Forward All Calls if Call Forward  
External Deny is enabled for the telephone.  
Both ESN access codes and CDP steering codes are considered external  
DNs, and cannot be used as a Call Forward All Calls DN if Call Forward  
External is denied for the telephone.  
The number of digits specified in LD 10 or LD 11 for the Call Forward DN  
must be equal to or greater than the number of digits of any other internal  
DN.  
Attendant Administration cannot change Call Forward External Deny Class  
of Service.  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
If Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled, Call Forward to an ACD  
DN is allowed only if the ACD DN is a message center.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature implementation 139  
Call Forward All Calls  
This feature overrides other Call Forward All Calls parameters. For example,  
if Call Forward to Trunk Access Code (CFTA) is allowed for the customer,  
but Call Forward External Deny (CFXD) is enabled for the telephone, CFXD  
takes precedence and call forwarding to a trunk access code is denied.  
Calling Party Privacy  
If an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the outgoing trunk route on the  
tandem node also has CCP provisioned.  
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing  
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the  
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (that is,  
at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating telephone. In  
this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN  
(such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Network Call Forward  
Call Forward External Deny restricts a telephone from being forwarded  
unconditionally to a number that is not on the home switch. Therefore, Call  
Forward External Deny and the Integrated Services Digital Network Primary  
Rate Interface (ISDN PRI) feature Network Call Forward are mutually  
exclusive.  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.  
Trunk Barring  
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives  
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones." (page 140)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
140 Call Forward External Deny  
Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones.  
2. "LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones." (page 140)  
Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones.  
LD 10 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
CFXA  
Allow Call Forward to an external DN CFXD = Deny Call  
Forward to an external DN (default).  
LD 11 - Allow/deny Call Forward External Deny for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
CFXA  
Allow Call Forward to an external DN.  
CFXD = Deny Call Forward to an external DN (default).  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
141  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 141)  
"Operating parameters" (page 143)  
"Feature interactions" (page 143)  
"Feature packaging" (page 147)  
"Feature implementation" (page 147)  
"Feature operation" (page 149)  
Feature description  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer enhances Flexible Call Forward  
No Answer by forwarding unanswered calls twice. The following example  
best illustrates this enhancement.  
Party A places a call to extension 5000, which does not answer. Extension  
5000 has Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) allowed and extension 6000  
defined as its CFNA number. The call forwards to extension 6000. This is  
the first level CFNA.  
Extension 6000 also does not answer the call. This telephone has a Call  
Forward No Answer and Second Level Call Forward No Answer allowed  
Class of Service (FNA and SFA). As it has a CFNA number of 7000,  
it forwards there. This is the second level of Call Forward No Answer.  
Note that the forwarding DN is always obtained from the currently ringing  
telephone.  
If extension 7000 does not answer the call, one of two things may occur:  
•
If the original call is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) or internal call, the  
forwarded call continues to ring until answered or the calling party  
disconnects.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
142 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
•
If the original call is extended by the attendant console, Attendant Recall  
occurs.  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the same customer-level timer  
as Flexible Call Forward No Answer to determine the number of rings before  
forwarding a call.  
Telephones with a message waiting allowed (MWA) Class of Service  
should have the Message Center DN defined as their FDN. Calls to these  
telephones forward to the Message Center and are not eligible for Second  
Level Call Forward No Answer.  
Call Forward No Answer Second Level for Message Waiting Allowed  
Telephones, enables an SFA Class of Service to be defined on telephones  
with a Message Waiting Allowed (MWA) Class of Service. Thus, a message  
waiting indication can be activated at the originally dialed DN for Second  
Level CFNA calls terminating at a message center.  
Requirements at the dialed DN for first-level CFNA are as follows:  
•
Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer  
level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal).  
•
•
The telephone has an FNA Class of Service.  
The terminating call has rung for the number of rings specified for CFNA  
or DFNA in the Customer Data Block (LD 15).  
•
The forwarding DN (Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN [FDN],  
Coordinated Dialing Plan DN [CDP DN], External Flexible DN [EFD],  
Hunting [HNT], or External Hunt [EHT]) must be distinct from the ringing  
DN and be a valid number within the system.  
Requirements at the originally called telephone DN for Second Level Call  
Forward No Answer are as follows:  
•
Flexible Call Forward No Answer or Hunting is allowed at the customer  
level for the incoming call type (DID, non-DID, or internal).  
•
•
The telephone has SFA and FNA Class of Service.  
Call Forward No Answer has occurred only once prior to ringing this  
telephone.  
•
The forwarding DN (FDN, EFD, Hunt, or EHT) must be distinct from the  
ringing DN and must be a valid number within the system.  
The order of precedence for activation of first level Call Forward No Answer  
is as follows:  
•
•
Call Forward All Calls  
Message Waiting  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature interactions 143  
•
•
Call Forward No Answer, and  
Attendant Recall.  
The order of precedence for activation of Second Level Call Forward No  
Answer is as follows:  
•
•
•
Call Forward All Calls  
Second Call Forward No Answer (CFNA calls only)  
Attendant Recall  
Operating parameters  
A maximum of two levels of Call Forward No Answer are allowed for an  
unanswered call.  
Calls directed to an attendant or Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Message  
Center cannot have Second Level Call Forward No Answer.  
Attendant Administration cannot change the SFA/SFD Class of Service.  
Error messages are generated if changes made to the Forward No Answer  
or Hunt Class of Service conflict with the SFA/SFD Class of Service.  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Timed Reminders  
When Call Forward No Answer is activated on a telephone, the slow answer  
timer begins only after the call reaches its final destination.  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls  
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does not  
affect how these features operate; however, it does provide information  
about the answering party in the CDR ID field if incoming calls have been  
redirected by any one of these features.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer uses the final (ringing) telephone in  
the chain to obtain Class of Service and forwarding DN information.  
First level treatment operates in the following manner. Suppose that Party A  
calls Party B, and Party B has programmed Call Forward All Calls to Party  
C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a No Answer call at Party C  
to the forwarding directory number associated with Party B, the dialed DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
144 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Call Forward by Call Type  
To implement Call Forward by Call Type for Second Level Call Forward No  
Answer eligible calls, the originating party’s call type is checked. If it is  
internal, the call is forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN  
(FDN). If it is external, the call is forwarded to the External Flexible DN  
(EFD).  
Call Forward No Answer  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer applies to the Hunt and Flexible Call  
Forward No Answer options. This is implemented by defining the FNAD,  
FNAT, or FNAL prompts in LD 15 as FDN or HNT. If the attendant option is  
defined, an unanswered call goes to the attendant queue and is not eligible  
for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Existing Second Level CFNA allows unanswered calls to receive Call  
Forward No Answer treatment twice. Call Redirection by Time of Day  
(CRTOD) parameters are obtained from the last rung Directory Number. A  
maximum of two levels of CFNA is allowed for an unanswered call.  
Call Waiting Redirection  
The existing Second Level CFNA treatment is applicable to Call Waiting  
calls redirected by CFNA (first level) with the Call Waiting Redirection  
feature which are still not answered at the last rung DN.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has  
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.  
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing  
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the  
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for  
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating  
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the  
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing  
The Directory Number Delayed Ringer (DNDR) feature allows the SCN/MCN  
(non ringing keys) to actually ring after a definable period of time (DNDR  
prompt in LD 11). If the time before CFNA takes effect is less than the  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 145  
DNDR time for a particular telephone, CFNA will forward this call before any  
SCN/MCN keys can ring on this telephone. Note that CFNA is defined in  
the number of rings and DNDR is defined in seconds.  
If the Forward DN telephone is busy or invalid when the call is forwarded,  
the call will return to the originally called telephone. However, the DNDR  
delay timer is reapplied to the called telephone if DNDR is defined.  
If a call is forwarded, as per existing operation, this call is treated as a  
new incoming call to the forward DN. For example, if the forward DN has  
a DNDR value defined, a new timer isgin timing according to the forward  
DN’s DNDR delay.  
Distinctive/New Distinctive Ringing  
The ringing cadence for all telephones in a chain of call redirections remains  
the same as for the original DN called.  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
If Second Level Call Forward No Answer is disabled, Flexible Call Forward  
No Answer operates as described.  
Group Hunt  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer will not be applied to calls that are  
Group Hunting.  
Hunting  
A forwarded call may be modified by Hunting if the Call Forward No Answer  
DN is busy. This call is eligible for Second Level Call Forward No Answer if  
the SFA Class of Service is allowed and a Call Forward No Answer DN has  
been defined for the last rung DN.  
If Group Hunting is active, Second Level CFNA is not applied.  
Message Centers  
There are three types of Message Centers:  
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
Calls forwarded to an ACD Message Center are queued, so that no  
CFNA timeout occurs.  
Attendant  
Calls forwarded to an Attendant Message Center are queued, so no  
CFNA timeout occurs.  
DN  
An indirect call forwarded to a DN Message Center and not answered by  
an operator is forwarded to a second level if SFA for DN-MC.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
146 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
It is recommended that DN Message Center stations be denied CFNA,  
Call Forward Busy (CFB), Call Forwarding (CFW), and Call Hunting  
(HUNT).  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers  
Call redirection parameters like Hunt and Call Forward No Answer are  
derived from the TN data block (LD 20 TNB) of the prime appearance of the  
called Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN). If there is more than  
one prime appearance, the parameters are selected from the last TN in the  
DN block for the DN (LD 22 DNB).  
If more than one prime appearance of a MADN exists, the following  
information must be considered prior to configuring call redirection  
parameters for MADNs.  
The DN Block organizes MADN information in numerical TN order. The TN  
with the highest numerical value (000-0-06-03) is placed at the beginning of  
the list. The list then continues in descending order with the lowest numerical  
TN (000-0-03-01) at the end of the list. Service change activity affects the  
organization of the DN list as described in the following paragraphs:  
•
If a telephone undergoes Service Change, its TN is moved to the  
beginning of the DN list, irrespective of the numerical value. This  
telephone remains at the beginning of the list until another Service  
Change or a SYSLOAD.  
•
If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary  
DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as described  
in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance of a DN  
exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived from the TN of  
the prime appearance telephone, even though it may not be at the end  
of the list. A prime appearance is always the first TN used when the  
system looks for call redirection instructions.  
•
•
If a DN appears on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian  
1 proprietary telephones, the analog (500/2500 type) telephones are  
listed in numerical TN order at the top of the list. Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A  
service change to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone moves its TN to  
the beginning of the list. A Service Change to a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone moves its TN to the end of the list.  
A SYSLOAD restructures the list with analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
at the top and Meridian 1 proprietary telephones at the bottom. Call  
redirection parameters continue to be derived as described in the  
preceding paragraphs.  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature implementation 147  
Slow Answer Recall  
When a Call Forward No Answer call is unanswered at a telephone eligible  
for Second Level Call Forward No Answer, and the call was extended by an  
attendant, Second Level Call Forward No Answer takes precedence over  
Slow Answer Recall. If the telephone has a Second Level Call Forward No  
Answer Denied Class of Service, the system performs Slow Answer Recall  
for the unanswered call.  
Total Redirection Count  
If a call has attempted Call Forward No Answer and was extended by the  
attendant, the call will not be intercepted when the Total Redirection Count  
limit has been exceeded. The call will continue to ring the telephone until  
recalled to the attendant.  
If Overflow (OVF), Busy (BSY), or Source (SRCx) is configured as Intercept  
Treatments, a call attempting Call Forward No Answer, that exceeds the  
Total Redirection Count limit, will not be intercepted. Further redirections  
are prohibited and the call continues to ring the current telephone.  
Trunk Barring  
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives  
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Assign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting  
indication." (page 148)  
Assign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting indication.  
2. "LD 10 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 148)  
Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for Meridian  
1 proprietary telephones." (page 148)  
Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
148 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
LD 15 - Assign Message Center to allow the Message Waiting indication.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
(Exclude) include Message Center.  
0-31  
- OPT  
(MCX) MCI  
LD 10 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
FTR  
(FND) FNA  
(MWD) MWA  
(SFD) SFA  
(Deny) allow Forward No Answer.  
(Deny) allow Message Waiting.  
(Deny) allow second level CFNA  
SFA can be implemented with an MWA Class of Service.  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN.  
FDN xxxx...x  
LD 11 - Add/change Second Level Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 149  
Prompt  
FDN  
Response  
Description  
xxx...x  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN.  
CLS  
(FND) FNA  
(MWD) MWA  
(SFD) SFA  
(Deny) allow Forward No Answer.  
(Deny) allow Message Waiting.  
(Deny) allow) Second Level CFNA  
SFA can be implemented with an MWA Class of Service.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
150 Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
151  
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call  
Forward No Answer  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 151)  
"Operating parameters" (page 152)  
"Feature interactions" (page 153)  
"Feature packaging" (page 161)  
"Feature implementation" (page 161)  
"Feature operation" (page 164)  
Feature description  
Call Forward No Answer automatically forwards unanswered calls to another  
DN. The customer can specify the number of rings (1 to 15) before the  
system invokes Call Forward No Answer. The default is four rings.  
Four options are available at the customer level for Call Forward No Answer:  
•
•
•
•
deny for all telephones  
route all unanswered calls to the attendant  
route all unanswered calls to the Hunt number defined for the telephone  
route all unanswered calls to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN  
defined for the telephone  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer allows the customer to specify, on a  
per-telephone basis, where an unanswered call should be routed. This is  
independent of the Hunt number assigned to the telephone. This capability  
is implemented on a per-customer basis and can be specified for Direct  
Inward Dialing (DID) and non-DID call types. When activated, a call to a  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
152 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
telephone that does not answer within the specified number of ring cycles  
is forwarded to the Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) associated  
with that telephone.  
The Flexible Call Forward No Answer operation applies only to individual  
DN calls of analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and not to Automatic Call  
Distribution (ACD) calls.  
A call is forwarded under the following conditions:  
•
The Class of Service of the dialed telephone is Forward No Answer  
allowed.  
•
•
•
Flexible Call Forward No Answer is enabled at the customer level.  
The call has rung the specified number of times.  
The Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) is valid and has been assigned.  
System or telephone features such as Hunting and Call Forward All Calls  
may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone that is different from  
the dialed DN. In these cases, if the call is eligible for Flexible Call Forward  
No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for the dialed DN, not the  
ringing DN.  
When you use Multiple Appearance DNs (MADNs), call redirection is  
determined based on the Terminal Number (TN) order in your DN block. To  
determine the TN order, print the DN block from LD 20 or LD 22 (TYPE  
= DNB). When a call comes in to a MADN, the system begins a search  
to determine how the call is handled. Using the TN list you printed, the  
system performs the following search, beginning at the bottom of the TN  
list and working up.  
Step Action  
1
2
Search for the first Prime DN appearance of the MADN with Call  
Forward All Calls activated.  
If there are no Prime DN appearances, the TN at the bottom of the  
list controls call redirection.  
The search does not necessarily determine the highest or lowest  
numerical TN.  
—End—  
Operating parameters  
Calls are forwarded one step only. For Call Forward No Answer  
enhancements, refer to the Call Forward, Second Level module.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 153  
Incoming calls on private lines with the Restricted Call Modification option  
enabled are not forwarded.  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN) can be assigned to telephones  
with Message Waiting Allowed Class of Service. This is irrespective of the  
telephone’s Class of Service and how forward no answer is specified in the  
Customer Data Block. Message Center always uses the FDN associated  
with the telephone to route unanswered calls.  
Feature interactions  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
Calls charged with Advice of Charge that are either transferred, extended  
or redirected to another telephone using Call Forward No Answer are  
charged against the last telephone that answers the call and the controlling  
telephone releases.  
Attendant Administration  
Attendant Administration can assign and change a Flexible Call Forward No  
Answer DN with the function key on the attendant console.  
Attendant Alternative Answering  
When Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) DN does not answer, the  
call can be forwarded by CFNA to the DN defined as the CFNA DN for the  
originally dialed DN. If the originally dialed DN is the attendant, the call is  
forwarded to the CFNA DN defined for the AAA DN.  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override the Call Forward No  
Answer feature. If the blocked DN of the telephone has the Call Forward No  
Answer feature active when the SACP key is pressed to ring the DN, the  
DN will ring until answered or disconnected. No Call Forward No Answer is  
done for the Attendant Blocking of DN call.  
Attendant Break-In to Inquiry Calls  
The operation of Call Forward No Answer is overridden on a analog  
(500/2500 type) telephone that has inadvertently been placed on-hook  
during a Break-In conference to allow it to be re-rung by the attendant.  
If the controlling party goes on hook in a Break-In conference, and is being  
re-rung by the attendant, the ringing takes precedence over Call Forward  
No Answer that may be applied to the telephone.  
Attendant Overflow Position  
A call rerouted through Attendant Overflow Position will Call Forward to  
the forwarding DN only if it is the Prime DN or a single appearance DN on  
that telephone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
154 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
Automatic Call Distribution  
The Flexible Call Forward No Answer operation does not apply to Automatic  
Call Distribution (ACD) calls.  
Automatic Set Relocation  
Calls will not forward no answer to a telephone that is being relocated  
Automatic Timed Recall  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer timing takes precedence over Automatic  
Timed Recall timing. Irrespective of the relative timeout intervals for each  
feature, ringing continues as long as allowed by Call Forward No Answer.  
Automatic Timed Reminders  
When Call Forward No Answer is activated on a telephone, the slow answer  
timer begins only after the call reaches its final destination.  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls  
The Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls feature does  
not affect how the Call Forward No Answer feature operates; however, it  
does provide information about the answering party in the CDR ID field if  
incoming calls have been redirected by any one of these features.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward All Calls may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone  
that is different from the dialed DN. In this case, if the call is eligible for  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for  
the dialed DN, not the ringing DN.  
Suppose that party A calls party B, and party B has programmed Call  
Forward All Calls to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer will forward a  
No Answer call at party C to the FDN associated with party B, the dialed DN.  
After the call is forwarded, the MARP TN for the dialed DN controls the call  
redirection for Flexible Call Forward No Answer.  
Call Forward by Call Type  
The sequence for forwarding unanswered calls is Call Forward All Calls,  
Message Waiting, Call Forward No Answer, then Attendant Recall (if the call  
is attendant-extended). The same sequence is used when Call Forward by  
Call Type is active for the customer.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Call Forward No Answer is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override  
Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature interactions 155  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer applies to the Hunt and Flexible Call  
Forward No Answer options. This is implemented by defining the FNAD,  
FNAT, or FNAL prompts in LD 15 as FDN or HNT. If the attendant option is  
defined, an unanswered call goes to the attendant queue and is not eligible  
for Second Level Call Forward No Answer.  
Call Page Network Wide  
Call Page Network Wide (PAGENET) does not block a telephone from being  
programmed to Call Forward No Answer to an external Paging trunk. At  
call termination time, calls that are forwarded to an external PAGENET  
uncontrolled trunk are not blocked. However, calls forwarded to an external  
PAGENET controlled trunk are given access denied intercept treatment  
at the Paging node.  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Call redirection parameters for Call Forward No Answer are obtained from  
the originally dialed Directory Number. When Call Redirection by Time of  
Day (CRTOD) is activated, unanswered calls given CRTOD treatment are  
forwarded with CFNA according to the time of day. No changes are made to  
the existing CFNA feature.  
Call Waiting  
If a call to a telephone gets CFNA treatment to another telephone that is  
busy, Call Waiting and Camp-On do not apply. The call will attempt to  
terminate on the original DN again.  
Call Waiting Redirection  
Per existing Call Forward No Answer feature operation, the call redirection  
parameters for CFNA are obtained from the originally dialed DN for  
redirected calls.  
Existing Network CFNA treatment is applied to calls receiving Call Waiting  
treatment on telephones with CFNA and the Call Waiting Redirection feature  
enabled if the Call Waiting call is not answered before the expiration of the  
CFNA timer and the CFNA DN is on another node.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has  
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding telephone (for  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
156 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
example, at the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating  
telephone. In this case, the forwarding station must include the CPP in the  
forwarding DN (such as *67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Camp-On  
When the Call Forward No Answer timer expires for a ringing camped-on  
call, the call is given Attendant Recall treatment instead of Call Forward  
No Answer treatment.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,  
idle DN treatment is given.  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.  
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back  
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).  
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.  
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the  
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the  
forwarding or hunting call is answered.  
Dial Access to Group Calls  
Call Forward No Answer cannot be applied to a Group Call.  
Departmental Listed Directory Number  
Call Forward No Answer to the attendant operates like Call Forward to 0,  
and are routed to any idle attendant console in the customer group.  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing  
The Directory Number Delayed Ringing (DNDR) feature allows the  
SCN/MCN (non ringing keys) to actually ring after a definable period of time  
(DNDR prompt in LD 11). If the time before CFNA takes effect is less than  
the DNDR time for a particular telephone, CFNA will forward this call before  
any SCN/MCN keys can ring on this telephone. Note that CFNA is defined  
in the number of rings and DNDR is defined in seconds.  
If the Forward DN telephone is busy or invalid when the call is forwarded,  
the call will return to the originally called telephone. However, the DNDR  
delay timer is reapplied to the called telephone if DNDR is defined.  
If a call is forwarded, as per existing operation, this call is treated as a  
new incoming call to the forward DN. For example, if the forward DN has  
a DNDR value defined, a new timer isgin timing according to the forward  
DN’s DNDR delay.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 157  
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer  
Call Forward No Answer takes precedence over the Message Center  
feature.  
Electronic Lock Network Wide/Electronic Lock on Private Lines  
For Call Forwarding, the COS and NCOS used for the forwarding call can be  
taken from either the forwarding telephone or from the forwarded telephone,  
depending on the option defined in the Customer Data Block.  
For example, telephone B call forwards all calls to an external trunk.  
Telephone A calls telephone B. If OPT = CFF in LD 15 (Call Forward  
forwarded to party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone B  
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk. If OPT = CFO (Call Forward  
originating party’s COS and NCOS), the COS and NCOS of telephone A  
are used for forwarding the call to the trunk.  
Group Call  
Group Call cannot be applied to Call Forward No Answer.  
Group Hunt  
Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) can optionally be configured to use a Pilot  
DN. This option is available when the HUNT DN or the FDN is defined as  
a Pilot DN.  
If an idle station attempted for termination has CFNA defined, then the  
station is rung. If the station does not answer within the customer specified  
number of ring cycles, then group hunting will continue with the next DN  
in the group. The calling party will continue to hear ring back tone until  
one of the termination conditions mentioned in the "Group Hunt" feature  
description (the last condition is not applicable in this case) is met, or until  
they releases the call.  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement  
An external call is made to the PLDN. An idle group hunt list member  
station is rung but does not answer. If the member station has Call Forward  
No Answer (FNA) or Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of  
Service, then the call is transferred to the attendant after the number of ring  
cycles defined for Call Forward No Answer has been reached. If the call  
is an internal call, then the system searches for another idle group hunt  
list member.  
Hot Line  
Any Hot Line telephone can be assigned Call Forward No Answer but it  
applies only to the two-way Hot Line capability.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
158 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
Hunting  
Hunting may result in the presentation of a call to a telephone that is  
different from the dialed DN. In this case, if the call is eligible for Flexible  
Call Forward No Answer, it is forwarded to the DN specified for the dialed  
DN, not the ringing DN.  
Suppose that party A calls to busy party B, and party B has programmed  
Hunting to party C. Flexible Call Forward No Answer forwards a No Answer  
call at party C to the FDN associated with party B, the dialed DN.  
After the call is forwarded, the MARP TN for the dialed DN controls the call  
redirection for Flexible Call Forward No Answer.  
ICP Network Screen Activation, Flexible DN, Meridian Mail Interactions  
When a call redirected by Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,  
Call Forward Busy, or Hunt terminates on an Intercept Computer (ICP)  
position, a redirected message identification "50" is sent to the ICP  
computer, when the call is answered.  
Incoming Call Indicator Enhancement  
When a DID call to a station that is unrestricted from receiving DID calls  
(UDI Class of Service) is forwarded to a UDI station due to Call Forward No  
Answer, the call is not RDI-intercepted to the attendant. The dialed party  
continues to ring. If the call has been forwarded to the attendant, the Call  
Forward No Answer ICI lights up, and not the RDI-intercept ICI.  
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide  
A Listed Directory Number (LDN) that is assigned to an Incoming Call  
Indicator (ICI) has a higher priority than a CFNA ICI. When a call is  
forwarded to an LDN through Flexible DN, the call is presented on an LDN  
ICI.  
Meridian Mail Operator Revert  
The Called Party ID can be passed along from the ACD Message Center  
when Operator Revert is activated. The attendant can now activate the  
Message Waiting key for the Called Party while active on the redirected call  
by pressing the Message Indicator key.  
For example, Party A calls Party B, which Call Forward No Answers to  
Meridian Mail. Party A dials 0 and is transferred to a message center with  
"live" agents. The agent receiving the call sees information for Party B along  
with the information for Party A, the calling party.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 159  
Multi-Party Operations  
For Call Transfer with Ring No Answer (RGNA) if the user has selected an  
option other than Standard, the optional treatment has priority over the  
CFNA option selected in the LD 15. If the user has chosen the standard  
option for RGNA, the call is treated as a normal CFNA call, and handled  
according to the options selected for CFNA in LD 15. Once the call is routed  
to a Night DN during recovery of a failed operation and the Night DN does  
not answer, the call is treated according to the NFNA and FDN options  
chosen for the Night DN. The Night DN can use flexible CFNA DN in two  
levels. MPO misoperation does not change the operation of the DNFD timer  
if one has been configured in LD 15.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime  
The MARP TN always controls the call redirection for Call Forward No  
Answer.  
•
•
•
If a DN is assigned as a Prime DN on a telephone and as a secondary  
DN on one or more telephones, the DN list is still organized as described  
in the preceding paragraphs. If only one prime appearance of a DN  
exists, however, call redirection parameters are derived from the TN of  
the prime appearance telephone, even though it may not be at the end  
of the list. A prime appearance is always the first TN used when the  
system looks for call redirection instructions.  
If a DN appears on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian  
1 proprietary telephones, the analog (500/2500 type) telephones are  
listed in numerical TN order at the top of the list. Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones are listed in numerical TN order at the bottom of the list. A  
service change to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone moves its TN to  
the beginning of the list. A service change to a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone moves its TN to the end of the list.  
A SYSLOAD restructures the list back to numerical TN order with  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones at the top and Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones at the bottom. Call redirection parameters continue to be  
derived as described in the preceding paragraphs.  
Network Intercom  
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,  
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call  
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the  
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.  
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number  
A Listed Directory Number (LDN) ICI has a higher priority than a Call  
Forward No Answer ICI. When a call is forwarded to an LDN through  
Flexible DN, the call is presented on an LDN ICI.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
160 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
Night Service enhancements  
Any call which has been presented to the Attendant Overflow Position  
cannot be removed from the console and re-queued by pressing the Make  
Set Busy (MSB) key. The call will only be removed if the Attendant Forward  
No Answer feature is active, and the Attendant Forward No Answer Timer  
has timed out. In this case, the call is re-queued and the Attendant Overflow  
Position is idled.  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
Metered calls transferred or extended from one station to another using the  
Call Forward No Answer are charged against the last station at which the  
call is answered as the controlling station releases. The last party to forward  
a call onto a metered Periodic Pulse Metering trunk is charged.  
Recall to Same Attendant  
If the attendant does not answer a call and the Attendant Forward No  
Answer feature is equipped, the console is forced into the Position Busy  
state and the call routed to the first available idle attendant.  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX) is  
activated if the call is forwarded to an outgoing external CO trunk with the  
RANX feature active.  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Call Forward No Answer takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.  
Ring Again on No Answer  
If an unanswered call is forwarded to another station by Call Forward No  
Answer, Ring Again on No Answer is applied to the originally dialed station.  
Slow Answer Recall for Transferred External Trunks  
If the ringing station to which the call has been transferred has Call Forward  
No Answer active, the call is transferred to the call forward DN after the  
specified number of ring cycles.  
Total Redirection Count  
If a call has attempted Call Forward No Answer and was extended by the  
attendant, the call will not be intercepted when the Total Redirection Count  
limit has been exceeded. The call will continue to ring the telephone until  
recalled to the attendant.  
If Overflow (OVF), Busy (BSY), or Source (SRCx) is configured as Intercept  
Treatments, a call attempting Call Forward No Answer, that exceeds the  
Total Redirection Count limit, will not be intercepted. Further redirections  
are prohibited and the call continues to ring the current telephone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature implementation 161  
Trunk Barring  
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives  
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer." (page 161)  
Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.  
2. "LD 10 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 162)  
Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones." (page 163)  
Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones.  
4. "LD 10 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 163)  
Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on analog (500/2500  
type) telephones.  
5. "LD 11 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on Meridian  
1 proprietary telephones." (page 163)  
Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
LD 15 - Define Call Forward No Answer for a customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
ATT_DATA  
Attendant console options  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
162 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
- ICI  
xx CFN  
Attendant Incoming Call Indicator for Call Forward No Answer,  
where:  
xx = key number (00-19).  
TYPE  
RDR  
- FNAD  
(HNT)  
ATT  
FDN  
NO  
Forward No Answer DID calls to the Hunt number.  
Forward No Answer DID calls to the attendant.  
Forward No Answer DID calls to the Flexible CFNA DN.  
No Answer DID calls are not forwarded.  
- FNAT  
- FNAL  
(HNT)  
ATT  
FDN  
NO  
Forward No Answer external calls to the Hunt number.  
Forward No Answer external calls to the attendant.  
Forward No Answer external calls to the Flexible CFNA DN.  
No answer external calls are not forwarded.  
(HNT)  
ATT  
FDN  
NO  
Forward No Answer local calls to the Hunt number.  
Forward No Answer local calls to the attendant.  
Forward No Answer local calls to the Flexible CFNA DN.  
No Answer local calls are not forwarded.  
- CFNA  
- CFN0  
1-(4)-15  
Number of ringing cycles before No Answer calls are forwarded  
(default is 4).  
1-(4)-15  
Number of normal rings for CFNA, Option 0.  
CFNA has three ringing cycle options. Refer to the User  
Selectable Call Redirection feature in this technical document  
for more information.  
- CFN1  
- CFN2  
1-(4)-15  
1-(4)-15  
Number of normal rings for CFNA, Option 1.  
Number of normal rings for CFNA, Option 2.  
LD 10 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
FTR  
(FND) FNA  
(Deny) allow Call Forward No Answer.  
FDN xxxx...x  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN Expansion  
package is equipped, the DN can have up to 13 digits).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature implementation 163  
LD 11 - Add/change Flexible Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xxx...x  
(FND) FNA  
FDN  
CLS  
Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (if the DN Expansion  
package is equipped, the DN can have up to seven digits).  
(Deny) allow Call Forward No Answer.  
LD 10 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xxxx  
HUNT  
CLS  
Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the DN  
Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to 10  
digits).  
(FND) FNA  
(Deny) allow CFNA.  
LD 11 - Implement Call Forward No Answer to the Hunt DN on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
164 Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
Prompt  
CLS  
Response  
(FND) FNA  
xxxx  
Description  
(Deny) allow CFNA.  
HUNT  
Hunt DN where a No Answer call is to be routed (if the DN  
Expansion package is equipped, the DN can have up to 10  
digits).  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
165  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 165)  
"Operating parameters" (page 165)  
"Feature interactions" (page 165)  
"Feature packaging" (page 166)  
"Feature implementation" (page 166)  
"Feature operation" (page 166)  
Feature description  
This feature enables telephones to have their Call Forward (CFW) status  
saved as part of the data dump routine, thereby allowing the telephone to  
have its CFW status reinstated following a SYSLOAD. Whether a telephone  
has Call Forward activated following a SYSLOAD is dependant on the  
response to the Call Forward Save (CFWS) prompt in LD 17, and the status  
of the CFW as of the last successful data dump:  
•
If CFWS is set to NO (the default), no sets will have their CFW saved  
and all sets will have CFW set to the default (deactivated) following  
a SYSLOAD; or  
•
If CFWS is set to YES, all sets will have their CFW status saved and set  
to the state they were in as of the last successful data dump following a  
SYSLOAD.  
Operating parameters  
There are no operating parameters associated with this feature.  
Feature interactions  
Call Forward All Calls  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
166 Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD  
Call Forward by Call Type  
The Call Forward status of each telephone can be saved as part of the data  
dump routine and reinstated following a SYSLOAD operation.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
LD 17 - Add or change Call Forward Save on data dump.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Systems Parameters  
TYPE  
...  
PARM  
...  
MSCL  
- CFWS  
(NO) YES  
Call Forward Save on SYSLOAD.  
Feature operation  
If CFWS = YES, the Call Forward status of every set is saved at data dump.  
Should a SYSLOAD occur, all sets are returned to the Call Forward state  
that they were in as of the last successful data dump.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
167  
Call Forward to Trunk Restriction  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 167)  
"Operating parameters" (page 167)  
"Feature interactions" (page 167)  
"Feature packaging" (page 168)  
"Feature implementation" (page 168)  
"Feature operation" (page 168)  
Feature description  
The Call Forward to Trunk Restriction feature prevents stations from  
forwarding calls from their station to a Public Switched Telephone Network  
(PSTN) trunk. This conforms with the regulatory requirements of certain  
countries.  
A second option of this feature allows calls to be forwarded to a PSTN trunk,  
as in previous operation, while recording the internal DN of the originating  
station (rather than the forwarding station) in the Call Detail Recording  
(CDR) record.  
Operating parameters  
The CDR option can only be applied to calls originated by internal  
telephones. Only the true originator’s DN is recorded.  
Feature interactions  
There are no feature interactions associated with this feature.  
CDP/UDP Calls  
The CFW restriction will not apply if the call forward DN is a NARS DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
168 Call Forward to Trunk Restriction  
Feature packaging  
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131.  
Feature implementation  
LD 16 - Create or modify the data blocks for trunk routes.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
RDB  
Route Data Block.  
CFWR  
(NO) YES  
(NO) YES  
Call Forward Restriction (does not) does apply to the trunk route.  
If NO is the response, the IDOP prompt follows.  
- IDOP  
Identify Originating Party.  
Responding YES modifies the trunk CDR for internal calls to  
identify the originating party instead of the forwarding station. If  
NO is the response, CDR is allowed to proceed as usual.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
169  
Call Forward, Internal Calls  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 169)  
"Operating parameters" (page 170)  
"Feature interactions" (page 171)  
"Feature packaging" (page 174)  
"Feature implementation" (page 174)  
"Feature operation" (page 175)  
Feature description  
The Internal Call Forward (Internal CFW) feature allows you to selectively  
forward only internal calls to the Internal CFW DN.  
Internal CFW is activated/deactivated on a per-telephone basis and is user  
programmable when Internal CFW is activated. On a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone, the Internal CFW feature (ICF) key is the only access method.  
On an analog (500/2500 type) telephone, Internal CFW can be accessed by  
either dialing SPRE and the Internal CFW feature code (9914), or by the  
appropriate Flexible Feature Codes (FFCs).  
All internal calls terminating on the primary (or any single appearance)  
DN of an Internal CFW active telephone are automatically forwarded to  
the programmed Internal CFW DN (refer to the "Operating parameters"  
(page 170) section for information on primary and secondary, and single  
and multiple appearance DNs).  
An internal call is defined by the Internal CFW feature as one of the following:  
•
•
an extension-to-extension call  
a Direct Inward System Access (DISA) call  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
170 Call Forward, Internal Calls  
•
•
•
•
an attendant-originated call  
a conference call  
a Group Call feature initiated call  
an incoming trunk call over a trunk route classified as internal (LD 16  
where RCLS = INT), and  
•
an incoming Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk call using  
private numbering.  
Non-internal calls are not affected by the Internal CFW feature.  
Operating parameters  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Internal CFW, but is not a  
prerequisite for the Internal CFW feature. For example, if a telephone is  
already CFW All Calls active, it will not be allowed to activate Internal CFW  
at the same time. Internal CFW can only be activated if CFW All Calls is  
explicitly deactivated.  
Also, if Internal CFW is active when trying to activate CFW All Calls, Internal  
CFW will automatically be deactivated.  
Internal CFW operation is consistent with the CFW All Calls feature.  
Therefore, when a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone activates Internal CFW,  
the following DNs iscome Internal CFW activated:  
•
the primary DN (key 0), regardless of whether the DN is multiple  
appearance or not, and  
•
all secondary DNs that are single appearance.  
Consequently, if all the appearances of a multiple appearance DN are on  
non-primary Meridian 1 proprietary telephone keys, calls to these DNs will  
never receive Internal CFW treatment.  
When an analog (500/2500 type) telephone activates Internal CFW,  
regardless of whether the DN is multiple appearance or not, Internal CFW  
becomes activated.  
Internal CFW supports only the voice line on digital telephones that have  
both voice and data options.  
On 2317 telephones, the CFW programming screen (invoked by pressing  
the CFW softkey) is not displayed when the ICF key is pressed. Instead, the  
screen displays the previously programmed ICF number.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 171  
If an Internal CFW call is rejected, a display message is given if the  
telephone is digital and has a digit display module (this display message  
is the same as that given to a failed CFW All Calls activation request).  
Otherwise, overflow tone is given.  
Internal CFW is not maintained through a SYSLOAD.  
Internal CFW is not supported on Basic Rate Interface (BRI) telephones.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Administration  
This feature does not support Internal CFW.  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
The Attendant Blocking of DN feature will override Internal CFW. If the  
dialed DN of the set is idle, the DN can be blocked; if the DN is busy, busy  
tone is heard.  
Attendant Busy Verify  
When the attendant is using this feature to call a telephone that is Internal  
CFW active, the call will not receive Internal CFW treatment.  
Attendant-Extended Calls  
When the attendant extends a call on its SRC key to a telephone that is  
Internal CFW active, the call on the SRC key will only receive Internal CFW  
treatment if it is an internal call.  
Attendant Night Service  
When a call to the attendant is redirected to the Attendant Night DN that  
is defined on an Internal CFW active telephone, the call will only receive  
Internal CFW treatment if it is an internal call.  
Attendant Overflow  
If Attendant Overflow redirects an internal call to a telephone that is Internal  
CFW active, the call will remain in the attendant queue, and will not receive  
Internal CFW treatment.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward Reminder Tone  
If Call Forward Reminder Tone Allowed (CFRA) is in effect, whenever an  
analog (500/2500 type) telephone with Internal CFW active goes off hook  
to originate a call, the telephone sounds the reminder tone. The reminder  
tone is either Call Forward Dial Tone (CFDT) or Call Forward/Message  
Waiting Dial Tone (CFMW).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
172 Call Forward, Internal Calls  
If the customer option is set to Call Forward Reminder Tone Denied (CFRD),  
whenever an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with internal CFW active  
goes off hook to originate a call, the telephone sounds either the normal dial  
tone (DIAL) or the Message Waiting Dial Tone (MWDT).  
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide  
If a treated call is a transfer call and the transferring call is on the treating  
node, the transferred party is considered. However, when the transferring  
party is not on the treating node, the transferring party will determine the  
treatment given.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Call Forward, Internal Calls is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override  
Via FFC feature, but there are no changes to the feature itself.  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Call Forward Internal Calls takes precedence over Call Redirection by Time  
of Day.  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting Redirection  
Internal CFW takes precedence over Call Waiting and Call Waiting  
Redirection.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has  
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding set (for example, at  
the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating set. In this case,  
the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN (such as  
*67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
If an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the outgoing trunk route on the  
tandem node also has CCP provisioned.  
If an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded to a trunk, the outgoing  
trunk call from the tandem node will carry the Privacy Indicator if the  
outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has the TCPP option set.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 173  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding set (for example, at  
the tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating set. In this case,  
the forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN (such as  
*67 + ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Camp-On  
Internal CFW takes precedence over Camp-On.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,  
idle DN treatment is given.  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Toll pad switching is also provided after call forwarding has been completed.  
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back  
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).  
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.  
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the  
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the  
forwarding or hunting call is answered.  
Do Not Disturb  
Hunting  
Internal Call Forward take precedence over Do Not Disturb and Hunting.  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number  
Voice calls directed to a dynamic voice/data Terminal Number are forwarded,  
if either of these features are enabled. Data calls, to a dynamic voice/data  
TN, are not forwarded.  
Network Intercom  
Hot Type I calls respect or override all kinds of Call Forward features (Busy,  
No Answer, All Calls, Internal, etc.) according to per-set definitions. If Call  
Forward is respected, the call becomes a normally dialed call and the  
originator will receive the appropriate indication on their display.  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)  
Internal CFW cannot be enabled on a Phantom TN.  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks  
Recorded Announcement for Calls Diverted to External Trunks (RANX)  
feature supports call forward to an outgoing external Central Office (CO)  
trunk if the trunk has the RANX flag set and is located in a node with a  
RAN trunk.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
174 Call Forward, Internal Calls  
Recovery on Misoperation of Attendant Console  
Call Forward takes precedence over the Misoperation feature.  
Remote Call Forward  
Remote CFW Activate (RCFA), Remote CFW Deactivate (RCFD), and  
Remote CFW Verify (RCFV) FFCs can be used only to access CFW All  
Calls; they cannot be used to access Internal CFW.  
Trunk Barring  
If an Originating Trunk Connection is forwarded to a barred route, it receives  
the intercept treatment specified in the Customer Data Block.  
Feature packaging  
Internal CFW requires the following packages:  
•
•
•
Basic Call Processing (BASIC) package 1 (CFW package required but  
does not have to be enabled)  
500 Set Dial Access to Features (SS5) package 73 for access to analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones  
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139 to implement FFC  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 174)  
Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
2. "LD 11 - Add/change CFW Internal Calls for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 175)  
Add/change CFW Internal Calls for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
3. "LD 57 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones using a Flexible Feature Code." (page 175)  
Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones using  
a Flexible Feature Code.  
LD 10 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature operation 175  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
FTR  
Response  
500  
Description  
Telephone type.  
ICF 4-(16)-23  
XICF  
Allow Internal CFW for the specified telephone and the maximum  
forward DN length.  
Remove Internal CFW from the telephone.  
LD 11 - Add/change CFW Internal Calls for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
KEY  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
xx ICF 4-(16)-23  
<nnnn>  
Define an Internal CFW feature key for the telephone. The  
command consists of:  
xx = key number.  
ICF = feature mnemonic.  
4-23 = the maximum forward DN length.  
nnnn = forward DN.  
xx null  
Remove function/feature from a key.  
LD 57 - Add/change Internal CFW for analog (500/2500 type) telephones using a Flexible  
Feature Code.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW CHG OUT  
FFC  
Description  
Add, change, or remove data.  
Flexible Feature Code.  
TYPE  
CODE  
ICFA  
ICFD  
ICFV  
Access Code for Internal CFW Activate.  
Access Code for Internal CFW Deactivate.  
Access Code for Internal CFW Verify.  
xxxx  
xxxx  
xxxx  
ICFA  
ICFD  
ICFV  
Internal CFW Activate code.  
Internal CFW Deactivate code.  
Internal CFW Verify code.  
Feature operation  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
To forward internal calls from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:  
Step Action  
1
Press the ICF key.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
176 Call Forward, Internal Calls  
2
3
Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.  
Press the ICF key.  
—End—  
To cancel Internal CFW from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:  
Press the ICF key.  
•
Analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
To forward internal calls from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:  
Step Action  
1
2
Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)  
- or –  
Lift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Activate (ICFA) FFC.  
Dial the number where calls are to be forwarded.  
—End—  
To cancel Internal CFW from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone:  
•
Lift the handset and dial SPRE 9914 (Internal CFW feature code)  
– or –  
Lift the handset and dial the Internal CFW Deactivate (ICFD) FFC.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
177  
Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and  
Network Wide)  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 177)  
"Operating parameters" (page 178)  
"Feature interactions" (page 178)  
"Feature packaging" (page 181)  
"Feature implementation" (page 181)  
"Feature operation" (page 185)  
Feature description  
Call Forward Remote (Attendant and Network wide) introduces the RCFW  
feature across the Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN), while  
also providing the attendant with RCFW capabilities. New ISDN FACILITY  
messages are used to facilitate the RCFW feature operation in an MCDN.  
The feature capabilities of the set-based (Flexible Feature Code activated)  
network wide application of the RCFW feature match those of the current  
standalone RCFW feature.  
The attendant RCFW functionality is controlled by a new flexible Attendant  
key (RFW). The attendant has the capability to view the current call forward  
number and determine the call forward status of any station. It is also  
possible for an attendant to activate or deactivate call forward for a particular  
station. This functionality is applicable both local within the system and  
network wide.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
178 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)  
A new optional customer-based password is introduced for attendant RCFW  
operation. This password is configured in LD 15 and is the only password  
required for attendant RCFW operation. The station control password  
previously used by the Flexible Feature Code (FFC) set-based RCFW is not  
required when the attendant activates RCFW by pressing the RFW key.  
Operating parameters  
The network wide application of this feature is only applicable to nodes in an  
MCDN environment. The nodes in the network must be system switches.  
No other Central Office (CO) or circuit switched network type is supported  
for this feature operation.  
For set-based network operation of the Remote Call Forward feature, the  
Station Control Password Length (SCPL) must be configured to be the same  
length for all nodes in the network. Attempts to operate RCFW with different  
SCPLs will result in overflow tone being presented to the user.  
For network operation of the RCFW feature, the Private Network Identifier  
(PNI) must be configured consistently for all nodes in the network.  
The Attendant and Network Wide RCFW features use the existing RCFW  
code to activate or deactivate call forward on stations. As such, all limitations  
applicable to the local RCFW feature are applicable to the network and  
attendant operation of the feature.  
No new hardware is required for this feature.  
Feature interactions  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)  
Since ISDN BRI sets do not support Flexible Feature Codes, Remote Call  
Forward cannot be activated from a BRI set.  
Call Forward Activation from any Feature  
Call Forward and Busy Status  
There are no direct conflicts with either of these features and the RCFW  
feature.  
Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
Remote Call Forward (RCFW) and Call Forward Destination Deactivation  
(CFDD) provide the same functionality but are activated differently. CFDD  
does not require the call forward station’s control password to deactivate the  
call forward functionality on the call forward station.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 179  
The call forwarded destination can use the Remote Call Forward  
deactivation FFC as well as CFDD to deactivate the Call Forward All Calls  
functionality on the call forward station.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is forwarded, the  
Privacy Indicator is tandemed to the far end to inhibit the display of the  
Calling Party Name or Number provided that the tandem node also has  
Calling Party Privacy (CCP) provisioned.  
The CCP code can also be stored on the forwarding DN. If the CPP is  
requested on the forwarding DN, the Privacy Indicator is outpulsed to the  
terminating node to inhibit the number of the forwarding set (that is, at the  
tandem node) from being displayed on the terminating set. In this case, the  
forwarding station must include the CPP in the forwarding DN (such, as *67  
+ ACOD + the DN on the terminating node).  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers  
The RCFW feature only applies to the primary appearances of Multiple  
Appearance DNs, and it is recommended that only one appearance of a  
Multiple Appearance DN be configured as the prime DN.  
For the case of multiple stations with the same prime DN and SCPW, the  
RCFW operation will apply to the station that has the Multiple Appearance  
Redirection Prime (MARP) assigned to it.  
If none of the stations having the DN and SCPW assigned are configured  
as the MARP TN for that DN, the RCFA and RCFD will apply to all stations  
matching the DN and SCPW.  
The attendant-based RCFW feature will only apply remote call forward  
operation to the prime DN with MARP status. If the DN is not the prime DN  
or does not have MARP status, overflow tone is received by the user.  
Outpulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO)  
If the OPAO package is equipped, the octothorpe (#) is treated as any other  
dialed digit and will not be used to signal end of dialing. The end of dialing  
digits to be used are defined in LD 15.  
Phantom Terminal Numbers (TNs)  
A Phantom TN does not physically exist. It is configured with no hardware  
associated with it (that is, no telephones or line cards); however, all required  
data blocks are configured.  
The Phantom TN feature uses the RCFW feature to configure and  
activate/deactivate the CFW DN on the Phantom TNs.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
180 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)  
As the data blocks associated with Phantom TNs match those of standard  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones configured within the system, the  
operation of the RCFA and RCFD features on Phantom TNs is applicable  
to the RCFW feature. As such, the set-based local and network RCFW  
features can be used to configure and activate/deactivate the CFW DN  
of Phantom TNs.  
The Phantom TN feature uses a Default Call Forward (DCFW) DN. If call  
forward is not active on the Phantom TN, all calls to the Phantom TN DN  
are routed to the DCFW DN.  
The Phantom TN feature modifies the set-based RCFW feature so that if  
CFW is not active on the Phantom TN, and the CFW DN entered in the  
RCFV operation matches the DCFW DN, confirmation tone is returned to  
the RCFV user; if the CFW DN entered does not match the CDFW DN,  
overflow is returned.  
This change to the set-based RCFV operation is applicable to the network  
RCFV operation. The operation of this feature network wide requires no  
changes to the ISDN message passing for the set-based network RCFV  
operation.  
There is no Attendant RCFW operation which interacts with the DCFW  
DN of Phantom TNs.  
Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward  
When Preventing Reciprocal Call Forward Allowed (PVCA) is defined in LD  
15, a set within the same customer configuration cannot be call forwarded  
to a set that is call forwarded back to it. Thus, CFW loops are prevented.  
This feature applies when the CFW DN is changed by Remote Call Forward.  
For network operation of the set- and attendant-based RCFW features,  
entering an invalid CFW DN (under the rules of the PRCF feature) results in  
overflow tone being returned and the CFW DN being ignored.  
Traffic Measurements  
The peg count, for the attendant RFW key, is generated on the first RFW  
key press of the RCFW operation. While the RFW key may be pressed  
multiple times during a single RCFW function, the peg count will only be  
implemented once.  
The RFW key peg count is included in the TFC005 feature key usage traffic  
report.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature implementation 181  
Feature packaging  
The Attendant Remote Call Forward (ARFW) package 253 must be  
provisioned to activate the Attendant-based RCFW feature.  
For network operation the following software packages are required:  
•
•
•
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) package 145  
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS) package 58  
Any other trunk or dialing plan packages, as required by the customer’s  
configuration  
The following are prerequisites for set-based RCFW:  
•
•
•
Optional Features (OPFT) package 1  
Flexible Feature Codes (FCC) package 139  
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81  
The following are prerequisites for implementation on analog (500/2500  
type) telephones:  
•
•
Special Service for 2500 Sets (SS25) package 18  
500 Set Dial Access to Features (SS5) package 73  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Set the Station Control Password Length." (page 182)  
Set the Station Control Password Length.  
2. "LD 15 - Configure a Special Prefix Number (SPRE) for the customer."  
(page 182)  
Configure a Special Prefix Number (SPRE) for the customer.  
3. "LD 57 - Define Remote Call Forward FFCs and set FFCT." (page 182)  
Define Remote Call Forward FFCs and set FFCT.  
4. "LD 10 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward."  
(page 183)  
Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.  
5. "LD 11 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward."  
(page 183)  
Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.  
6. "LD 12 - Configure the attendant console RFW key." (page 184)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
182 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)  
Configure the attendant console RFW key.  
7. "LD 15 - Configure the Attendant RCFW password." (page 184)  
Configure the Attendant RCFW password.  
Set-based configuration  
LD 15 - Set the Station Control Password Length.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Code  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
0-8  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
- SCPL  
Station Control Password Length (must be consistent network  
wide).  
- FFCS  
YES  
1-3  
Change end of dialing digits in FFC.  
- - STRL  
- - STRG  
Number of digits to indicate FFC end of feature activation.  
One to three digits to indicate FFC end of a feature activation.  
(#) xxx  
LD 15 - Configure a Special Prefix Number (SPRE) for the customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
xxx  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Special Prefix Number.  
- SPRE  
LD 57 - Define Remote Call Forward FFCs and set FFCT.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
FFCT  
CODE  
RCFA  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Codes.  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Confirmation tone is (is not) to be given after an FFC.  
Remote Call Forward Activate.  
xx = RCFA code.  
(NO) YES  
RCFA  
xx  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature implementation 183  
Prompt  
CODE  
RCFD  
CODE  
RCFV  
Response  
RCFD  
xx  
Description  
Remote Call Forward Deactivate.  
xx = RCFD code.  
RCFV  
xx  
Remote Call Forward Verify.  
xx = RCFV code.  
LD 10 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
...  
FTR  
CFW 4-(16)-23  
Allow Call Forwarding and set the forwarding DN length.  
LD 11 - Set the Station Control Password and allow Call Forward.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xxxxxxxx  
SCPW  
KEY  
Station Control Password (0 to 8 digits, defined in LD 15).  
xx CFW 4-(16)-23 Assign Call Forward key (xx) and set the forwarding DN length.  
Attendant-based configuration  
A new Flexible Attendant feature key, RFW, has been added to this overlay.  
Configuration of the key on the attendant console is required to allow  
attendant access to the RCFW feature. Configuration of the RFW key is  
only allowed if the ARFW package is equipped.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
184 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)  
LD 12 - Configure the attendant console RFW key.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
2250  
TYPE  
TN  
Attendant console type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
...  
KEY  
xx RFW  
Key number assigned as Attendant Remote Call Forward key.  
LD 15 - Configure the Attendant RCFW password.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
ATT_DATA  
Attendant console options  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
...  
- IRFR  
(NO) YES  
Internal Remote Call Forward Password required.  
An internal password is the password required to perform an  
attendant RCFW operation within the same customer as the  
attendant.  
xxxxxxxx  
- - IRFP  
- XRFR  
Internal RCFW Password (only prompted if the response to  
IRFR is YES).  
The password length is one to eight digits; the password is  
numeric only.  
(NO) YES  
External Remote Call Forward Password required.  
An external password is the password required to perform an  
attendant RCFW operation on a different customer than the  
attendant.  
xxxxxxxx  
- XRFP  
External RCFW password (only prompted if the response to  
XRFR is YES).  
The password length is one to eight digits; the password is  
numeric only.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 185  
Feature operation  
Network Wide Set-based Remote Call Forward  
From the remote set dial:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
FCC RCFA code.  
SCPW for the set to be forwarded.  
The complete DN of the set to be forwarded. This DN is the full  
DN required to call the set to be forwarded from the user’s present  
location.  
Expected Result: Confirmation tone is delivered to the user.  
From the remote set continue dialing:  
4
The CFW DN to be activated followed by the end of dial indicator (#).  
Expected Result: Confirmation tone is delivered to the user.  
Error Condition: If an error should occur during set-based RCFW,  
the user is presented with an Overflow tone. To remove the error  
condition, the user must release from the operation and begin again.  
—End—  
Attendant-based Remote Call Forward  
From the attendant console, perform the following:  
Procedure 1  
Attendant-based Remote Call Forward  
Step Action  
1
2
Press an idle loop key followed by the RFW key.  
Expected Result: The RFW key is flashing and the Loop key is  
steady lit.  
Dial the DN of the set to be forwarded.  
Expected Result: If a password is required, the RFW key is winking,  
and the console display shows "PWD –". If the console does not  
support alpha characters, the display is blank.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
186 Call Forward, Remote (Attendant and Network Wide)  
If a password is not required, the console display will show the DN  
of the set to be forwarded followed by the CFW DN stored on that  
set. The RFW key lamp will display the status of the CFW DN. If the  
RFW lamp is flashing, CFW is not active; if the RFW lamp is steady  
lit, CFW is active. Proceed to Step 4.  
3
Dial the password followed by #.  
Expected Result: The console display will show the DN of the  
set to be forwarded followed by the CFW DN stored on that set.  
The RFW key lamp will display the status of the CFW DN. If the  
RFW lamp is flashing, CFW is not active; if the RFW lamp is steady  
lit, CFW is active.  
4
5
The user can now enter a new CFW DN or press the RFW key to  
activate or deactivate the stored CFW DN.  
Expected Result: The console display will show the DN of the set to  
be forwarded followed by the CFW DN. If the RFW lamp is flashing,  
CFW is not active; if the RFW lamp is steady lit, CFW is active.  
When RCFW operation is in this state, the user has the following  
three options:  
•
Press the Release or Release Source key to terminate RCFW  
operation.  
•
•
Press the RFW key to reverse the CFW status.  
Enter a new CFW DN to begin the task of changing the CFW DN  
programmed. The new CFW DN is not active until the RFW key  
is pressed again.  
Error Condition: If an error should occur during the attendant-based  
RCFW, the user is presented with an Overflow tone. To remove  
the error condition, the user must release from the operation and  
begin again.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
187  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible  
Feature Code  
Contents  
The following are topics in this section:  
"Feature description" (page 187)  
"Operating parameters" (page 188)  
"Feature interactions" (page 188)  
"Feature packaging" (page 192)  
"Feature implementation" (page 192)  
"Feature operation" (page 194)  
Feature description  
Call Forward Override provides all telephone users (having a specific Class  
of Service) and attendants with the ability to override Intercept Computer  
Call Forward (ICP-CFW), Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward No Answer,  
Hunting and Make Set Busy by entering a Flexible Feature Code. In  
order to use this feature, the originating set must have Call Forward Hunt  
Allowed (CFHA) Class of Service. When this feature is enabled if override  
is attempted, and the called party is idle, the set is rung regardless of any  
diversion. If the dialed set is busy and has Hunt active, the calling party will  
terminate on the wanted set and receive a busy indication. Sets without  
Call Forward/Hunt Override denied (CFHD) Class of Service will not be  
able to use the Call Forward/Hunt Override (CFHO) Via Flexible Feature  
Code (FFC) feature.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC works in network environments with  
system nodes and Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN) links.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
188 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Operating parameters  
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be used in pre-dial mode  
from a set (for instance, it must be dialed before dialing the DN that has Call  
Forward All Calls, Intercept Call Forward, Call Forward No Answer, Internal  
Call Forward, Hunt, or Make Set Busy active).  
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be dialed from its own node  
(that is, it must be dialed before any trunk access code).  
On an ABCD set the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be  
configured as a pre-dial FFC (ABCD sets are a type of German telephone).  
Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC can only be used against extensions with  
one of the following type: HOT/MCN/MCR/SCN/SCR/Basic Rate Interface  
(BRI) DNs and analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
It is not possible for BRI extensions to dial a Call/Forward Hunt Override  
FFC.  
The Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature can only be used in  
standalone and MCDN environments. If no MCDN links are involved, no  
information about Call Forward/Hunt Override is passed on to other nodes.  
To get the functionality of Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC in an MCDN  
environment these enhancements must be integrated in the originating  
node, terminating node and any intermediate nodes.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Blocking of DN  
Using Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC after activation of ABDN is not  
allowed. Any attempt is canceled and overflow tone is returned.  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs are not overridden by Call  
Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC. Any attempt is canceled and access denied  
treatment is returned. Individual DNs on an ACD set are overridden by Call  
Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC with the same limitations as for other sets.  
Attendant Barge-in  
Attendant Busy Verify  
Attendant Break-in  
Using Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC after activation of Barge-in,  
Busy Verify or Break-in is not allowed. Attempts is canceled and overflow  
tone is returned.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 189  
Using post-dial Break-in after dialing the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC is  
possible after encountering a busy set, if Break-in is enabled.  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)  
BRI sets are not supported; any attempt to dial Call Forward/Hunt Override  
from a BRI set is ignored and access denied treatment is returned.  
BRIT  
BRI TIE trunks in a Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN) are  
supported.  
Call Forward-older features  
The following features are overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via  
FFC feature, but there are no changes to the features themselves:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward No Answer  
Call Forward and Busy Status  
Call Forward, Internal Calls  
Call Forward No Answer/Flexible Call Forward No Answer  
Make Set Busy  
Secretarial Filtering  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC has precedence over Call Redirection  
by Time of Day.  
Call Transfer  
A set can activate Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC when initiating a  
transfer. If the transfer is completed while ringing, the Call Forward/Hunt  
Override will still be active and passed on to the transferred party.  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature has been activated. When a busy set with Call Waiting configured  
is encountered, it will terminate on Call Waiting.  
Call Waiting Redirection  
There is no interaction with the Call Waiting treatment component of the  
Call Waiting Redirection feature. However, Call Forward/Hunt Override Via  
Flexible Feature Code does override CFNA, and thus the CFNA treatment  
given to unanswered Call Waiting calls by the Call Waiting Redirection  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
190 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
feature is overridden by the CFHO feature. The incoming call will continue  
to be given Call Waiting treatment as if the Call Waiting Redirection feature  
is disabled when the CFHO feature is enabled by the calling party.  
Camp-on  
When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to Camp-on to the set, even if  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC has been activated.  
Digital Private Network Signaling System One (DPNSS1)  
DPNSS1 is only supported as an incoming trunk transferred to a MCDN  
environment using Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC.  
Direct Inward System Access  
Direct Inward System Access is not supported. Any attempt to dial the  
Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC is ignored and access denied treatment  
is returned.  
Do Not Disturb  
Do Not Disturb is not overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via  
FFC feature.  
Flexible DN  
External Flexible DN  
It is not possible to store the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a Flexible  
Directory Number or External Flexible Directory Number.  
Group Call  
It is not possible to use the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a Group  
Call DN.  
Group Hunt  
Primary Line Directory Numbers (PLDNs) are not overridden by the Call  
Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature. Any attempt is ignored and access  
denied treatment will result.  
Hunt  
This feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature. If a set activating Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC encounters  
a busy set no hunt steps is performed; the call will terminate on the DN  
and busy tone is returned.  
Hunt DN/External Hunt DN  
It is not possible to store the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a Hunt  
or External Hunt DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature interactions 191  
Idle Extension Notification  
This feature can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature is activated. When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to place  
an Idle Extension Notification request against the set.  
Intercept Computer Call Forward  
This feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature. The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC replaces the Intercept  
Computer Override FFC.  
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operations  
Call Forward Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code can be dialed prior  
to dialing the DN from the Intercept Computer.  
Last Number Redial  
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC and the dialed DN are stored under  
Last Number Redial.  
Multiple Appearance Multiple Call Arrangements (MCAs)  
Multiple Appearance Single Call Arrangements (SCAs)  
If the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC is used against an MCA (MCR/MCN)  
or SCA (SCR/SCN) DN it will override any active forward and terminate on  
all idle appearances. If all appearances are busy, busy treatment is returned.  
Primary Line Directory Number (PLDN)  
It is not possible to store the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC as a PLDN.  
Phantom TN  
If Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC is used against a Phantom TN, the  
attempt is canceled and overflow tone is given.  
Priority Override  
It is possible to use Priority Override after using the Call Forward/Hunt  
Override FFC and encountering a busy set.  
Radio Paging  
If Radio Paging is activated in a call where Call Forward/Hunt Override has  
been used, the Call Forward/Hunt Override feature is deactivated.  
Ring Again  
Network Ring Again  
Using the Ring Again feature is possible after using the Call Forward/Hunt  
Override FFC and encountering a busy signal. Ring Again can be placed  
against the set for which the Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC was used  
(that is, the set with CFW active should be rung by the Ring Again feature).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
192 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Ring Again No Answer  
Network Ring Again No Answer  
Using the Ring Again No Answer feature is possible after using the Call  
Forward/Hunt Override FFC and encountering an idle set that does not  
answer. Ring Again No Answer can be placed against the set for which the  
Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC was used (that is, the set should be rung  
by the Ring Again No Answer feature).  
Single Digit Access  
It is not possible to store Call Forward/Hunt Override FFCs in a Single Digit  
Access list.  
Semi-automatic Camp-On  
This feature can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature is activated. When encountering a busy set, it is possible to activate  
Semi-automatic Camp-On, if it is applicable.  
Speed Call  
The Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC cannot be stored in a speed call list.  
Feature packaging  
In a standalone environment, the Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) software  
package 139 must be provisioned to activate this feature.  
For network environments, Network Attendant Service (NAS) package 159  
must also be provisioned. Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) package  
56 must be restricted, as it is mutually exclusive with Network Attendant  
Service.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 57 - Define FFC for Call Forward/Hunt Override." (page 193)  
Define FFC for Call Forward/Hunt Override.  
2. "LD 10 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature for analog (500/2500 type" (page 193)  
Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature for Meridian 1 proprietar" (page 193)  
Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature implementation 193  
4. "LD 18 - Configure ABCD key for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature." (page 193)  
Configure ABCD key for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature.  
LD 57 - Define FFC for Call Forward/Hunt Override.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Code.  
CODE  
CFHO  
CFHO  
nnnn  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override FFC.  
LD 10 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
TYPE:  
...  
Type of telephone.  
CLS  
(CFHD) CFHA  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC is (denied) or allowed.  
LD 11 - Set Class of Service for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature for Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
...  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
CLS  
(CFHD) CFHA  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC is (denied) or allowed.  
LD 18 - Configure ABCD key for the Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC feature.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
ABCD  
Modifying 16-button DTMF.  
Function table for pre-dial.  
PRED  
YES  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
194 Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Prompt  
Response  
CFHO  
Description  
A
B
C
D
CFHO is assigned to key A.  
CFHO is assigned to key B.  
CFHO is assigned to key C.  
CFHO is assigned to key D.  
CFHO  
CFHO  
CFHO  
Feature operation  
Standalone  
To activate the Call Forward/Hunt Override feature, the user dials the FFC  
for Call Forward/Hunt Override and the DN of the wanted party. If the set is  
idle, the set is rung regardless of any diversion (for example, Call Forward  
All Calls, Intercept Call Forward, Call Forward No Answer, or Hunt) or Make  
Set Busy on the set.  
If the set(s) have displays, the display(s) are updated. If the display on the  
originating set is updated when the call is answered, the Call Forward/Hunt  
Override FFC will no longer be displayed.  
If the dialed set is busy and Hunt is active, the calling party will terminate on  
the wanted set and will receive busy indication.  
If the dialed set is idle, but does not answer within the defined number of  
ringing cycles for CFNA, the call is not forwarded (that is, it continues to ring).  
If the dialed set is busy, the attendant can activate Camp-on, if Camp-on is  
applicable. In addition, Ring Again can be placed against a set for which  
Call Forward/Hunt Override was used and a busy set was encountered.  
Network  
The user gets the same functionality in a Meridian Customer Defined  
Network (MCDN) as in standalone environments. The Call Forward/Hunt  
Override information is transmitted from the originating node to the  
terminating node using the Network Attendant Service (NAS) feature.  
Activation of the service is call dependent; network-wide Call Forward/Hunt  
Override is part of the NAS feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
195  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 195)  
"Operating parameters" (page 196)  
"Feature interactions" (page 196)  
"Feature packaging" (page 197)  
"Feature implementation" (page 197)  
"Feature operation" (page 199)  
Feature description  
Deluxe Call Hold (DHLD) offers two options: Individual Hold and Exclusive  
Hold.  
Individual Hold indicates only those calls placed on hold on Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones in a multiple appearance, single call arrangement.  
When a user puts a call on hold, normal hold (winking) is indicated at the  
user’s telephone only. A slow flicker is shown at all other telephones with  
the multiple appearance.  
With Exclusive Hold Class of Service, multiple appearances of a line remain  
exclusive to the user’s telephone, even when the call is put on hold. While  
hold (winking) is indicated at the telephone holding the call, the Directory  
Number (DN) lamp is steadily lit on all other appearances of the held call.  
The Privacy Release key must be used for access by other appearances of  
the DN. Telephones with the Exclusive Hold capability can be held at any  
single-line or Meridian digital telephone with an appearance.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
196 Call Hold, Deluxe  
Operating parameters  
Exclusive Hold has priority over Individual Hold. If a telephone is equipped  
with Exclusive Hold, the other telephones receive the Exclusive, not  
Individual, Hold indication.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Administration  
Deluxe Hold (DHLD) cannot be administered through the Attendant  
Administration feature.  
Attendant Break-In  
The attendant cannot break in to a call on hold.  
Camp-On, Forced  
Override, Enhanced  
Override, Priority  
Neither held calls nor telephones with calls on hold can be camped on or  
overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting  
either Forced Camp-on or Priority Override.  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
When a call is retrieved from hold, the calling and called parties’ displays  
reflect their individual DPD Class of Service options.  
Calling Line Identification  
In a trunk call for ISDN interfaces, if the originating party puts the call on  
hold and then retrieves the call, the CLID at the originating party will reflect  
the trunk access code and member number. This behavior is not applicable  
to transferred call scenarios.  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
A Disconnect Timer applies to held calls on all trunks on the route. All  
answered calls in the held state is disconnected if left in that state for an  
extended period.  
Call Party Name Display  
When a call is put on hold, the holding telephone’s display clears. The held  
telephone’s display does not change. When the telephone reestablishes the  
call, the display returns the original DN and name.  
Call Transfer  
A consultation call can be placed on Hold.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Feature implementation 197  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls  
The calling party and called party can put either party on hold. However,  
the calling party cannot release the call while the called party is on hold.  
The called party is permitted to release the call.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When a user takes an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator off of  
hold, no Calling Party Number or Name is displayed on the set.  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion  
Executive Intrusion is denied if the requested party is put on hold by another  
station at the same node. This restriction also applies to the unrequested  
party if the unrequested party is located at the same node as the requested  
party (standalone) or if the requested party and the unrequested party are  
linked using DPNSS1.  
Mixed DNs  
If a call is put on Exclusive Hold in a mixed Directory Number (DN) group,  
other telephones with an appearance of the DN that go off hook are not  
included in the call, nor do they receive any tone. Privacy Release cannot  
be used with exclusively held calls in a mixed-appearance DN group.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
If two or more proprietary sets of the same Directory Number are in  
conference due to privacy release or privacy override, then only one set can  
hold the call at a given time.  
Music, Enhanced  
A caller placed on Hold by a member of a multiple appearance group  
receives Music regardless of whether the call is on Hold or Exclusive Hold.  
Predictive Dialing  
If an established call is put on hold by the set initiating the Fast Transfer, the  
switch will not be able to transfer the call. The switch can only transfer a  
call if it is in the established state.  
Feature packaging  
Deluxe Hold (DHLD) package 71 has no feature package dependencies.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer." (page 198)  
Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
198 Call Hold, Deluxe  
2. "LD 10 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones" (page 198)  
Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones" (page 198)  
Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones  
LD 15 - Enable/disable Individual Hold for the customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
(Disable) enable Individual Hold.  
0-31  
- OPT  
(IHD) IHA  
LD 10 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(XHD) XHA  
(Disable) enable Exclusive Hold.  
LD 11 - Enable/disable Exclusive Hold for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(XHD) XHA  
(Disable) enable Exclusive Hold.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 199  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
200 Call Hold, Deluxe  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
201  
Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 201)  
"Operating parameters" (page 202)  
"Feature interactions" (page 203)  
"Feature packaging" (page 205)  
"Feature implementation" (page 205)  
"Feature operation" (page 207)  
Feature description  
Individual Hold Enhancement (IHE) expands the functionality of the  
Individual Hold feature. This enhancement is part of Deluxe Call Hold.  
Individual Hold Enhancement provides, in a single line Multiple Appearance  
Directory Number (MADN) environment, the following options:  
•
•
Lamp Option  
Release Option  
With the Lamp Option allowed (HLPA), if one of the single line MADNs is  
on hold, all other appearances of the same single line MADN now remain  
steadily lit.  
With the Lamp Option denied (HLPD), the existing Individual Hold  
functionality is retained.  
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), if the user presses the Hold key  
while another member of the same single line MADN is still active on the  
call, the set that put the call on hold is now disconnected from the call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
202 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement  
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), if the user is the only active  
member of the single line MADN on the call, pressing the hold key puts the  
call on hold as per the existing operation.  
With the Release Option denied (HRLD), the existing Individual Hold  
functionality is retained.  
"Lamp Status of a single line MADN with Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release  
(HRLA/HRLD) Options configured" (page 202) shows the lamp status of a  
single line MADN when the Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release (HRLA/HRLD)  
Options are configured in LD 15.  
Lamp Status of a single line MADN with Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release (HRLA/HRLD) Options  
configured  
Held or Disconnected  
OPT in LD 15  
Other Appearances  
Appearance  
IHA, HLPD, HRLD (See Note 1) wink (held appearance)  
IHA, HLPA, HRLD wink (held appearance)  
flicker  
steadily lit  
steadily lit  
IHA, HLPD, HRLA (See Note 2) steadily lit (disconnected  
appearance)  
IHA, HLPD, HRLA (See Note 3) wink (held appearance)  
flicker  
IHA, HLPA, HRLA (See Note 2) steadily lit (disconnected  
appearance)  
steadily lit  
IHA, HLPA, HRLA (See Note 3) wink (held appearance)  
steadily lit  
In this situation, the existing functionality of Individual Hold is retained.  
In this situation, a single line MADN member is disconnected from the active call. Another member  
of the same single line MADN remains active on the call.  
In this situation, a single line MADN member places a call on hold. No other member of the same  
single line MADN is active on the call.  
Operating parameters  
For Individual Hold Enhancement to be activated, Individual Hold Allowed  
(IHA) and the Lamp (HLPA/HLPD) and Release (HRLA/HRLD) Options  
must be defined in the Customer Data Block. Also, a single line MADN  
must be defined for the sets.  
The Lamp Option applies to Meridian 1 proprietary sets with a call on hold  
and to analog (500/2500 type) sets which perform the Permanent Hold  
operation.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 203  
If the single line MADN member is an analog (500/2500 type) set, the lamp  
option only applies when Permanent Hold is initiated from that set.  
The Release Option only applies when two or more parties with the same  
single line MADN are active in a conference call.  
The Release Option (HRLA/HRLD) only applies to Meridian 1 proprietary  
sets with a Hold key or to Meridian 1 proprietary sets with Automatic Hold  
enabled (CLS = AHA) in LD 11.  
For Meridian 1 proprietary sets with the Release Option allowed (HRLA),  
the Conference (A03/A06) and Transfer (TRN) keys are ignored if more than  
one single line MADN is active on a Conference call.  
For analog (500/2500 type) sets, Transfer, Conference, and Permanent Hold  
work as per the existing operation.  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Call Distribution  
When an Individual Directory Number (IDN) on an Automatic Call  
Distribution (ACD) set is configured as a single line MADN, both the Lamp  
and Release Options of the Individual Hold Enhancement feature are  
applicable to that IDN.  
Automatic Hold  
When a proprietary set has Automatic Hold allowed and more than one  
single line MADN (SCR/SCN/HOT/PVR/PVN) is active on a conference call,  
if the user presses the hold key or presses the active single line MADN,  
the following occurs:  
•
Without the Release Option enabled, the active call on the single line  
MADN is put on hold. That is, the lamp on the single line MADN flashes  
as per the existing operation.  
•
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), the active call on the single  
line MADN is disconnected.  
If only one single line MADN is active on a conference call, the existing  
operation is retained.  
Multi-Party Operations  
Call Join  
If a conference is set up using Call Join, Individual Hold Enhancement still  
functions.  
When the Lamp Option is allowed (HLPA) and the user presses the Hold  
key on an active single line MADN in Call Join operation, the lamps of all  
other appearances of the same single line MADN are steadily lit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
204 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement  
When the Release Option is allowed (HRLA) and the user presses the Hold  
key on an active single line MADN in order to enlarge a conference using  
the Call Join feature, the following occurs:  
•
The call is disconnected if another member of the same single line  
MADN is still active on the call.  
•
The call is placed on hold if the active single line MADN is the only active  
member of the single line MADN on the call.  
Conference (A03/A06, C6A)  
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), the Conference key is ignored on  
the Meridian 1 proprietary set, when more than one Multiple Appearance  
Directory Number (MADN) is active in the conference.  
Exclusive Hold  
The Exclusive Hold feature takes precedence over the Lamp Option of the  
Individual Hold Enhancement feature. The lamps on all other single line  
appearances of the MADN are steadily lit while the call is held on one of the  
single line MADNs. When the Lamp Option is enabled (HLPA), the existing  
Exclusive Hold functionality is retained.  
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA) and more than one single line  
MADN active in a conference, the call is disconnected when the hold key  
is pressed.  
Permanent Hold on an analog (500/2500 type) set  
When an analog (500/2500 type) set puts a call on Permanent Hold, the  
lamp status remains steadily lit on all other members of the same single line  
MADN if the customer has the Lamp Option allowed.  
With the Release Option configured, if an analog (500/2500 type) set with  
the same single line MADN initiates Permanent Hold, the call is not dropped  
even if other appearances are active on this call. This is as per the existing  
functionality.  
Switch Hook Flash  
When a single line MADN member uses Switch Hook Flash to place a call  
on hold, all other appearances of the same single line MADN remain lit as  
per the existing operation.  
When an analog (500/2500 type) set with the same single line MADN  
initiates hold by Switch Hook Flash, the existing functionality is retained.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature implementation 205  
Transfer (TRN)  
For Meridian 1 proprietary sets with the Release Option allowed (HRLA),  
the transfer feature is disabled on the single line MADN, while more than  
one appearance is active in the conference.  
For analog (500/2500 type) sets, transfers work as per the existing operation.  
Feature packaging  
Individual Hold Enhancement requires Deluxe Call Hold (DHLD) package  
71.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure Individual Hold Allowed, the Individual Hold Lamp  
Option and the Individual Hold R" (page 205)  
Configure Individual Hold Allowed, the Individual Hold Lamp Option and  
the Individual Hold Release Option in the Customer Data Block.  
2. "LD 10 - Enable Call Transfer Allowed (XFA), Enhanced Hot Line Denied  
(EHTD), Exclusive Hold Denied (" (page 206)  
Enable Call Transfer Allowed (XFA), Enhanced Hot Line Denied (EHTD),  
Exclusive Hold Denied (XHD), and Permanent Hold (PHD) for analog  
telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Enable Privacy Override Allowed (POA) and Exclusive Hold  
Denied (XHD) for Meridian proprieta" (page 206)  
Enable Privacy Override Allowed (POA) and Exclusive Hold Denied  
(XHD) for Meridian proprietary telephones.  
LD 15 - Configure Individual Hold Allowed, the Individual Hold Lamp Option and the Individual  
Hold Release Option in the Customer Data Block.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options data.  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
IHA  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Individual Hold Allowed.  
OPT  
HLPA  
Individual Hold Lamp Option Allowed.  
HLPD = Individual Hold Lamp Option Denied (default).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
206 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
HRLA  
Individual Hold Release Option Allowed.  
HRLD = Individual Hold Release Option Denied (default).  
...  
LD 10 - Enable Call Transfer Allowed (XFA), Enhanced Hot Line Denied (EHTD), Exclusive Hold  
Denied (XHD), and Permanent Hold (PHD) for analog telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Analog (500/2500 type) set data block.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
...  
CLS  
XFA  
Call Transfer Allowed.  
EHTD  
XHD  
Enhanced Hot Line Denied.  
Exclusive Hold Denied.  
...  
FTR  
...  
PHD  
Permanent Hold.  
LD 11 - Enable Privacy Override Allowed (POA) and Exclusive Hold Denied (XHD) for Meridian  
proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
...  
CLS  
POA  
XHD  
Privacy Override Allowed.  
Exclusive Hold Denied.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 207  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
KEY  
xx SCR yyyy  
Single Call Ringing key, where:  
xx = key number  
SCR = Single Call Ringing  
yyyy = DN  
KEY may also be defined as HOT (Two-way), PVN, PVR, or  
SCN.  
Feature operation  
With the Release Option allowed (HRLA), the user of a single line MADN  
disconnects from an active call by  
•
•
pressing the release key; or  
pressing the hold key to disconnect from the active call while another  
member of the same single line MADN is still active on the call.  
However, if a user is the only active member of the single line MADN on the  
call with the Release Option allowed (HRLA), pressing the hold key puts the  
call on hold as per the existing operation.  
With the Release Option denied (HRLD), the existing functionality is  
retained. Therefore, the user must press the release key to disconnect from  
the active call. When the hold key is pressed, the call is not released.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
208 Call Hold, Individual Hold Enhancement  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
209  
Call Hold, Permanent  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 209)  
"Operating parameters" (page 209)  
"Feature interactions" (page 210)  
"Feature packaging" (page 211)  
"Feature implementation" (page 212)  
"Feature operation" (page 212)  
Feature description  
Permanent Hold holds an active call on a 2500 telephone without attendant  
assistance. Calls cannot be originated or received while in the Permanent  
Hold mode. Incoming calls receive a busy signal if Hunting is not defined for  
the called telephone.  
If the telephone user goes on-hook after activating Permanent Hold, the  
telephone periodically receives a one-second ring burst as a reminder that  
the call is on hold. This interval is defined at the customer level.  
Operating parameters  
Permanent Hold is allowed only when a call is active, and if the Class  
of Service allows transfer.  
If Busy Verify is attempted on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold,  
busy tone is received.  
Override cannot be used on a telephone with a call on Permanent Hold.  
Permanent Hold cannot be activated during a Conference call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
210 Call Hold, Permanent  
Two parties, connected trunk-to-trunk, can activate Permanent Hold at the  
same time if they both have the feature defined. After being placed on  
Permanent Hold, the second party can flash the switchhook and dial #4 to  
hold the call. After flashing the switchhook, any dialing sequence other than  
the access code results in overflow tone.  
Permanent Hold is not supported on station-to-station calls.  
If the telephone activating Permanent Hold is part of a mixed arrangement  
with another 2500, or Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, the following events  
occur:  
•
If a different telephone with the same DN goes off hook, that telephone  
connects to the held party.  
•
When Permanent Hold is activated, the DN lamp on the Meridian 1  
proprietary telephone remains steadily lit.  
If the telephone activating Permanent Hold goes off hook, it is automatically  
reconnected to the held call.  
If the held party disconnects, the hold reminder ring stops.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Break-In  
The attendant cannot break in to a call on hold.  
Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH)  
If Audible Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) is enabled in LD 15, the Audible  
Reminder of Held Call (ARCH) timer takes precedence over the Permanent  
Hold timer.  
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall  
Call Hold Permanent is activated when the attendant presses the HOLD  
key, then the Release (RLS) key, when extending a call; then the call is  
held permanently on the Loop key. If the attendant retrieves the original  
call on hold by pressing the Loop key, the recall timer is stopped. If the  
attendant then presses the RLS key, the call is extended, and the recall  
timer is restarted.  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
A Disconnect Timer applies to held calls on all trunks on the route. All  
answered calls in the held state are disconnected if left in that state for  
an extended period.  
Calling Party Privacy  
When a user answers a held incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator,  
no Calling Party Number or Name are displayed on the telephone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature packaging 211  
Camp-On, Forced  
Override, Enhanced  
Override, Priority  
Neither held calls nor telephones with calls on hold can be camped on or  
overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting  
either Forced Camp-on or Priority Override.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
Monitoring is not affected if any caller involved in the monitor’s call activates  
hold, except for the case of a simple call. For a monitored simple call,  
activating hold deactivates monitoring. In all cases, activation of music on  
hold deactivates monitoring.  
An attendant monitoring a call cannot put the monitored DN on hold. The  
attendant pressing the hold key has no effect while monitoring is enabled.  
DECT and DCS telephones  
With CS 1000 Release 4.5 and later, you cannot activate Permanent Hold  
(PHD) from DECT and DCS telephones. Users hear overflow tone if they  
attempt to activate the feature.  
You cannot configure the PHD feature on these telephones as of CS 1000  
Release 4.5 in LD 10.  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion  
Executive Intrusion is denied if the requested party is put on hold by another  
station at the same node. This restriction also applies to the unrequested  
party, if the unrequested party is located at the same node as the requested  
party (standalone), or if the requested party and the unrequested party  
are linked using DPNSS1.  
Predictive Dialing  
If an established call is put on hold by the set initiating the Fast Transfer,  
the switch cannot transfer the call. The switch can only transfer a call if  
the call is in the established state.  
Privacy  
A call placed on Permanent Hold no longer has Privacy. Privacy is reinstated  
when the call is removed from Permanent Hold.  
Feature packaging  
Special Service for 2500 Sets (SS25) package 18 includes Permanent Hold,  
and has no feature package dependencies.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
212 Call Hold, Permanent  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold reminder ring timer for the  
customer." (page 212)  
Enable/disable Permanent Hold reminder ring timer for the customer.  
2. "LD 10 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones." (page  
212)  
Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones.  
LD 15 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold reminder ring timer for the customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
TIM  
Timers.  
Customer number.  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
0-31  
- PHDT  
1-(30)-63  
Permanent Hold reminder ring timing in two-second increments  
(that is, 30 = 60 seconds).  
LD 10 - Enable/disable Permanent Hold for 2500 telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number.  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
FTR  
XFA  
PHD  
Allow transfer.  
Enable Permanent Hold.  
Feature operation  
To place a call on hold, follow these steps:  
•
•
•
While on an active call, flash the switchhook, or press the Link key.  
Dial #4, or the Flexible Feature Code (FFC), if enabled.  
Hang up.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature operation 213  
The Permanent Hold timer begins.  
To retrieve a held call, lift the handset.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214 Call Hold, Permanent  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
215  
Call Park  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 215)  
"Operating parameters" (page 216)  
"Feature interactions" (page 217)  
"Feature packaging" (page 223)  
"Feature implementation" (page 223)  
"Feature operation" (page 225)  
Feature description  
Call Park (CPRK) places a call in a parked state, similar to hold, where it  
can be retrieved by any attendant console or telephone. A parked call must  
have an access ID, also known as a Park DN. This is done by parking the  
call on a System Park DN or on any telephone Directory Number (DN) in  
the system. A parked call does not occupy a DN, nor is there a lamp to  
indicate its presence.  
Up to 50 System Park DNs are available per customer. There is no limit to  
the number of DNs that can be used as a Call Park access ID. However,  
only one call at a time can be parked against any particular telephone or  
System Park DN.  
In addition, the system can offer a default access ID. If System Call Park is  
defined, the default access ID for attendant consoles and Meridian Digital  
Telephones is the next available System Park DN.  
If System Park DNs are not defined for the customer, the default access ID  
is the DN of the telephone where the call was parked. An attendant must  
press the Park key and enter a DN if System Park DNs are not defined.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
216 Call Park  
Park the call, then page the person called. The person called then picks  
up the call directly or through the attendant. Call Park also enables the  
telephone that originally receives the call to park it so that another telephone  
can retrieve it later. The telephone placing the call in Park is free to make  
or answer other calls.  
Calls can be parked from telephones or attendant consoles with the Park  
key/lamp pair or Special Prefix (SPRE) code. Parked calls not retrieved  
within a specified time (30 to 240 seconds) are recalled to the telephone  
that parked it. Music for parked calls can be provided if Music (MUS)  
package 44 is installed.  
If a call is parked on a System Park DN, it is recalled to the attendant who  
parked it if the parking attendant is idle. If the parking attendant is busy, the  
call is presented to any idle attendant.  
If a call is parked on a telephone DN, the recall is placed in the attendant  
queue and presented to any available attendant. In all cases, parked calls  
recalled to the attendant appear on the Recall Incoming Call Identification  
(ICI) key, if defined.  
The Park DN of the most recently parked call can be displayed again on  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones equipped with displays, a Park key, and a  
Display key. This is done by pressing the Display key, then the Park key.  
The attendant can display the last call parked by pressing the Park key  
when no loop key is active.  
Operating parameters  
Call Park is not available for calls on Dial Intercom keys or for calls on  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones designated as Dial Intercom telephones.  
Call Park is not permitted when Privacy Release or Conference is active.  
Calls parked from Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and analog (500/2500  
type) telephones are recalled to the telephone that parked the call.  
When a Multiple Appearance Single Call telephone mix (the same DN  
appears on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, and single-line telephones)  
is parked, other appearances are not automatically bridged to the parked  
call when going off hook. The call can be retrieved by another Multiple  
Appearance DN (MADN) telephone only by dialing the Call Park retrieval  
code and the DN.  
Remote access (for example, Centralized Attendant Service or Direct  
Inward System Access) for parked parties is not permitted.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 217  
Private lines, attendant DNs, Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), and Direct  
Inward System Access (DISA) DNs are not valid park numbers.  
Trunks without disconnect supervision cannot be parked.  
Parked calls are not retained during initialization or SYSLOAD.  
Parked calls cannot be accessed with the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
In-calls key. If parked access from Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
positions is required, a DN key must be provided.  
A parked call recall cannot be placed on hold by the attendant.  
A call transferred to the attendant by the Conference key on a Meridian 1  
proprietary telephone cannot be parked by the attendant. A call transferred  
to the attendant by the Transfer key on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
can be parked by the attendant.  
Feature interactions  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1  
If Party Z parks the call initiated by Party X (an external caller), then the  
AC15 Recall: Transfer cannot be used to call Party Y. Party Z can neither  
park, selectively, one member of a split trunk nor park a whole split trunk.  
This avoids a recall to an attendant on the recall originating node that would  
not be able to send a recall to toggle from one party to another.  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar  
Remote access to call park from AC15 TIE trunks is not permitted. It is not  
possible to park an AC15 trunk if it has a call on hold. When an AC15 trunk  
is parked, it is not allowed to initiate a consultation call.  
Access Restrictions  
A call can be parked on any DN, regardless of its Class of Service. Access  
to a parked call is governed by the same Class of Service limitations for  
normal trunk-to-telephone call processing. Table 1 "Accessing telephone  
Class of Service" (page 217) details the limitations. These limitations can  
be overridden with the Authorization Code.  
Table 1  
Accessing telephone Class of Service  
Accessing telephone Class of Service  
Parked call type  
FRE  
FR1  
FR2  
Telephone  
allowed  
denied  
allowed  
denied  
allowed  
denied  
CO/FX/WATS  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
218 Call Park  
Accessing telephone Class of Service  
Parked call type  
FRE  
FR1  
FR2  
DID Trunk  
TIE trunk  
denied  
allowed  
denied  
allowed  
denied  
denied  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
When a set parks a call charged with Advice of Charge, the calling party  
continues to be charged until the call is answered by another set.  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
It is not possible to park an Attendant Blocking of DN call. If a Call Park call  
recalls to a blocked DN, the recall is treated as if the DN is in a ringing state.  
Attendant Break-In  
The attendant cannot break in to a parked call.  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Calls parked by Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents are recalled to the  
ACD DN queue and presented to any available agent.  
Automatic Redial  
When an Automatic Redial (ARDL) call is not accepted by the calling party,  
the Call Park (PRK) key is ignored.  
Attendant Consoles  
The Call Park access code and the Park DN are displayed on the M2250  
attendant console for parked call recalls.  
Autodial  
Speed Call  
Autodial and Speed Calls can be programmed to park calls or access  
parked calls.  
Automatic Timed Reminders  
A Call Park recall to an attendant appears on the Recall Incoming Call  
Indicator.  
Busy Lamp Field  
A Busy Lamp Field can be equipped to display the status of System Park  
DNs.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature interactions 219  
Call Detail Recording (CDR)  
Call Detail Recording (CDR) records for Call Park are similar to the start  
and end records generated when a call is transferred or terminated. When a  
call is parked, a Call Detail Recording (CDR) start record is generated if one  
has not already been generated by another feature. A CDR record is not  
generated when the parked call is accessed. A CDR end record is generated  
when the trunk call is terminated or when a parked call disconnects.  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls  
There is no interaction with Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming  
Calls, as there is no "N" record generated in a Call Park scenario.  
Call Forward  
A recalled parked call to telephones with Call Forward, Call Forward Busy,  
or Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) is not forwarded.  
Call Page Network Wide  
A station set or attendant console that parks an external Call Page Network  
Wide (PAGENET) uncontrolled call is not blocked. However, an external  
PAGENET controlled call is blocked.  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
A 14-second Disconnect Timer applies to parked calls on all trunks on the  
route. All answered calls in the parked state is disconnected if left in that  
state for an extended period.  
Call Party Name Display  
Upon valid operation of the Park key, or dial-access if used, Call Party Name  
Display (CPND) shows the SPRE code and the Park Access ID. Because the  
Park Access Code is displayed, no CPND name is displayed. The only time  
that the digit display shows the actual DN of the parked party is when the  
parked party has been retrieved, put on hold, and then retrieved from hold.  
Call Pickup  
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user on a call can pick up a call by  
parking the existing call, then activating the Call Pickup feature.  
Call Pickup Network Wide  
The Call Pickup Network Wide feature cannot be used to pick up parked  
calls. A recall of a parked call can be picked up, in which case the call is  
un-parked and answered by the requesting party.  
Call Transfer  
Conference  
A parked call can be accessed after Call Transfer or Conference is activated.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
220 Call Park  
Call Waiting  
A recall of a parked call is not presented in the Call Waiting mode. If an  
internal telephone is in the parked state, Call Waiting to that telephone  
is not provided.  
Centralized Attendant Service  
Call Park is limited to the local system for systems equipped with Centralized  
Attendant Service. Call Park cannot be accessed from release-link trunks.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If a DN being monitored becomes parked by another party, the Attendant  
Monitor feature is deactivated.  
Conference  
A parked call can be accessed after Conference is activated  
Console Presentation Group Level Services  
If the attendant who parked a call on the System Park DN is busy when  
that call is recalled and the parking attendant does not belong to the same  
Console Presentation Group (CPG) specified for the tenant of the calling  
station, the parked call is presented to an idle attendant in the same CPG  
specified for the calling station. If no attendant in that CPG is available to  
receive the recall, the parked call is queued until one of the attendants  
in the CPG becomes idle.  
Tenant access checking between the set (A) who picks up a parked call and  
the party (B) who parked the call, is enforced as follows:  
•
•
If B is a set, tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between A and B.  
If B is an attendant, A and B must belong to the same CPG for  
tenant-to-tenant access.  
•
If access is denied, set A (who intends to pick up the access-denied  
parked call) receives a blocking tone.  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion  
Attempts to intrude into a parked call receive Executive Intrusion Denied  
treatment.  
Display of Calling Party Denied  
When the Call Park timer expires on a parked call, a set’s display reflects the  
Directory Number the call is parked against. The display does not include  
the name and DN of the calling party. When a parked call is retrieved by  
another set, display information is based on the DPD Class of Service of  
the individual sets.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 221  
Do Not Disturb  
Calls can be parked on telephone DNs that are in the Do Not Disturb mode  
(DND). Telephones in the DND mode can park a call or access a parked  
call. Recall of a parked call to a DND telephone is recalled to the attendant.  
Generic XFCOT Software Support  
Call Park feature allows an attendant or telephone user to place a call in  
parked state (connected to a parked DN) where it can be retrieved by  
any attendant console or station set. If the call is not retrieved after a  
customer-defined time, the call is recalled to the telephone user who parked  
it.  
Call Park is allowed on disconnect-supervised or unsupervised IPE  
loopstart Central Office trunks. If a caller on an unsupervised loopstart  
trunk disconnects while the call is in parked state is detected when the  
parked call is recalled or answered.  
Caller disconnection during park state is detected by a disconnect  
supervised loopstart trunk on an XFCOT card. The disconnected caller is  
then dropped from the parked DN.  
Group Call  
Call Park cannot be applied on a Group Call.  
Held Call Clearing  
A call put on hold during a Call Park is not cleared by an on-hook action  
on that set.  
Hot Line  
Analog (500/2500 type) Hot Line telephones with EHTA and XFA Class of  
Service are allowed to park calls using the established Call Park procedures.  
Once a call is parked on an analog (500/2500 type) Hot Line telephone  
and the telephone is placed on hook, it cannot be unparked. Parked calls  
will recall to the parking telephone after the Call Park timeout. Two-way  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone Hot Line stations that are equipped with a  
Call Park key/lamp pair are allowed to park calls in the normal fashion. As  
with analog (500/2500 type) telephones, a call parked from a Hot Line key  
cannot be picked up using the same key.  
In-Band Automatic Number Identification  
If an agent parks an In-Band ANI call and it times out and recalls the agent,  
the ANI number is not displayed.  
INIT ACD Queue Call Restore  
Parked calls are restored by ACDR as new incoming calls to the ACD DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
222 Call Park  
Intercept Computer Dial from Directory - Pre-dial Operation  
An attendant can park a call in the following manner:  
•
•
Press the Call Park key on the attendant console.  
Dial a DN from the Intercept Computer.  
Terminate Call Park operation by pressing the Release key.  
Make Set Busy  
Recall of a parked call to a telephone in the Make Set Busy mode is  
intercepted by the attendant.  
Multi-Tenant Service  
If the attendant who parked a call on the System Park DN is busy when  
that call is recalled and the parking attendant does not belong to the same  
Console Presentation Group (CPG) specified for the tenant of the calling  
station, the parked call is presented to an idle attendant in the same CPG  
specified for the calling station. If no attendant in that CPG is available to  
receive the recall, the parked call is queued until one of the attendants  
in the CPG becomes idle.  
Tenant access checking between the set (A) who picks up a parked call and  
the party (B) who parked the call, is enforced as follows:  
•
•
If B is a set, tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between A and B.  
If B is an attendant, A and B must belong to the same CPG for  
tenant-to-tenant access.  
•
If access is denied, set A (who intends to pick up the access-denied  
parked call) receives a blocking tone.  
Music  
When a call is parked, music is not heard. When a trunk is parked, music  
plays if music is enabled for the route.  
Network Intercom  
Private Line Service  
Hot Type I and Private Line Service calls cannot be parked.  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
When a metered call is parked from one station to another, the controlling  
station is charged until the call is answered.  
Privacy Override  
Calls in a Privacy Override conference state cannot be parked.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature implementation 223  
Privacy Release  
When a call from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone is parked, that  
telephone cannot activate Privacy Release. For example, Party A calls  
Party B. Party B parks the call. Party A cannot activate Privacy Release.  
Recall After Parking  
This enhancement to Call Park causes a parked call to be recalled to the  
attendant or night DN if the attendant is in Night Service, rather than to the  
parking telephone, if not answered within a customer-defined period of time  
(two-minute maximum). The call may be external or internal.  
The recall to the attendant appears on the Recall ICI key. If the attendant is  
in Night Service, the recall occurs to the night DN. If the night DN is busy,  
the call is queued if it is an external call.  
Traffic measurements  
TFC007 is included for Call Park. It provides traffic measurements for the  
following:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
system park usage  
system park overflow  
telephone park usage  
park access  
park recall  
average waiting time  
Feature packaging  
Call Park (CPRK) is package 33 and has no feature package dependencies.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable or disable Call Park." (page 224)  
Enable or disable Call Park.  
2. "LD 50 - Add/change or print Call Park. This overlay must be defined for  
Call Park operation." (page 224)  
Add/change or print Call Park. This overlay must be defined for Call  
Park operation.  
3. "LD 10 - Allow or deny access to Call Park for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 224)  
Allow or deny access to Call Park for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
224 Call Park  
4. "LD 11 - Add or change a Call Park key on Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 225)  
Add or change a Call Park key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
5. "LD 12 - Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles." (page  
225)  
Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles.  
LD 15 - Enable or disable Call Park.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
CPA  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Enable Call Park.  
- OPT  
LD 50 - Add/change or print Call Park. This overlay must be defined for Call Park operation.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Call Park data block.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CPTM  
CPK  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
30-(45)-240  
30-(45)-480  
Call Park Timer (in seconds).  
Call Park recall time (in seconds) if CPRK package 33 is  
equipped.  
The amount of time a call is held in the parked state before  
recalling the parking set or the attendant.  
SPDN  
MURT  
(0)-50 xxxx  
Number of contiguous System Park DNs and the first System  
Park DN. The default 0 (zero) disables System Park DN  
capability, but allows Telephone Park DNs.  
If the DN Expansion package is equipped, the System Park DN  
can have up to seven digits.  
Music route number for parked calls.  
For Large Systems  
For Small Systems  
0-511  
0-127  
LD 10 - Allow or deny access to Call Park for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
CHG  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 225  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
Description  
500  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
XFA  
Allow access to Call Park.  
LD 11 - Add or change a Call Park key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx PRK  
Add a Call Park key (key number must be 17 for the M2317).  
LD 12 - Add or change a Call Park key on attendant consoles.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Attendant console type.  
Terminal number  
2250  
TYPE  
TN  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx PRK  
Add a Call Park key (key number can be 00-19 on the M2250).  
Feature operation  
To park a call with the Park key:  
Step Action  
Press Park twice.  
1
If there is a System Park extension, the call is parked on it.  
Otherwise, it is parked on your extension.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
226 Call Park  
—End—  
To park a call on an extension other than the System Park extension, follow  
these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Press Park.  
Enter the extension number.  
Press Park again.  
—End—  
To park a call using SPRE codes, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Press Transfer or Conference.  
Dial SPRE 71.  
You can dial an extension number to park the call, or you can use  
the System Park extension, chosen automatically. It shows on your  
telephone’s display, if equipped.  
3
Press Transfer or Conference again.  
—End—  
To retrieve a parked call, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Select a free extension.  
Dial SPRE 72.  
Dial the extension where the call is parked.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
227  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 227)  
"Operating parameters" (page 227)  
"Feature interactions" (page 228)  
"Feature packaging" (page 228)  
"Feature implementation" (page 228)  
"Feature operation" (page 229)  
Feature description  
This enhancement to the Call Park feature allows Central Office (CO),  
FEX, and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunks, without disconnect  
supervision, to be call-parked. All other trunk types without disconnect  
supervision cannot be parked. The Disconnect Timer (DCTI) is used to  
prevent phantom calls from ringing beyond the set time. Answered calls in  
the held, parked, camped-on, or ringing state are disconnected when the  
DCTI times-out.  
This enhancement also allows Direct Inward System Access (DISA) on  
CO, FEX, and WATS trunks without disconnect supervision. DISA on  
unsupervised trunks does not intercept to the attendant, but is subject to  
Timed Forced Disconnect Timer, which prevents the CO trunk from being  
seized if the far end hangs up.  
Operating parameters  
The Disconnect Timer apples not only to Call Park but also to all trunks on  
the route. All answered calls in the held, parked, ringing, or Camp-On states  
is disconnected if left in that state for an extended period (this even applies  
to calls in a call waiting queue type).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
228 Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Calls Waiting Indication  
If all the attendants are busy and a Call Park Recall occurs, the recall is  
placed in the calls waiting queue. If the recalled station is busy when the  
recall occurs, the Disconnect Timer (DCTI) temporarily suspends timing  
until the recall is presented. After the recall is presented, the Disconnect  
Timer continues timing for the remainder of the period.  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
If all the ACD agents are busy and a Call Park Recall occurs, the recall is  
placed in the ACD DN queue.  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
Call Hold, Permanent  
A Disconnect Timer applies to held calls on all trunks on the route. All  
answered calls in the held state is disconnected if left in that state for an  
extended period.  
Call Park  
A 14-second Disconnect Timer applies to parked calls on all trunks on the  
route. All answered calls in the parked state is disconnected if left in that  
state for an extended period.  
Camp-On  
A Disconnect Timer applies to camped-on calls on all trunks on the route.  
All answered calls in the camped-on state is disconnected if left in that state  
for an extended period.  
Feature packaging  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks is included in Direct Inward System  
Access (DISA) package 22.  
Feature implementation  
LD 16 - Set the disconnect timer.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
RDB  
Route Data Block.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature operation 229  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
DCTI  
(0)-511  
Time, in seconds, that an extension is allowed to ring or be on  
hold or Call Park before the trunk is disconnected. 0, the default,  
or <CR> means that the condition goes on indefinitely.  
Respond with a value equal to the number of seconds a set is  
to ring after recall, plus the value of the Call Park Recall Timer  
(which is defined in LD 50 in response to the CPTM prompt).  
The value stored, which is the closest lower multiple of four, is  
echoed back upon entry.  
Feature operation  
Feature operation for Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks is the same as  
that for Call Park.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
230 Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
231  
Call Party Name Display  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 231)  
"Operating parameters" (page 234)  
"Feature interactions" (page 235)  
"Feature packaging" (page 239)  
"Feature implementation" (page 239)  
"Feature operation" (page 245)  
Feature description  
Call Party Name Display (CPND) identifies the calling or called number in  
addition to the DN. The identifier (for example, the name) associated with a  
DN on telephones with an alphanumeric display is defined in LD 95.  
Whenever the calling party’s DN displays on the terminating telephone, the  
calling party’s name also appears. Likewise, on an internal call, the called  
party’s name is appended to the displayed DN on the originator’s telephone,  
as soon as a valid DN is completely dialed.  
CPND displays the DN and name of the originally dialed party for redirected  
calls. A Class of Service, DNDA/DNDD (Dialed Name Display Allowed or  
Denied), is assigned on a per-telephone basis. The terminating telephone  
must have DNDA to display the name of the originally dialed party.  
The M2250 attendant console can extend a call to a DN requested by a  
calling party.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
232 Call Party Name Display  
Multi-Language CPND displays the party’s name in Roman/English or  
Katakana (Japanese alphabet) characters on Meridian modular telephones.  
The names are stored in the database under each character set and the  
language is specified with the Meridian modular program keys.  
Two languages can be stored in the database for any given name. For this  
enhancement to work fully, both telephones involved must have the same  
name in the same languages. (For example, John Smith calls Anne Jones.  
Both John and Anne must have Katakana in their database for the name to  
appear in Katakana characters. If John has Katakana enabled, but Anne  
does not, Anne sees the English version.)  
Entering Katakana, or any other non-ASCII Roman characters, requires a  
system terminal that supports eight-bit, no-parity Input/Output.  
The maintenance terminal must support ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 for the Roman  
character mode.  
Call Party Name Display assignment  
A CPND name string can be assigned to internal DNs associated with any  
of the following:  
•
•
•
•
•
analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
Trunk access codes  
Attendant DNs  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs  
Dial Intercom Group member numbers  
As a customer option for multiple appearance DNs (MADNs), the assigned  
CPND name can be linked with its member telephone’s designator (DES  
field in the TN block) to further identify the party of a shared DN.  
Call Party Name Display composition  
A CPND name is the name used to identify a DN, entered in ASCII  
alphanumeric character format. The maximum CPND length is the smaller  
of two values: the maximum length configured in LD 95 or 27 characters,  
including spaces and special characters.  
The ASCII characters supported are A-Z, 0-9, space, Hex 20-127, and the  
following special characters:  
" ( ) - # ,  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature description 233  
The NAME prompt in LDs 10, 11, and 95 accepts first name, a comma as  
a separator, and last name (such as Mary,Smith). CPND also supports  
names using a space separator (such as Mary Smith), treating the entire  
name string as the first name. See Table 2 "Response formats for CPND  
NAME prompt" (page 233) for examples.  
Table 2  
Response formats for CPND NAME prompt  
Entered Data  
Displayed Result  
Sue Smith  
Sue Smith <CR>  
Sue,Smith <CR>  
Sue Smith  
Sue <CR>  
Sue, <CR>  
Sue  
(Trailing comma is ignored.)  
Sue,Smith, Dept. 410 <CR>  
Sue Smith, Joe Brown <CR>  
Sue Smith, Dept. 410  
Sue Smith, Joe Brown  
The default is to accept the names as entered, replacing the comma with a  
space. Hence, a value entered as Mary,Smith displays as Mary Smith.  
Do not enter leading spaces. LD 95 ignores them. When CPND information  
is printed (using LD 10/11 or LD 20), the printout reflects what is in the  
database, not what appears on the telephone display.  
In addition to the caller’s name, a reason field can be provided to indicate  
the cause of a redirection. This is a customer option and the actual  
mnemonics are service changeable. The following call redirections have  
a reason displayed:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward No Answer  
Hunting/Call Forward Busy  
Call Transfer with Network Call Redirection  
Attendant Alternative Answering  
Call Pickup  
Display Devices and Capabilities  
The M2317 has a display line of 40 characters, 33 available for displaying  
DN-related information.  
If there are more characters than the telephone’s display allows, the system  
deletes letters to make the name fit.  
The M2250 attendant console is equipped with four lines of LCD  
alphanumeric display. Each line has 40 characters, and lines 2 and 3  
are used to display DN-related information. If the number of characters  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
234 Call Party Name Display  
displayed is more than 40, an arrow appears in the upper right corner  
of the display. The arrow alerts the user that more information can be  
retrieved using the scrolling keys. For complete information, refer to the  
M1250/M2250 Attendant Console User Guide  
The call type, originating or terminating telephone, and the Class of Service  
all affect the display and CPND information. Three Classes of Service are  
associated with the display function. CPND conforms to whichever Class of  
Service is configured for the telephone.  
•
•
•
Automatic Digit Display (ADD)  
Digit Display Selection (DDS)  
Touch phone Digit Display (TDD)  
No user interaction is required to display information on the call. On the  
M2317 telephone, however, the user can press the SAVE # softkey to save  
the name and number of the calling party. This applies to all outgoing and  
answered incoming calls.  
Operating parameters  
CPND is not displayed if a live call is not involved (for example, while  
programming a Speed Call key).  
Attendant Administration does not support the entry of CPND class marks  
for digital telephones.  
CPND is not displayed on the calling telephone while making an outgoing  
trunk call.  
CPND is not supported on data calls.  
CPND applies only to redirected calls on M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616,  
and M2317 telephones.  
For M2008, M2016, M2216, M2616, and M2317 telephones, CPND is  
provided on a per-telephone basis, depending on the Class of Service.  
DNDA (Dialed Name Display Allowed) and NDD (No Digit Display) Class  
of Service are mutually exclusive.  
Multi-Language CPND operates on Meridian modular telephones only.  
An individual DN can have Roman/English, or Katakana, or both  
programmed in the database if MLIO is equipped.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 235  
If the call destination is a trunk or a telephone type other than Meridian  
modular, the name is translated into the ASCII equivalent.  
Multi-Language CPND applies to DNs on local switches only. CPND for  
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) calls is displayed in English only.  
The CPND feature uses JIS X 0201-1976, the RCode for Information  
Interchanges, also known as JIS-Roman, which specifies the upper- and  
lower- case letters, numbers, punctuation and symbols, and Katakana.  
Feature interactions  
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall  
When the AC15 recall is presented to an attendant or a set with a display,  
the source and destination names are shown beside the DNs or the ACODs.  
ACD Routing by DNIS  
When an incoming trunk call from a route with Routing by DNIS is presented  
to a display telephone, the identification digits follow the regular trunk access  
code and member number. It precedes the CPND name for the DNIS DN.  
Attendant Recall  
Attendant Recall using the Attendant Recall key or a switchhook flash  
results in both source and destination information being displayed. No  
redirection reason is displayed, however. In this type of recall, the party that  
pressed the Attendant Recall key or switchhook is the destination party.  
Attendant Recall using Call Transfer or Conference displays the recalling  
party’s DN and CPND information on the attendant’s source line. No  
redirection reason is displayed. If the recall is done with the Transfer key  
the third party’s DN and CPND information are displayed on the source  
line when the transfer is complete.  
Attendant Recall with Splitting  
For the M2250 attendant console, M2317, and Meridian Modular sets,  
the appropriate DN and calling party’s name is correctly shown on the  
digit display when the attendant presses either the Exclude Source or the  
Exclude Destination key.  
Autodial  
Speed Call  
No name information displays during the programming of Autodial and  
Speed Call numbers.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
236 Call Party Name Display  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Dialed Number Identification Services  
(DNIS)  
If an incoming trunk call from a route with DNIS is presented to a display  
telephone, the identification digits follow the regular trunk access code  
and member number. It precedes the CPND name for the DNIS incoming  
trunk group.  
Automatic Wake Up  
All display information associated with Automatic Wake Up (AWU)  
programming is directed to line three of the display. Names are appended  
to DNs appearing on line three if they are different from those on line two,  
or if no DN appears on line two. There is no DN information on line two if  
the attendant has initiated the AWU process while not on an active call. No  
DES information is appended, since AWU operates on a DN basis.  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
When a call is put on hold, the holding telephone’s display clears. The held  
telephone’s display does not change. When the telephone reestablishes the  
call, the display returns the original DN and name.  
Call Park  
Upon valid operation of the Park key, or dial-access if used, CPND shows  
the SPRE code and the Park Access ID. Because the Park Access Code is  
displayed, no CPND name is displayed. The only time that the digit display  
shows the actual DN of the parked party is when the parked party has been  
retrieved, put on hold, and then retrieved from hold.  
Call Pickup  
For Call Pickup, CPND applies when the call is answered.  
Call Pickup Network Wide  
Network Call Party Name Display information is exchanged during Call  
Pickup Network Wide calls if the sets involved in the call would normally  
exchange the information for calls over the routes that have been used for  
the original call and the call pickup. Conversely, if Network Called Party  
Name Display would not operate for a normal call from the originating party  
to the terminating party, the service will not be supported when Call Pickup  
Network Wide is involved.  
Call Transfer  
When the Transfer key is pressed during an active call, the display clears.  
The call is in a held state. The DN and name of the transferred telephone  
appear on the display when the DN is dialed. When the transfer is complete,  
the transferring telephone’s display clears because the telephone is now  
disconnected. The transferred telephone’s display changes to show the  
name of the newly connected party.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 237  
Calling Party Privacy  
In current operations, if the International Supplementary Features (SUPP)  
package 131 is not equipped in the system, an incoming ISDN call with  
the Call Party Name Display (CPND) Indicator field set to "Presentation  
Denied" still displays the Calling Party Name. If package 131 is equipped  
in the system, the current operations will inhibit the Calling Party Name for  
an incoming ISDN call with the CPND Indicator field set to "Presentation  
Denied".  
The CPP feature will inhibit the display of the Calling Party Name for an  
incoming ISDN call with the CPND Indicator field set to "Presentation  
Denied" if package 131 is not equipped.  
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)  
When an attendant in the CAS mode extends a call to a remote station, the  
display shows only the source line.  
Conference  
When pressed during an active call, or to set up a conference, the  
Conference, Connect, or Join Parties key clears the display. The telephones  
involved in the conference have blank displays. If the conference returns  
to a two-way only call, each telephone displays the DN and name of the  
other telephone.  
Dial Intercom  
The display on telephones connected by Dial Intercom shows the group  
member’s DIG number plus CPND information.  
Dialed Number Identification Service  
If an incoming trunk call from a route with Dialed Number Identification  
Service (DNIS) is presented to a display telephone, the identification digits  
follow the regular trunk access code and member number. It precedes the  
CPND name for the DNIS incoming trunk group.  
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access  
Signaling System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working  
The Call Party Name Display feature is supported in a DPNSS1 UDP  
network. Names can be associated with the access codes of the DPNSS1  
UDP routes defined in LD 95.  
Display Key  
When pressed during a call, the Display key clears the display until pressed  
again. The original display reappears. When the telephone is inactive and  
the DSP key is pressed, followed by a function key like Autodial, no CPND  
information is displayed.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
238 Call Party Name Display  
End-to-End Signaling  
When entered after a call is answered, EES digits are displayed immediately  
following the CPND name of the connected party. Leading DN digits and  
name characters may be shifted out of the display window.  
ISDN  
On incoming ISDN calls, the Calling Line ID number can be displayed  
instead of a DN on the source party line. CPND applies to telephones  
configured for ISDN when redirection is supported. CPND allows calls to  
redirect across a network with Network Call Redirection. The CPND is  
maintained through the redirection.  
ISDN QSIG Name Display  
Call Party Name Display and Calling Party Name Display Denied  
interact with ISDN QSIG Name Display, depending on the Name Display  
configuration in LD 16 for BRI or LD 17 for PRI. When a QSIG network is  
interacting with an MCDN network providing network capability ND3, both  
the MCDN and QSIG Name Display feature function on the same level.  
Listed Directory Number  
CPND is not supported for LDNs. If the LDN is an incoming trunk route, the  
CPND assigned to the route access code is displayed.  
Manual Signaling (Buzz)  
If the Signal key is pressed to buzz another telephone, no digit or name  
display appears on the telephone.  
Meridian Hospitality Voice Services  
The maximum length of a CPND name sent from the PMSI/Background  
Terminal (BGD) is 27 characters. When the full 27 character length is used,  
part of the CPND name may scroll off the screen. To avoid this problem, the  
PMSI/Background Terminal (BGD) software has been updated to strip from  
the screen all trailing blanks from the CPND name.  
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration  
There is significant interaction between the Meridian 1 Call Party Name  
Display (CPND) database and the Meridian Mail VMB database. These  
interactions are further described in the "Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox  
Administration" description in Features and Services Fundamentals  
(NN43001-106), Book 2.  
Meridian 911  
The Call Party Name Display feature can be used to configure and display  
the incoming 911 route name.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature implementation 239  
Network Intercom  
Hot Type I calls display names the same as a normal call.  
Hot Type I calls that become a normal call indicate on the originating  
station’s display that the call is no longer a Hot Line call.  
Override  
When Overriding an established call, the displays of the other telephones  
show the DN and name of the overriding party.  
Slow Answer Recall  
Slow Answer Recall results in displays showing source and destination  
information. If a redirection occurs, the reason is displayed.  
Voice Call  
The telephone originating a Voice Call displays the called DN’s CPND. The  
called telephone shows the caller’s DN and name on its display.  
Feature packaging  
Call Party Name Display (CPND) package 95 requires:  
•
•
•
•
•
Digit Display (DDSP) package 19  
M2000 Digital Sets (DSET) package 88  
M3000 Digital Sets (TSET) package 89 or  
M2317 Digital Sets (DLT2) package 91  
Aries Digital Sets (ARIE) package 170  
Multi-Language CPND requires Multi-Language TTY Input/Output (MLIO)  
package 211.  
If the designator field is to be used for multiple-appearance DNs, CPND  
requires:  
•
Office Data Administration System (ODAS) package 20  
For Hotel/Motel applications configuring CPND, CPND requires:  
•
•
Background Terminal Facility (BGD) package 99  
Multi-Language TTY Input/Output (MLIO) package 211 to support  
eight-bit, no-parity system terminals  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 95 - Create the CPND data block." (page 240)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
240 Call Party Name Display  
Create the CPND data block.  
2. "LD 95 - Add names to the CPND data block." (page 241)  
Add names to the CPND data block.  
3. "LD 10 - Allow names to be assigned to analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 242)  
Allow names to be assigned to analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
4. "LD 11 - Allow names to display on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."  
(page 242)  
Allow names to display on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
5. "LD 12 - Allow names to display on attendant consoles." (page 242)  
Allow names to display on attendant consoles.  
6. "LD 95 - Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries."  
(page 243)  
Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries.  
7. "LD 95 - Print information associated with entries in the CPND data  
block." (page 244)  
Print information associated with entries in the CPND data block.  
8. "LD 10/11 - Add or change CPND name." (page 244)  
Add or change CPND name.  
Before name strings can be assigned to various telephones, the CPND  
data block must be created in LD 95. The number and size of CPND  
name strings is limited by available space in the Protected Data Store, so  
it is recommended that you initially use a small number for the maximum  
character length.  
Enable CPND and add names to the CPND data block  
LD 95 - Create the CPND data block.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
Description  
Create CPND database (or open existing database).  
CPND data block.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CNFG  
MXLN  
CPND  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Standalone memory.  
<CR>  
5-(17)-27  
Maximum number of characters allowed in each name string.  
Once defined, this value can be changed only by removing the  
CPND data block and recreating it.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature implementation 241  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
STAL  
(NO) YES  
Static allocation of name storage. Must be YES if Background  
Terminal is equipped, or whenever name strings change  
frequently.  
- DFLN  
5-MXLN  
Average default character string length. Suggested default is 13  
or the maximum length given to MXLN, whichever is less.  
Prompted if STAL = YES.  
DES  
RESN  
(NO) YES  
(NO) YES  
aaaa (F)  
aaaa (N)  
aaaa (B)  
aaaa (P)  
xxxx (T)  
(Do not) allow designator for MADNs.  
(Do not) allow display of reason for redirecting calls.  
Mnemonic for Call Forward All Calls display.  
Mnemonic for Call Forward No Answer display.  
Mnemonic for Hunt/Call Forward Busy display.  
Mnemonic for Call Pickup display.  
- CFWD  
- CFNA  
- HUNT  
- PKUP  
- XFER  
- AAA  
Mnemonic for Call Transfer display for NCRD.  
Mnemonic for Attendant Alternative Answering.  
aaaa (A)  
LD 95 - Add names to the CPND data block.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
Description  
Open CPND data block to add new entries.  
Create a new name string.  
TYPE  
LANG  
NAME  
(ROM) KAT <CR> Store the name in Roman or Katakana. <CR> stores the name  
in English.  
xx  
CUST  
DIG  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
0-2045 0-99  
Dial Intercom Group number and member number. Each time  
a name string is assigned to a Dial Intercom Group member,  
the DIG prompt repeats, until a carriage return is entered to go  
to the DN prompt.  
<CR>  
Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to assign  
names on a DN basis.  
- NAME  
- XPLN  
aaaa bbbb  
xx  
CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.  
Expected Length.  
Range must be between the Input Name length and the MXLN,  
or it defaults to DFLN.  
<CR>  
Set XPLN to average default character string length (DFLN) or  
the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.  
xxx...x  
DN  
DN to which name string is linked.  
- NAME  
aaaa bbbb  
CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
242 Call Party Name Display  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
xx  
- XPLN  
Expected Length.  
Range must be between the Input Name length and the MXLN,  
or it defaults to DFLN.  
<CR>  
Set XPLN to average default character string length (DFLN) or  
the actual length (NAME), whichever is longer.  
xxx  
DCNO  
IDC  
IDC conversion table number (0-254).  
nnn  
Existing complete or partial IDC number.  
Prompted only when DCNO is valid.  
NAME  
aaaa bbbb  
CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.  
LD 10 - Allow names to be assigned to analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
FTR  
CPND  
Allow CPND name assignment on this telephone.  
LD 11 - Allow names to display on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(CNDD) CNDA  
(DNDD) DNDA  
(Deny) allow display of CPND entries.  
(Deny) allow display of CPND originally dialed entries.  
LD 12 - Allow names to display on attendant consoles.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
CHG  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature implementation 243  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
Description  
2250  
Attendant console type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CPND  
DNDI  
(CNDD) CNDA  
(DNDD) DNDA  
(Deny) allow CPND name assignment.  
(Deny) allow display of originally dialed CPND entries.  
Change or remove names in the CPND data block  
LD 95 - Open the CPND data block to change or remove entries.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG OUT  
NAME  
Description  
Change, or remove an existing entry.  
Change, or remove an existing CPND name string.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
TYPE  
CUST  
LANG  
xx  
ROM KAT ALL  
Change or remove the name in Roman or Katakana. ALL is  
used to remove all names stored for the DIG.  
0-2045 0-99  
ALL <CR>  
DIG  
Dial Intercom Group number and member number. Each time  
a name string is assigned to or removed from a Dial Intercom  
Group member, the DIG prompt repeats, until a carriage return  
is entered to go to the DN prompt. ALL removes all entries for  
that DIG. <CR> bypasses DIG and goes to the DN.  
- NAME  
DN  
aaaa bbbb  
CPND name string for this DIG; maximum of 27 characters.  
<CR>  
xxx...x  
Leave this entry unchanged.  
DN of name string being changed or removed.  
ALL  
Remove all DN-defined entries.  
<CR>  
aaaa bbbb  
xxx  
Return to REQ prompt.  
- NAME  
DCNO  
- IDC  
CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.  
IDC conversion table number (0-254).  
nnn  
Existing complete or partial IDC number.  
Prompted only when DCNO is valid.  
NAME  
aaaa bbbb  
CPND name string; maximum of 27 characters.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
244 Call Party Name Display  
Print entries from the CPND data block  
LD 95 - Print information associated with entries in the CPND data block.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
PRT  
Description  
Print entries in the CPND data block.  
CPND name strings.  
TYPE  
CUST  
LANG  
PAGE  
DIG  
NAME  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Print names in Roman or Katakana.  
Page headers and page numbers for multiple DNs and DIGs.  
Print information on all entries defined by Dial Intercom Groups.  
ROM KAT  
(NO) YES  
ALL  
0-2045 0-99  
<CR>  
Dial Intercom Group and member number. The DIG prompt  
repeats until a carriage return is entered.  
Bypass Dial Intercom Group and go to the DN prompt to print  
information on a DN basis.  
DN  
ALL  
Print information on all DN entries.  
xxxx  
<CR>  
DN to print information from. DN prompt repeats until a carriage  
return is entered.  
Return to REQ prompt.  
xxx  
DCNO  
- IDC  
IDC conversion table number (0-254).  
nnn  
Existing complete or partial IDC number. Prompted only when  
DCNO is valid.  
ALL  
All names defined are printed.  
SHRT  
Short form.  
(NO)  
YES  
Prints one IDC per single line.  
Prints several IDCs on single line.  
Add or change CPND name entry for a telephone  
LD 10/11 - Add or change CPND name.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
NEW CHG  
a...a  
Description  
Add or change CPND name information.  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature operation 245  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
CPND  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Add, change, or remove the CPND information.  
Use Roman or Katakana characters.  
NEW CHG OUT  
CPND_LAN (ROM) KAT  
G
NAME  
XPLN  
aaaa bbbb  
xx  
CPND name; maximum of 27 characters.  
Expected name length.  
DISPLAY_F (FIRST) LAST  
MT  
First name; Last name (John Doe).  
Last name; First name (Doe John).  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
246 Call Party Name Display  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
247  
Call Pickup  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 247)  
"Operating parameters" (page 248)  
"Feature interactions" (page 248)  
"Feature packaging" (page 250)  
"Feature implementation" (page 250)  
"Feature operation" (page 252)  
Feature description  
Call Pickup allows telephones to be arranged in groups consisting of  
any combination of analog (500/2500 type) telephones, and Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
Telephones can be specified as Call Pickup allowed or Call Pickup denied.  
If the telephone’s Class of Service is Call Pickup allowed, the user can  
answer calls made to any telephone within the Call Pickup group. If the  
telephone’s Class of Service is Call Pickup denied, but the telephone is  
assigned to a Call Pickup group, the user cannot answer calls directed to  
other telephones. Calls to the denied telephone, however, can be answered  
by other members of the group.  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones can dial-access this feature, or be  
equipped with a Call Pickup key. An associated lamp is not required.  
Central Office (CO) Trunk Priority, provides CO trunk calls priority over other  
calls within the distinctive ringing and normal ringing queues. If the CO  
Trunk Priority is implemented, calls are answered in the following order:  
•
•
Distinctive Ringing Queue CO call (Priority 1)  
Distinctive Ringing Queue non-CO call (Priority 3)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
248 Call Pickup  
•
•
Normal Ringing Queue CO call (Priority 2)  
Normal Ringing Queue non-CO call (Priority 4)  
Operating parameters  
The number of Call Pickup groups is 4095. The number of members  
assigned to each group is unlimited, depending on available system  
memory.  
Feature interactions  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
Calls charged with Advice of Charge that are either transferred, extended or  
redirected to another set using Call Pickup are charged against the last set  
that answers the call and the controlling set releases.  
Attendant Alternative Answering  
The Attendant Alternative Answering (AAA) DN can be assigned to a Call  
Pickup group to allow members of the same group to answer the call.  
Attendant Overflow Position  
An Attendant Overflow Position Call presented to the AOP DN can be picked  
up by any station belonging to the same Call Pickup Group.  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) DNs are not supported by Call Pickup.  
Call Park  
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user on a call can pick up a call by  
parking the existing call, then activating the Call Pickup feature.  
Calling Party Privacy  
If an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Indicator is picked up locally, the  
display of the calling Party Number and Name are not displayed on the  
terminating set.  
Call Detail Recording on Redirected Incoming Calls  
When an incoming call is picked up, the answering set is identified in the  
Terminating ID. This operation remains the same.  
Call Pickup, Directed  
Call Pickup can be assigned to a telephone independent of Directed Call  
Pickup (DCP).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Feature interactions 249  
Conference  
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call. Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones can activate Call Pickup if an idle Directory Number  
(DN) key is available. The conference call must be put on hold before  
pressing the idle DN key to pick up the call.  
Dial Intercom  
Call Pickup may be used by Meridian 1 proprietary telephones if the  
telephones are all in the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG) and Call Pickup  
Group and the ring option is specified for the DIG  
Digital Private Network Signaling System (DPNSS1)/Digital Access  
Signaling System (DASS2) Uniform Dialing Plan (UDP) Inter-working  
Call Pickup is supported in a DPNSS1 UDP network.  
Display of Calling Party Denied  
When a call is picked up from another set, the terminating set’s display  
is in accordance with the Class of Service of the dialed and calling sets.  
The calling party’s display includes the dialed DN, the terminating DN and  
the name of the terminated set. However, if the terminating set has Digit  
Display Denied (DDGD), then both the dialed and terminating sets’ DNs  
are blocked from the calling party’s display. The same occurs when Digit  
Display Allowed (DDGA) is configured on the terminating set. Both the  
dialed and terminating sets’ DNs are displayed on the calling party’s set,  
regardless of the Class of Service of the dialed set.  
Flexible Feature Codes  
Flexible Feature Codes are not supported on a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone during an attempt to pick up a Dial Intercom ringing call.  
Group Call  
This feature can be used to answer a Group Call if it is activated by a valid  
telephone in the same Call Pickup group, or by using Directory Number  
(DN) Pickup or Group Pickup.  
Hot Line  
Telephones with two-way Hot Line keys, and analog (500/2500 type) Hot  
Line telephones, can be assigned to pickup groups. Incoming Hot Line calls  
may be picked up by group members. To prevent someone from picking up  
a Hot Line call, do not put the Hot Line user into a Call Pickup group.  
ISDN QSIG Name Display  
An incoming QSIG call with name display presentation allowed has name  
information displayed on the set that picks up the call. If the incoming QSIG  
call has presentation denied, the calling party’s name is not displayed on  
the set picking up the incoming call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
250 Call Pickup  
Multi-Party Operations  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones with PUA and TSA Class of Service can  
pick up a call only if they are not involved in another call. After picking up a  
call, the user can form a Consultation connection and dial Programmable  
Control Digits as normal.  
Network Intercom  
Hot Type I calls cannot be picked up. An attempt to pick up a Hot Type I call  
results in an overflow tone.  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
Metered calls transferred or extended from one station and answered at  
another station using the Call Pickup feature are charged against the station  
where the call is picked up as the controlling party disconnects.  
M3900 (Single Site) Virtual Office  
The Call Pickup feature is not supported for Virtual Set TNs. A Virtual Set  
cannot be a member of a call pickup group since the DPU and GPU keys  
cannot be configured.  
The RNPG prompt is blocked in LD 11. Dialing a SPRE code for Call Pickup  
from a logged in Host Telephone results in overflow tone.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Implement CO Trunk Priority in the Customer Data Block."  
(page 251)  
Implement CO Trunk Priority in the Customer Data Block.  
2. "LD 10 - Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 251)  
Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key  
for Meridian 1 proprietary t" (page 251)  
Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key for  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature implementation 251  
LD 15 - Implement CO Trunk Priority in the Customer Data Block.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Features and options  
Customer number  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
0-31  
- OPT  
(COX) COP  
CO Trunk Priority for the Call Pickup feature.  
COX is no Priority.  
LD 10 - Define Call Pickup group and Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
0-4095  
PUA  
RNPG  
CLS  
Call Pickup group number.  
Allow Call Pickup.  
LD 11 - Define Call Pickup group, Class of Service, and Call Pickup key for Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
0-4095  
PUA  
RNPG  
CLS  
Call Pickup group number.  
Allow Call Pickup.  
KEY  
xx RNP  
Add a Call Pickup key.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
252 Call Pickup  
Feature operation  
To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Lift the handset, or press a DN key.  
Press Call Pickup or dial SPRE + 3.  
—End—  
To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Lift the handset.  
Dial SPRE 3 or PURN FFC.  
You are connected to the caller.  
If you are on a call when another call comes in for someone in your  
Call Pickup group, you must end, park, or transfer the existing call  
before you can answer the new call.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
253  
Call Pickup, Directed  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 253)  
"Operating parameters" (page 254)  
"Feature interactions" (page 254)  
"Feature packaging" (page 254)  
"Feature implementation" (page 254)  
"Feature operation" (page 256)  
Feature description  
Directed Call Pickup (DCP) allows a caller from one Call Pickup group to  
pick up a ringing call in another Call Pickup group. The ringing call is picked  
up by dialing either its Call Pickup Group number or the DN on which it is  
ringing.  
Directed Call Pickup adds two new methods of Call Pickup to the existing  
Call Pickup feature:  
•
•
Group Pickup (GPU), and  
DN Pickup (DPU).  
Group Pickup lets you pick up any ringing call in your own pickup group,  
or any pickup group in the system.  
DN Pickup allows pickup of a call ringing on a specified DN. If a DN is not  
assigned to any group, it defaults to Group Zero (0). This prevents any  
other group from picking up that DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
254 Call Pickup, Directed  
Both GPU and DPU can be activated using programmable keys or Special  
Prefix (SPRE) code dialing. Each pickup method can be assigned to a  
telephone independent of the others.  
The dialed digits (DN or group number) are displayed on the Digit Display as  
dialed. Like the Call Pickup feature, the lamp is optional for the Call Pickup  
and Group Call Pickup keys. No second dial tone is given after the key is  
pressed, nor is it given after the SPRE code is dialed.  
Operating parameters  
Group 0 (zero) is not a valid group number. A telephone that is not part of  
any group is assigned by default to group 0 (zero).  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Automatic Call Distribution DNs are not supported by Directed Call Pickup.  
Call Pickup  
Call Pickup can be assigned to a telephone independent of Directed Call  
Pickup (DCP).  
Flexible Feature Code  
Flexible Feature Codes are not supported on a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone during an attempt to pick up a Dial Intercom ringing call.  
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service  
Users of analog (500/2500 type) telephones involved in a Three-Party  
Service call cannot pick up another call by dialing the SPRE code.  
Feature packaging  
Directed Call Pickup (DCP) is package 115 and has no feature package  
requirements.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups."  
(page 255)  
Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups.  
2. "LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones to allow DCP  
Class of Service." (page 255)  
Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones to allow DCP Class of  
Service.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature implementation 255  
3. "LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to allow Directed  
Call Pickup Class of Service." (page 255)  
Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to allow Directed Call  
Pickup Class of Service.  
LD 15 - Define the number of digits dialed for Call Pickup groups.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Options.  
- OPT  
(COX)  
COP  
Central Office call No Priority for Ringing (default).  
Central Office call Priority for Ringing.  
- PKND  
(1)-4  
Number of digits dialed for Group Pickup.  
Prompted only if DCP is equipped.  
LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones to allow DCP Class of Service.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
RNPG  
CLS  
(0)-4095  
Ringing Number Pickup Group.  
0 = no pickup group.  
(GPUD) GPUA  
(DPUD) DPUA  
(Deny) allow Group Pickup.  
(Deny) allow DN Pickup.  
LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones to allow Directed Call Pickup Class  
of Service.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
CHG  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
256 Call Pickup, Directed  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
Description  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
0-4095  
RNPG  
Call Pickup Group.  
0 = no pickup group.  
CLS  
KEY  
(GPUD) GPUA  
(DPUD) DPUA  
(Deny) allow Group Pickup.  
(Deny) allow DN Pickup.  
xx GPU  
xx DPU  
Group Pickup key.  
DN Pickup key.  
Feature operation  
To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Lift the handset.  
Press GRP Pickup or dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.  
Dial the pickup group number.  
—End—  
To answer a call on a specified DN from a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Lift the handset.  
Press DN Pickup or dial SPRE + 95 or PUDN FFC.  
Dial the extension number.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 257  
To answer a call in another Call Pickup group from an analog (500/2500  
type) telephone, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 94 or PUGR FFC.  
Dial the pickup group number.  
—End—  
To answer a call on a specified DN from an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone:  
Step Action  
1
2
Lift the handset and dial SPRE + 95 or PUDN FFC.  
Dial the extension number.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
258 Call Pickup, Directed  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
259  
Call Redirection by Day  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 259)  
"Operating parameters" (page 260)  
"Feature interactions" (page 260)  
"Feature packaging" (page 262)  
"Feature implementation" (page 262)  
"Feature operation" (page 266)  
Feature description  
Call Redirection by Day (CRDAY) is an enhancement of the feature Call  
Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD). The CRDAY feature allows you to  
automatically redirect incoming calls on specified days of the week and/or  
holidays. You can define the number of rings required before a call is  
redirected, and the Directory Number (DN) to which the call is redirected.  
Existing parameters that apply to the operation and redirection of DNs of  
Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) and Hunting also apply to this feature.  
The CRDAY feature also uses the alternate DNs introduced by the CRTOD  
feature.  
You can configure up to four alternate day lists, DAY0 – DAY3, for each  
customer. Each day list can contain one or more days of the week. You can  
also configure up to four holiday lists, HOLIDAY0 – HOLIDAY3, for each  
customer. Each holiday list can contain up to 20 dates.  
You can assign one alternate day list and/or one alternate holiday list for  
each telephone. The maximum value of the year in a holiday date is 2104.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
260 Call Redirection by Day  
There is a class of service (CLS) for each of CRTOD, CRDAY, and Call  
Redirection by Holiday (CRHOL). Each CLS can be enabled or disabled  
separately and are independent of each other.  
At the CRDAY prompt, answering “YES” or “NO” does not fully enable or  
disable the feature. To enable the feature, you must define at least one of  
the alternate day lists (DAY0 - DAY3)—call redirection to the alternate DN  
then takes place, even if you enter “NO” at the CRDAY prompt. Similarly,  
to disable the feature, all alternate day lists must remain undefined—call  
redirection does not take place, even if you enter “YES” at the CRDAY  
prompt.  
Operating parameters  
CRDAY is not supported on Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) sets.  
Feature interactions  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
The CRTOD and CRDAY features can work together or separately. If all  
three classes of service are enabled, CRHOL takes precedence over  
CRDAY and CRTOD. When the CRDAY and CRTOD classes of service are  
enabled, CRDAY takes precedence.  
When incoming calls require redirection, the order of precedence for which  
the system handles no answer and busy calls, is listed below:  
Calls to Idle Stations:  
Call Forward All Calls  
Message Waiting  
Call Forward No Answer  
Attendant Recall  
Calls to Busy Stations:  
Call Forward All Calls  
Hunting  
Call Waiting or Camp-On  
Message Waiting Forward Busy  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Forward, Internal  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 261  
Call Forward No Answer  
When Call Redirection by Day (CRDAY) is activated, calls unanswered  
after a specified number of rings are sent to Call Forward No Answer  
feature (CFNA) and forwarded to the alternate DN based on the alternative  
days/holidays configured for the set.  
Call Forward All Calls  
All unanswered incoming calls are sent to the Call Forward All Calls feature  
if there is no answer then the call is sent to the alternate CRDAY DN  
specified for that day/holiday.  
Call Waiting Redirection  
When Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) occurs on a waiting call, the Call  
Waiting Redirection (CWTR) feature redirects the call to a specified DN  
based upon the alternate days and/or holidays configured for the set. If the  
current day matches one of the busy set’s alternate days or holidays, then  
the call is redirected to the CRDAY alternate DN.  
Hunting  
Hunting allows a call encountering a busy DN to route automatically to  
another DN. When CRDAY is enabled and an incoming call reaches a busy  
DN, the current day is checked against the alternate days and holidays  
specified for that set. If the current day matches one of the alternate days,  
the call begins the hunting route using the alternate redirection DNs defined  
for the set.  
Hunting by Call Type  
The Hunt by Call Type redirects an incoming call to a HUNT DN. With  
CRDAY enabled on the called DN, the incoming calls on specified Alternate  
Days and Holidays are redirected to the assigned alternate HUNT DN.  
Group Hunting  
The Group Hunting feature provides a method of hunting DNs in a group.  
The group is associated with a Pilot DN, that is, a DN with no associated  
Terminal Number (TN). The hunting is done in the order of entry of DNs in  
the group. If a set’s list of alternate days and/or holidays program matches  
the current day, incoming calls are directed to Group Hunt. This feature  
allows an incoming DID call to be redirected to a Hunt DN or External Hunt  
(EHT) if Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled. To activate this  
feature, the called DN must have the following class of service Hunting  
Denied HTD with Hunting By Call Type Allowed (HBTA), and package 131  
enabled.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
262 Call Redirection by Day  
Multiple Appearance DN, Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime  
When a call redirection feature is activated for a Multiple Appearance DN  
(MADN), the TN information is required. Call redirection always refers to  
the Multiple Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) TN to determine the  
feature operation. The CRDAY feature also uses the MARP TN to get the  
alternate call redirection DNs.  
Second Level Call Forward No Answer  
The Second Level Call Forward No Answer (SFNA) allows unanswered calls  
to receive Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) treatment twice. The CFNA  
timer is configured in the customer data block (CDB) for the number of rings  
before a call is redirected. If SFNA is allowed on the last DN rung, then  
the incoming call is redirected based on the list of alternate days and/or  
holidays configured for the set (day/holiday class of service).  
User Selectable Call Redirection  
The CRDAY feature does not support User Selectable Call Redirection  
(USCR). Only the following redirection DNs can be changed from a set:  
•
•
•
•
CFNA DN (FDN)  
External CFNA DN (EDN)  
Hunt DN (HUNT)  
External Hunt DN (EHT)  
The alternate redirection DNs cannot be changed with USCR.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure alternate days/holidays." (page 263)  
Configure alternate days/holidays.  
2. "LD 10 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for analog (500/2500-type)  
telephones." (page 264)  
Enable call redirection by day/holiday for analog (500/2500-type)  
telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for a digital sets." (page  
265)  
Enable call redirection by day/holiday for a digital sets.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 263  
LD 15 - Configure alternate days/holidays.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Redirection data  
Customer number  
TYPE:  
CUST  
RDR  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
...  
CRDAY  
Call Redirection by Day.  
DAY0 is prompted if "YES" is entered.  
(NO) = default.  
YES  
If you enter "NO" or <CR> at this prompt, then subsequent  
alternate day list prompts (DAYx) are skipped.  
x x...x  
- DAY0  
List of alternate days in list 0.  
Where x = 1...7  
Sunday = 1  
Monday = 2  
Tuesday = 3  
Wednesday = 4  
Thursday = 5  
Friday = 6  
Saturday = 7  
To remove a day value precede the day number with an X.  
x x...x  
x x...x  
x x...x  
- DAY1  
- DAY2  
- DAY3  
CRHOL  
List of alternate days in list one.  
List of alternate days in list two.  
List of alternate days in list three.  
Call Redirection by Holiday.  
NEW  
Add new data.  
CHG  
Change existing data.  
OUT  
Remove existing data.  
OUT ALL  
Delete all holidays in the list.  
There are a maximum of 20 holidays allowed. The four holiday  
options lists are created from these original 20 holidays.  
- DATE  
dd mm yyyy  
Enter holiday date.  
dd = day.  
mm = month.  
yyyy = year (optional, with maximum year value of 2104).  
If the year is not entered, the holiday is repeated every year.  
--HOL_OPT  
Holiday Option List to which entered date applies.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
264 Call Redirection by Day  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
n n n n  
Where:  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.  
ALL  
Select all four holiday option lists.  
Precede the holiday list with X to remove.  
- DATE  
dd mm yyyy  
<CR>  
Continue to input holidays to maximum of 20.  
Stop adding holidays and continue administration.  
Holiday Option List to which entered date applies.  
n n n n  
--HOL_OPT  
Where:  
n = 0, 1, 2, or 3.  
Select all four holiday option lists.  
Precede the holiday list with X to remove.  
LD 10 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for analog (500/2500-type) telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
2500  
TYPE:  
TN  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
CLS  
FNA  
FBA  
Call Forward No Answer Allowed.  
Call Forward Busy Allowed.  
RBDA  
RBHA  
Redirection By Day Allowed.  
Redirection By Holiday Allowed.  
...  
ADAY  
(0) - 3  
Alternate days in DAY list 0-3 are selected for the set.  
Enter the list of alternate days listed in the Customer Data Block.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature implementation 265  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
AHOL  
(0) - 3  
Enter the list of alternate redirection holidays in Holiday list 0-3  
as selected for the set defined in the Customer Data Block.  
...  
FTR  
AFD x...x  
Alternate forward DN to which all internal calls on an alternate  
day and/or holiday are redirected upon no answer.  
AHNT x...x  
Alternate hunt DN to which all internal calls on an alternate day  
and/or holiday are redirected when set is busy or no answer.  
(CFNA to HUNT).  
AEFD x...x  
AEHT x...x  
Alternate external forward DN to which all external calls on an  
alternate day and/or holiday are redirected upon no answer.  
Alternate external hunt DN to which all external calls on an  
alternate day and/or holiday are redirected when set is busy or  
no answer (CFNA to HUNT).  
LD 11 - Enable call redirection by day/holiday for a digital sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
TN  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
CLS  
FNA  
FBA  
Call Forward No Answer Allowed.  
Call Forward Busy Allowed.  
RBDA  
RBHA  
Redirection By Day Allowed.  
Redirection By Holiday Allowed.  
...  
ADAY  
AHOL  
(0) - 3  
(0) - 3  
Alternate days in DAY list 0 - 3 are selected for the DN.  
Enter the list of alternate redirection holidays in Holiday list 0-3  
as selected for sets defined in the Customer Data Block.  
...  
x...x  
x...x  
AFD  
Alternate forward DN to which all internal call forward DNs on  
alternate days/and all holidays are redirected upon no answer.  
AHNT  
When the DN is busy all incoming calls in the HOLIDAY list are  
redirected to the alternate hunt DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
266 Call Redirection by Day  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
x...x  
AEFD  
Alternate external forward DN to which incoming calls are  
redirected on alternate days.  
x...x  
AEHT  
When the DN is busy, all incoming calls for the specified holiday  
are redirected to the alternate external hunt DN.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
267  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 267)  
"Operating parameters" (page 268)  
"Feature interactions" (page 268)  
"Feature packaging" (page 269)  
"Feature implementation" (page 270)  
"Feature operation" (page 272)  
Feature description  
Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD) adds flexibility to the existing  
operations of Call Forward No Answer, Hunting and Call Forward by  
Call Type by allowing incoming calls to be automatically redirected to a  
predefined Directory Number at a specified time of day.  
When the Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD) feature is activated,  
incoming calls are automatically redirected to a Directory Number through  
Hunting, Flexible Call Forward No Answer, External Hunt or External Call  
Forward No Answer. Depending on the time of day, an incoming call can  
also be redirected to an alternate Directory Number using the Hunting, Call  
Forward No Answer and Call Forward by Call Type operations.  
This feature only changes which redirection Directory Number or alternative  
Directory Number is used to redirect a call when possible.  
At the CRTOD prompt, answering “YES” or “NO” does not fully enable or  
disable the feature. To enable the feature, you must define at least one of  
the four possible alternate time options (CRT0 - CRT3). Also, the defined  
CRTx start time must not equal the defined end time. If you define one or  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
268 Call Redirection by Time of Day  
more CRTx options (at least one with an unequal start and end time), then  
call redirection to the alternate DN takes place, even when you enter “NO”  
at the CRTOD prompt. Similarly, to disable the feature, all alternate time  
options (CRT0 - CRT3) must remain undefined (or, if defined, the CRTx  
start time must equal the defined end time). If you leave all CRTx options  
undefined (or with equal start and end times), then call redirection does not  
take place, even when you enter “YES” at the CRTOD prompt.  
Operating parameters  
All existing limitations that apply to the operation and redirection of Directory  
Numbers of Call Forward No Answer and Hunting also apply to this feature.  
Only one alternate time option is allowed per telephone at a given time.  
This feature is not supported on Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminals.  
Feature interactions  
When incoming calls require redirection, the order of precedence for which  
the system handles no answer and busy calls, is listed below:  
Calls to Idle Stations:  
1. Call Forward All Calls  
2. Message Waiting  
3. Call Forward No Answer  
4. Attendant Recall  
Calls to Busy Stations:  
1. Call Forward All Calls  
2. Hunting  
3. Call Waiting or Camp-On  
4. Message Waiting Forward Busy  
5. Call Forward Busy  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward, Internal  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
These features take precedence over Call Redirection by Time of Day  
(CRTOD).  
Call Forward by Call Type  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature packaging 269  
Hunting by Call Type  
If Call Forward by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward No  
Answer (CFNA) and Call Redirection by Time of Day (CRTOD), unanswered  
internal calls receiving CFNA are routed to the Flexible CFNA DN, Hunt  
DN, Alternate Flexible CFNA DN or Alternate Hunt DNs. External calls are  
routed in the same manner.  
If CFNA is enabled with Hunting by Call Type and Call Redirection by Time  
of Day (CRTOD), unanswered internal calls are redirected to the Hunt DN  
or Alternate Hunt DN during the alternative time. External calls are routed  
in the same manner. The alternate time is defined on the called DN’s  
data block.  
Call Forward No Answer  
Call redirection parameters for Call Forward No Answer are obtained  
from the originally dialed Directory Number. When CRTOD is activated,  
unanswered calls given CRTOD treatment are forwarded with CFNA  
according to the time of day. No changes are made to the existing CFNA  
feature.  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
Existing Second Level CFNA allows unanswered calls to receive Call  
Forward No Answer treatment twice. CRTOD parameters are obtained  
from the last rung Directory Number. A maximum of two levels of CFNA  
is allowed for an unanswered call.  
Call Waiting Redirection  
When Call Forward No Answer occurs on a waiting call, the redirected  
Directory Number used depends on the time of day if CRTOD is activated.  
Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime  
When CRTOD and Multiple Appearance DN Redirection Prime (MARP)  
are activated, Call Forward or Hunt are dependent on the time of day and  
follows the MARP feature for Call Forward No Answer or Hunt treatment.  
Hunting  
When CRTOD is enabled and an incoming call reaches a busy Directory  
Number, the time is checked against the Alternate Redirection Time Option  
range defined on the telephone.  
User Selectable Call Redirection  
User Selectable Call Redirection is not supported.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
270 Call Redirection by Time of Day  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure Alternative Redirection Time." (page 270)  
Configure Alternative Redirection Time.  
2. "LD 10 - Configure Terminal Number Block for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 271)  
Configure Terminal Number Block for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Configure Terminal Number Block for proprietary telephones"  
(page 272)  
Configure Terminal Number Block for proprietary telephones  
LD 15 - Configure Alternative Redirection Time.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
RDR  
Change Call Redirection.  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
...  
- CRTOD  
YES  
Call Redirection by Time of Day.  
Alternate time option prompts are skipped if (NO) or <CR> is  
entered  
- - CRT0  
SH SM EH EM  
Alternate time option 0, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =  
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end  
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23  
and minute 00-59).  
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time  
and end time equal to 0.  
- - CRT1  
SH SM EH EM  
Alternate time option 1, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =  
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end  
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23  
and minute 00-59).  
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time  
and end time equal to 0.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature implementation 271  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
- - CRT2  
SH SM EH EM  
Alternate time option 2, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =  
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end  
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23  
and minute 00-59).  
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time  
and end time equal to 0.  
- - CRT3  
SH SM EH EM  
Alternate time option 3, where: SH = start time in hours, SM =  
start time in minutes, EH = end time in hours and EM = end  
time in minutes in international time format (hour from 00-23  
and minute 00-59).  
Enter "X" to remove current value and reset both the start time  
and end time equal to 0.  
LD 10 - Configure Terminal Number Block for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
...  
Response  
NEW CHG  
500  
Description  
Analog telephone can be defined or modified.  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephone data block.  
CLS  
RTDA  
Call Redirection by the Time of Day allowed.  
If CLS = RTDD (denied) then RTDA, AEFD, AEHT, AFDN,  
AHNT is removed and ARTO prompt is reset to 0.  
...  
ARTO  
(0)-3  
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection defined  
in the Customer Data Block. Only prompted if CLS = RTDA.  
Default value 0 is entered if request is new. The value is not  
changed if request is CHG.  
<CR> to enter CLS and ARTO data.  
Enter Feature Name and Related Data.  
xxxx yyyy  
AFD  
FTR  
Alternate Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits.  
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.  
AHNT  
AEFD  
AEHT  
Alternate Hunt DN up to 13 digits.  
Remove by setting CLS = RTDD.  
Alternate External Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits.  
Remove by setting CLS = CFTD or RTDD.  
Alternate External Hunt up to 13 digits.  
Remove by setting CLS = CFTD or RTDD.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
272 Call Redirection by Time of Day  
LD 11 - Configure Terminal Number Block for proprietary telephones  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
...  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
CLS  
...  
RTDA  
(0)-3  
Call Redirection by the Time of Day allowed.  
ARTO  
Alternate Redirection Time Option for call redirection defined in  
the Customer Data Block. Only prompted if CLS = RTDA.  
Default value 0 is entered if request is new. The value is not  
changed if the request = CHG.  
<CR> to enter CLS and ARTO data.  
xxxx  
xxxx  
xxxx  
AFD  
Alternate Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits. Remove  
by setting CLS = RTDD.  
AHNT  
AEFD  
Alternate Hunt DN up to 13 digits. Remove by setting CLS =  
RTDD.  
Alternate External Call Forward No Answer DN up to 13 digits.  
Remove by setting CLS = CFTD or RTDD.  
Requires Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of  
Service.  
xxxx  
AEHT  
Alternate External Hunt up to 13 digits. Remove by setting CLS  
= CFTD or RTDD.  
Requires Call Forward by Call Type Allowed (CFTA) Class of  
Service.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
273  
Call Transfer  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 273)  
"Operating parameters" (page 274)  
"Feature interactions" (page 274)  
"Feature packaging" (page 282)  
"Feature implementation" (page 282)  
"Feature operation" (page 283)  
Feature description  
The Three-Party Service Allowed Class of Service, part of the Multi-Party  
Operations feature, cannot be used together with the XFR Class of Service.  
With the Restricted Call Transfer feature enabled, users of analog (500/2500  
type) telephones cannot transfer calls. Attempted call transfers are not  
routed to the attendant.  
Call Transfer allows a telephone user on any two-party call to hold the  
existing call and originate another call to a third party. The user may consult  
privately or transfer the original call to the third party. A call is transferred  
by pressing a dedicated key on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones or by  
flashing the switchhook on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Restricted Call Transfer  
The Restricted Call Transfer feature provides the Call Transfer Restricted  
(XFR) Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. By assigning  
XFR Class of Service in LD 10, a call transfer attempt will not result in action.  
This is different from the Call Transfer Denied (XFD) Class of Service, which  
will route the call to the attendant when a transfer is attempted.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
274 Call Transfer  
Operating parameters  
A separate Call Transfer key/lamp pair must be assigned to Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
A transfer allowed Class of Service must be specified for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones to access this feature.  
If trunks are involved, successful completion of a transfer depends on the  
access limitations assigned to the stations and trunks.  
While the originating side of a call is linked to a transfer or conference key  
(that is, the originator of a transfer/conference call has not yet completed  
the transfer/conference), the terminating side cannot initiate a transfer or  
conference. Conference calls cannot be transferred.  
Feature interactions  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
When a set is connected to an ISDN CO trunk conveying AOC charging  
information, the received call charging information is stored against this set.  
If the user transfers the call while the dialed set is still ringing, call charging  
information is stored against the transferring set until the call is either  
answered or abandoned by the external party. If the user consults with the  
dialed transfer set, charging information is stored against the transferring  
set until the call is either answered or abandoned. If the transferred call  
is redirected by a call redirection feature, the call is charged against the  
transferring set until the call transfer is completed and the call is answered.  
In all instances, if the call is answered, new call charging information is  
stored against the set receiving the transferred call.  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar  
A party involved in a consultation call (an active or held party) cannot initiate  
a consultation call for preventing call chaining. This principle is maintained  
in the following cases:  
•
the party is an AC15 trunk (if it attempts to initiate a consultation call,  
the recall signal is ignored), and  
•
the party is a local set, but the consultation call is made by an AC15  
trunk.  
Attendant Break-In  
Until a transferred call is connected, the attendant cannot break in to a  
call that is being transferred.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 275  
Automatic Redial  
When an Automatic Redial (ARDL) call is not accepted by the calling party,  
the Call Transfer (TRN) key is ignored.  
Call Forward by Call Type  
Calls modified by Call Transfer receive Call Forward by Call Type treatment.  
If party A (telephone or trunk) calls party B, and B transfers to party C, the  
forwarding DN and Class of Service are obtained from party C  
Call Forward, Break-In and Hunt Internal/External Network Wide  
The treatment of a call following a call transfer (Call Forward/Hunt by Call  
Type) is based on the transferring set and the call originator’s set. The set  
display on network call modification or redirection does not change.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
A set can activate Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC when initiating a  
transfer. If the transfer is completed while ringing, the Call Forward/Hunt  
Override will still be active and passed on to the transferred party.  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
A consultation call can be placed on Hold.  
Call Page Network Wide  
A station set or attendant console that transfers an external Call Page  
Network Wide (PAGENET) uncontrolled call is not blocked. However, an  
external PAGENET controlled call is blocked.  
Call Party Name Display  
When the Transfer key is pressed during an active call, the display clears.  
The call is in a held state. The DN and name of the transferred telephone  
appear on the display when the DN is dialed. When the transfer is complete,  
the transferring telephone’s display clears because the telephone is now  
disconnected. The transferred telephone’s display changes to show the  
name of the newly connected party.  
Call Pickup Network Wide  
A call may be picked up before or after the transferring party has completed  
the transfer.  
For pickup before transfer completion, the transferring party is displayed  
updated information by the Call Pickup Network Wide feature when the call  
is picked up. Then, when the transfer is completed, normal call transfer  
information is exchanged by each party involved in the final call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
276 Call Transfer  
For pickup after call transfer completion, everything happens as if the  
call had been made directly from calling to ringing party. After pickup is  
performed, displays are updated as for normal Call Pickup.  
Call Transfer  
Call Completion notification is only presented to the Call Completion  
originating set. This notification cannot be transferred to another station.  
Once the second call is completed, the call can be transferred.  
If a user encounters a busy or no answer situation during a transfer  
operation, Call Completion can be activated.  
Calling Party Name Display Denied  
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and  
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating set.  
This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of Service  
of the calling set and the forwarding/transferring set. The name of the  
forwarding/transferring set is not displayed on the calling and terminating set.  
Calling Party Privacy  
If an incoming non-ISDN call is being transferred or an incoming ISDN call  
is transferred to a non-ISDN trunk, the Calling Party Name and Number will  
not be passed on to the terminating set. The CPP feature will not change  
this operation.  
For cases where an incoming call with the Privacy Indicator is transferred  
over an MCDN trunk, or to a local station, the name and/or number of the  
originating party will not be displayed on the set of the final terminating party.  
Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
A Call Transfer call produces two records: a Call Detail Recording (CDR)  
start record and a CDR end record.  
Charge Account, Forced  
If an FCA code is entered at the beginning of a call, the new unrestricted  
Class of Service remains in effect for any transfer or conference made  
during the call. If all FCA criteria are met, an account number entered after  
activating the Conference key, Call Transfer key, or a switchhook flash is  
interpreted as an FCA code.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If any party at the customer location involved in a monitored call attempts to  
activate call transfer, monitoring is immediately deactivated.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 277  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Toll pad switching is also provided after call transfer has been completed.  
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back  
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).  
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.  
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the  
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the  
forwarding or hunting call is answered.  
Conference  
Conference can be used to transfer calls, eliminating the need for a separate  
Call Transfer key/lamp pair on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Calls in  
the ringing state cannot be transferred with Conference. The third party  
must answer before the transfer can be completed.  
A conference can also be established after initiating a Call Transfer  
operation. After the third party answers, pressing the Conference key  
establishes a three-way conference.  
When a switchhook flash transfers calls on analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones with three-party conference (C6A) Class of Service, the  
transferring party goes on hook, leaving the other two parties established.  
Telephones with a C6A Class of Service involved in a conference having  
more than three parties must add the last party to the conference, then flash  
the switchhook and go on hook to complete the transfer.  
Dial Intercom  
When using Conference or Transfer, the voice option is not provided if the  
call is terminated before the conference or transfer is completed. If an  
analog (500/2500 type) telephone is part of a Dial Intercom Group (DIG),  
the user of the telephone can conference only with another user whose  
telephone is within the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG).  
Display Calling Party Denied  
When a set transfers a call, display information is updated according to the  
Class of Service of the respective sets. This occurs for both internal and  
ISDN network calls.  
If an unsupervised call transfer occurs on an internal call, the DN of the  
terminating set is displayed to the calling party regardless of the DPD Class  
of Service options that are configured on the terminating set.  
Dial Access to Group Calls  
Group Call  
Call Transfer cannot be applied to Dial Access to Group Calls or Group Call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
278 Call Transfer  
Group Hunt  
Any call may be transferred to a Group Hunt Pilot DN. If there are no idle  
sets available for the call transfer, the call is queued to the Pilot DN and the  
caller receives ring back tone. If the call cannot be queued because the  
queue threshold has been reached, the caller receives busy tone.  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation Enhancement  
If a call is transferred to the PLDN, and all Group Hunt list members are  
busy, the call is queued to the PLDN, if the number of queued calls is less  
than the Group Hunt Threshold limit. If the number of queued calls has  
reached the Group Hunt Threshold limit, the call is not queued and busy  
tone is returned to the transferring party.  
Held Call Clearing  
Active Call Transfer calls are cleared by either an on-hook or Release key  
action. Held Call Transfer calls are cleared only by an on-hook action, and  
not by a Release key action.  
Hold  
A consultation call can be placed on Hold.  
In-Band Automatic Number Identification  
If an agent transfers an In-Band Automatic Number Identification (IANI) call  
to another Automatic Call Distribution DN, the ANI number is displayed on  
the terminating set’s display.  
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion  
Call Completion notification is only presented to the Call Completion  
originating set. This notification cannot be transferred to another station.  
Once the second call is completed, the call can be transferred.  
If a user encounters a busy or no answer situation during a transfer  
operation, Call Completion can be activated.  
ISDN QSIG Name Display  
After the completion of a call transfer, an incoming QSIG call with name  
display presentation allowed has name information displayed on the  
destination set. If the incoming QSIG call has presentation denied, name  
information is not displayed to the destination set.  
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks  
If an internal station user transfers an answered outgoing call to another  
station in the ringing state, then any disconnect signal received from the far  
end causes the trunk to be released and ringing of the internal set to stop.  
This operation eliminates the problem of holding trunks and extensions due  
to lack of supervision on Loop Start trunks.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature interactions 279  
Meridian 911  
Trunk priority associated with an incoming 911 call is only preserved if blind  
transfer is used.  
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon  
M911 abandoned calls cannot be transferred.  
Message Registration  
The party that originates a call is charged. The charge cannot be moved to  
another party using Call Transfer.  
Multi-Party Operations  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones with TSA Class of Service can Call  
Transfer by going on-hook after establishing a conference. This differs from  
operation with XFA Class of service, where transfer can be achieved by  
going on-hook during Consultation connection.  
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with TSA Class of Service goes  
on-hook during consultation connection, it is treated as misoperation of All  
Other Cases and the recovery actions are done based on the CCDO and  
AOCS options selected in LD 15. If CDOC = NO, an analog (500/2500  
type) telephone can achieve a transfer by going on-hook after establishing a  
conference.  
During the Consultation connection, the non-controlling parties are restricted  
from using Call Transfer, Conference and Three-party Service features.  
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements  
A party receiving Patience Tone or recall of misoperation ringback is not  
able to Call Transfer.  
Music, Enhanced  
The held party receives Music when the other party presses the Call  
Transfer key. The Music connection remains until the Call Transfer key or  
the DN key is pressed, ending the Consultation Hold state.  
Network Intercom  
Hot Type I calls may be transferred to another Hot Line key or to a normal DN  
key; likewise calls on a normal DN key may be transferred to a Hot Line key.  
Off-Hook Alarm Security  
A telephone receives the Off-Hook Alarm Security treatment if the telephone  
has ASCA Class of Service and attempts to transfer a call and the ASTM  
expires.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
280 Call Transfer  
On Hold on Loudspeaker  
It will not be possible to transfer the loudspeaker call to another party.  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
If the user of a station which is connected to a metered trunk transfers an  
internal call to another internal station while the dialed station is still ringing,  
the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) pulse count is accumulated against  
the transferring station until the call is answered by the dialed party, or  
abandoned by the dialing party. When the call is answered, the pulses are  
counted against the station to which the call has been transferred. If the  
station user transfers the call after consulting with the dialed station user,  
then the PPM pulses are counted against the controlling station until the  
call is transferred. When the call is transferred, the PPM pulses are counted  
against the station to which the call has been transferred. If the transferred  
call is redirected using any of the call redirection features such as Call  
Forward or Hunting, the call is charged against the transferring station until  
the call is transferred. The pulses are then counted against the answering  
station. This method ensures that PPM meters are charged in a manner  
consistent with the printing of CDR records.  
Predictive Dialing  
The application sends the Fast Transfer request on behalf of a Meridian  
1 proprietary telephone, and then the switch initiates and completes the  
transfer immediately which is similar to a normal call transfer from a  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.  
In a Predictive Dialing scenario where the autodialer (origination DN)  
is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, the Make Call message sent by  
the application to the switch to make a call on behalf of the Meridian 1  
proprietary telephone, and then the call transfer call, will interact with the  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone Call Transfer feature. The autodialer is  
configured with Class of Service TRN so that the switch can transfer the  
call to the target destination.  
The application sends the Fast Transfer request on behalf of an analog  
(500/2500 type) telephone. The switch will then initiate and complete the  
transfer in one step.  
In a predictive dialing scenario, the application will send the Make Call  
request on behalf of the autodialer (analog (500/2500 type) telephone) to  
have the switch make the call, and then transfer the call when the switch  
receives the Fast Transfer message. The autodialer needs to be configured  
with Classes of Service Dial Pulse (DIP) and Transfer Allowed (XFA) for 500  
sets, or with Classes of Service Digitone (DTN) and XFA for 2500 sets.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature interactions 281  
Privacy Override  
Calls in a Privacy Override conference state cannot be transferred.  
Station Activity Records  
A Station Activity Record is generated when a set with Class of Service Call  
Detail Monitoring Allowed (CDMA) transfers a trunk call. CDR "X" record  
generation is not affected by this development. The set to which the call is  
transferred also produces a Station Activity Record if it has Class of Service  
CDMA and answers the call. When the second "D" record is produced (by  
the set to which the call is transferred), the digits field of the "D" record  
shows the digits dialed by the transferring set.  
Supervised Analog Lines  
China-Supervised Analog Lines  
If more than one active call is extended to an analog line, the call type  
associated with an analog line is determined by the first active call. The call  
type is assumed to be incoming and hook flash supervision applies if a  
terminal device answers an incoming call from an idle state. If the terminal  
device performs a switch hook flash to put the first party on hold and  
initiates a consultation call, the Battery Reversal feature is not supported;  
no battery reversal answer signal is extended to the terminal device when  
the second party answers.  
If the first party disconnects while the terminal device is connected to  
the second party, no disconnect supervision is extended to the terminal  
device. However, hook flash disconnect supervision is extended to the  
terminal device when the second party disconnects (that is, a disconnect  
supervision signal is sent only when the last party connected to the terminal  
disconnects).  
If a terminal device originates an outgoing call, battery reversal answer  
supervision is extended when the called party answers. The polarity of  
the line remains reversed polarity when the terminal device performs a  
switch hook flash and then initiates a consultation call to a second party.  
The analog line is reverted to normal polarity when the terminal device  
completes the transfer and drops out or when the last of either the held  
party or the consultation party disconnects.  
Three-Party Service  
The party receiving the patience tone or the Misoperation ringback is not  
able to make a call transfer.  
Trunk Barring  
The originator of a call transfer, unless otherwise restricted, is able to  
connect to a denied party on a consultation basis. Operating the Transfer  
key on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone or going on hook on an analog  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
282 Call Transfer  
(500/2500 type) telephone does not result in a call transfer if the Originating  
Trunk Connection is barred. The user of a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
remains connected to the denied party until releasing the connection and  
returning to the held Originating Trunk Connection. The user of an analog  
(500/2500 type) telephone is re-rung by the Originating Trunk Connection  
when transfer is attempted and denied.  
Trunk to Trunk Connection  
To transfer an external trunk on ringing across a supervised analog network  
TIE trunk, the external trunk and internal TIE line must have both answer  
and disconnect supervision, and the external call must be established. To  
transfer one outgoing external trunk to another, both external trunks must  
have answer and disconnect supervision, and both external calls must be  
established.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Configure Call Transfer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones."  
(page 282)  
Configure Call Transfer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
2. "LD 11 - Add a Call Transfer key for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."  
(page 283)  
Add a Call Transfer key for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
3. "LD 10 - Restricted Call Transfer for an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone." (page 283)  
Restricted Call Transfer for an analog (500/2500 type) telephone.  
LD 10 - Configure Call Transfer for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(XFD) XFA  
(Deny) allow Call Transfer.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature operation 283  
LD 11 - Add a Call Transfer key for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx TRN  
Add a Call Transfer key (the M2317 must use key 26).  
LD 10 - Restricted Call Transfer for an analog (500/2500 type) telephone.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
TYPE:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
REQ:  
...  
Telephone type.  
CLS  
XFR  
Restrict call transfers and do not recall to attendant.  
Feature operation  
To transfer an active call on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone, follow  
these steps:  
Step Action  
1
Press Transfer.  
The call is on hold.  
2
3
Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.  
Press Transfer when you hear ringing or after your call is answered.  
When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new  
party before completing the transfer.  
To cancel an incomplete transfer, press the key beside the fast  
flashing indicator and you return to the call you tried to transfer. To  
conference all three parties, press the Conference key, if equipped.  
—End—  
To transfer an active call on an analog (500/2500 type) telephone, follow  
these steps:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
284 Call Transfer  
Step Action  
1
Flash the switchhook.  
The call is on hold.  
2
3
Dial the number where you want to transfer the call.  
Flash the switchhook when you hear ringing or after your call is  
answered.  
When your call is answered, you may speak privately with the new  
party before completing the transfer. To cancel an incomplete  
transfer, hang up, then lift the handset and flash the switchhook to  
return to the call.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
285  
Call Waiting Redirection  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 285)  
"Operating parameters" (page 286)  
"Feature interactions" (page 286)  
"Feature packaging" (page 290)  
"Feature implementation" (page 290)  
"Feature operation" (page 293)  
Feature description  
Previously, Call Waiting notified an active set that a second call was  
waiting to be answered on that Directory Number (DN). For non-attendant  
extended calls, the incoming call received Call Waiting treatment until the  
call was answered by the called party or the calling party disconnected. For  
attendant-extended calls, the incoming call received Call Waiting treatment  
until the Call Waiting Recall timer timed out, at which time the call was  
recalled to the attendant. The attendant had to then extend the call to a  
message center or voice mail. However, since the attendant was given no  
indication as the reason for the recall (called party busy or not answering), it  
was difficult for the attendant to redirect the call properly.  
The Call Waiting Redirection feature follows the Call Forward No Answer  
(CFNA) treatment defined for the DN. No modifications have been made; all  
existing Call Forward No Answer functionality will apply to redirected calls.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
286 Call Waiting Redirection  
Operating parameters  
The existing Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer limitations apply to  
the Call Waiting Redirection feature. The Call Forward No Answer feature is  
used by the Call Waiting Redirection feature to redirect "no answer" calls  
given Call Waiting treatment.  
Although the Call Waiting treatment is applied to a busy DN, the CFNA  
call redirection treatment given by the Call Waiting Redirection feature  
is for a "no answer" presentation. The unanswered Call Waiting call is  
treated as a call presented to an idle "no answered" DN. Calls redirected to  
messaging services or sets with displays are provided with the "no answer"  
call redirection reason.  
The existing implementation of Call Forward No Answer is used to select  
the TN with the CFNA DN for the "no answer" Call Waiting call. Calls are  
redirected according to the call type (internal or external) as defined at the  
designated call redirection TN chosen by CFNA.  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Timed Reminders  
Automatic Timed Recalls  
When CFNA is active, the Slow Answer Recall timer begins only after the  
call reaches its final destination. CFNA has precedence over Attendant  
Recall for attendant-extended calls. Irrespective of the relative timeout  
intervals for each feature, ringing continues as long as allowed by CFNA  
for sets with CFNA enabled.  
Since the Call Waiting Redirection feature applies CFNA treatment to a  
Call Waiting call, the Call Waiting Redirection feature also has precedence  
over the Call Waiting recall timer.  
Basic Rate Interface  
The Call Waiting Redirection feature is not applicable to Basic Rate Interface  
(BRI) terminals. However, an ISDN BRI terminal may redirect a call using  
hunting or CFNA.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward, Internal  
Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward both have precedence over  
Call Waiting and the Call Waiting Redirection feature.  
Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type  
If Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward  
No Answer and Call Waiting Redirection, "no answer" internal calls receiving  
Call Waiting treatment are routed for CFNA treatment to the Flexible CFNA  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 287  
DN (FDN) or Hunt DN, and "no answer" external calls are routed for CFNA  
treatment to the External Flexible CFNA DN (EFD) or External Hunt DN  
(EHT).  
Call Forward/Hunt Override via Flexible Feature Code  
There is no interaction with the Call Waiting treatment component of the  
Call Waiting Redirection feature. However, Call Forward/Hunt Override via  
Flexible Feature Code does override CFNA, and thus the CFNA treatment  
given to unanswered Call Waiting calls by the Call Waiting Redirection  
feature is overridden by the Call Forward/Hunt Override via Flexible Feature  
Code (CFHO) feature. The incoming call will continue to be given Call  
Waiting treatment as if the Call Waiting Redirection feature is disabled when  
the CFHO feature is enabled by the calling party.  
Call Forward No Answer  
Per existing Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) feature operation, the call  
redirection parameters for CFNA are obtained from the originally dialed  
DN for redirected calls.  
Existing Network CFNA treatment is applied to calls receiving Call Waiting  
treatment on sets with CFNA and the Call Waiting Redirection feature  
enabled if the Call Waiting call is not answered before the expiration of the  
CFNA timer and the CFNA DN is on another node.  
Call Forward No Answer, Second Level  
The existing Second Level Call Forward No Answer treatment is applicable  
to Call Waiting calls redirected by CFNA (first level) with the Call Waiting  
Redirection feature which are still not answered at the last rung DN.  
Call Redirection by Time of Day  
When Call Forward No Answer occurs on a waiting call, the redirected  
Directory Number used depends on the time of day if Call Redirection by  
Time of Day (CRTOD) is activated.  
Call Pickup Network Wide  
A call that is redirected by the Call Waiting Redirection feature to the active  
set’s Call Forward No Answer DN may be picked up.  
Call Waiting  
The option selected for Call Waiting Redirection treatment also applies to  
calls given Internal Call Waiting treatment.  
Camp-On  
There is no interaction as Call Waiting and Camp-On are mutually exclusive.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
288 Call Waiting Redirection  
Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer  
The Direct Inward Dialing Call Forward No Answer Timer is applied after  
the last stage of CFNA or SFNA treatment resulting from the Call Waiting  
Redirection feature for DID Call Waiting calls.  
Distinctive Ringing/New Distinctive Ringing  
Call Forward No Answer  
The existing Distinctive Ringing Call Forward No Answer feature is applied  
to calls from a Distinctive Ringing enabled trunk. If such an incoming call  
is receiving Call Waiting treatment on sets with Distinctive Ringing, Call  
Forward No Answer (CFNA), and the Call Waiting Redirection feature  
enabled, the DFNA timer is applied to the call instead of the CFNA timer.  
The Call Waiting warning tone, if enabled, is not changed by Distinctive  
Ringing. If that call is not answered before the expiration of the DFNA timer,  
CFNA treatment is given using the Call Waiting Redirection feature.  
Forward No Answer Call Waiting Direct Inward Dialing  
With the Call Waiting Redirection feature also enabled, the Call Waiting  
Redirection feature takes precedence over Forward No Answer Call Waiting  
Direct Inward Dialing (FCWD). The existing CFNA also takes precedence  
over the existing Attendant Recall of Call Waiting calls. Since the Call  
Waiting Redirection feature applies CFNA treatment to a Call Waiting call  
while the FCWD feature applies an attendant recall timer, the Call Waiting  
Redirection feature also has precedence over the FCWD timer.  
Hunting  
If Call Forward and Hunt by Call Type (CFCT) is enabled with Call Forward  
No Answer and Call Waiting Redirection, "no answer" internal calls receiving  
Call Waiting treatment are routed for CFNA treatment to the Flexible CFNA  
DN (FDN) or Hunt DN, and "no answer" external calls are routed for CFNA  
treatment to the External Flexible CFNA DN (EFD) or External Hunt DN  
(EHT).  
Internal or Station-to-Station Call Waiting  
The option selected for Call Waiting Redirection treatment also applies to  
calls given Internal Call Waiting treatment.  
Meridian Mail Voice Mailbox Administration  
Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment may now be allowed to  
forward to Voice Mail through the activation of the Call Waiting Redirection  
feature. The greeting given to the caller is for a "no answer" condition.  
Message Center  
Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment may now be allowed by the  
Call Waiting Redirection feature to be forwarded to a CFNA DN which may  
be a Message Center. The call redirection reason is "no answer".  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 289  
Message Waiting  
Message Waiting has precedence over CFNA and Attendant Recall for  
attendant-extended calls. Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment are  
forwarded to the Flexible CFNA DN by the Call Waiting Redirection feature.  
Multi-Party Operations  
Recovery on Misoperation of Call Transfer - Call Transfer with  
Ring No Answer (RGNA)  
If the transferring party goes on-hook to complete the Call Transfer (that  
is, blind transfer) before the "transferred to" or called party answers the  
Call Waiting call, an RGNA Misoperation of Call Transfer is detected by  
Multi-Party Operations (MPO).  
With the Call Waiting Redirection feature enabled, if the blind transfer  
completes after the CFNA timer applied by Call Waiting Redirection has  
expired, there is no interaction as the Call Waiting Redirection feature is  
done and has already redirected the unanswered Call Waiting call to the  
CFNA DN.  
If the blind transfer completes before the Call Waiting Redirection CFNA  
timer expires and the RGNA option is defined to be:  
1. Standard (STD, that is, operation as it was prior to introduction of MPO),  
there is no interaction, as Call Waiting Redirection will redirect the  
unanswered Call Waiting call when the CFNA timer expires.  
2. Non-STD (that is, ATN, DIS, OVF, AAR, or DAR), the RGNA option  
has precedence over CFNA and thus has priority over Call Waiting  
Redirection’s CFNA treatment.  
Recovery on Misoperation of Call Transfer – Misoperation of Call Transfer  
for All Other Cases  
This type of misoperation occurs when the transferring party attempts to  
complete the transfer in several other non-RGNA scenarios. There is no  
interaction with these Multi-Party Operations scenarios and the Call Waiting  
Redirection feature.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
The Call Waiting Redirection feature applies to unanswered Call Waiting  
calls which apply to single appearance DNs and primary appearance DNs  
of Multiple Appearance.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime  
If the Multiple Appearance Directory Number Redirection Prime (MARP)  
feature is activated, the Call Forward No Answer (CFNA) treatment given  
by Call Waiting Redirection for an unanswered Call Waiting call follows the  
MARP feature for CFNA treatment of calls to an idle DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
290 Call Waiting Redirection  
Network Call Forward No Answer  
Existing Network CFNA treatment is applied to calls receiving Call Waiting  
treatment on sets with CFNA and the Call Waiting Redirection feature  
enabled if the Call Waiting call is not answered before the expiration of the  
CFNA timer and the CFNA DN is on another node.  
Network Call Redirection  
Incoming calls receiving Call Waiting Redirection treatment can be  
redirected over the network only if the trunk-to-trunk connection is already  
supported per the existing Network Call Redirection feature.  
Night Restriction Classes of Service  
The Call Waiting Redirection feature applies to unanswered calls given Call  
Waiting treatment when the Night Restriction Classes of Service feature  
allows Call Waiting.  
Night Service  
Night Service Enhancements  
Night Service has the same interaction with the Call Waiting Redirection  
feature as attendant-extended calls. Since the Call Waiting Redirection  
feature applies CFNA treatment to a Call Waiting call, the Call Waiting  
Redirection feature also has precedence over the Call Waiting recall timer.  
Voice Mail  
Unanswered calls given Call Waiting treatment may now be allowed to  
forward to Voice Mail through the activation of the Call Waiting Redirection  
feature. The greeting given to the caller is for a "no answer" condition.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure the CFNA treatment, the number of ringing cycles  
for CFNA, and the Call Waiting Re" (page 291)  
Configure the CFNA treatment, the number of ringing cycles for CFNA,  
and the Call Waiting Redirection option.  
2. "LD 10 - Configure Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones." (page 291)  
Configure Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature implementation 291  
3. "LD 11 - Configure Call Waiting, and Call Forward No Answer for  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones." (page 292)  
Configure Call Waiting, and Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
LD 15 - Configure the CFNA treatment, the number of ringing cycles for CFNA, and the Call  
Waiting Redirection option.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
RDR  
Call Redirection  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Call Waiting Redirection Allowed.  
0-31  
- OPT  
CWRA  
Allow Call Forward No Answer treatment for unanswered Call  
Waiting calls on a DN.  
...  
FNAD  
(HNT) ATT NO  
FDN  
CFNA treatment for DID calls.  
FNAT  
FNAL  
...  
(HNT) ATT NO  
FDN  
CFNA treatment for internal non-Direct Inward Dialing calls.  
(HNT) ATT NO  
FDN  
CFNA treatment for calls when Call Waiting Redirection is  
enabled.  
CFN0 CFN1 1-(4)-15  
CFNA timers; number of normal ringing cycles for CFNA Options  
0, 1, and 2.  
CFN2  
1-(4)-15  
1-(4)-15  
DFN0 DFN1 1-(4)-15  
Distinctive Ringing CFNA timers; number of distinctive ringing  
cycles for CFNA Options 0, 1, and 2.  
DFN2  
1-(4)-15  
1-(4)-15  
LD 10 - Configure Call Waiting and Call Forward No Answer for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
292 Call Waiting Redirection  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xxx..x  
HUNT  
CLS  
Hunt DN. If the Call Forward No Answer treatments set up in LD  
15 are set to HNT, the Hunt DN should be configured.  
(CWD) CWA  
(SWD) SWA  
Call Waiting external (denied) allowed.  
Internal (Station-to-Station) Call Waiting (denied) allowed. If  
SWA is defined, CWA must also be defined.  
(WTA) WTD  
(FND) FNA  
FBA  
Warning tone (allowed) denied.  
Call Forward No Answer (denied) allowed.  
Call Forward Busy Allowed.  
For customers with the United Kingdom (UK) package 190  
configured, CLS must be set to FBA for calls over DASS/DPNSS  
trunks.  
RCO  
FTR  
(0)-2  
Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer. Prompted  
when CLS = FNA, or MWA (or both). RCO must be set to a  
value other than 0 for Call Waiting Redirection to operate.  
aaaa  
Enter the feature and related data.  
FDN xxx..x  
Flexible CFNA DN. If the CFNA treatments set up in LD 15 are  
set to FDN, the Flexible CFNA DN should be configured.  
LD 11 - Configure Call Waiting, and Call Forward No Answer for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xxx..x  
FDN  
CLS  
Flexible CFNA DN. If the Call Forward No Answer treatments  
set up in LD 15 are set to FDN, the Flexible CFNA DN should  
be configured.  
(SWD) SWA  
Internal (Station-to-Station) Call Waiting (denied) allowed. SWA  
does not need to exist to have external Call Waiting.  
(WTA) WTD  
(FND) FNA  
Warning tone (allowed) denied.  
Call Forward No Answer (denied) allowed.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 293  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
FBA  
Call Forward Busy Allowed.  
For customers with the United Kingdom (UK) package 190  
configured, CLS must be set to FBA for calls over DASS/DPNSS  
trunks.  
RCO  
(0)-2  
Ringing cycle option for Call Forward No Answer. Prompted  
when CLS = FNA, or MWA (or both). RCO must be set to a  
value other than 0 for Call Waiting Redirection to operate.  
xxx..x  
HUNT  
KEY  
Hunt DN. If the Call Forward No Answer treatments set up in LD  
15 are set to HNT, the Hunt DN should be configured.  
xx CWT  
xx = key number.  
Add a Call Waiting key.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
294 Call Waiting Redirection  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
295  
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 295)  
"Operating parameters" (page 296)  
"Feature interactions" (page 297)  
"Feature packaging" (page 302)  
"Feature implementation" (page 302)  
"Feature operation" (page 303)  
Feature description  
Call Waiting notifies a telephone user on an established call (internal  
or external) that an external call is waiting to be answered. Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones must have a Call Waiting key/lamp pair assigned  
and a Class of Service that allows a warning tone. Call Waiting is applicable  
to the Prime DN or any single appearance DN on the telephone. When  
an external call comes into a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone and the  
telephone user is on a call, the Call Waiting lamp flashes and a buzz sounds  
through the telephone’s speaker.  
To use Call Waiting, analog (500/2500 type) telephones must have a  
Class of Service that allows Call Waiting and a warning tone. Two tone  
bursts are received through the handset to advise an analog (500/2500  
type) telephone user of a waiting call. Note that the two calls cannot be  
conferenced together.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
296 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
Call Waiting applies to Direct Inward Dialing (DID), Central Office (CO),  
Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunk  
calls extended to a busy telephone by the attendant. Call Waiting also  
applies to calls on TIE and Common Control Switching Arrangement  
(CCSA) trunks.  
Internal Call Waiting  
This feature provides Call Waiting for internal calls. This option, defined on  
a per-telephone basis, allows Call Waiting for calls from other telephones  
within the customer group. These calls include the following:  
•
•
•
direct telephone-to-telephone calls  
attendant-extended internal calls  
telephone-to-telephone call transfer of all trunk and internal calls  
Call Waiting Flexible Feature Codes  
A user may activate Call Waiting from an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
with Call Waiting Class of Service by dialing the Call Waiting Activate  
(CWGA) FFC (defined in LD 57). To deactivate Call Waiting, the user dials  
either the Call Waiting Deactivate (CWGD) FFC (defined in LD 57) or the  
general Deactivate (DEAF) FFC (also defined in LD 57).  
If Call Waiting is deactivated using FFCs, then station-to-station call waiting  
is also deactivated at the telephone.  
If the Class of Service is CWA, ACTIV or DEACT is printed in brackets  
when CWT is activated or deactivated.  
The CWT FFCs do not affect Precedence Call Waiting.  
Operating parameters  
A Meridian 1 proprietary telephone can have only one working Call Waiting  
key/lamp pair.  
Telephones with internal telephone-to-telephone Call Waiting must also  
have external Call Waiting (CWA) Class of Service.  
A Call Waiting indication is not presented to a single-line telephone in the  
transfer or conference mode.  
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user receiving a second call can  
connect alternately to the original call and the Call Waiting call by a  
switchhook flash. The user cannot transfer or conference either call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature interactions 297  
When a second call goes to a telephone that already has a Call Waiting  
call, the second call is recalled to the attendant if it is not answered by the  
number of rings defined in the Customer Data Block (RTIM prompt, field zz).  
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone user who has received a Call Waiting  
call routed from the attendant cannot reconnect to the original call until it  
has been released from the console.  
Attendant Administration does not support the Internal Call Waiting feature.  
If a call is waiting and Call Waiting is deactivated using the Call Waiting  
Deactivate (CWGD) FFC, the call that is waiting is allowed to continue  
waiting while any new calls will not be allowed to wait.  
Feature interactions  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
When an Advice of Charge call is transferred to a busy set with Call Waiting  
Allowed, the transferring station is charged until the call is answered.  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
If a set that has the Station-to station Call Waiting feature active (CLS SWA  
and a Call Waiting (CWT) key for digital sets) is idle when an Attendant  
Blocking of DN attempt is made, the Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is  
allowed and processed as normal. If the DN is idle and there is an active  
call on the Call Waiting key, the Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is allowed.  
If a set has the Station-to-station Call Waiting feature active and the DN to  
be blocked is busy when an Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is made, the  
Attendant Blocking of DN attempt is canceled and busy tone is returned.  
For a set that has the Call Waiting (or Station-to-station Call Waiting) feature  
active and a DN is blocked due to the Attendant Blocking of DN feature, any  
incoming call to the blocked DN will receive busy tone.  
Attendant Break-In  
If the destination DN has a camped-on incoming trunk call, the attendant  
cannot extend the urgent incoming call as a Camp-On call.  
Attendant Incoming Call Indicators  
The ICI feature is used with the Call Waiting feature to recognize, answer,  
and process incoming calls.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
298 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
Attendant Queuing  
Call Waiting options do not apply to calls queued to a specified attendant.  
The exception to this is the display call waiting key, which shows the number  
of calls in the overall attendant queue and the calls in the queue for a  
specified attendant.  
Automatic Line Selection  
A call on the Call Waiting key is not selected.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward All Calls takes precedence over Call Waiting.  
Call Forward Busy - proprietary telephones  
If Class of Service allows Call Forward Busy and Call Waiting Allowed, and  
the proprietary telephone has a Call Waiting key, calls do not forward to the  
attendant when the telephone is busy and another call is waiting.  
Call Forward Busy - Analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
If a telephone has Call Forward Busy and Call Waiting Allowed Class of  
Service, calls are forwarded to the attendant when the telephone is busy  
and has another call waiting.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
Call Waiting can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature has been activated. When a busy set with Call Waiting configured  
is encountered, it will terminate on Call Waiting.  
Call Forward, Internal Calls  
Internal Call Forward takes precedence over Call Waiting.  
Call Forward No Answer  
If a call to a telephone gets Call Forward No Answer treatment to another  
telephone which is busy, Call Waiting and Camp-On do not apply. The call  
will attempt to terminate on the original DN again.  
Call Park  
A recall of a parked call is not presented in the Call Waiting mode. If an  
internal telephone is in the parked state, Call Waiting to that telephone  
is not provided.  
Call Pickup Network Wide  
Call Waiting calls cannot be picked up.  
Call Waiting Redirection  
The option selected for Call Waiting Redirection treatment also applies to  
calls given Internal Call Waiting treatment.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Feature interactions 299  
Camp-On  
Call Waiting and Camp-On are mutually exclusive. If a Call Waiting Class of  
Service or key is defined, Camp-On cannot be provided.  
Camp-on, Station  
Call Waiting takes precedence over Station Camp-On.  
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control  
An attendant cannot apply Call Waiting on an outgoing call that follows  
Called Party Control.  
Dial Intercom  
Call Waiting does not apply to a Dial Intercom appearance.  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion  
Executive Intrusion is permitted (consult-only state) into a requested party  
having call waiting.  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing  
Call Waiting tones apply to SCN/MCN keys as per existing operation. The  
Directory Number Delayed Ringing does not apply, and the user is informed  
of the incoming call immediately.  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering  
Call Waiting to a boss set with filtering active is routed to the secretary set.  
Flexible Feature Code enhancement  
The Call Waiting Deactivate (CWGD) FFC may be used to deactivate Call  
Waiting. If a call is waiting when Call Waiting is deactivated, the call is  
allowed to continue waiting while any new calls will not be allowed to wait.  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number  
Call Waiting is not supported on data calls to a dynamic voice/data TN. Call  
Waiting is supported for voice calls to dynamic voice/data TN.  
Group Hunt  
Call Waiting to a Pilot DN will not be supported.  
Hunting  
If a call comes into a busy DN, it begins the hunting route defined from the  
called DN. If there are idle DNs on the hunting route, the call becomes a  
Call Waiting call on the called DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
300 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
Idle Extension Notification  
This feature can be used even if the Call Forward/Hunt Override Via FFC  
feature is activated. When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to place  
an IEN request against the set.  
ISDN Night Service  
If a call is diverted to a third-party operator Night DN that is busy, Call  
Waiting may be activated (if equipped). The call to the third-party operator  
circuit switched network is released.  
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion  
On an Analog (500/2500 type) set, Call Completion notification waits until  
the set has finished an active call. If Call Waiting is configured on a set,  
notification is presented after the Call Waiting call. If an additional call is  
queued while Ring Again free notification is waiting on a set, the waiting call  
takes precedence over the Call Completion notification. An established Call  
Completion call is also queued if a set has Call Waiting feature equipped  
and is occupied on another call.  
Message Center  
Call Waiting calls are not forwarded to a Message Center.  
Multi-Party Operations  
A user of an analog (500/2500 type) telephone can answer a Call Waiting  
call, thereby establishing a consultation connection. The user can dial  
control digits, as normal. To toggle the calls, the toggle control digit must be  
used rather than a switchhook flash.  
Multi-Party Operations  
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone may be assigned both CWA and TSA  
Classes of Service. The user can establish a Consultation connection by  
answering Call Waiting during an active established call. If this is done,  
Control Digit features (CNFD, TGLD, and DISD) are available. Note that  
Programmable Control Digit TGLD, rather than a switchhook flash, is used  
to toggle the calls. Operation with XFA Class of Service is unchanged.  
The Three-party Service feature changes the operation of Call Waiting for  
all analog (500/2500 type) telephones as follows (regardless of whether the  
sets have TSA Class of Service. If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
user activates Waiting during an active call so as to establish a Consultation  
connection, and if the user goes on-hook during the Consultation  
connection, the operation is treated as an AOCS misoperation. This  
recovery of misoperation will take place even if the MPO package is not  
equipped. In this case, the controlling party is re-rung by the held party  
regardless of the CCDO and the recovery of misoperation options.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 301  
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user attempts to set up a  
Consultation connection by dialing a busy DN and if the Call Waiting  
conditions are satisfied, the controlling party will hear ringback tone and  
the active party will hear Call Waiting tone. If the controlling party goes  
on-hook before the active party has answered, the held call is disconnected  
regardless of the MPO options and Call Waiting tone is removed from the  
active party.  
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service  
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone cannot have Call Waiting during the  
patience tone.  
An analog (500/2500 type) telephone may be assigned both CWA and TSA  
Classes of Service. The user can establish a Consultation connection by  
answering Call Waiting during an active established call. If this is done,  
Control Digit features (CNFD, TGLD, and DISD) are available. Note that  
Programmable Control Digit TGLD, rather than a switchhook flash, is used  
to toggle the calls. Operation with XFA Class of Service is unchanged.  
The Three-party Service feature changes the operation of Call Waiting for  
all analog (500/2500 type) telephones as follows (regardless of whether the  
sets have TSA Class of Service. If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
user activates Waiting during an active call so as to establish a Consultation  
connection, and if the user goes on-hook during the Consultation  
connection, the operation is treated as an AOCS misoperation. This  
recovery of misoperation will take place even if the MPO package is not  
equipped. In this case, the controlling party is re-rung by the held party  
regardless of the CCDO and the recovery of misoperation options.  
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user attempts to set up a  
Consultation connection by dialing a busy DN and if the Call Waiting  
conditions are satisfied, the controlling party will hear ringback tone and  
the active party will hear Call Waiting tone. If the controlling party goes  
on-hook before the active party has answered, the held call is disconnected  
regardless of the MPO options and Call Waiting tone is removed from the  
active party.  
Night Restriction Classes of Service  
If Call Waiting and Night Restriction for Call Waiting Class of Service  
(NRWA) are assigned, Call Waiting is operational for the set only when  
Night Service is in effect.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
302 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
Night Service Enhancements  
This feature will terminate incoming Night calls to busy DNs by applying  
Call Waiting. This is done even if the Night DN is an analog (500/2500  
type) telephone with Call Waiting Denied (CWD) Class of Service, or if  
the Night DN is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone without a Call Waiting  
(CWT) key assigned.  
All telephones (analog (500/2500 type) and Meridian 1 proprietary) is given  
Night Call Waiting tone, if the NWT prompt in LD 15 was responded to with  
"YES", regardless of the Warning Tone (WTA,WTD) Class of Service setting  
of the set. Meridian 1 proprietary telephones is given Night Call Waiting  
tone in the handset instead of the speaker buzz for Call Waiting.  
On Hold on Loudspeaker  
Call Waiting can be applied to a busy loudspeaker DN.  
Ring Again  
The user is notified that a previously busy line is free only when both the  
original call and the waiting call have disconnected.  
Station Camp-on  
Call Waiting takes precedence over Station Camp-On.  
Feature packaging  
Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting is included in base system software.  
For Call Waiting FFCs, the following packages are required:  
•
•
Background Terminal Facility (BGD) package 99  
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Allow Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones."  
(page 302)  
Allow Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
2. "LD 11 - Allow Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."  
(page 303)  
Allow Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
LD 10 - Allow Call Waiting for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
CHG  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature operation 303  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
Description  
500  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(CWD) CWA  
(SWD) SWA  
(Deny) allow Call Waiting.  
(Deny) allow internal Call Waiting (if SWA is defined, CWA must  
also be defined).  
(Allow) deny warning tone.  
(WTA) WTD  
LD 11 - Allow Call Waiting for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
KEY  
SWA  
WTD  
allow internal Call Waiting.  
deny warning tone.  
xx CWT  
Add a Call Waiting key.  
Feature operation  
To answer a Call Waiting call on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, follow  
these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Press Hold when you hear a tone during a telephone call.  
Press Call Wait to answer the waiting call.  
—End—  
To return to your first call, follow these steps:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
304 Call Waiting/Internal Call Waiting  
Step Action  
1
2
Press Hold if you want to put your second call on Hold.  
Press the extension key that has the first call on it.  
—End—  
To answer a Call Waiting call on analog (500/2500 type) telephones, follow  
these steps:  
•
Flash the switchhook when you hear a beep during a telephone call.  
Your current call is on Hold and you are connected to the waiting call.  
To return to your first call:  
Flash the switchhook.  
•
The following instructions are for using Call Waiting FFCs:  
•
•
Allow – The user must dial the Call Waiting Activate (CWGA) FFC.  
Disallow – The user must dial the Call Waiting Deactivate (ATDD) FFC  
or the Deactivate (DEAF) FFC.  
•
Use prerequisites – To set Call Waiting, the telephone must have Call  
Waiting Allowed (CWA) Class of Service.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
305  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 305)  
"Operating parameters" (page 305)  
"Feature interactions" (page 306)  
"Feature packaging" (page 306)  
"Feature implementation" (page 307)  
"Feature operation" (page 308)  
Feature description  
The Called Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) feature allows the  
called party with Class of Service Malicious Call Trace Allowed to activate  
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) even after the calling party goes on-hook. When  
enabled, the calling party is prevented from releasing a call until the called  
party has initially released. If the calling party goes on hook, the call is put  
on hold and both parties are given call hold treatment. When the called  
party activates the call trace request, the calling party’s information is  
printed in the call trace record.  
This feature builds on the capabilities of the existing Called Party Disconnect  
Control (CPDC) and Malicious Call Trace (MCT) features. Called Party  
Control on Internal Calls is applicable on set to set calls and can be  
activated during or after a malicious call has occurred.  
Operating parameters  
The feature is applicable to all systems.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
306 Called Party Control on Internal Calls  
This feature is designed for stand alone application only and is not  
supported across a network. On a set to set call, the calling and the called  
party must belong to the same customer on the same system.  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) is not supported on ISDN  
BRI sets.  
If an attendant console is the calling party and involved in a call with a set,  
the CPCI feature functionality is not provided to the call.  
The CPCI feature is not supported with features such as Attendant Recall,  
Override, Call Park and Privacy Release.  
If the system initializes during an established call, the call remains  
established. Following initialization, the calling party can successfully  
release from a connected call prior to the called party releasing.  
For this feature, the called party must have a Malicious Call Trace Allowed  
(MCTA) Class of Service configured in the Customer Data Block (LD 15).  
The existing limitations of Malicious Call Trace apply to this feature. When  
MCT is requested, the information is printed in the call trace record.  
If the called party does not release the connection, then the calling party  
remains established until the called party releases.  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Hold  
If Called Party Control on Internal Calls is active, an established call is put  
on hold regardless of the Automatic Hold Class of Service assigned to the  
set when a second call is originated or answered.  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
The calling party and called party can put either party on hold. However,  
the calling party cannot release the call while the called party is on hold.  
The called party is permitted to release the call.  
Held Call Clearing  
With Called Party Control on Internal Call enabled, a call on hold is not  
cleared when the calling party releases. This occurs whether or not the  
Held Call Clearing feature has been activated.  
Feature packaging  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls requires the new package Called  
Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) package 310 and also requires  
Malicious Call Trace (MCT) package 107.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature implementation 307  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure Called Party Control on Internal Calls in the  
Customer Data Block." (page 307)  
Configure Called Party Control on Internal Calls in the Customer Data  
Block.  
2. "LD 57 - Configure Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code." (page  
307)  
Configure Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.  
3. "LD 10 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Analog (500/2500 type) sets."  
(page 308)  
Enable Malicious Call Trace on Analog (500/2500 type) sets.  
4. "LD 11 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Meridian 1 proprietary sets."  
(page 308)  
Enable Malicious Call Trace on Meridian 1 proprietary sets.  
LD 15 - Configure Called Party Control on Internal Calls in the Customer Data Block.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Change Features and options.  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
...  
- MCDC  
CPCI  
YES  
YES  
Malicious Call DN/CLID printing allowed.  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls allowed.  
NO = Called Party Control on Internal Calls denied.  
LD 57 - Configure Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CODE  
MTRC  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Code data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.  
Enter Flexible Feature Code.  
xx  
MTRC  
xxxx  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
308 Called Party Control on Internal Calls  
LD 10 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Analog (500/2500 type) sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
TYPE:  
TN  
Analog Set Type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
CLS  
MCTA  
Malicious Call Trace allowed.  
MCTD = Malicious Call Trace denied.  
LD 11 - Enable Malicious Call Trace on Meridian 1 proprietary sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
TN  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
CLS  
KEY  
MCTA  
Malicious Call Trace allowed.  
MCTD = Malicious Call Trace denied.  
Key Number, Malicious Call Trace.  
xxx TRC  
For information on the implementation of the Malicious Call Trace feature,  
refer to the Malicious Call Trace feature description in Features and Services  
Fundamentals (NN43001-106), Book 2.  
Feature operation  
Feature operation is described in the following scenarios.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 309  
Simple Call - Meridian 1 Proprietary Sets  
Set A, the calling party, initiates a call to Set B, the called party. Set B has  
Class of Service Malicious Call Trace Allowed (MCTA) configured. With  
Called Party Control on Internal Calls (CPCI) activated, Set B can activate  
Malicious Call Trace even after Set A has gone on-hook. This operation  
is possible because Set A is not idled until Set B has gone on-hook.  
Depending on the type of telephone, CPCI activation is done by completing  
the following:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Enter the SPRE code and "83" access code;  
Dial the Malicious Call Trace (MCT) Flexible Feature Code (FFC) or  
Activate the Call Trace key.  
—End—  
With Called Party Control on Internal Calls, Set B can activate the Malicious  
Call Trace feature during an active call between Set A and Set B as well as  
after Set A has gone on-hook. Set A is not idled until Set B goes on-hook.  
Simple Call - Analog (500/2500 type) Sets  
Step Action  
1
Flash the switchhook. A special dial tone is heard that signifies the  
call is on hold.  
2
3
4
Enter the SPRE code and "83" access code.  
Dial the Malicious Call Trace Flexible Feature Code.  
Go on-hook.  
—End—  
Conference Call  
When the calling party and the called party both are involved in a conference  
call then the following operation is observed:  
1. A party that called a set with CLS MCTA is only allowed to release if the  
called party has gone on hook and no other conferee has CLS MCTA or  
all remaining conferees were originators of a CPCI call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
310 Called Party Control on Internal Calls  
2. In a three party conference between the called party, calling party and  
the recorder then the recorder is not considered as a conferee. The  
recorder is treated as a simple call for called party control on internal  
calls feature.  
3. In a set to set call, if the called party establishes a conference with a  
trunk then the called party control on internal calls feature functionality is  
provided as long as the last called party (with CLS configured as MCTA)  
which goes on hook is a set rather than a trunk.  
Transfer Call  
If calling party and the called party are both involved in a simple call  
and either party tries to transfer the call to another set then the following  
operation is observed:  
1. If the called party in a CPCI call attempts to transfer the call to a set with  
CLS MCTA, it is not allowed to complete its transfer.  
2. If the called party transfers the call across the network then the called  
party is allowed to complete its transfer across the network and the  
transferred to party does not have any control on the calling party.  
3. If the calling party in a CPCI call attempts to transfer the call to another  
set, it is not allowed to complete its transfer regardless of that set’s  
Class of Service.  
Call on Hold  
If calling party and the called party both are involved in a simple call and  
either party tries to put the call on hold then the following operation is  
observed:  
1. If the calling party tries to release the call then the calling party is not  
allowed to release from the call.  
2. If the called party tries to release the call then the called party is allowed  
to release from the call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
311  
Called Party Disconnect Control  
Content  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 311)  
"Operating parameters" (page 311)  
"Feature interactions" (page 312)  
"Feature packaging" (page 313)  
"Feature implementation" (page 313)  
"Feature operation" (page 313)  
Feature description  
Called Party Disconnect Control allows the system to control the  
disconnecting of calls on Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX),  
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA), Direct Inward Dialing  
(DID), TIE, Wide Area telephone Service (WATS), modem, and Centralized  
Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks. The trunk route data  
block has been modified so that a route can be specified for Called Party  
Disconnect Control.  
With Called Party Disconnect Control, an incoming trunk call answered  
within the system is not disconnected until the system end goes on-hook. If  
the calling party goes on-hook, the connection is held, allowing the call to  
be traced in emergency situations. If the calling party goes off-hook again,  
the call is not reestablished.  
Operating parameters  
An incoming call on a trunk route with Called Party Disconnect Control  
allowed can be transferred to another telephone within the system, but  
cannot be transferred to a trunk.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
312 Called Party Disconnect Control  
An incoming call with Called Party Disconnect Control can be forwarded to  
another telephone, but not to another trunk.  
Tandem trunk connections are not allowed on incoming calls on trunks with  
Called Party Disconnect Control allowed.  
If Barge-In or Busy Verify is applied to trunks with Called Party Disconnect  
allowed, the trunk is disconnected.  
Force disconnect, through service change and maintenance, overrides  
Called Party Disconnect Control.  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Answerback  
Incoming calls on a trunk with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed  
that terminate on a telephone with Handsfree Answerback are answered  
automatically. They are not disconnected automatically, however, when the  
calling party goes on-hook.  
Conference  
Trunks with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed are treated as trunks  
without disconnect supervision when conferenced.  
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) - Commonwealth of Independent States  
(CIS)  
Called Party Disconnect Control may not be used in the CIS market because  
of its signaling requirements.  
Malicious Call Traced - Enhanced  
Prior to this feature, the Called Party Control (CDPC) option was not  
supported for conference calls. The CDPC option is now supported if the  
conference contains exactly one recording trunk, one MCT activating party  
and one other trunk. This is done to make the recorder transparent to the  
user. The CDPC option remains unsupported for all other conference calls.  
Meridian 911  
The Called Party Disconnect (CPDC) feature is used to retain a 911 trunk  
when a 911 call is disconnected by the caller. No modification to the feature  
is required for Meridian 911, except lifting the CPDC and Automatic Call  
Distribution (ACD) NCFW limitation. 911 Calls, arriving through trunks with  
CPDC defined, is allowed to NCFW, unlike non-911 ACD calls.  
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon  
There is no interaction with M911 Call Abandon and Called Party Disconnect  
Control.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature operation 313  
Periodic Clearing Enhancement  
Called Party Disconnect Control can exist on the same system and function  
on the same route, but is not to be used in conjunction with Periodic  
Clearing.  
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music  
This feature enhancement is not supported if used together with Toll  
Operator Break-In.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
LD 16 - Define Called Party Disconnect Control for a trunk route.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CNTL  
...  
CDB  
Customer Data Block.  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
(Do not) change the controls or timers.  
(NO) YES  
CPDC  
(NO) YES  
(Deny) allow Called Party Disconnect Control for the trunk route.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
314 Called Party Disconnect Control  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
315  
Calling Party Name Display Denied  
Content  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 315)  
"Operating parameters" (page 317)  
"Feature interactions" (page 317)  
"Feature packaging" (page 318)  
"Feature implementation" (page 318)  
"Feature operation" (page 319)  
Feature description  
This enhancement to the Calling Party Name Display feature allows a  
customer to define, on an originating set, whether or not to allow the display  
of the calling and called party name and/or digits on the terminating set.  
This option can be defined individually for each customer set, and applies  
to all Meridian telephone types. The display of digits is controlled by "digit  
display allowed on other set" (DIGA) or "digit display denied on other set"  
(DIGD) Class of Service. The name display is controlled by the "name  
display allowed on other set" (NAMA) or "name display denied on other set"  
(NAMD) Class of Service.  
The following scenarios are possible, where set A is the originating set and  
set B is the terminating set. DIGA "Allowed" and "Denied" indicates whether  
or not the called party digits display are allowed or denied on the set. If the  
display of digits is denied, the digits are replaced by four dashes (for an  
internal call) or seven dashes (for an external call). If the name display is  
denied (that is, NAMD), the name is replaced by "XXXX".  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
316 Calling Party Name Display Denied  
In the following example, originating set A has DIGA and NAMA Class of  
Service, and terminating set B also has DIGA and NAMA Class of Service.  
During an established call, the respective displays would be as follows:  
Figure 2  
Display of Calling Party Denied example  
Figure 3  
Example of displays when the originating and terminating sets both have Class of Service set  
to DIGA and NAMA  
If set A has DIGD and NAMD Class of Service, and set B also has DIGD  
and NAMD Class of Service, the displays would be as follows (keep in mind  
that set A displays the dialed digits even though set B has DIGD Class  
of Service).  
Figure 4  
Example of displays when the originating and terminating sets both have Class of Service set  
to DIGD and NAMD  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature interactions 317  
Operating parameters  
This enhancement pertains to both standalone and network environments.  
The called party digits are displayed on the originating set, regardless of the  
Class of Service of the terminating set.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Consoles  
The Calling Party Name Display Denied enhancement cannot be applied to  
attendant consoles.  
Call Forward  
Call Transfer  
During a Call Forward or Call Transfer, the calling party digits and  
forwarding/transferring party digits are displayed on the terminating set.  
This display is allowed or denied depending on the Class of Service  
of the calling set and the forwarding/transferring set. The name of the  
forwarding/transferring set is not displayed on the calling and terminating set.  
Calling Party Privacy  
For outgoing calls, if the Calling Party Privacy (CPP) package is equipped,  
the CPP feature will take precedence over the Calling Party Name Display  
Denied feature for restricting the Calling Party Name and Number. For  
example, if an outgoing ISDN call is marked as a CPP call, the outgoing  
SETUP message will include the Calling Party Number IE with the  
Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation Restricted" and the Display IE  
with the CPND Indicator set to "Presentation Denied", to inhibit both the  
Calling Party Number and Name being displayed on the terminating set,  
regardless of whether or not the Calling Party Name Display Denied feature  
allows the display of the Calling Party Name and/or Number.  
The Calling Party Name Display Denied feature takes precedence over  
the CPP feature for displaying an incoming ISDN call. If International  
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 is equipped, an incoming  
ISDN call with the Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation Restricted"  
in the Calling Party Number IE or the CPND Indicator set to "Presentation  
Denied" in the Display IE is marked as a CPP call, and will display "ACOD +  
Member" or "XXXX" as for the Calling Party Name Display Denied feature.  
Conference  
Calling Party Name Display Denied does not apply to conference calls.  
ISDN QSIG Name Display  
Call Party Name Display and Calling Party Name Display Denied interact  
with ISDN Q Interface Signaling Protocol (QSIG) Name Display, depending  
on the Name Display configuration in LD 16 for BRI or LD 17 for PRI. When  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
318 Calling Party Name Display Denied  
a QSIG network is interacting with an Meridian Customer Defined Network  
(MCDN) network providing network capability ND3, both the MCDN and  
QSIG Name Display feature function on the same level.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Numbers  
For a ringing call to a Multiple Appearance Directory Number (DN), the  
name on the calling set display can be suppressed by configuring any of  
the Terminal Numbers with NAMD Class of Service. The digit display on  
the calling set cannot be suppressed—the called digits are displayed even  
though the Class of Service on any of the Terminal Numbers is DIGD.  
The called set display is subject to the Class of Service of the calling  
party. For an established call to a Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
(DN), the calling set display is subject to the Class of Service configured  
for the answering set. The answering set display only is subject to the  
Class of Service of the calling party—the displays of the other sets in the  
Multiple-appearance group are blank.  
Office Data Administration System (ODAS)  
Depending on the Class of Service of the originating set, the ODAS  
designator is displayed or replaced by Xs, up to the maximum number of  
characters that the designator may have.  
Feature packaging  
Calling Party Name Display Denied requires International Supplementary  
Features (SUPP) package 131.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Configure the Calling Party Name Denied Class of Service for  
analog (500/2500 type) telephon" (page 318)  
Configure the Calling Party Name Denied Class of Service for analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones.  
2. "LD 11 - Configure the Calling Party Name Display Denied Class of  
Service for proprietary telephones." (page 319)  
Configure the Calling Party Name Display Denied Class of Service for  
proprietary telephones.  
LD 10 - Configure the Calling Party Name Denied Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature operation 319  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
...  
Response  
Description  
500  
Telephone type.  
CLS  
(DDGA) DDGD  
(NAMA) NAMD  
(Allow) deny DN to be displayed on other set.  
(Allow) deny name to displayed on other set.  
LD 11 - Configure the Calling Party Name Display Denied Class of Service for proprietary  
telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
...  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
CLS  
(DDGA) DDGD  
(NAMA) NAMD  
(Allow) deny DN to be displayed on other set.  
(Allow) deny name to be displayed on other set.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
320 Calling Party Name Display Denied  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
321  
Calling Party Privacy  
The Calling Party Privacy (CPP) feature enables the system to support the  
blocking of a Calling Party’s Number and Name from being displayed at the  
terminating set on an individual call basis. Users can dial a Calling Party  
Privacy code (for example, *67 from a proprietary set or 1167 from an analog  
(500/2500 type) set) to prevent their telephone number and name from being  
displayed on a receiving telephone across the Public Switched Telephone  
Network (PSTN). Internal calls within the system have originating numbers  
or names displayed, even though the originating call has requested privacy.  
This feature also allows a per-line blocking Class of Service to be  
programmed for station sets for public network calls. This relieves the user  
from having to dial the Flexible Feature Code (FFC) for every call, but in  
every other way is equivalent to the per-call blocking.  
Please refer to ISDN Primary Rate Interface Fundamentals (NN43001-569)  
for complete information.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
322 Calling Party Privacy  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
323  
Calling Party Privacy Override  
Content  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 323)  
"Operating parameters" (page 326)  
"Feature interactions" (page 327)  
"Feature packaging" (page 336)  
"Feature implementation" (page 336)  
"Feature operation" (page 339)  
Feature description  
Calling Party Privacy Override (CPPO) enhances the functionality of the  
Calling Party Privacy (CPP) feature. With Calling Party Privacy Override,  
calling party information can be selectively unblocked on a per-call basis.  
With the Calling Party Privacy Override feature, a circuit switched network  
user can selectively unblock calling party information on a per-call basis  
when Class of Service is set to CLBA. The user unblocks the calling party  
information by dialing a Calling Party Privacy Override Flexible Feature  
Code prior to dialing the destination number. When the CPPO Flexible  
Feature Code is dialed before the destination number, the user’s calling  
party information is displayed on the terminating set. The default for the  
Calling Party Privacy Override Flexible Feature Code is "*82" for proprietary  
sets and "1182" for analog (500/2500 type) sets. The Calling Party Privacy  
Override Flexible Feature Code is defined in Overlay 57.  
CPPO is provisioned on a trunk route basis. Any trunk type that can support  
an outgoing call can request the CPPO feature (see "Operating parameters"  
(page 326) for more information).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
324 Calling Party Privacy Override  
When the CPPO Flexible Feature Code is dialed prior to the normal dialing  
sequence, the call is marked as a CPPO call. The CPPO Flexible Feature  
Code is then removed from the dialed digits stored in the call register. If the  
outgoing trunk route provisions CPPO, then the Privacy Override Indicator  
is sent to the far end, and the Calling Party Number and Name information  
is displayed on the receiving telephone. If the outgoing trunk route does not  
provision CPPO, the call does not carry the Privacy Override Indicator.  
The following example illustrates Calling Party Privacy Override functionality:  
Step Action  
1
2
Set A, a Meridian 1 proprietary set with Class of Service set to  
CLBA, goes off-hook.  
Set A dials the Calling Party Privacy Override Flexible Feature Code,  
defined in Overlay 57. Calling Party Privacy Override is initiated.  
3
4
5
Set A dials the destination number for Set B.  
The call rings on Set B.  
The calling party information of Set A is presented on the display  
screen of Set B.  
—End—  
Outgoing calls  
For an outgoing non-ISDN trunk call, the Privacy Override Indicator is  
defined on the outgoing trunk route. The CPPO Flexible Feature Code is  
outpulsed to the far end provided that the outgoing trunk route provisions  
CPPO. If CPPO is not provisioned on the trunk route, then the call does not  
carry the Privacy Override Indicator.  
For an outgoing ISDN call from one system to another, the Privacy Override  
Indicator is represented when the Presentation Indicator field is set to  
"Presentation Allowed" in the Calling Party Number Information Element  
(IE) and the Call Party Name Display (CPND) Indicator field is set to  
"Presentation Allowed" in the Display IE.  
For an outgoing ISDN call to the Central Office, the Privacy Override  
Indicator is represented when the Presentation Indicator field is set to  
"Presentation Allowed" in the Calling Party Number IE and when the CPND  
information is included in the Display IE.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 325  
Incoming calls  
An incoming ISDN call is recognized as a CPPO call (that is, it carries  
the Privacy Override Indicator) if the Presentation Indicator field is set to  
"Presentation Allowed" in the Calling Party Number IE and if the CPND  
Indicator is set to "Presentation Allowed" in the Display IE (if it exists).  
When an incoming call is on a non-ISDN route, the system does not receive  
the Privacy Override Indicator.  
Tandem Calls  
Incoming ISDN calls  
ISDN to ISDN tandem For an incoming call tandeming through the  
system, any incoming Privacy Override Indicator is only repeated to the  
outgoing trunk route that also has CPPO provisioned.  
When an incoming ISDN trunk call is tandemed through an ISDN trunk to a  
system, the Presentation Indicator or the CPND Indicator, received from the  
incoming ISDN trunk, is tandemed to the outgoing ISDN trunk.  
When an incoming ISDN trunk call is tandemed through an ISDN trunk to a  
CO, the Presentation Indicator received from the incoming ISDN trunk is  
tandemed to the outgoing ISDN trunk. If the Display IE with the CPND  
Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed" is received from an incoming ISDN  
trunk, the Display IE, containing the Call Party Name, is sent across in the  
SETUP message tandemed to the outgoing ISDN trunk.  
ISDN to non-ISDN tandem When an incoming ISDN trunk call is  
tandemed to a non-ISDN trunk, the incoming call is treated as a CPPO call  
only if both the CLID and CPND Indicators are set to "Allowed". Otherwise,  
the call is treated as a CPP call.  
Incoming non-ISDN calls  
For incoming non-ISDN calls, the system does not receive the Privacy  
Override Indicator.  
When a call on an incoming non-ISDN route is tandemed on the system,  
the call is tandemed based on how the CPP flag (TCPP) prompt is defined  
in the Route Data Block for the outgoing route.  
When TCPP is set to YES, an incoming non-ISDN call tandemed to this  
route is treated as a CPP call.  
When TCPP is set to NO, an incoming non-ISDN call tandemed to this route  
is treated as a CPPO call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
326 Calling Party Privacy Override  
Non-ISDN to ISDN tandem Even though a Privacy Override Indicator  
is not provided for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call, if the outgoing route  
has TCPP set to NO, the Presentation Indicator field in the Calling Party  
IE is set to "Presentation Allowed".  
Non-ISDN to non-ISDN tandem A Privacy Override Indicator is not  
provided for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call. If the outgoing route has  
TCPP set to NO, the Privacy Override Indicator defined for that route is  
outpulsed, provided that the outgoing route provisions CPPO.  
Operating parameters  
Central Office Trunks (COT), Foreign Exchange (FEX), Wide Area  
Telephone Service (WATS), and Direct Inward Dial (DID) are the only trunk  
route types (including ISA service routes) that can out-pulse the Privacy  
Override Indicator for an outgoing non-ISDN call. All ISDN trunk routes  
provision the CPPO feature.  
A non-ISDN trunk route does not provision the CPPO feature if the out-pulse  
asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO) package (package 104) is configured.  
During SYSLOAD, the CPPO database is removed from the non-ISDN trunk  
routes if the OPAO package is configured.  
The Privacy Override Indicator, defined for a non-ISDN trunk route  
(dial-pulse or digitone), consists of any four arbitrary digits from 0-9. The  
asterisk (*) or octothorpe (#) cannot be part of the Privacy Override Indicator  
for dial-pulse trunks. For digitone trunks, the asterisk (*) can only be the first  
digit of the Privacy Override Indicator Flexible Feature Code.  
The asterisk and octothorpe are not outpulsed if the OPAO package is  
configured. The asterisk signals a three second pause and the octothorpe  
indicates end-of-dialing. The octothorpe cannot be used in a Privacy  
Override Indicator.  
The asterisk (*) used to introduce a pause while out-pulsing digits is  
supported on analog and DTI trunks, but not supported on ISDN trunks. On  
ISDN trunks, if the OPAO feature is enabled, the asterisk (*) is outpulsed  
as a called party digit.  
Privacy Override Indicators are not received from the CO or non-ISDN  
DID trunks.  
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code cannot conflict with any internal DN,  
including the Special Prefix (SPRE) code.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 327  
When a user dials the Flexible Feature Code defined for the CPPO feature  
and if CPPO is not provisioned on the outgoing trunk route, the call proceeds  
without carrying the Privacy Override Indicator.  
The CPPO feature does not affect whether or not the Calling Party Number  
and Name information is displayed for internal calls within the system, even  
if the originator requests CPPO.  
All incoming non-ISDN calls with the Privacy Override Indicator terminate  
on the system. If the Privacy Override Indicator is not defined in the Flexible  
Feature Code for CPPO, an overflow tone (unrecognized digits) is provided  
to the user.  
If the Stored Number Redial (SNR)/Last Number Redial (LNR) feature is  
used by the originator of a CPPO call to store the dialed digits, the CPPO  
Flexible Feature Code is stored against the SNR/LNR database. If the user  
removes that CPPO Flexible Feature Code and then the SNR/LNR feature  
is used to re-initiate the call, overflow tone is returned to the user.  
ISDN implementation for this feature includes DMS100/250, SL-100, AT&T4,  
AT&T5, TR-1268 (NI-2), Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN)  
Private Networks, EuroISDN, QSIG, and BRI trunks.  
The CPPO feature is supported on the following International PRI (IPRI)  
connectivity: Ericsson AXE-10 CO Connectivity (Australia), Ericsson  
AXE10-CO Connectivity (Sweden), French Numeris CO Connectivity, Japan  
D70 CO Connectivity, Swissnet 2 CO Connectivity, SYS-12 CO Connectivity,  
1TR6 CO Connectivity (Germany), and Asia Pacific ISDN Phase 2.  
The CPPO feature supports the following North American connectivity:  
DMS100/250, S1100, Lucent #4 ESS (ESS4), Lucent #5 EES (ESS5), and  
TR-1268 (NI-2).  
CPPO does not support R2MFC signaling.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Consoles  
A CPPO call can be originated from any Meridian 1 attendant console.  
Attendant consoles request CPPO by preceding the normal dialing  
sequence with the Flexible Feature Code for CPPO.  
Attendant consoles can also initiate a CPPO call using the Autoline key.  
An outgoing trunk call, initiated by pressing the Autoline key, carries the  
Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code, followed by  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
328 Calling Party Privacy Override  
the normal dialing sequence, is stored against the Autoline key. The CPPO  
Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits  
(currently 31) stored against the Autoline key.  
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code can also be stored against the Autoline  
key. An outgoing CPPO call can then be initiated by pressing the Autoline  
key followed by manually dialing the destination number.  
An outgoing CPPO call can also be initiated by dialing the CPPO Flexible  
Feature Code followed by pressing the Autoline key, on which the normal  
dialing sequence of digits for the destination number is stored.  
Autodial  
An outgoing trunk call, initiated by pressing the Autodial key, carries the  
Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code followed by  
the normal dialing sequence is stored against the Autodial key. The CPPO  
Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits  
(currently 31) stored against the Autodial key.  
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code can be stored against the Autodial key. In  
this case, an outgoing CPPO call can be initiated by pressing the Autodial  
key followed by manually dialing the normal sequence of digits for the  
destination number.  
An outgoing CPPO call can also be initiated by dialing the CPPO Flexible  
Feature Code followed by pressing the Autodial key on which the normal  
dialing sequence of digits for the destination number is stored.  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Calls placed by means of Enhanced Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)  
Routing, Enhanced Interflow, Enhanced Night Call Forward, Enhanced  
Network Routing, and Network ACD recognize the originator’s CPPO  
request.  
Automatic Call Distribution MAX  
If the CPP package is equipped, ACD MAX reports include the Calling  
Line Identification (CLID) for incoming ISDN calls that have the CLID  
Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed".  
Basic Rate Interface  
Although Basic Rate Interface (BRI) networking is not supported in North  
America, CPPO treats BRI trunk calls in the same manner as an ISDN  
trunk call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature interactions 329  
Call Detail Recording  
Call Detail Recording (CDR) records continue to include the Calling Party  
Number even if the caller has requested CPPO. When the CDR record  
is generated, the CPPO Flexible Feature Code dialed by the originator is  
included in the DIGIT field (if it displays the dialed digits).  
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code dialed by the originator is not included  
in the DIGIT field if it displays the outpulsed digits. The Privacy Override  
Indicator, outpulsed by an outgoing non-ISDN trunk route that provisions  
CPPO, is included in the outpulsed digits.  
Call Pickup Network Wide  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator is picked up  
by a remote set (the requesting party), the Calling Party Number and Name  
is displayed on the requesting set.  
Call Hold  
When an incoming trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator is taken  
off hold, the Calling Party Number and Name information is displayed on  
the set.  
Call Forward All Types  
Hunt  
Network Hunt  
The existing call redirection functionality is not changed by this feature.  
When an incoming ISDN trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator is  
forwarded into the public or private networks, the Privacy Override Indicator  
is tandemed to the far end to allow the display of the Calling Party Number  
and Name, provided that the outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has  
CPPO provisioned.  
When an incoming ISDN call with Calling Party Number and Name set  
to "Presentation Allowed" is forwarded to a set within the same node, the  
Calling Party Number and Name is displayed on the terminating set.  
When an incoming non-ISDN trunk call is forwarded onto a trunk, the  
outgoing trunk call from the tandem node carries the Privacy Override  
Indicator, provided that the outgoing trunk route on the tandem node has  
CPPO provisioned. Also, the TCPP prompt in the Route Data Block must  
be set to NO.  
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code can be stored on the forwarding Directory  
Number (DN), including the forwarding DN for Call Forward All Calls, Hunt  
DN and Flexible Call Forward No Answer DN (FDN).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
330 Calling Party Privacy Override  
If CPPO is requested on the forwarding DN and the call is forwarded across  
an ISDN link, the outgoing SETUP message includes the Redirecting  
Number IE (if it exists) with the Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation  
Allowed".  
If CPPO is requested on the forwarding DN and the call is forwarded  
across a non-ISDN link, no Privacy Override Indicator is outpulsed to  
the terminating node if the originating set did not request CPPO. This is  
because no Redirecting Number information is sent across a non-ISDN link.  
When an internal call is forwarded into the public or private networks, if the  
originator requests CPPO and the outgoing trunk route provisions CPPO,  
the Privacy Override Indicator is sent to the far end to allow the display of  
the Calling Party Number and Name.  
Call Pickup  
With CPPO activated, when an incoming trunk call with the Privacy  
Override Indicator is picked up locally, the Calling Party Number and Name  
information is displayed on the terminating set.  
Call Transfer  
As per existing operation, if an incoming non-ISDN call is transferred or an  
incoming ISDN call is transferred to a non-ISDN trunk, the Connect Party  
Number and Name information is not passed to the terminating node. The  
CPPO feature does not change this operation.  
When an incoming call with the Privacy Override Indicator is transferred  
across the MCDN network or to a local set, the originator’s calling party  
information is displayed on the final terminating set.  
Calling Line Identification Restriction  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) sets do not support the Flexible Feature Code  
(FFC) feature. CPPO can only be requested by applying the existing Calling  
Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) Service option. This is done by setting  
the soft key "ID PRES" (if it exists) to "Allowed" or the Presentation of CLID  
to far end on outgoing calls (PRES) prompt to YES in Overlay 27. Then an  
outgoing ISDN/non-ISDN trunk call carries the Privacy Override Indicator  
if the outgoing trunk route provisions CPPO. However, if the Calling Party  
Number Information Element (IE) with the Presentation Indicator set to  
"Presentation Denied" is included in the SETUP message generated by  
the Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminal, then the BRI terminal does not  
allow CPPO. This is because the Presentation Indicator, generated by the  
BRI terminal, always overwrites the Calling Line Identification Restriction  
(CLIR) service option.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature interactions 331  
Calling Party Privacy  
If the user requests both Calling Party Privacy and Calling Party Privacy  
Override, then the feature last requested takes precedence. The Flexible  
Feature Code dialed last determines the type of call.  
If a set with Class of Service set to CLBA requests CPPO by dialing the  
CPPO Flexible Feature Code, then the call is treated as a CPPO call. If a  
set with Class of Service set to CLBD requests CPP by dialing the CPP  
Flexible Feature Code, then the call is treated as a CPP call.  
If a user dials the Flexible Feature Code for CPPO followed by the Flexible  
Feature Code for CPP, then the call is treated as a CPP call. If a user dials  
the Flexible Feature Code for CPP followed by the Flexible Feature Code for  
CPPO, then the call is treated as a CPPO call.  
Calling Party Privacy and Call Forward  
Set A, requesting CPPO, calls Set B. Set B Call Forwards All Calls to Set C.  
The CPP Flexible Feature Code is part of the forwarding DN. Set A’s number  
and name is displayed on Set C as the Calling Party Number and Name;  
although, no redirecting number is displayed on Set C. The tandem node  
sends the Display IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed" and the  
Redirecting Number IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Restricted".  
Set A, requesting CPP, calls Set B. Set B Call Forwards All Calls to Set C.  
The CPPO Flexible Feature Code is part of the forwarding DN. Set B’s  
number is displayed on Set C as the Redirecting Number; although, no  
Calling Party Number and Name is displayed on Set C. The tandem node  
sends the display IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Restricted" and  
the Redirecting Number IE with the Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed".  
Calling Party Privacy and Call Transfer  
Set A, requesting CPPO, calls Set B. Set B answers the call, requests CPP,  
and initiates a transfer to Set D. After the transfer is complete, Set A’s  
Calling Party Number and Name is displayed on Set D. The request made  
by the connected party takes precedence over the transferring party while  
displaying the Connect Party Number and Name.  
Set A, requesting CPP, calls Set B. Set B answers the call, requests CPPO,  
and initiates a transfer to Set D. After the transfer is complete, Set A’s  
Calling Party Number and Name is not displayed on Set D. The request  
made by the connected party takes precedence over the transferring party  
while displaying the Connect Party Number and Name.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
332 Calling Party Privacy Override  
Conference  
The CPPO feature passes the Privacy Override Indicator to the terminating  
set in order to display the Calling Party Number and Name, if the Conference  
feature is used for the purpose of performing a transfer.  
Display of Calling Party Denied  
When the CPP package is equipped, the CPPO feature takes precedence  
over the Display of Calling Party Denied (DPD) feature for allowing the  
Calling Party Number and Name to be displayed. For example, when an  
outgoing ISDN call is marked as a CPPO call, then the outgoing SETUP  
message includes the Calling Party Number IE with the Presentation  
Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed" and the Display IE with the CPND  
Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed". This enables both the Calling Party  
Number and Name to be displayed on the terminating set, regardless of  
whether the DPD feature allows or denies the display of the Calling Party  
Number and/or Name.  
E.164 ESN Numbering Plan Enhancement  
CPPO can be requested for ESN calls by preceding the dialing sequence  
with the Flexible Feature Code defined for the CPPO feature. The CPPO  
Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits  
(currently 31) allowed for the destination DN.  
Feature Group D  
When an incoming Feature Group D (FGD) call terminates at a system  
locally, the received 10 digit Automatic Number Identification (ANI) is  
displayed on the terminating set if the Show ANI Digits on Terminal Displays  
(SHAN) field is set to YES in the FGD data block that is associated with the  
incoming trunk route. If the originator requests CPPO, the end office sends  
the 10 digit ANI to the circuit switched network.  
If an incoming FGD call is routed to another switch through ISDN Primary  
Rate Interface (PRI) or ISDN Signaling Link (ISL), the outgoing SETUP  
message includes the 10 digit ANI (if it exists) as the Calling Party Number  
(CLID) with the Presentation Indicator set to "Presentation Allowed". This  
occurs if the incoming call requests CPPO. CPPO takes precedence over  
the SHAN field that is defined in the FGD data block and is associated with  
the incoming trunk route to allow the 10 digit ANI display.  
Hot Line  
Hot line calls carry the Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible  
Feature Code followed by the normal dialing sequence is stored in the Hot  
Line DN. The CPPO Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum  
number of digits (currently 31) allowed for the Hot Line DN.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 333  
Last Number Redial  
The Last Number Redial (LNR) feature stores the CPPO Flexible Feature  
Code in the LNR database if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code was included  
in the last number dialed by the user. The outgoing re-dialed calls also send  
the Privacy Override Indicator to the far end.  
Incoming Trunk Programmable Calling Line Identification  
When the incoming trunk route is a non-ISDN route, the billing number  
(CLID) assigned by the incoming trunk route is passed to the CO with the  
Presentation Indicator field set to "Presentation Allowed", if the outgoing  
ISDN trunk route has the TCPP prompt set to NO.  
When the incoming trunk route is an ISDN route, the "Allowed" Presentation  
Indicator is tandemed to the outgoing trunk route. If the Presentation  
Indicator is set to "Presentation Allowed" or no Calling Party Number IE is  
received on the incoming trunk route, the billing number assigned by the  
incoming trunk route is passed to the CO with the Presentation Indicator  
field set to "Presentation Allowed", if the incoming trunk route has the Billing  
Number Display (BDSP) prompt set to YES or NO.  
ISDN Signaling Link  
CPPO treats an ISDN Signaling Link (ISL) call in the same manner as an  
ISDN trunk call.  
Malicious Call Trace  
An incoming call to a set with the Malicious Call Trace (MCT) feature  
activated includes the Terminal Number (TN) of the calling party in the MCT  
record, whether or not the caller has requested CPPO.  
Meridian 911  
An incoming 911 call with Automatic Number Identification (ANI) information  
always displays the ANI digits on the terminating set or passes the ANI  
information to the Meridian 911.  
Meridian Interactive Voice Response  
An incoming ISDN call with the CLID Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed"  
sends the CLID to the Meridian Interactive Voice Response (IVR) if the  
CPP package is equipped.  
Meridian Link  
If the CPP package is equipped, an incoming ISDN call with the CLID  
Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed" includes the CLID in the Application  
Module Link (AML) messages sent to the Meridian Link module.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
334 Calling Party Privacy Override  
Meridian Mail  
When an incoming ISDN call with the CLID Presentation Indicator set to  
"Allowed" terminates on Meridian Mail, the CLID passed to Meridian Mail is  
recorded. The call is treated by Meridian Mail as an external call.  
Calls placed by means of Through Dial can request Calling Party Privacy  
Override. These calls involve the person accessing Meridian Mail (mailbox  
user or incoming caller) dialing 0 followed by any telephone number. The  
caller is able to dial a CPPO Flexible Feature Code plus the normal dialing  
sequence, following the 0. The asterisk (*) or octothorpe (#), as part of the  
CPPO Flexible Feature Code, are rejected by Meridian Mail. Therefore, the  
CPPO Flexible Feature Code can only consist of seven digits (0-9).  
Meridian MAX  
If the CPP package is equipped, an incoming ISDN call with the CLID  
Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed" sends the CLID to Meridian MAX.  
Network Call Redirection  
If a set receives a call and is then redirected to the public network on an  
ISDN trunk that supports call redirection, then the redirecting IE in the  
outgoing SETUP message has the Presentation Indicator set accordingly.  
For instance, if the call that had requested CPPO is redirected, the outgoing  
SETUP message has the Presentation Indicator set to "Allowed".  
Network Message Center  
An incoming trunk call with the Privacy Override Indicator displays the  
Calling Party Number and Name on the Message Center operator’s terminal.  
Network Ring Again  
A call placed by means of the Network Ring Again feature recognizes the  
CPPO request from when the call was originally dialed.  
Nortel Symposium Call Center  
As per existing operation, an incoming CPPO call routed to Nortel  
Symposium Call Center contains the CLID.  
Private Line Service  
The Private Line Service feature out-pulses the Privacy Override Indicator  
only if it is dialed by the originator. The asterisk (*) is outpulsed to the  
far end only if it is an Out-pulse Asterisk and Octothorpe (OPAO) call.  
Otherwise, the asterisk (*) signals a three-second pause.  
The asterisk (*) used to introduce a pause while out-pulsing digits is  
supported on analog and DTI trunks, but not supported on ISDN trunks. On  
ISDN trunks, if the OPAO feature is enabled, the asterisk (*) is outpulsed  
as a called party digit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 335  
Remote Virtual Queuing  
The Remote Virtual Queuing feature has automatic retry capabilities that  
are used when congestion is encountered within the network. The same  
Calling Party Privacy Override considerations are provided to the "retries"  
as were provided to the originally dialed call.  
Ring Again - Busy Trunk  
A call that is automatically re-dialed by the Ring Again - Busy Trunk feature  
recognizes the CPPO requested when the call is originally dialed.  
Speed Call  
System Speed Call  
When an outgoing trunk call is initiated by dialing a Speed Call code, the  
Speed Call code carries the Privacy Override Indicator if the CPPO Flexible  
Feature Code followed by the normal dialing sequence is stored in the  
Speed Call Entry represented by the Speed Call code. The CPPO Flexible  
Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of digits (currently  
31) allowed per Speed Call list entry.  
The user can also store the CPPO Flexible Feature Code in the Speed  
Call Entry (or Speed Call key). An outgoing CPPO call can be initiated by  
dialing the Speed Call code (or pressing the Speed Call key), followed by  
manually dialing the digits.  
Stored Number Redial  
In the Stored Number Redial (SNR) programming mode, the user can store  
the CPPO Flexible Feature Code, followed by the normal dialing sequence  
in the SNR database. The outgoing calls originated by the Stored Number  
Redial feature send the Privacy Override Indicator to the far end. The  
CPPO Flexible Feature Code is counted against the maximum number of  
digits (currently 31) allowed by the SNR feature.  
During an active call on a Meridian 1 proprietary set, the Stored Number  
Redial feature stores the CPPO Flexible Feature Code in the SNR database  
if the CPPO Flexible Feature Code is included in the number dialed by the  
originator. The outgoing re-dialed calls also send the Privacy Override  
Indicator to the far end.  
Trunk Anti-Tromboning  
When trunks are removed, due to the Trunk Anti-Tromboning (TAT)  
operation, an ISDN call recognizes the CPPO/CPP requested by the  
originator.  
Trunk Optimization Before Answer  
An optimized call, due to Trunk Optimization Before Answer (TRO)  
operation, recognizes the CPPO/CPP requested by the originator.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
336 Calling Party Privacy Override  
Virtual Network Services  
CPPO treats Virtual Network Services (VNS) trunk calls in the same manner  
as ISDN trunk calls. For instance, CPPO does not affect the existing VNS  
operation. If CPPO was requested when originating a call, the Presentation  
Indicator field of CLID is set to "Presentation Allowed".  
VISIT  
The VISIT which connects to a set receives the Calling Party Number or  
Name, since an incoming CPPO call sends the Calling Party Number or  
Name to the set for display.  
Feature packaging  
The Calling Party Privacy Override feature requires the following package:  
•
Calling Party Privacy (CPP) package 301, which has the following  
dependency:  
— Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139.  
For Calling Party Name Display, Calling Party Name Display (CPND)  
package 95 is required. ISDN package 145 is required for ISDN routes.  
Non-ISDN trunks must restrict the Outpulse Asterisk and Octothorpe  
(OPAO) package 104 to provision the Calling Party Privacy Override feature.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 16 - Configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route."  
(page 337)  
Configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route.  
2. "LD 16 - For an ISDN trunk route, set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem  
non-ISDN calls on to this route." (page 337)  
For an ISDN trunk route, set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem non-ISDN  
calls on to this route.  
3. "LD 57 - Define the Flexible Feature Code for the Calling Party Privacy  
Override feature." (page 338)  
Define the Flexible Feature Code for the Calling Party Privacy Override  
feature.  
4. "LD 10/11 - Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking."  
(page 339)  
Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature implementation 337  
Configuration procedures require that the following conditions are met  
before you configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route:  
•
•
•
CPPO is configurable on COT, DID, FEX, WAT and ISA routes.  
OAPO package 104 is restricted or unequipped.  
Route is either OGT (outgoing) or IAO (incoming and outgoing).  
LD 16 - Configure Privacy Override Indicators for a Non-ISDN route.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ROUT  
RDB  
Route Data Block.  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Route number  
0-511  
0-127  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
...  
CPP  
Calling Party Privacy/Privacy Override (CPP/CPPO) flag.  
Enable CPP/CPPO feature and configure parameters.  
(NO) = CPP/CPPO feature is disabled is the default.  
YES  
- TCPP  
- DTPI  
CPP/CPPO flag treatment for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call  
tandemed to this trunk route.  
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Override Indicator (default).  
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Indicator.  
(NO)  
YES  
(*67) nnnn  
Digitone Trunk Privacy Indicator  
nnnn = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.  
- DPPI  
0-(1167)-9999  
(*82) nnnn  
Dial-pulse Trunk Privacy Indicator  
- DTPO  
Digitone Trunk Privacy Indicator  
nnnn = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.  
- DPPO  
0-(1182)-9999  
Dial-pulse Trunk Privacy Indicator  
Configuration procedures require that the following conditions are met before  
you set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem non-ISDN calls on to this route:  
•
•
The CPP package 301 is equipped.  
Route is either OGT (outgoing) or IAO (incoming and outgoing).  
LD 16 - For an ISDN trunk route, set the TCPP flag in RDB to tandem non-ISDN calls on to  
this route.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Route Data Block.  
TYPE  
RDB  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
338 Calling Party Privacy Override  
Prompt  
CUST  
Response  
Description  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Route number  
ROUT  
0-511  
0-127  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
All ISDN trunk routes are CPPO configurable.  
...  
CPP  
Calling Party Privacy/Privacy Override (CPP/CPPO) flag.  
Enable CPP/CPPO feature and configure parameters.  
(NO) = CPP/CPPO feature is disabled is the default.  
YES  
- TCPP  
CPP/CPPO flag treatment for an incoming non-ISDN trunk call  
tandemed to this trunk route.  
(NO)  
YES  
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Override Indicator (default).  
Outgoing call will carry the Privacy Indicator.  
LD 57 - Define the Flexible Feature Code for the Calling Party Privacy Override feature.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
FFCT  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Code.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15.  
xx  
(NO)  
YES  
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone denied.  
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone allowed.  
...  
CODE  
- CPP  
CPP  
xxxx  
CPP Flexible Feature Code  
Calling Party Privacy code  
xxxx = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.  
The Flexible Feature Code may be up to 4 digits, or up to 7 digits  
with the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package (150).  
xxxx  
- CPP  
Change the CPP code or enter a <CR> to accept.  
CPPO Flexible Feature Code  
CODE  
- CPPO  
CPPO  
xxxx  
Calling Party Privacy Override code  
xxxx = 0-9999, an asterisk (*) can be entered as the first digit.  
The Flexible Feature Code may be up to 4 digits, or up to 7 digits  
with the Directory Number Expansion (DNXP) package (150).  
xxxx  
- CPPO  
Change the CPPO code or enter a <CR> to accept.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 339  
LD 10/11 - Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
TN  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
DES  
d...d  
Designator  
The response d...d represents an Office Data Administration  
System (ODAS) Station Designator of 1-6 alphanumeric  
characters.  
xx  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
CLS  
CLBA  
Activate Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking.  
CLBD = Deactivate Calling Party Number and Name per-line  
blocking (default).  
Feature operation  
For a user to override the Calling Party Number and Name per-line blocking  
allowed (CLBA) Class of Service, the following steps must be performed.  
Step Action  
1
2
The user goes off hook.  
The user initiates a call by dialing the Calling Party Privacy Override  
Flexible Feature Code, defined in LD 57.  
3
The user dials the destination number.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
340 Calling Party Privacy Override  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
341  
Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 341)  
"Operating parameters" (page 342)  
"Feature interactions" (page 342)  
"Feature packaging" (page 343)  
"Feature implementation" (page 343)  
"Feature operation" (page 343)  
Feature description  
This feature allows a station or attendant to Camp-on an external trunk call  
to another station that is in a ringback or dialing state. If the station on which  
the call is camped on becomes idle without going into established state, the  
camped-on call rings the station automatically.  
This capability applies to standalone and networking environments. Within a  
networking environment, the station affecting the Camp-on and the desired  
party can be anywhere in the network.  
If the Flexible Tones and Cadences package is equipped and periodic  
Camp-on tones and cadences are defined, periodic Camp-on tone is given  
to the desired station when it goes into established state indicating that a  
call is camped on. For analog sets, this is in the form of a tone. For digital  
sets, it is a periodic buzz. The Camp-on tone lasts for the duration of the  
Camp-on. The desired station receives periodic Camp-on tone, if the station  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
342 Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing  
has Warning Tone Allowed class of service and the customer has the  
Camp-on Tone Allowed option. Music is provided to the camped-on station,  
if the Music package is equipped and defined for the customer.  
During Camp-on, as soon as the attendant releases the call or the station  
completes the transfer, recall timing begins (the Recall Timer is configured  
in LD 15). If the timer times out, the Camp-on is recalled to the attendant. If  
the attendant is busy, the recall is queued against the attendant. The call  
can no longer be camped on to the desired station without affecting another  
Camp-on. If the attendant is in Night Service, the Camp-on receives night  
treatment.  
If the desired party is on a different node, and Network Attendant Service  
(NAS) is equipped, the Camp-on is routed according to the NAS routing  
table. If the Camp-on is recalled to the local attendant, and the local  
attendant is busy, the recall is queued to the attendant. During this time, the  
call may still be answered by the desired station (the call remains camped  
on until the attendant answers the recall). This capability is that of the Slow  
Camp-on Recall.  
Operating parameters  
Only one call at a time can be camped on to a station in dialing or ringback  
state.  
The cadence for Periodic Camp-on can be defined in LD 56. Periodic  
Camp-on can be allowed or denied on a customer and set basis.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Forward No Answer  
Camp-on recall takes precedence over the Attendant Forward No Answer  
recall. However, if during the recall the customer goes into Night Service  
and the recall is not answered by the night DN, the call is disconnected  
according to the Attendant No Answer feature processing.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting and Call Forward All Calls take precedence over Camp-on.  
First-Second Degree Busy  
If the First-Second Degree Busy Indication is equipped, and the attendant  
attempts to Camp-on a call to a station in the ringing or dialing state, the  
attendant receives first degree busy indication. If the attendant attempts to  
Camp-on a call to a station that is second degree busy, Camp-on is not  
allowed. The attendant receives second degree busy indication.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 343  
Slow Answer Recall Modification  
Slow Answer Recall Modification (SLAM) has an interaction after the  
attendant answers the recall. If SLAM is configured, then the target set is  
disconnected after the attendant answers the recall. The call is no longer  
camped on.  
Feature packaging  
Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing requires Camp-on French Type  
Approval (FRTA) package 197.  
For network routing, the Network Attendant Service (NAS) package 159  
is required.  
If periodic Camp-on tone is desired, the Flexible Tones and Cadences  
(FTC) package 125 is required.  
If music to the camped-on station is desired, the Music (MUS) package 44  
is required.  
For a station to Camp-on a trunk, the Station Camp-on (SCMP) package  
121 is required.  
Feature implementation  
No change to existing configuration is required for the Camp-On to a Set in  
Ringback or Dialing feature.  
Feature operation  
See the Camp-On feature description contained within this document.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
344 Camp-On to a Set in Ringback or Dialing  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
345  
Camp-On to Multiple Appearance  
Directory Number  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 345)  
"Operating parameters" (page 346)  
"Feature interactions" (page 346)  
"Feature packaging" (page 347)  
"Feature implementation" (page 347)  
Feature operation  
Feature description  
The Camp-On to Multiple Appearance DN enhancement allows a call  
camped on to an Multiple Call Ringing (MCR) or Multiple Call Non-ringing  
(MCN) Directory Number (DN) to be camped on to all sets with that DN.  
That is, any set with that MCR or MCN DN can receive the call when it idles.  
The camped call will Camp-On to each set as allowed for by the existing  
Camp-On feature. Also, each set with the MCR or MCN DN will receive  
Camp-On tone as long the camped call is in the Camp-On Queue. Prior to  
the introduction of the Camp-On to Multiple Appearance DN enhancement  
Camp-On was applied to the first set in the TN list.  
This enhancement applies to Station Camp-On and Network Camp-On  
(regardless of where in the network the Camp-On originated).  
An example of the sequence for multiple Camp-Ons to a single DN follows:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
346 Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
5
Sets A, B, and C are Meridian 1 proprietary telephones with the  
same MCR or MCN DN. All three sets are busy.  
The attendant extends an external call to the busy DN and releases.  
Sets A, B, and C hear Camp-On tone.  
A goes on-hook and camped call is presented to set A. Camp-On  
tone is removed from B and C.  
If B went on-hook in step 3, the call is presented to set B and  
Camp-On tone is removed from sets A and C.  
Similar operations as in step 4 if set C goes on-hook.  
—End—  
Operating parameters  
The same feature requirements apply as for the Camp-On feature.  
This Camp-On enhancement applies to Multiple-appearance Multiple-call  
Ringing (MCR) or Non-ringing (MCN) DNs; it does not apply to  
Multiple-appearance Single-call Ringing (SCR) or Non-ringing (SCN) DNs.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Break-in  
Camp-On will not be allowed on a set involved in an Attendant Break-in.  
Centralized Multiline  
This feature allows analog (500/2500 type) telephones to appear as MCR  
DNs. This enhancement should apply to these sets.  
Make Set Busy  
Camp-On will not be allowed on a set with Make Set Busy active.  
Network Camp-On  
The Camp-On enhancement applies to all Camp-On attempts regardless of  
where the Camp-On was originated.  
Operator Call Back  
Camp-On is not allowed on a set waiting for an Operator Recall signal.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature operation 347  
Single Call Ringing and Non-ringing  
Multiple-appearance Single Call Ringing and Non-ringing (SCR and SCN)  
DNs are not affected by the Camp-On enhancement.  
Station Camp-On  
The Camp-On enhancement applies to Station Camp-On.  
Feature packaging  
Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number requires International  
Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131.  
Feature implementation  
There are no specific implementation procedures for this feature.  
Feature operation  
For operating procedures, see the"Camp-On to Multiple Appearance  
Directory Number" (page 345) feature description on "Camp-On to Multiple  
Appearance Directory Number" (page 345).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
348 Camp-On to Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
349  
Camp-On  
Content  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 349)  
"Operating parameters" (page 349)  
"Feature interactions" (page 350)  
"Feature packaging" (page 353)  
"Feature implementation" (page 353)  
"Feature operation" (page 354)  
Feature description  
The Camp-On feature routes one additional external call to a busy Directory  
Number (DN). When the attendant extends a call to a busy DN, the external  
call is camped-on to the telephone. If the Class of Service allows a warning  
tone, the user hears a tone indicating that a call is camped on. If the user  
frees the line within a specified time, the camped-on call rings the telephone  
automatically. If not, the call returns to the attendant as a recall.  
Camp-On Tone is allowed or denied on a per-customer basis. The time a  
camped-on call waits is defined in LD 15 from 0 to 510 seconds, in multiples  
of two seconds. The default is 30 seconds.  
Operating parameters  
Camp-On applies to attendant-extended calls only. If the attendant hears a  
busy tone, another call has already been camped on to the busy telephone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
350 Camp-On  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Blocking of Directory Number  
Camp-on is denied for a DN that is blocked due to the Attendant Blocking of  
DN feature.  
Attendant Break-In  
If the destination DN has a camped-on incoming trunk call, the attendant  
cannot extend the urgent incoming call as a Camp-On call.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward, Internal Call  
Call Forward All Calls and Internal Call Forward take precedence over  
Camp-On.  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code  
When a busy set is encountered, it is possible to Camp-on to the set, even if  
Call Forward/Hunt Override Via Flexible Feature Code has been activated  
Call Forward No Answer  
When the Call Forward No Answer timer expires for a ringing camped-on  
call, the call is given Attendant Recall treatment instead of Call Forward  
No Answer treatment.  
Call Park Network Wide  
When an attendant attempts to extend a call to a busy station across the  
network and the busy station returns a Camp-On allow signal, an attendant  
has the option of camping on a call or continuing with Network Call Park.  
Call Park on Unsupervised Trunks  
A Disconnect Timer applies to camped-on calls on all trunks on the route.  
All answered calls in the camped-on state is disconnected if left in that state  
for an extended period.  
Call Waiting  
Call Waiting Redirection  
If a Call Waiting Class of Service or key is defined, Camp-On cannot be  
provided.  
Camp-On, Station  
With Station Camp-On, any internal station can camp an external call on to  
another internal station that is busy. Prior to the introduction of this feature,  
attendants were the only parties that could camp calls on to busy internal  
stations. The term internal station includes stations on other nodes within a  
Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN). For more information, see  
the Camp-On, Station feature description.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Feature interactions 351  
China Number 1 Signaling - Called Party Control  
A local attendant cannot Camp-on a call to an analog (500/2500 type) set  
that is on an outgoing trunk call that follows Called Party Control.  
Enhanced Override  
Forced Camp-On  
Priority Override  
Station-to-Station Camp-On and Attendant Camp-On are not affected  
by Forced Camp-On or Priority Override. The new Classes of Service  
(Camp-On From Another Telephone Allowed [CPFA], Camp-On From  
Another Telephone Denied [CPFD], Camp-On To Another Telephone  
Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On To Another Telephone Denied [CPTD])  
affect only Forced Camp-On. The Station Camp-On (SCMP) package  
(121) is required to return busy tone instead of ringback tone to the party  
camping on.  
Flexible Feature Code Boss Secretarial Filtering  
When an attendant is attempting to Camp-on a call to a boss set with  
filtering active, the call is routed to the secretary set, if the filtering is active  
for all calls. If filtering is active for external calls only, the call is routed to the  
secretary set if the call is an external call.  
Flexible Voice/Data Terminal Number  
Camp-On is not supported on data calls to a dynamic voice/data TN.  
Camp On is supported for voice calls to dynamic voice/data TN. However,  
no tone is inserted during a Camp On attempt if the Terminal Number is  
in a busy data mode.  
Generic XFCOT Software Support  
The Camp-On feature allows an attendant to route one additional call to a  
busy DN so it can be rung when it becomes free. If the busy DN is not free  
after a customer-defined time, the call is recalled to the attendant.  
A call from a loopstart disconnect supervised or unsupervised loopstart  
trunk can be camped on. If a caller on an unsupervised loopstart trunk  
disconnects while the call is camped on, it is detected when the call is  
recalled or answered.  
Caller disconnection during Camp-On operation is detected by a  
disconnect-supervised loopstart trunk on an XFCOT card and the camped  
on call is dropped.  
Group Hunt  
Camping an incoming call on to a Pilot DN is not be supported  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
352 Camp-On  
Group Hunting Queuing Limitation  
No Camp-on tone is provided for Group Hunting Queuing Limitation.  
Hunting  
Hunting takes precedence over Camp-On.  
Idle Extension Notification  
When an extension is blocked for receiving calls due to the Idle Extension  
Notification feature, Camp-on is not possible.  
Multi-Party Operations  
Camp-on to a controlling party DN which is involved in a Consultation  
connection is not permitted. However, Camp-on is allowed at non-controlling  
parties DN’s which are involved in the Consultation connection.  
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements  
Camp-on is allowed on a party receiving Patience Tone. Camp-on tone and  
is not applied to the party during Patience tone. However, Camp-on tone  
and is applied when the speechpath has been reestablished  
Multi-Party Operations - Three-Party Service  
While Camp-On is allowed to the party receiving the patience tone, the  
Camp-On tone is not applied to the party during the patience tone. The  
Camp-On tone is applied, however, when the speech path has been  
reestablished.  
On Hold on Loudspeaker  
Camp-On can be applied to a busy loudspeaker DN.  
Override - Forced Camp-On and Priority Override  
Override, Enhanced  
Station-to-Station Camp-On and Attendant Camp-On are not affected  
by Forced Camp-On or Priority Override. The new Classes of Service  
(Camp-On From Another Telephone Allowed [CPFA], Camp-On From  
Another Telephone Denied [CPFD], Camp-On To Another Telephone  
Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On To Another Telephone Denied [CPTD])  
affect only Forced Camp-On. The Station Camp-On (SCMP) package  
(121) is required to return busy tone instead of ringback tone to the party  
camping on.  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
Metered calls camped-on to a busy station by an attendant are charged  
against the attendant until the call is answered and the attendant releases.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature implementation 353  
Source Included when Attendant Dials  
The source remains included while the attendant dials the destination.  
Uninterrupted Line Connections  
Warning Tone  
Class of Service with warning tone denied allows a call to be camped on,  
but with no warning tone.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable Camp-On tone for a customer." (page 353)  
Enable Camp-On tone for a customer.  
2. "LD 10 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 354)  
Allow warning tone Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 354)  
Allow warning tone Class of Service for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones.  
LD 15 - Enable Camp-On tone for a customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options data block.  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Enable Camp-On tone for the customer.  
Configure timers data block.  
Set recall timers.  
0-31  
- OPT  
TYPE  
- RTIM  
CTA  
TIM  
xx yy zz  
yy = Camp-On recall timer, response is 0-(30)-510.  
...  
TYPE  
FTR  
Features and options  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
354 Camp-On  
Prompt  
- STCB  
- NSCP  
Response  
(NO) YES  
(NO) YES  
Description  
Station Camp-On Busy allowed.  
Network Station Camp-On to sets on this node allowed.  
LD 10 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal Number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
WTA  
Allow warning tone.  
LD 11 - Allow warning tone Class of Service for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal Number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
WTA  
Allow warning tone.  
Feature operation  
To camp on an external call to a busy destination:  
•
Press Rls.  
The call is camped on to the extension. If you hear a busy tone, a call is  
already camped on the extension.  
If the call is not answered within a specified time, it recalls to the  
attendant. Both the Source and Destination indicators flash until the  
recall is answered. The call can be camped on again or released.  
To answer a camped-on call, follows these steps:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 355  
Step Action  
1
2
When you hear a short beep indicating a camped-on call, hang up or  
press Rls.  
When the telephone rings, lift the handset.  
You are connected to the camped-on call.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
356 Camp-On  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
357  
Camp-On, Forced  
Content  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 357)  
"Operating parameters" (page 358)  
"Feature interactions" (page 359)  
"Feature packaging" (page 361)  
"Feature implementation" (page 361)  
"Feature operation" (page 363)  
Feature description  
Forced Camp-On differs from normal Camp-On in that both internal and  
external calls can be camped on, rather than just external calls as with  
the Camp-On feature. The Forced Camp-On can be automatic or manual.  
The manual operation requires the use of the Enhanced Override (EOVR)  
key or Flexible Feature Code (FFC).  
Forced Camp-On can be used as a feature by itself or in conjunction with  
Priority Override. The combination of the two features is referred to as  
Enhanced Override (EOVR).  
For manual Forced Camp-On, an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user  
has to dial the EOVR Flexible Feature Code (FFC), while a Meridian 1  
proprietary telephone user has to use the EOVR key.  
A second operation of the EOVR key or FFC executes Enhanced Override.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
358 Camp-On, Forced  
Forced Camp-On is similar to station-to-station Camp-On except that  
Forced Camp-On can be done with either no call on hold or an external or  
internal call on hold. It can be done automatically or manually; whether it is  
automatic or manual is determined by the response to the Automatic Forced  
Camp-On (AFCO) prompt in LD 15.  
For manual operation, once a busy telephone has been reached, the first  
depression of the EOVR key or the first dialing of the EOVR FFC attempts  
Forced Camp-On. If successful, Forced Camp-On introduces Camp-On  
tone into the connection. If unsuccessful, overflow (fast busy) tone is  
returned to the party attempting the Forced Camp-On.  
For Forced Camp-On to be attempted, all other methods of call termination  
must have been tried, the last of which was Camp-On. If station-to-station  
Camp-On or automatic Forced Camp-On has occurred, or Forced Camp-On  
has been excluded by the new telephone options, then the first depression  
of the EOVR key or dialing of the EOVR FFC executes Enhanced Override.  
If, however, Forced Camp-On is denied due to existing Camp-On limitations,  
Enhanced Override is also denied.  
Operating parameters  
The Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package (139) must be equipped  
for Forced Camp-On and Priority Override to be available from analog  
(500/2500 type) telephones.  
For analog (500/2500 type) telephone activation, the Multi-Party Operations  
(MPO) package (141) must be equipped, with "YES" as the response to the  
RALL prompt in LD 15 to ensure register recalls are required before dialing  
control digits. The EOVF FFC defined must not start with the same digit as  
one of the control digits. The control digits are defined in LD 15 and are  
printed as part of the Customer Data Block (LD 21).  
Telephones or trunks involved in any of the following cannot be camped  
on to:  
•
•
•
•
Non established call  
Conference call  
Attendant call  
Attendant call using Centralized Attendant Service (CAS), Primary Rate  
Interface (PRI), or Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk  
•
•
•
•
Make Set Busy  
Do Not Disturb  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) call  
Operator Call Back  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 359  
•
•
•
•
Hold  
Data call  
Release Link call, and  
Parked call.  
Call Forward and Hunting take precedence over Call Waiting. If Call Waiting  
is allowed, Camp-On is not attempted. If Call Waiting is not allowed,  
station-to-station Camp-On is automatically attempted. If this succeeds,  
Enhanced Override can still follow. If Camp-On fails because there is no  
external call, Forced Camp-On and Enhanced Override may still work.  
However, if Camp-On fails due to other limitations, Forced Camp-On and  
Enhanced Override will also not work.  
Even though Camp-On will still function when Warning Tone Denied (WTD)  
Class of Service is defined, Forced Camp-On requires Warning Tone  
Allowed (WTA) Class of Service.  
Camp-On requires an external call on hold. Forced Camp-On can be done  
without a call on hold, or with both internal and external calls on hold.  
Camp-On Classes of Service (Camp-On From another telephone Allowed  
[CPFA], Camp-On From another telephone Denied [CPFD], Camp-On To  
another telephone Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On To another telephone  
Denied [CPTD]) apply to Forced Camp-On and automatic Forced Camp-On  
(AFCO) only. They do not apply to Station or attendant Camp-On.  
If a telephone is denied Forced Camp-On by Class of Service, Enhanced  
Override may still be attempted.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Break-In  
Telephones with a toll operator break-in call cannot be camped on to.  
Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced Camp-on.  
Attendant Calls  
Telephones involved in attendant calls cannot be camped on to. Overflow  
(fast busy) tone is returned to telephones on which Forced Camp-On is  
attempted.  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Telephones involved in Automatic Call Distribution calls cannot be camped  
on to. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced  
Camp-On.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
360 Camp-On, Forced  
Call Hold, Deluxe  
Call Hold, Permanent  
Hold  
Neither held calls nor telephones with calls on hold can be camped on to  
with Forced Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting  
Forced Camp-On.  
Camp-On  
Station-to-Station Camp-On and attendant Camp-On are not affected  
by Forced Camp-On. The Classes of Service (Camp-On From another  
telephone Allowed [CPFA], Camp-On From another telephone Denied  
[CPFD], Camp-On To another telephone Allowed [CPTA], and Camp-On  
To another telephone Denied [CPTD]) affect only Forced Camp-On. The  
Station Camp-On (SCMP) package (121) is required to return busy tone  
instead of ringback tone to the party camping on.  
Conference calls  
Telephones involved in Conference calls cannot be camped on to. Overflow  
tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced Camp-On.  
Data calls  
Data calls have Warning Tone Denied (WTD) Class of Service and therefore  
cannot be camped on to. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting  
Forced Camp-On.  
Do Not Disturb  
Telephones with Do Not Disturb enabled cannot be camped on to with  
Forced Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting  
Forced Camp-On.  
Make Set Busy  
Telephones with Make Set Busy active cannot be camped on to with Forced  
Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced  
Camp-On. Voice Call is blocked by Make Set Busy.  
Multi-Party Operations  
With Multi-Party Operations (MPO), when a consultation call is made on a  
set equipped with Priority Override, a control digit has to be dialed from the  
set to perform a recall and return the call on hold.  
Night Restriction Classes of Service  
If Forced Camp-on and Night Restriction for Forced Camp-on Class of  
Service (NRCA) are assigned, Forced Camp-on is operational for the set  
only when Night Service is in effect.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature implementation 361  
Operator Call Back  
Telephones involved in an Operator Call Back call or Toll Operator Break-In  
cannot be camped on to with Forced Camp-On. Overflow tone is returned  
to telephones attempting Forced Camp-On.  
Override  
When Priority Override is activated, it replaces normal override. Once  
Priority Override has been performed on a set, its Digit Display shows the  
DN of the overriding set.  
Feature packaging  
Forced Camp-On requires the following packages to function as described  
in this document:  
•
•
•
Station Camp-On (SCMP) package 121  
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139  
Priority Override/Forced Camp-On (POVR) package 186  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure the customer for Automatic Forced Camp-On and  
Station Camp-On tone." (page 362)  
Configure the customer for Automatic Forced Camp-On and Station  
Camp-On tone.  
2. "LD 57 - Configure Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Codes (FFC)."  
(page 362)  
Configure Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Codes (FFC).  
3. "LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones for Forced  
Camp-On." (page 362)  
Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones for Forced Camp-On.  
4. "LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones for Forced  
Camp-On." (page 363)  
Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones for Forced Camp-On.  
5. "LD 14 - Configure trunks for Forced Camp-On." (page 363)  
Configure trunks for Forced Camp-On.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
362 Camp-On, Forced  
LD 15 - Configure the customer for Automatic Forced Camp-On and Station Camp-On tone.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
...  
MPO  
Multi-Party Options  
- AFCO  
(NO) YES  
Automatic Forced Camp-On.  
Enter YES if Forced Camp-On is to be applied automatically.  
Enter NO if Forced Camp-On is to be applied manually.  
...  
TYPE:  
- STCB  
FTR  
Features and options  
(NO) YES  
Station Camp-On Busy tone.  
Enter NO if Busy Tone is not to be given to the transferring  
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.  
Enter YES if Busy Tone is to be given to the transferring  
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.  
LD 57 - Configure Enhanced Override Flexible Feature Codes (FFC).  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Codes.  
CODE  
EOVR  
y...y  
Enhanced Override (programmable only when the Priority  
Override package 186 is equipped).  
EOVR  
y...y is a one- to seven-character input that the user must dial  
to use the FFC. Valid inputs are digits 0 through 9, asterisk (*),  
and octothorpe (#).  
LD 10 - Configure analog (500/2500 type) telephones for Forced Camp-On.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
TYPE:  
CLS  
Telephone type.  
(CPFA) CPFD  
Forced Camp-On from another telephone to this telephone  
(Allowed) Denied.  
Forced Camp-On to another telephone from this telephone  
(Allowed) Denied.  
Warning Tone Allowed.  
(CPTA) CPTD  
WTA  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 363  
LD 11 - Configure Meridian 1 proprietary telephones for Forced Camp-On.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
TN  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal Number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(CPFA) CPFD  
(CPTA) CPTD  
WTA  
Forced Camp-On from another telephone to this telephone  
(Allowed) Denied.  
Forced Camp-On to another telephone from this telephone  
(Allowed) Denied.  
Warning Tone Allowed.  
...  
KEY  
xx EOVR  
Add an Enhanced Override key, where;  
xx = the key number (allowed to be programmed only if Priority  
Override package 186 is equipped).  
LD 14 - Configure trunks for Forced Camp-On.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
...  
CLS  
WTA  
Warning Tone Allowed.  
Feature operation  
Forced Camp-On can be used when making either a simple or consultation  
call (that is, having a call on hold while calling another party). The following  
feature operation descriptions use telephone A (an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone) or telephone E (a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone) to call  
telephone B, which is connected to party C.  
The telephones are configured as follows:  
1. Telephone A is an analog (500/2500 type) telephone with Warning Tone  
Allowed (WTA) Class of Service.  
2. Telephone B has Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
364 Camp-On, Forced  
3. Party C has Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service and can be  
any telephone type or a Direct Inward Dial (DID), TIE, or Central Office  
(Public Exchange) (COT) trunk.  
4. Telephone E is a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone with Warning Tone  
Allowed (WTA) Class of Service and an Enhanced Override (EOVR)  
key equipped.  
For the following examples:  
1. Telephones A and E both have Camp-On From another telephone  
Allowed (CPFA) Class of Service.  
2. Both telephone B and telephone C are involved in a simple call, not a  
conference call.  
3. Telephone B has Camp-On To another telephone Allowed (CPTA) Class  
of Service.  
4. Call Forward, Hunting, and Call Waiting are not in use.  
In the following feature operation descriptions, the term "recall" refers to  
performing a register recall, which can be performed in a number of different  
ways. Some typical examples are:  
•
Flash the switchhook. (This is the equivalent of hanging up the handset  
and picking it back up. This on hook, off hook is performed in a time  
period that is less than what the system would consider to be a valid  
disconnect.)  
•
Press the flash or LINK button if equipped.  
The Camp-On tone is always provided for Forced Camp-On since Warning  
Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service is a prerequisite. This tone can be  
a buzz for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones or a single burst of tone for  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones if the customer (LD 15) option Periodic  
Camp-On Tone Denied (CTD) is selected. If the customer (LD 15) option  
Periodic Camp-On Tone Allowed (CTA) is selected, the Camp-On Tone as  
defined in the Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) (LD 56) in response to  
the CAMP prompt is used.  
While camping on, the party attempting the Camp-On, either telephone A  
or E, receives ringback if the Station Camp-On (SCMP) package (121) is  
not equipped, or either ringback or busy tone, as defined by the response  
to the Station Camp-On Busy tone (STCB) prompt in LD 15, if the SCMP  
package is equipped.  
Forced Camp-On with an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned off; response to AFCO in LD 15  
was "NO":  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 365  
ACTION  
RESPONSE  
1
B and C are connected in a simple  
call.  
2
3
4
A dials B.  
A receives busy tone.  
A performs a recall.  
A receives special dial tone (SDT).  
A dials EOVR FFC to attempt  
Forced Camp-On.  
If telephone B or C has  
disconnected, telephone A  
receives overflow (fast busy) tone.  
Otherwise B receives Camp-On  
tone and A receives ringback or  
busy tone depending on the options  
equipped. A is manually Forced  
Camp-On to B.  
5
B disconnects from the call.  
Telephone A rings telephone B.  
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned on; response to AFCO in LD 15  
was "YES":  
ACTION  
RESPONSE  
1
B and C are connected in a simple  
call.  
2
3
A dials B.  
A attempts Forced Camp-On to B.  
If Forced Camp-On was successful. A receives ringback or busy  
tone depending on the options  
equipped. A is automatically  
Forced Camp-On to B.  
4
B disconnects.  
A rings B.  
Forced Camp-On with a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned off; response to AFCO in LD 15  
was "NO":  
ACTION  
RESPONSE  
1
2
B and C are connected in a simple  
call.  
E dials B.  
E receives busy tone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
366 Camp-On, Forced  
ACTION  
RESPONSE  
3
E presses EOVR key to attempt  
Forced Camp-On.  
If telephone B or C has  
disconnected, telephone E  
receives overflow (fast busy) tone.  
Otherwise B receives Camp-On  
tone and E receives ringback or  
busy tone depending on the options  
equipped. E is manually Forced  
Camp-On to B.  
4
B disconnects from the call.  
Telephone E rings telephone B.  
With automatic Forced Camp-On turned on; response to AFCO in LD 15  
was "YES":  
ACTION  
RESPONSE  
1
B and C are connected in a simple  
call.  
2
3
E dials B.  
E attempts Forced Camp-On to B.  
If Forced Camp-On was successful. E receives ringback or busy  
tone depending on the options  
equipped. E is automatically  
Forced Camp-On to B.  
4
B disconnects.  
E rings B.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
367  
Camp-On, Station  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 367)  
"Operating parameters" (page 368)  
"Feature interactions" (page 368)  
"Feature packaging" (page 369)  
"Feature implementation" (page 369)  
"Feature operation" (page 370)  
Feature description  
With this feature, any internal station can camp an external call on to  
another internal station that is busy. Prior to the introduction of this feature  
attendants were the only parties that could camp calls on to busy internal  
stations. The term internal station includes stations on other nodes within  
a Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN).  
When a transferring party reaches a busy internal party, the transferring  
telephone will receive Ringback tone (providing certain conditions are met).  
When the transferring party completes the transfer, the external (calling)  
party will Camp-On to the desired party and the external party (an external  
party is any CO, DID, FEX, or WATS call) will receive ringback tone or music.  
This feature applies to both standalone and network environments.  
Within a network environment, the transferring and camped on to stations  
may be on the same or different nodes, as long as all nodes are configured  
with Network Station Camp-On.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
368 Camp-On, Station  
Operating parameters  
The limitations that currently apply to the operation of the Camp-On feature  
from an attendant console also apply to Station Camp-On.  
These limitations are:  
•
Camp-On is not permitted if the desired station is in a state other than  
established (that is, ringing, dialing).  
•
•
Only one call at a time can Camp-On to a busy station.  
Calls cannot Camp-On to a station with the Call Waiting feature  
configured.  
•
•
The station camped on to is given Warning tone only if the customer  
has Camp-On Tone Allowed (CTA) in the Customer Data Block (LD  
15) and the station has Warning Tone Allowed (WTA) Class of Service  
assigned. If the station has Warning Tone Denied (WTD) Class of  
Service assigned, the Camp-On will take effect without giving any  
Camp-On tone to the camped on to (desired) party.  
The transferring station will receive Busy tone only if the response to  
the STCB prompt in the Customer Data Block (LD 15) of the camped  
on to (desired) telephone is YES. Otherwise, the transferring station  
will receive Ringback tone.  
Camp-On indication  
When a call is extended from an attendant to a busy station there is a  
specific combination of tones and indicator states to identify the Camp-On  
state.  
When an inquiry call is made from a station, there is only one way for  
the user to distinguish between a busy telephone and an idle ringing  
telephone. That way is to ensure that the response to the STCB prompt in  
the Customer Data Block (LD 15) of the camped on to (desired) telephone  
is YES. Otherwise, Ringback tone is provided in both cases.  
Feature interactions  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Waiting  
Hunting  
Call Waiting, Call Forward Busy (for DID calls only), Call Forward All Calls,  
Call Waiting and Hunting all take precedence over Station Camp-On.  
Camp-On  
With Station Camp-On, any internal station can camp an external call on to  
another internal station that is busy. Prior to the introduction of this feature,  
attendants were the only parties that could camp calls on to busy internal  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature implementation 369  
stations. The term internal station includes stations on other nodes within a  
Meridian Customer Defined Network (MCDN). For more information, see  
the Camp-On, Station feature description.  
Dial Impulse Set  
A Dial Impulse (DIP Class of Service) station must have TSA Class of  
Service to perform a Station Camp-On.  
Network Attendant Service  
For network-wide Station Camp-On, NAS must be equipped at each node  
of the network.  
Feature packaging  
For standalone environments, the Station Camp-On (SCMP) package 121  
is required.  
For network environments, the Station Camp-On (SCMP) package 121 and  
the Network Attendant Service (NAS) package 159 are required.  
For Music (MUS), package 44 is required.  
Feature implementation  
LD 15 - Configure Station Camp-On for both standalone and network environments.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
...  
FTR  
Features and options  
- STCB  
(NO) YES  
Station Camp-On Busy tone.  
Enter NO if Busy tone is not to be given to the transferring  
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.  
Enter YES if Busy tone is to be given to the transferring  
(controlling) party when the desired station is busy.  
- NSCP  
(NO) YES  
Network Station Camp-On.  
Enter NO if telephones on this node are not allowed to have  
calls camped on by telephones in other nodes.  
Enter YES if telephones on this node are allowed to have calls  
camped on by telephones in other nodes.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
370 Camp-On, Station  
Feature operation  
Standalone case  
Any station, not necessarily the Night DN, attempting to transfer an external  
call may, during the associated inquiry call, camp the trunk on to a busy  
station.  
The Camp-On will take effect from the moment the transferring station has  
completed the transfer to the desired DN.  
The transferring station will hear Ringback tone or Busy tone depending  
on the option entered in response to the STCB prompt in the Customer  
Data Block (LD 15). This prompt applies to any telephone, not just the  
Night DN. By default (STCB is set to NO), the transferring party will hear  
Ringback tone.  
The desired station will hear Camp-On tone if it has WTA Class of Service  
assigned. Otherwise, if it has WTD Class of Service, the Camp-On will take  
effect without the desired party being informed a call is camped on.  
When the transfer is completed, the external party is camped on to the  
desired station and receives either Ringback tone or an announcement.  
Network case  
Any station, not necessarily the Night DN, attempting to transfer an external  
call across an MCDN network may, during the associated inquiry call,  
Camp-On the trunk to a busy station.  
The location of the transferring party has no effect on the Station Camp-On  
capability.  
The Camp-On will take effect from the moment the transferring station has  
completed the transfer to the desired DN.  
The transferring station will hear Ringback tone or Busy tone depending on  
the option entered in response to the STCB prompt in the Customer Data  
Block (LD 15). This prompt applies to any telephone, not just the Night DN.  
By default (STCB is set to NO), the transferring party will hear Ringback  
tone. The tone given, either ringback tone or Busy tone, is determined by  
the node in which the desired (camped on to) party resides.  
The desired station will hear Camp-On tone if it has WTA Class of Service  
assigned. If it has WTD Class of Service, the Camp-On will take effect  
without the desired party being informed a call is camped on.  
When the transfer is completed, the external party is camped on to the  
desired station and receives either Ringback tone or an announcement.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 371  
Recall timing on Camp-On calls  
When any station extends an external call, recall timing is initiated if the  
call is camped on to a busy station.  
The recall timing will start from the moment that the extending station  
"releases" the call. The value of the recall timer is set by the prompt RTIM in  
the Customer Data Block (LD 15).  
At the recall, the camped on call is routed to the attendant. If the attendant  
is in Night Service, Night treatment is given; if NAS routing is active, the call  
is routed according to the NAS configuration.  
Standalone case  
When the recall to the attendant occurs, the Camp-On is canceled. If the  
attendant is busy during the recall, the recall is queued.  
Network case  
When the recall occurs and the attendant has answered the recall, the call  
will still be camped on to the desired party. If during the recall the attendant  
is busy, the recall is queued.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
372 Camp-On, Station  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
373  
Card LED Status  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 373)  
"Operating parameters" (page 373)  
"Feature interactions" (page 374)  
"Feature packaging" (page 374)  
"Feature implementation" (page 374)  
"Feature operation" (page 374)  
Feature description  
This feature allows the use of Swedish Televerket (TVT) Intelligent  
Peripheral Equipment on the system. This is accomplished by defining  
individual terminal loops as TVT type in LD 17. The system software is  
modified to allow the status (on/off) of the LED on the faceplate of the  
TVT cards to be opposite of the LED on NT cards. The TVT peripheral  
cards (standard extension line, off-premises extension and Multi Frequency  
Receiver [MFR]) are equivalent to the NT 500-type line card and Digitone  
Receiver (DTR). Since the TVT off-premises extension line card must be  
treated as a local extension by the system, the OPX Class of Service is  
prohibited for this card in LD 10.  
Operating parameters  
The system software supports the following TVT cards:  
•
•
•
•
single-density standard extension line card (TPC60)  
dual-density extension line card (TPC451)  
two-wire Off-premise Extension (OPX) line card (TPC22)  
four-wire Off-premise Extension (OPX) line card (TPC23), and  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
374 Card LED Status  
•
multi-frequency receiver (MFR) card (TPC15).  
Feature interactions  
Card LED Status does not interact with other features.  
Feature packaging  
Card LED Status requires International Supplementary Features (SUPP)  
package 131.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 17 - Configure the system hardware and software parameters."  
(page 374)  
Configure the system hardware and software parameters.  
2. "LD 10 - Create or modify data blocks for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 374)  
Create or modify data blocks for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
LD 17 - Configure the system hardware and software parameters.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
CEQU  
Common Equipment parameters  
CEQU  
TERM  
(NO) YES  
T0-T159  
Change CE parameters.  
TVT single density local terminal loops.  
LD 10 - Create or modify data blocks for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
TYPE:  
...  
Telephone type.  
CLS  
OPN  
Allows Swedish TVT off-premise line card to be treated as  
a local extension by the system.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
375  
Centralized Multiple Line Emulation  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 375)  
"Operating parameters" (page 375)  
"Feature interactions" (page 376)  
"Feature packaging" (page 376)  
"Feature implementation" (page 376)  
"Feature operation" (page 377)  
Feature description  
The Centralized Multiple Line Emulation (CML) feature allows a mixed group  
of telephones (analog (500/2500 type) telephones, or Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones) to answer calls ringing at a central DN (referred to as the CML  
DN). This function is provided by using the Automatic Call Distribution  
(ACD) and Multiple Appearance Directory Number (MADN) features, and  
making modifications to the Call Pick-up feature.  
Large queues to the CML DN (up to 15 calls) are handled by the ACD  
feature, which distributes the calls to members of the CML group.  
Small queues to the CML DN (one or two calls) are handled using MADNs  
configured on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.  
Operating parameters  
The Centralized Multiple Line Emulation feature is not supported by  
Attendant Administration.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
376 Centralized Multiple Line Emulation  
Call Pick-up groups assigned at the key level cannot be given a group  
number containing ACD DNs, since calls ringing in an ACD queue cannot  
be picked up.  
Calls cannot be picked up from a station having direct-termination-denied  
Class of Service.  
Normal tenant-service calling limitations apply. If a station cannot receive a  
ringing call, then the call cannot be picked up for that station. A station that  
cannot direct dial another station cannot pick up a call from that station.  
Calls ringing on the CML priority station are picked up before ringing Central  
Office trunk calls in the same Call Pick-up group.  
Feature interactions  
Digit Display  
The digit display of the station picking up a parked call recall shows the  
parked call’s access code followed by the parked call’s access-identification  
code. If the picked-up call is a group member call, the display shows the  
group number of the picked-up station.  
Feature packaging  
Centralized Multiple Line Emulation requires International Supplementary  
Features (SUPP) package 131.  
The following packages are also required:  
•
•
Basic Automatic Call Distribution (BACD) package 40  
Network Priority Queuing (PQUE) package 60  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Configure the Required Classes of Service." (page 376)  
Configure the Required Classes of Service.  
2. "LD 11 - Assign ringing number pickup groups to keys." (page 377)  
Assign ringing number pickup groups to keys.  
LD 10 - Configure the Required Classes of Service.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
TYPE:  
Telephone type.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature operation 377  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
CLS  
(PRSD) PRSA  
(CRD) CRA  
Priority Call Pick-up station (denied) allowed.  
Continuous Ringing (denied) allowed.  
(MCRD) MCRA  
Multiple Call Arrangement (denied) allowed.  
LD 11 - Assign ringing number pickup groups to keys.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
...  
RNPG  
(0)-4095  
Ringing Number Pick-up Group. Respond with the number  
of the Ringing Number Pick-up group for which the set is  
to be assigned.  
To remove a telephone from a group, enter 0 in response  
to the RNPG prompt.  
...  
CLS  
...  
(PRSD) PRSA  
xx RNP yyyy  
Priority Call Pick-up station (denied) allowed.  
KEY  
xx = Key number  
RNP = Ringing Number Pick-up  
yyyy = Ringing Number Pick-up group number (optional).  
If the group number is not entered, the key will pick-up the  
group number assigned to the station. If the group number  
is entered, the key will pick-up calls in the specified group  
yyyy.  
Feature operation  
The ability to notify a large group that a CML is ringing is provided through  
modification of the Call Pick-up feature. A ringer, centrally mounted on a  
wall, rings whenever a call comes into the CML DN, and continues to ring  
until the call is answered. The ringer is configured as a priority 500-type set,  
which ensures that a call ringing on the CML DN is answered before any  
other station ringing in the Call Pick-up group.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
378 Centralized Multiple Line Emulation  
Step Action  
1
To answer a CML call using a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone,  
press the RNP key.  
—End—  
To answer a call in your Call Pickup group from an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Lift the handset.  
Dial the PURN FCC.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
379  
Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 379)  
"Operating parameters" (page 380)  
"Feature interactions" (page 381)  
"Feature packaging" (page 382)  
"Feature implementation" (page 382)  
"Feature operation" (page 385)  
Feature description  
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) permits the user to signal the Central  
Office (CO)/Public Exchange during an established CO call, requesting  
activation of a Central Office based service. Such services can include Call  
Transfer, Three-way Calling, Malicious Call Trace, Conference, or Autodial  
Tandem Transfer. For more information on these services, please refer to  
the feature descriptions contained within this document.  
The feature is useful when Centrex is the backbone of the service network.  
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) is supported by the following trunk types:  
•
•
Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD)  
Common Control Switching Arrangement, Automatic Number  
Identification (CCSA ANI)  
•
•
•
•
•
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA)  
Central Office (CO)  
Common Control Switching Arrangement (CCSA)  
Direct Inward Dial (DID)  
Foreign Exchange (FX)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
380 Centrex Switchhook Flash  
•
•
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS)  
CO trunks located at a remote node connected via ISDN Meridian  
Customer Defined Network (MCDN) TIE trunks, and  
•
Analog, Digital Trunk Interface (DTI), and DT12 CO trunks.  
Whenever Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) is invoked, the system checks  
for the following:  
•
With analog (500/2500 type) telephones, that the Class of Service  
supports THF. With Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, the feature  
cannot be activated if a corresponding key is not equipped.  
•
•
That the telephone is on an active two-way trunk call.  
That THF is enabled in the trunk’s Class of Service.  
If any of the above checks fails, the user hears an overflow tone. After the  
tone times out, the original connection resumes.  
Operating parameters  
This feature is not supported on Basic Rate Interface (BRI) telephones.  
THF is not supported on Primary Rate Interface (PRI) or BRI Central Office  
trunks.  
On Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, once the THF key has been pressed,  
all other function keys are blocked. While waiting for the Centrex connection,  
only the RLS key or on-hook connection is operative. Pressing the RLS  
key or hanging up terminates the original connection as well as the THF  
message.  
For the analog (500/2500 type) telephones, another switchhook flash is not  
allowed once THF has been invoked. A second switchhook flash is treated  
as an on hook disconnection.  
Only voice calls are supported on THF.  
In Italy the DTI2 register recall signal is currently only supported for Type  
Approval and is not commercially available.  
The 1.5 or 2 Mbit Digital Trunks Interface pack is required.  
Because the software cannot recognize which type of Intelligent Peripheral  
Equipment (IPE) CO line card (for example, XCOT, or XFCOT) is in use, CO  
trunks belonging to different card types should not coexist on the same  
Route Data Block (RDB).  
•
The minimum value of the range for the Flash-length (FLH) timer for a  
Centrex Switchhook Flash, defined in LD 16 in response to the TIMR  
prompt, is 60-1536 milliseconds.  
•
Attendant consoles can activate the feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 381  
•
•
The THF feature can be activated on DTI2 Central Office trunks and  
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Central Office trunks.  
The Centrex Switchhook timing on the Extended Flexible Universal  
Trunk (EXUT) is performed using firmware, offering a significant  
improvement in trunk timing accuracy.  
Feature interactions  
Autodial Tandem Transfer  
Because Autodial Tandem Transfer uses Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF), it  
is affected by any modification to the THF enhancement feature.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If any set at the customer location involved in the monitored call switchhook  
flashes or performs a Centrex switchhook flash, Attendant Monitor is  
immediately deactivated.  
Collect Call Blocking  
A Centrex Switchhook Flash cannot be invoked by another feature while the  
Collect Call Blocking answer signal is being sent.  
Conference  
THF allows conference calls through the CO. It can be invoked only if there  
is an established call connected to an outside trunk. If the telephone is  
engaged in internal conference calls, THF cannot be used.  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion  
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone is part of an Executive Intrusion  
conference, any Switchhook Flash is ignored.  
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced  
Interaction with the Centrex switchhook flash results because the flash  
range is changed for this feature. Communication to the CO (trunk hook  
flash) is performed by using the Centrex switchhook flash feature base  
code. The enhanced range is available for the Centrex switchhook flash.  
Periodic Clearing on RAN, Meridian Mail, ACD and Music  
This feature enhancement is not supported if used together with Centrex  
Switchhook flash.  
Secrecy  
If secrecy is not allowed in LD 15 (OPT = SYD), the attendant must use the  
EXCL DEST or EXCL SRC keys to select the Central Office trunk on which  
the THF has to be sent. The THF is not activated when both SRC and  
DEST are included.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
382 Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software. Centrex Switchhook  
Flash (THF) package 157 has no package dependencies. The End-to-End  
Signaling (EES) package 10 is recommended for users with Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones, and attendant consoles.  
If both THF and the 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129 are  
present, this feature can also be applied to digital Central Office trunk  
connections.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Enable Centrex Switchhook flash for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 382)  
Enable Centrex Switchhook flash for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
2. "LD 11 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 383)  
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
3. "LD 12 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for attendant consoles."  
(page 383)  
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for attendant consoles.  
4. "LD 14 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk." (page 383)  
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk.  
5. "LD 16 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk route." (page  
384)  
Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk route.  
6. "LD 73 - Activate the THF on digital trunks for incoming and outgoing  
calls." (page 384)  
Activate the THF on digital trunks for incoming and outgoing calls.  
LD 10 - Enable Centrex Switchhook flash for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature implementation 383  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
CLS  
THFA  
THFD  
Allow Centrex Switchhook Flash.  
THFD = Default  
LD 11 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx THF  
Add a Centrex Switchhook Flash key; xx is the key number.  
LD 12 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for attendant consoles.  
Prompt  
REQ  
TYPE  
...  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Attendant console type.  
2250  
KEY  
xx THF  
Add a Centrex Switchhook Flash key; xx is the key number.  
LD 14 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
AID  
Automatic Identification of Outward Dialing (AIOD) trunk  
data block.  
CAA  
CAM  
Common Control Switching Arrangement Automatic  
Number Identification (CCSA ANI) trunk data block.  
Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk  
data block.  
COT  
CSA  
Central Office (CO) trunk data block.  
Common Control Switching Arrangement access line data  
block.  
DID  
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk data block.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
384 Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Prompt  
Response  
FEX  
Description  
Foreign Exchange trunk data block.  
Wide Area Telephone Service trunk data block.  
WAT  
CLS  
THFA  
THFD  
Allow Centrex Switchhook Flash.  
THFD = Default  
LD 16 - Enable Centrex Switchhook Flash for each trunk route.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CNTL  
- TIMR  
RDB  
YES  
Route Data Block.  
Change controls or timers  
FLH <space>  
60-(510)-1536  
Flash timer in msec.  
The range of the Centrex switchhook flash timer is  
60-(510)-1536. The FLH value is rounded down to the  
nearest 10 msec. tick. If the value entered is 128 or 129,  
then it is set to 130 msec.  
Software controlled flash  
60-127 msec. Digit 1 is sent.  
128-1536 msec. software controlled switchhook flash.  
A FLH timer value of 127 msec. or less is not supported  
by the XFCOT card. The firmware controlled flash must  
be used.  
Firmware controlled flash  
The user can enter any value from 60 to 1536 msec. 90  
msec. is the hard coded firmware flash for an XFCOT card;  
the technician should enter 90 msec.  
The FWTM prompt must be set to YES for the trunk  
associated with this route in LD 14, if firmware timing is to  
be used.  
LD 73 - Activate the THF on digital trunks for incoming and outgoing calls.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
New  
Change  
TYPE  
FEAT  
DTI2  
2 Mbits DTI  
ABCD  
Digital signaling category.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 385  
Prompt  
SICA  
...  
Response  
Description  
XX  
Signaling category table.  
...  
P RRC(S)  
TIME  
ABCD  
Register Recall signal.  
10-(100)-630  
Duration of RRC Pulse in msec.  
Feature operation  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
To use Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) from an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Flash the switchhook to receive a special dial tone.  
Enter the Special Prefix (SPRE) code, then the THF feature access  
code (96). Alternatively, the appropriate Flexible Feature Code  
(FFC) should be used.  
—End—  
To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, flash the  
switchhook.  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones  
To use Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) from a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone, press the key configured for THF.  
To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, press the DN key  
or the key establishing the original call.  
Attendant Consoles  
Attendant consoles must use the THF key. Dial access is not supported on  
these consoles.  
To reestablish a connection before the overflow tone ends, press the DN key  
or the key establishing the original call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
386 Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
387  
Charge Account and Calling Party  
Number  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 387)  
"Operating parameters" (page 388)  
"Feature interactions" (page 389)  
"Feature packaging" (page 390)  
"Feature implementation" (page 391)  
"Feature operation" (page 392)  
Feature description  
Used in conjunction with Call Detail Recording (CDR), Charge Account bills  
calls directly to specific accounts or charge numbers instead of Directory  
Numbers (DN).  
Charge Account supports fixed-length numbers of 0 to 23 digits (default  
is 0), specified on a per-customer basis. The charge account number is  
validated by the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits  
entered is part of CDR downstream processing.  
On Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, this feature can be activated by a  
separate Charge key/lamp pair, or dial accessed. On attendant consoles,  
it is activated by a separate key/lamp pair. On single-line telephones, it  
is dial-accessed.  
When a Charge Account number is used, the entire call is billed to that  
number. The number can be entered either before or during a call, or when  
Consultation Hold, Call Transfer, or Conference is activated.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
388 Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
The Charge Account feature is not supported for internal calls. A Charge  
Account number entered through the Charge key/lamp pair is blocked for  
established internal calls.  
Charge Account can be used to charge an entire conference call or portions  
of the call. Portions of the call are assigned to different accounts by  
entering the account number when adding trunks to a conference, before  
the conference is completed.  
•
When using analog (500/2500 type) telephones, enter the account  
information immediately after the switchhook flash, before the new  
trunk is dialed.  
•
When using Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, enter the number after  
pressing the Conference key the first time, and before dialing.  
The charge record shows the identity of the user who made the entry and  
the trunk that was added to the call. If the new call is not added to the  
conference, the record shows a simple two-party call.  
An entire call is charged to the same account by entering the charge  
number while active on the conference. When using Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones, press the Charge key and enter the number in the usual  
manner. When using analog (500/2500 type) telephones, enter the number  
after a switchhook flash.  
The call is reestablished without dialing additional trunks; a record is  
produced for each trunk involved in the conference. In all these records, the  
telephone user entering the number is considered the originating party.  
When an entire call is charged to only one account number, it must be  
entered while all trunks are connected to the conference.  
Calling Party Number (CPN) is an extension of Charge Account that allows  
entry of the calling party’s number on collect calls. Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones are assigned a separate Calling Party Number (CPN) key/lamp  
pair to activate this feature. When the calling party’s number is entered,  
a Calling Party Number (CPN) record is produced. This record may be  
compared to a telephone company billing for collect calls. Calling party  
numbers can be up to 23 digits, and may include an asterisk (*) and  
octothorpe (#). A CPN record is generated on the Call Detail Recording  
(CDR) device similar to a normal Charge record.  
Operating parameters  
A valid charge account number is recognized when the number of dialed  
digits matches the account length, or when the octothorpe (#) indicates  
end of dialing. After a valid charge account number has been entered, the  
system returns a dial tone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 389  
If too few digits are dialed, no response is given until the interdigit timeout  
occurs. Overflow tone is returned for 15 seconds after timeout; then the  
user is locked out.  
If Call Transfer or Conference is used to consult with a third party and  
returns to the original call without completing the transfer or conference, the  
charge account number is applied to the Consultation call only.  
Attendant use of Charge or CPN is restricted to situations in which there is  
only one account party involved in the call (source side). When the calling  
party number is used, the attendant must transfer the call, or the Call Detail  
Recording (CDR) record does not reflect it.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Barge-In  
Attendant Busy Verify  
A charge account number cannot be entered when Barge-In or Busy Verify  
is active. Barge-In cannot be used to connect to a trunk after an account  
number has been entered.  
Call Transfer  
A Call Transfer call produces two records: a Call Detail Recording (CDR)  
start record and a CDR end record.  
China - Flexible Feature Codes - Outgoing Call Barring  
Digits dialed after a charge account are checked against the active Outgoing  
Call Barring level.  
Conference  
Conference calls produce multiple Call Detail Recording (CDR) records.  
Whenever a new trunk is added to a conference, the connection between  
the connected telephone and the trunk is recorded, and a connection to the  
conference loop is established. This causes CDR to generate a start record  
with the telephone and trunk identified as the involved parties. As trunks are  
removed from a conference, CDR end records are produced. These records  
may identify different telephones or conferences as the local parties.  
Music, Enhanced  
The Charge Account (CHG) and Calling Party Number (CPN) keys place  
the far end party on Hold while a charge number is entered. The held party  
receives Music during this period.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
390 Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
Override  
When Charge Account is used during active Override, some digits may be  
lost. When entered with Override in conference, a Charge Account number  
is accepted and no digits are lost.  
Ring Again  
When Ring Again is activated, no charge record is generated, but the  
information is stored for future use. If Ring Again is canceled before a  
trunk is seized, the charge number is deleted and no record is produced.  
If a trunk is seized later by Ring Again, the charge record is generated in  
the usual manner. The use of Ring Again with Charge Account ties up  
system resources because an auxiliary call register must be maintained in  
the Ring Again queue.  
Speed Call  
Charge account numbers, including the Charge Account access Special  
Prefix (SPRE) code, can be stored as Speed Call or Autodial numbers. All  
current limitations of these features apply, such as a maximum of 23 digits  
per entry, including the access code. An Autodial number or dialed digits  
can follow, but not precede, a Speed Call number. The digits generated by  
an Autodial key during feature operation are accepted as Charge Account  
digits.  
Telephone keys  
A Charge Account entry is aborted with any of the following keys:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DN  
Page  
Voice Call  
In-Calls  
Call Waiting  
Call Pickup  
Release  
Not Ready  
a loop key  
Release Destination, and  
Release Source.  
Feature packaging  
CDR with Charge Account (CHG) package 23 requires:  
•
Call Detail Recording (CDR) package 4  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature implementation 391  
•
Charge Account/Authorization Code Base (CAB) package 24  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Add or modify the customer Charge Account." (page 391)  
Add or modify the customer Charge Account.  
2. "LD 10 - Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge  
Account." (page 391)  
Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge Account.  
3. "LD 11 - Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge  
Account." (page 392)  
Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge Account.  
4. "LD 12 - Allow attendant console access to Charge Account." (page 392)  
Allow attendant console access to Charge Account.  
5. "LD 15 - Add or modify the customer Charge Account." (page 391)  
6. "LD 10 - Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge  
Account." (page 391)  
7. "LD 11 - Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge  
Account." (page 392)  
8. "LD 12 - Allow attendant console access to Charge Account." (page 392)  
LD 15 - Add or modify the customer Charge Account.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
CDR  
Call Detail Recording Gate Opener.  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
0-31  
- CHLN  
(0)-23  
Maximum number of digits that can be entered as a  
charge account number.  
LD 10 - Allow analog (500/2500 type) telephone access to Charge Account.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
500  
TYPE:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
392 Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B  
where c = card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(XFD) XFA  
(Deny) allow call transfer.  
LD 11 - Allow Meridian 1 proprietary telephone access to Charge Account.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible  
responses.  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B  
where c = card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx CPN  
xx CHG  
Add a Calling Party Number key (must be key 24 for  
the M2317).  
Add a Charge key (must be key 25 for the M2317).  
LD 12 - Allow attendant console access to Charge Account.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Attendant console type.  
Terminal number  
2250  
TYPE  
TN  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B  
where c = card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
KEY  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
0-9 CPN  
0-9 CHG  
Add a Calling Party Number key.  
Add a Charge key.  
Feature operation  
This section explains Charge Account feature and Calling Party Number  
feature operation for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones, analog (500/2500  
type) telephones, and attendant console.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 393  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones  
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Select a free extension.  
Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.  
—End—  
To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Press Charge.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
Press the extension key to return to your call.  
—End—  
To use a SPRE code to charge a call in progress, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Press Transfer or Conference.  
Dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
Press the extension key to return to your call.  
—End—  
To charge a call to an account when you transfer a call, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
Press Transfer.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
394 Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
The call is on hold.  
2
3
4
5
Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
Dial the number where the call is to be transferred.  
Press Transfer.  
—End—  
To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,  
follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
Press Conference.  
The call is on hold.  
2
3
4
5
Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
Call the party that you want to add to the conference.  
Press Conference.  
—End—  
To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
Press Calling No.  
The other party is on hold.  
2
3
Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.  
Press Calling No. again to return to the call.  
—End—  
Analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 395  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Select a free extension.  
Dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the charge account number.  
When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.  
—End—  
To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Flash the switchhook or link.  
Dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.  
—End—  
To charge a call to an account when adding a party to a conference call,  
follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
Flash the switchhook or link.  
2
3
4
5
Dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
Call the party that you want to add to the conference.  
Flash the switchhook or link.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
396 Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
Attendant Consoles  
To charge a call to an account before dialing, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Press the loop key.  
Press Charge.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
When you have a dial tone, dial the telephone number.  
—End—  
To charge during a call in progress, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
While the source call is active on a loop key, press Charge.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
The voice connection remains active.  
3
Flash the switchhook or link to return to the call in progress.  
—End—  
To record a caller’s number for accounting purposes, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
While the source call is active on a loop key, press Calling No.  
The other party is on hold.  
2
3
Dial a Charge Account number or the caller’s number.  
Press Calling No. again to return to the call.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
397  
Charge Account, Forced  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 397)  
"Operating parameters" (page 398)  
"Feature interactions" (page 398)  
"Feature packaging" (page 400)  
"Feature implementation" (page 400)  
"Feature operation" (page 402)  
Feature description  
Forced Charge Account (FCA) temporarily overrides Class of Service  
limitations for toll-denied users. Use Forced Charge Account long distance  
calls to an account number when calling from a telephone that is restricted  
from making long distance calls. The unrestricted Class of Service provided  
by FCA applies for the duration of the call.  
When the account number is entered, a charge record is produced on a  
Call Detail Recording (CDR) device.  
FCA supports variable-length numbers of 1 to 23 digits. The minimum value  
for the account number is specified at the customer level.  
A valid account number equals or exceeds the minimum value defined, and  
is validated by the system for length only. Verification of the actual digits  
entered is part of Call Detail Recording (CDR) downstream processing.  
FCA can be allowed or denied at both customer and user levels. Users  
include any station or TIE and Common Control Switching Arrangement  
(CCSA) type trunks assigned a Toll-Denied (TLD), Conditionally Toll-Denied  
(CTD), or Conditionally Unrestricted (CUN) Class of Service.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
398 Charge Account, Forced  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones activate this feature by using a separate  
Charge key/lamp pair. Any user can access this feature by dialing SPRE + 5.  
A distinction is made between normal CDR Charge Account processing and  
FCA. If all the following conditions are met, the account number is treated  
as an FCA code:  
•
The telephone from which the number is entered has a TLD, CTD, or  
CUN Class of Service.  
•
The station or trunk from which the number is entered is in a state  
to originate a call (press a Directory Number [DN] key or flash the  
switchhook).  
•
•
•
FCA is enabled at the customer level.  
FCA is allowed for the station or trunk from which the number is entered.  
A valid account number is entered at the beginning of the call.  
The unrestricted Class of Service provided by FCA, as described above,  
applies for the duration of the call only. The account number must be  
reentered for each successive toll call placed by the station or trunk.  
Operating parameters  
An octothorpe (#) dialed after the account number indicates that the  
subsequent digits are part of the dialed number.  
CDR charge account numbers are fixed-length codes for which a maximum  
value is specified by the customer. This is also the maximum allowed for  
the FCA account number.  
Because 500 telephones cannot dial an octothorpe (#), they are restricted  
to fixed-length account numbers.  
FCA does not apply to attendant calls.  
Feature interactions  
Autodial  
Speed Call  
FCA numbers (including the SPRE code and the Charge Account access  
code) can be entered in Speed Call lists or stored as Autodial numbers. The  
digits can also be stored, provided that the account number, regardless of  
its length, is followed directly by an octothorpe (#).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature interactions 399  
Authorization Code Security Enhancement  
If the Authorization Code is used to change the Class of Service of the user,  
the new Class of Service must be TLD, CTD, or CUN. If an Authorization  
Code entered after FCA has altered the Class of Service to unrestricted  
(UNR), the change made by the Authorization Code still comes into effect.  
If the originator’s Network Class of Service (NCOS) has been changed by  
an Authorization Code prior to an applicable FCA entry, the new NCOS is  
replaced by the FCA NCOS, provided the new Facility Restriction Level  
(FRL) is not lower than the existing FRL. Similarly, if the originator’s NCOS  
has been changed by an FCA entry, the NCOS is changed again by a valid  
Authorization Code entry.  
Basic Alternate Route Selection (BARS)  
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS)  
If BARS or NARS is equipped, a Network Class of Service (NCOS)  
associated with FCA must be defined in the Customer Data Block.  
Call Detail Recording  
Normal Call Detail Recording (CDR) charge account numbers can still be  
entered before or after an FCA code. If the criteria for an FCA call are not  
met, (CDR) charge account numbers function in the normal manner.  
Call Transfer  
Conference  
If an FCA code is entered at the beginning of a call, the new unrestricted  
Class of Service remains in effect for any transfer or conference made  
during the call. If all FCA criteria are met, an account number entered after  
activating the Conference key, Call Transfer key, or a switchhook flash is  
interpreted as an FCA code.  
Last Number Redial  
These codes are not stored in Last Number Redial (LNR). To use these  
features when calling the number stored in LNR, the code must first be  
dialed manually. When dial tone is returned, LNR can be used to complete  
the dialing.  
Pre-translation  
The first digit dialed after a valid Charge Account Code is sent to the  
pre-translator.  
Scheduled Access Restrictions  
FCA can be used to override Scheduled Access Restrictions (SAR) on a  
per-call basis, provided the current Class of Service (COS) of the telephone  
or trunk is CUN, TLD, or CTD. The current COS is the COS in force  
according to the SAR schedule. If an Authorization Code that sets the COS  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
400 Charge Account, Forced  
to CUN, TLD, or CTD is dialed before the FCA, the call is allowed. FCA sets  
the COS to UNR and the Network COS (NCOS) to the NCOS defined in LD  
15, provided that FCA is enabled on both a customer and telephone/trunk  
basis.  
Stored Number Redial  
The Forced Charge Account code is not stored. To store a code, dial the  
code prior to using Stored Number Redial to dial the call.  
Trunk Group Access Restrictions (TGAR)  
Trunk Group Access Restrictions apply to the telephone or trunk entering  
the account number.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software. Forced Charge Account  
(FCA) package 52 requires:  
•
•
Charge Account/Authorization Code Base (CAB) package 24  
Charge Account (CHG) package 23  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable Forced Charge Account for a customer." (page 400)  
Enable Forced Charge Account for a customer.  
2. "LD 10 - Enable Forced Charge Account for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 401)  
Enable Forced Charge Account for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
3. "LD 11 - Enable Forced Charge Account for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 401)  
Enable Forced Charge Account for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
4. "LD 14 - Enable Forced Charge Account for each incoming TIE or CCSA  
trunk." (page 401)  
Enable Forced Charge Account for each incoming TIE or CCSA trunk.  
LD 15 - Enable Forced Charge Account for a customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Call Detail Recording.  
Customer number  
TYPE:  
CUST  
CDR  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 401  
Prompt  
Response  
0-99  
Description  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
0-31  
- CHLN  
(0)-23  
Maximum number of digits that can be in an FCA code (default  
is 0).  
- FCAF  
(NO) YES  
xx  
(Disable) enable FCA for the customer.  
- CHMN  
Minimum number of digits that can be in an FCA code (must be  
less than CHLN).  
xx  
- FCNC  
NCOS to be assigned to FCA codes.  
LD 10 - Enable Forced Charge Account for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
FCAR  
(NO)  
YES  
FCA can be used by this telephone.  
FCA is restricted from use by this telephone.  
LD 11 - Enable Forced Charge Account for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
FCAR  
(NO)  
YES  
FCA can be used by this telephone.  
FCA is restricted from use by this telephone.  
LD 14 - Enable Forced Charge Account for each incoming TIE or CCSA trunk.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Trunk type (must be TIE or CCSA).  
TYPE  
TIE CAA  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
402 Charge Account, Forced  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
FCAR  
(NO)  
YES  
FCA can be used by this trunk.  
FCA is restricted from use by this trunk.  
Feature operation  
To use FCA, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Select a free extension.  
Press Charge or dial SPRE + 5.  
Dial the Charge Account number.  
When you have a dial tone, dial the long distance number.  
—End—  
For operating procedures from particular telephones or consoles, see the  
Charge Account and Calling Party Number module in this document.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
403  
Charge Display at End of Call  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 403)  
"Operating parameters" (page 404)  
"Feature interactions" (page 404)  
"Feature packaging" (page 404)  
"Feature implementation" (page 405)  
"Feature operation" (page 405)  
Feature description  
This feature allows the set display of a charged party to show the charged  
amount of a metered call, along with the normal call-display information. To  
give you time to read and transcribe the charges, the feature maintains this  
display for ten seconds after call completion, unless you do something with  
the set such as make another call or use another feature.  
The currency (for instance, pound sterling, mark, and dollar) displayed is  
the currency specified in the feature configuration (LD 15 and LD 16). The  
charge information is received from the Central Office (generated from a  
Periodic Pulse Metering trunk or an Integrated Services Digital Network  
(ISDN) trunk).  
This feature is operational in a standalone environment, and is available  
on modular digital sets and M2317 sets. For M2317 sets, the charge  
information is appended to the standard call-display information. On  
modular sets, the charge information is scrolled to the second line (there are  
two lines of display on these sets).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
404 Charge Display at End of Call  
When a call is transferred, the Advice of Charge display appears on the set  
to which the call is transferred. It does not appear on the display of the  
set that transferred the call.  
M2317 charge display  
For M2317 sets, the charge information is appended to the standard  
call-display information. In the example below, the dialed DN  
(90113145078400) is displayed followed by the cost charged to the call  
($22.45).  
90113145078400  
= = = = =>  
2245  
Modular Set charge display  
On modular sets, which have two lines of display, the charge information is  
scrolled to the second line. In the example below, the name of the caller is  
displayed on the first line. The dialed DN (90113145078400), followed by  
the cost charged to the call ($12.75), is displayed on line two.  
LOIS LANE  
90113145078400  
1275  
Operating parameters  
The charge is displayed only if all of the following conditions are met:  
•
•
•
the customer to which the set belongs has the Charge Display at End of  
Call (CHDA) option defined  
the set has a display with Message Registration Allowed Class of  
Service.  
the trunk is configured with buffered or non-buffered Periodic Pulse  
Metering.  
Feature interactions  
There are no feature interactions associated with this feature.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
The following packages are required for Charge Display at End of Call:  
•
•
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131  
Periodic Pulse Metering/Message Registration (MR) package 101  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature operation 405  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 17 - Implement Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)." (page 405)  
Implement Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM).  
2. "LD 15 - Allow or deny Charge Display at End of Call for a customer."  
(page 405)  
Allow or deny Charge Display at End of Call for a customer.  
LD 17 - Implement Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM).  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
System Parameters.  
TYPE  
...  
PARM  
MTRO  
PPM  
Periodic Pulse Metering  
LD 15 - Allow or deny Charge Display at End of Call for a customer.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options.  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
...  
OPT  
CHDA  
CHDD  
Enter CHDA to allow Charge Display at End of Call. CHDD =  
Default  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
406 Charge Display at End of Call  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
407  
China - Attendant Monitor  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 407)  
"Operating parameters" (page 408)  
"Feature interactions" (page 408)  
"Feature packaging" (page 411)  
"Feature implementation" (page 411)  
"Feature operation" (page 412)  
Feature description  
Attendant Monitor Function  
Attendant Monitor is a customer defined option which allows the attendant  
to monitor, in listen only mode, any established call involving a set or  
trunk on the customer’s switch with or without the connected parties being  
aware that monitoring is taking place (depends on the configuration of the  
customer tone option).  
The differences between the existing Busy Verify and Barge-In features and  
the Attendant Monitor feature are the following:  
•
•
Attendant Monitor provides a listen only path for the attendant.  
There is no click sound given to the connected parties upon attendant  
connection when the no tone option is configured.  
•
•
The tone to the connected parties may or may not be given depending  
on the new customer tone option for Attendant Monitor.  
The display (if there is one) on any parties involved in the call does not  
indicate that the attendant is monitoring.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
408 China - Attendant Monitor  
Operating parameters  
Since Attendant Monitor is based on Busy Verify and Barge-In, it has the  
same limitations which apply to Busy Verify and Barge-in unless otherwise  
stated in this feature description.  
This feature has been developed exclusively for use in China.  
Attendant Monitor is strictly a standalone, same-customer feature which  
is not supported over networks. A customer equipped with the Attendant  
Monitor feature can only monitor a DN or trunk defined for that customer  
without going over the network.  
The toggle function between having a one-way speechpath and a two-way  
speechpath during monitoring is not supported.  
This feature is not supported for attendants monitoring other attendants.  
Monitoring an M2216 or M5317 is not supported.  
The attendant may be blocked from monitoring a DN or trunk due to a limit  
on the number of conference time slots.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Barge-In  
When China (CHINA) package 285 is equipped, the normal operation of  
Barge-In changes slightly. The repeatable tone is now configurable with the  
(TOA)/TOD option in LD 15.  
If an attendant is monitoring a trunk, a second attendant defined at the  
same customer location is blocked from Barging In to any trunk involved  
in the monitored call.  
If an attendant is Barged-In with a trunk, a second attendant defined at  
the same customer location is blocked from monitoring any party involved  
in the monitored call.  
Attendant Break-In  
If an attendant is monitoring a DN, a second attendant defined at the  
same customer site is blocked from Breaking In to any party involved in  
the monitored call.  
If an attendant is in a Break-In situation with a DN, a second attendant  
defined at the same customer site is blocked from monitoring any party  
involved in the monitored call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature interactions 409  
Attendant Busy Verify  
When China (CHINA) package 285 is equipped, the normal operation of  
Busy Verify changes. The repeatable tone is now configurable with the  
(TOA)/TOD option in LD 15.  
If an attendant is monitoring a DN, a second attendant defined for the same  
customer is blocked from Busy Verifying any party involved in the monitored  
call.  
If an attendant is Busy Verifying a DN, a second attendant defined for  
the same customer is blocked from monitoring any party involved in the  
monitored call.  
Automatic Call Distribution  
The attendant cannot monitor a call in which an Automatic Call Distribution  
(ACD) DN is involved.  
Call Forward All Calls  
Call Forward Busy  
Call Forward, Internal Calls  
Call Forward No Answer  
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which is Call Forwarded and is idle,  
idle DN treatment is given.  
Call Hold, Permanent  
Monitoring is not affected if anybody involved in the monitor’s call activates  
hold, except for the case of a simple call. For a monitored simple call,  
activating hold deactivates monitoring. In all cases, activation of music on  
hold deactivates monitoring.  
An attendant monitoring a call cannot put the monitored DN on hold. The  
attendant pressing the hold key has no effect while monitoring is enabled.  
Call Park  
If a DN being monitored becomes parked by another party, the Attendant  
Monitor feature is deactivated.  
Call Trace  
If a Call Trace is performed on the attendant, the output will consist of the  
existing Call Trace information elements for an attendant loop. In addition,  
"MON" is printed immediately after "ATTN" to indicate that this attendant is  
monitoring.  
If a Call Trace is performed on any other party involved in the monitored call,  
the output will consist of the existing information elements for a DN or trunk,  
as well as "MON" being printed immediately before "ACTIVE".  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
410 China - Attendant Monitor  
Call Transfer  
If any party at the customer location involved in a monitored call attempts to  
activate call transfer, monitoring is immediately deactivated.  
Centrex Switchhook Flash  
If any set at the customer location involved in the monitored call switchhook  
flashes or performs a Centrex switchhook flash, Attendant Monitor is  
immediately deactivated.  
Conference  
If any party involved in a monitored call attempts to activate conference,  
monitoring is immediately deactivated. With Attendant Monitor active, the  
attendant cannot create a conference without first disabling the Attendant  
Monitor feature.  
Do Not Disturb  
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which has Do Not Disturb activated  
and is idle, idle DN treatment is given.  
Make Set Busy  
If an attendant attempts to monitor a DN which has Make Set Busy activated  
and is idle, idle DN treatment is given.  
Malicious Call Trace  
If a party involved in a monitored call activates the TRC key, monitoring  
is immediately deactivated.  
Multiple Appearance DN  
If Attendant Monitor is attempted on a Multiple Appearance DN, the Multiple  
Appearance Redirection Prime (MARP) TN becomes the desired party.  
Override  
A set may operate override to join into a desired call. If the desired call is  
being Attendant Monitored at the time, one of the following occurs:  
•
•
•
If the desired call is a conference call, the override attempt is blocked  
as per existing operation.  
If the call is a simple one with the Attendant Monitoring with no tone, the  
override attempt is successful and Attendant Monitor is deactivated.  
If the call is a simple one with the Attendant Monitoring with tone, the  
override attempt is blocked.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature implementation 411  
Override, Enhanced  
A set may operate enhanced override on a desired call. If the desired call  
is being Attendant Monitored at the time, existing operation occurs for the  
first time the Enhanced Override key is pressed. The second time the  
key is pressed, the interaction with Attendant Monitor is the same as with  
regular override.  
Privacy Release  
If Privacy Release is activated on a set that is involved in a monitored call,  
Attendant Monitor is deactivated.  
Private Line  
Attendant Monitor is blocked from monitoring a Private DN.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable the Attendant Monitor option for a customer, and then  
either allow or deny the tone o" (page 411)  
Enable the Attendant Monitor option for a customer, and then either  
allow or deny the tone option.  
2. "LD 12 - Define the Barge-In/Attendant Monitor key and the Busy  
Verify/Attendant Monitor key on an at" (page 412)  
Define the Barge-In/Attendant Monitor key and the Busy Verify/Attendant  
Monitor key on an attendant console.  
LD 15 - Enable the Attendant Monitor option for a customer, and then either allow or deny  
the tone option.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
- OPT  
ATT_DATA  
(AMD) AMA  
(TOA) TOD  
Attendant console options  
(Deny) allow Attendant Monitor.  
(Allow) deny Attendant Monitor Tone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
412 China - Attendant Monitor  
LD 12 - Define the Barge-In/Attendant Monitor key and the Busy Verify/Attendant Monitor key  
on an attendant console.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
2250  
TYPE  
...  
Attendant console type.  
KEY  
00 BVR  
01 BIN  
Allow both Busy Verify and Attendant Monitor on key 00.  
Allow both Barge-In and Attendant Monitor on key 01.  
Feature operation  
Monitor a DN  
Step Action  
1
Press an idle Loop key on the attendant console. The Loop indicator  
is lit.  
2
3
Press the Busy Verify key. The Busy Verify lamp is lit.  
Press the Busy Verify key again to enable Attendant Monitor. The  
Busy Verify lamp is in the flashing state indicating that the Attendant  
Monitor option is enabled.  
4
Dial the extension desired to be monitored. One of the following  
happens:  
•
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is maintenance  
busy or disabled.  
•
•
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is vacant.  
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is in some  
transient state (for example, Conference or Transfer)  
•
•
•
•
•
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is idle, receiving  
busy tone, or receiving overflow tone.  
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is involved with  
another attendant.  
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension has activated  
the Hold key.  
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the extension is already  
involved in a monitored call by another attendant.  
Attendant Monitor is active when the extension is busy. The  
attendant is able to listen to all connected parties. If the  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 413  
Attendant Monitor Customer tone is denied (TOD), there is no  
indication given to the connected parties that the attendant is  
monitoring. If the Attendant Monitor Customer Tone is allowed  
(TOA), a burst of tone is sent to the connected parties every 16  
seconds. When the monitored DN disconnects from the call,  
Attendant Monitor is deactivated.  
In all of the above situations, the display on the parties involved  
in the call does not indicate that the attendant has attempted to  
monitor. With TOD configured, upon the attendant successfully  
joining the connection there is no click sound given to the monitored  
parties that could indicate that the attendant has joined in.  
5
When Attendant Monitor is deactivated, the attendant is released  
from monitoring and is free to process calls. Deactivation occurs  
due to the following:  
•
•
•
The RLS key on the attendant console is pressed.  
Any DN involved in the monitored call disconnects.  
Any DN involved in the monitored call at the customer location  
activates some form of call modification.  
—End—  
Monitor a Trunk  
Step Action  
1
Press an idle Loop key on the attendant console. The Loop indicator  
is lit.  
2
3
Press the Barge-In key. The Barge-In lamp is lit.  
Press the Barge-In key again to enable Attendant Monitor. The  
Barge-In lamp is in the flashing state indicating that the Attendant  
Monitor option is enabled.  
4
Dial the trunk access code and the route member number, then  
press (#). One of the following happens:  
•
•
•
•
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is disabled.  
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is idle.  
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is not assigned.  
Attendant Monitor is blocked when the trunk is already being  
monitored by another attendant.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
414 China - Attendant Monitor  
•
Attendant Monitor is active when the trunk is busy. The attendant  
is able to listen to all parties on the trunk. If the Attendant Monitor  
Customer tone is denied (TOD), there is no indication given to  
the connected parties that the attendant is monitoring. If the  
Attendant Monitor Customer tone is allowed (TOA), a burst of  
tone is sent every 16 seconds.  
5
When Attendant Monitor is deactivated, the attendant is released  
from monitoring and is free to process calls. Deactivation occurs  
due to the following:  
•
•
•
The RLS key on the attendant console is pressed.  
The trunk disconnects.  
Any party at the customer location performs some form of call  
modification or activates hold.  
•
•
Any party at the customer location disconnects.  
Any trunk involved in the monitored call disconnects.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
415  
China - Busy Tone Detection  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 415)  
"Operating parameters" (page 415)  
"Feature interactions" (page 416)  
"Feature packaging" (page 416)  
"Feature implementation" (page 416)  
"Feature operation" (page 418)  
Feature description  
In many countries, loop start trunks are not supervised. Therefore, many  
Public Exchanges/Central Offices send a busy tone to the system when the  
external party has disconnected. A tone detector must be used to detect  
this tone.  
The China - Busy Tone Detection (BTD) feature allows a technician to  
enter the characteristics of the busy tone to be detected in overlay 97.  
This information is downloaded to the system trunk for use during call  
processing. Once the busy tone is detected, the trunk sends a message  
to the system software, which then disconnects the call, and the trunk  
is free for other uses.  
An option is provided to allow Busy Tone Disconnect to occur only for  
incoming calls. This option is also programmed in LD 97. Cadence  
information is downloaded on a card basis.  
Operating parameters  
The Busy Tone Detection functionality is implemented on the Enhanced  
Extended Universal Trunk Card for China (NTRA10AA).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
416 China - Busy Tone Detection  
The system will disconnect any call once busy tone is detected on the  
incoming side of the trunk. If the user on the far end causes busy tone to  
be generated by any means, the call is disconnected whether or not that  
was the intention.  
The BTD characteristics are downloaded on a card basis only (not on a unit  
basis) and thus all units on the trunk card must go to Public Exchanges that  
produce the same busy tone cadence.  
Busy Tone Detection may not work with conference bridges in certain  
situations. This is due to the nature of conference bridges in such that all of  
the trunks are incoming. In the situation where two or more loop start trunks  
with BTD disconnect simultaneously, the resulting busy tone from each  
trunk may be detected by the BTD inhibitors of the other trunks. The result  
would be a stalemate where all trunks remain connected.  
If a trunk card is not designed to support the Busy Tone Detection feature  
(for example, for future BTD hardware implementation), the functionality  
can still be configured in software.  
To change Busy Tone Detection assigned to a trunk card, all trunks on the  
card must first be removed using LD 14.  
Feature interactions  
Loop Start Supervisory Trunks  
The interaction with Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) trunks occurs  
because Busy Tone Supervision (BTS) can be configured in conjunction  
with any existing supervision type. For the EXUT, BTS can now be  
configured with a supervision type of BST (both incoming and outgoing  
battery reversal) and Polarity Insensitive (PIP). These supervision type’s  
call processing methods are not changed, except that now the first type of  
supervision received is the one acted upon.  
Feature packaging  
China - Busy Tone Detection requires Busy Tone Detection (BTD) package  
294, which depends upon Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (XPE) package  
203.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
•
"LD 97 - Busy Tone table configuration." (page 417)  
Busy Tone table configuration.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature implementation 417  
•
"LD 14 - Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision  
assignment." (page 417)  
Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision assignment.  
For China, the BTD table and its assignment to the various routes is  
automatic and does not require configuration in LD 97 or LD 14, as long  
as the BTD package is equipped. Only the configuration of Busy Tone  
Supervision in LD 14 is required.  
LD 97 need only be changed if the values other than the default are required.  
If table 0 is modified, rather than creating a new one, the assignment  
to the trunk in LD 14 is not required. After the BTD table is created, or  
changed, the data must be dumped and the system reloaded in order for  
the information to be downloaded.  
LD 97 - Busy Tone table configuration.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Busy Tone Detection.  
Busy Tone Detection Table.  
TYPE  
BTDT  
BTD  
(0)-7  
X1-X7  
BCAD  
BTDD  
Ph1 Ph2  
(350 350)  
Busy Tone Cadence. The input values are rounded to  
the nearest multiple of 25 ms.  
(BOTH)  
INC  
Busy Tone Detection allowed on both incoming and  
outgoing calls.  
Busy Tone Detection allowed on incoming calls only.  
LD 14 - Busy Tone Detection Table and Busy Tone Supervision assignment.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
Description  
Create or change a route.  
Central Office trunk.  
Terminal number  
TYPE  
TN  
COT  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B  
where c = card and u = unit.  
XTRK  
...  
EXUT  
Extended Universal Trunk.  
SIGL  
...  
LOP  
Loop Start signaling.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
418 China - Busy Tone Detection  
Prompt  
SUPN  
STYP  
Response  
Description  
(NO) YES  
Supervision.  
Supervision type, where:  
(PIP)  
BTS  
BST  
PIP = Polarity Insensitive  
BTS = Busy Tone Supervision  
BST = Both way Supervision Trunk (BST) (that is, PIP  
on both incoming and outgoing calls) PIP  
PIP BTS  
BST BTS  
BTS = PIP and BTS, and  
BST BTS = BST and BTS.  
BTDT  
(0)-7  
Busy Tone Detection Table number.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
419  
China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 419)  
"Operating parameters" (page 420)  
"Feature interactions" (page 421)  
"Feature packaging" (page 424)  
"Feature implementation" (page 424)  
"Feature operation" (page 431)  
Feature description  
Three Flexible Feature Code (FFC) features have been developed to meet  
the requirements of the Chinese Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications  
for the rural switch market in China, these features can be used in other  
markets. The three features are Busy Number Redial (BNR), Customer  
Call Forward (CCFW), and Outgoing Call Barring (OCB). With all three  
of these features, there is an option to provide a confirmation tone upon  
feature activation.  
Busy Number Redial  
Busy Number Redial enables a user of an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
encountering a busy condition to automatically re-dial the busy number by  
performing a switchhook flash and dialing the Busy Number Redial FFC.  
When the user goes off-hook next without dialing any digit, the busy number  
is automatically re-dialed. This feature remains in effect until the desired  
Directory Number (DN) is reached, up to a maximum of 20 minutes.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
420 China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Customer Call Forward  
Customer Call Forward allows users of analog (500/2500 type) telephones  
to forward their telephones to a central answering position by dialing the  
Customer Call Forward FFC. This feature activates the Call Forward All  
Calls function without having to specify the forward DN.  
Outgoing Call Barring  
Outgoing Call Barring allows a set to be blocked from making some or all  
outgoing calls. Three levels of barring are available which can be selected  
by dialing the Outgoing Call Barring FFC, the barring level desired, and the  
Station Control Password (SCPW).  
The three levels are each associated with a New Flexible Code Restriction  
(NFCR) tree in the Customer Data Block. When a DN is dialed, the digits  
dialed are compared to the associated NFCR tree and busy tone is given if  
the call is barred. An FFC is also available to verify that the feature is active.  
The active level cannot be changed without first deactivating the feature  
and reactivating it with a new level.  
Operating parameters  
Although designed for China, the China – Flexible Feature Codes feature  
can be used in other markets.  
Busy Number Redial is only available for internal calls and for trunk calls  
that provide a busy signal when busy tone is given.  
Busy Number Redial and Customer Call Forward are only available for  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Outgoing Call Barring does not apply to BRI sets.  
The Reply DN for CCFW is limited to 16 digits.  
OCB will only process asterisk (*) and octothorpe (#) according to the active  
NFCR tree if the digits are to be outpulsed on a route with OPR active  
(including all necessary conditions for OPR). If they are dialed as part of  
an FFC, the call is allowed; otherwise, an octothorpe will cause the call to  
be blocked. An asterisk (*) is ignored, except during digit counting. Thus,  
FFCs containing an asterisk (*) or an octothorpe (#) cannot be blocked by  
this feature.  
OCB will not prevent calls from terminating when there are too few dialed  
digits to traverse the full NCFR tree (for example, if the active tree is set  
up to bar 2001, but a DN of 200 exists, calls to 200 is allowed with no  
error message).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature interactions 421  
The maximum number of digits that is processed by OCB is 32. If the call is  
not allowed or denied by that point, the call is barred.  
OCB can bar feature access codes such as Special Prefix (SPRE) codes  
and numeric FFCs. It will not bar the digits dialed after a feature access  
code.  
Feature interactions  
Busy Number Redial  
Autodial  
Activation of Busy Number Redial changes the activation of Autodial. The  
DN that is auto dialed becomes the DN that was busy. When the BNR  
activation timer expires or the busy DN is re-dialed when it is idle, the  
autodial capability is deactivated, but the number saved is not cleared. If  
Autodial is then activated without entering a DN, the number used is the  
formerly busy DN.  
Activation of Autodial when BNR is active deactivates BNR.  
Automatic Set Relocation  
Busy Number Redial is deactivated when a set is relocated.  
Deactivate Feature FFC  
The Deactivate Feature (DEAF) FFC deactivates Busy Number Redial.  
Hot Line  
Busy Number Redial cannot be used on Flexible Hot Line or Enhanced  
Hot Line sets.  
Off-Hook Alarm Security  
Busy Number Redial cannot be used on a set with Off-Hook Alarm Security  
Allowed, since autodial cannot be configured on these sets.  
16-Button Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Sets  
Busy Number Redial (BNR) activate can be a post-dial function, and BNR  
deactivate can be a pre-dial function. Both FFCs may be dialed normally  
from a 16-button DTMF telephone.  
Customer Call Forward  
Customer Call Forward (CCFW) is another way of activating Call Forward  
All Calls (CFWAC), therefore all interactions with CCFW not specified below  
are the same as with CFWAC.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
422 China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Call Forward All Calls  
When CCFW is active Call Forward All Calls (CFWAC) cannot be activated  
by Flexible Feature Code, but can be activated by SPRE. When CFWAC is  
active, CCFW cannot be activated.  
CCFW can be deactivated by deactivating CFWAC. CFWAC can only be  
deactivated by the CCFD FFC if the current CFW DN is the same as the  
current CCFW DN.  
Deactivate Feature FFC  
The Deactivate Feature FFC deactivates Customer Call Forward.  
Make Set Busy  
Customer Call Forward takes precedence over Make Set Busy if both are  
active.  
16-Button Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Sets  
CCFA and CCFD are allowed as predial ABCD functions. They may also be  
dialed normally from 16-Button DTMF telephones.  
Outgoing Call Barring  
Outgoing Call Barring is an additional feature that may block a call. All other  
call blocking features still apply as usual.  
Authorization Code Security Enhancement  
Digits dialed after an Authorization Code are checked against the active  
OCB level.  
Call Forward All Calls  
When a set with Outgoing Call Barring active activates CFWAC with a new  
CFW DN, the CFW DN is checked against the current barring level. If the  
DN is not allowed to be dialed, it can also not be used as a Call Forward  
DN. This is to prevent a set from forwarding to a barred DN and then dialing  
its own DN to bypass the limitations.  
Charge Account and Calling Party Number  
Digits dialed after a charge account are checked against the active OCB  
level.  
Digit Display  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones with displays do not display the OCB level  
and the Station Control Password (SCPW) when OCB FFCs are dialed.  
This protects the security of the SCPW.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 423  
Flexible Feature Codes  
Flexible Feature Codes containing an asterisk (*) or an octothorpe (#) will  
always be allowed by OCB. Therefore, FFCs which can be used to make a  
call should be entirely numeric if barring of them is required.  
Some FFCs are equivalent to Special Prefix functions and these is subject  
to barring based on the equivalent Special Prefix codes, even if the FFC is  
entirely numeric.  
Last Number Redial  
Barred DNs is stored by Last Number Redial (LNR). DNs re-dialed using  
LNR are checked against the active OCB level.  
OCB Flexible Feature Codes are not stored as the last number dialed.  
Network Alternate Route Selection (NARS)/Basic Alternate Route  
Selection (BARS)  
Calls made through NARS or BARS that result in local termination may  
not be barred based on the full dialed digits. They is barred based on the  
resulting local digits. Calls to a Local Steering Code will use the full dialed  
digits, as well as the resulting termination. Calls to the Home Location  
Code (HLOC) is barred based on the AC1 and HLOC, and then barred  
separately based on the local DN. Other local terminations include calls to  
an Numbering Plan Area (NPA) or Home Numbering Plan Area (HNPA)  
that use Supplemental Digit Restriction and Recognition to recognize a  
Local Direct Inward Dialing (DID) number, and calls using a Route List Block  
which terminate using the LTER option.  
New Flexible Code Restriction  
Outgoing Call Barring uses New Flexible Code Restriction (NFCR) trees to  
define the digit sequences that are not allowed for each level of barring.  
However, OCB analyses all dialed digits, whereas NFCR only analyses  
digits outpulsed on trunks. This means that the same tree will not normally  
be usable for both features, unless only Coordinated Dialing Plan trunk calls  
are to be blocked for both features and no digit manipulation is done.  
Outpulsing of Asterisks and Octothorpes  
The NFCR trees used for Outgoing Call Barring are allowed to contain  
asterisks and octothorpes when the Outpulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe  
(OPAO) package 104 is equipped. These special digits will only be used for  
processing dialed digits on routes with OPAO allowed.  
Remote Call Forward  
Activation of CFW to a barred DN by Remote Call Forward is permitted,  
since the user has had to dial the Station Control Password, which could  
also have been used to deactivate OCB.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
424 China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Ring Again  
Ring Again cannot be activated after a call is barred by Outgoing Call  
Barring. Sets with display will not offer Ring Again.  
Saved Number Redial  
DNs re-dialed using Saved Number Redial (SNR) are checked against the  
active OCB level.  
M2317 sets will offer a "Save #" after a call to a barred DN.  
Speed Call  
Digits dialed using Speed Call are checked against the active OCB level.  
This includes calls made using the Dial Access to Speed Call feature (that  
is, using Pilot DNs).  
Speed Call, System  
Digits dialed using System Speed Call are checked against the active OCB  
level.  
16-Button Dual-tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Sets  
The Outgoing Call Barring FFCs are not allowed as ABCD functions. They  
may be dialed normally from 16-Button DTMF telephones.  
Feature packaging  
China – Flexible Feature Codes is contained in base system software. The  
following packages are required for feature activation:  
•
•
Flexible Feature Codes (FFC) package 139  
Busy Number Redial also requires the Autodial functionality that is  
contained in Optional Features (OPT) package 1  
•
•
Customer Call Forward also requires the Call Forward All Calls  
functionality contained in Optional Features (OPT) package 1 and  
Special Service for 2500 Sets (SS25) package 18  
Outgoing Call Barring also requires the New Flexible Feature Code  
Restriction (NFCR) package 49  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Define the basic setup for all three of the FFC-based features."  
(page 425)  
Define the basic setup for all three of the FFC-based features.  
2. "LD 56 - Define Confirmation Tone." (page 425)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature implementation 425  
Define Confirmation Tone.  
LD 15 - Define the basic setup for all three of the FFC-based features.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Codes  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
0-31  
- FFCS  
(NO) YES  
(Do not) change Flexible Feature Code end-of-dialing  
indicator.  
1-3  
xxx  
- STRL  
- STRG  
String Length of end-of-dial indicator.  
String to indicate end-of-dialing. Up to three digits as  
defined by STRL. Digits 0-9 and "#" are valid entries.  
REQ  
CHG  
FTR  
nnnn  
Change.  
TYPE  
- SPRE  
Features and options.  
Special Function Prefix (required for FFCs to operate).  
LD 56 - Define Confirmation Tone.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
TABL  
FTC  
Flexible Tones and Cadences.  
FTC Table Number.  
0-31  
HCCT  
...  
YES  
Hardware controlled cadences and tones.  
- FFCT  
- - XTON  
- - XCAD  
Configure Confirmation Tone.  
0-(4)-255  
(0)-255  
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Tone code.  
XCT (NT8D17 Conference/TDS) Cadence number (FCAD  
cadence number).  
Busy Number Redial  
Task Summary List  
Complete the following steps to configure the Busy Number Redial feature:  
1. "LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Busy Number Redial."  
(page 426)  
Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Busy Number Redial.  
2. "LD 15 - Set the Autodial Delay time used by Busy Number Redial."  
(page 426)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
426 China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Set the Autodial Delay time used by Busy Number Redial.  
3. "LD 10 - Allow Busy Number Redial for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 426)  
Allow Busy Number Redial for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Busy Number Redial.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Codes.  
xx  
CUST  
FFCT  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.  
Change code.  
(NO) YES  
CODE  
- DEAF  
- BNRA  
- BNRD  
xxxx  
xxxx  
xxxx  
Deactivate Feature.  
Busy Number Redial activation code.  
Busy Number Redial deactivation code.  
LD 15 - Set the Autodial Delay time used by Busy Number Redial.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Codes  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
0-31  
- ADLD  
(0)-20  
Number of seconds to delay before auto-dialing the saved  
busy number (0 will make the feature unavailable). Odd  
entries are rounded up to the next even number.  
LD 10 - Allow Busy Number Redial for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature implementation 427  
Prompt  
CLS  
Response  
(BNRD) BNRA  
ADL xx  
Description  
(Deny) allow Busy Number Redial for this telephone.  
FTR  
Autodial, where:  
xx = the maximum number of digits that can be stored.  
Customer Call Forward  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Customer Call Forward."  
(page 427)  
Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Customer Call Forward.  
2. "LD 15 - Add or change the Reply DN for Customer Call Forward."  
(page 427)  
Add or change the Reply DN for Customer Call Forward.  
3. "LD 10 - Configure the Call Forward feature to allow Customer Call  
Forward for analog (500/2500 type)" (page 428)  
Configure the Call Forward feature to allow Customer Call Forward for  
analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
LD 57 - Configure Flexible Feature Codes for Customer Call Forward.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
FFC  
Flexible Feature Codes.  
xx  
CUST  
FFCT  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.  
Change code.  
(NO) YES  
CODE  
- DEAF  
- CCFA  
- CCFD  
xxxx  
xxxx  
xxxx  
Deactivate Feature.  
Customer Call Forward activation code.  
Customer Call Forward deactivation code.  
LD 15 - Add or change the Reply DN for Customer Call Forward.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Call Redirection  
TYPE:  
CUST  
RDR  
Customer number  
0-99  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
428 China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Prompt  
Response  
0-31  
Description  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
- CCFWDN  
dd..dd X  
Customer Call Forward DN (maximum of 16 digits). X to  
delete.  
LD 10 - Configure the Call Forward feature to allow Customer Call Forward for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
FTR  
CFW nn  
Call Forward (nn must be the same number of digits as  
the CCFW DN).  
Outgoing Call Barring  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 57 - Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for Outgoing Call  
Barring." (page 429)  
Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for Outgoing Call Barring.  
2. "LD 15 - Specify NFCR trees and Station Control Password length for  
Outgoing Call Barring." (page 429)  
Specify NFCR trees and Station Control Password length for Outgoing  
Call Barring.  
3. "LD 49 - Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring." (page 429)  
Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring.  
4. "LD 10 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 430)  
Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
5. "LD 11 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 430)  
Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature implementation 429  
LD 57 - Configure the Flexible Feature Codes for Outgoing Call Barring.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Flexible Feature Codes.  
TYPE  
FFC  
xx  
CUST  
FFCT  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Flexible Feature Confirmation Tone.  
Change code  
(NO) YES  
CODE  
- OCBA  
- OCBD  
- OCBV  
xxxx  
xxxx  
xxxx  
Outgoing Call Barring activation code.  
Outgoing Call Barring deactivation code.  
Outgoing Call Barring verification code.  
LD 15 - Specify NFCR trees and Station Control Password length for Outgoing Call Barring.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
NFCR  
FCR  
New Flexible Code Restriction options  
(Disable) enable New Flexible Code Restriction.  
Maximum number of NFCR trees.  
(NO) YES  
1-255  
- MAXT  
- OCB1  
0-MAXT  
NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 1. Enter 255  
to deactivate.  
- OCB2  
- OCB3  
0-MAXT  
0-MAXT  
FFC  
NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 2. Enter 255  
to deactivate.  
NFCR tree for Outgoing Call Barring level 3. Enter 255  
to deactivate.  
TYPE  
CUST  
Flexible Feature Codes  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
0-8  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Station Control Password Length.  
- SCPL  
LD 49 - Create NFCR trees for Outgoing Call Barring.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW  
Description  
Add new data.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CRNO  
INIT  
FCR  
Flexible Code Restriction.  
xx  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
New Flexible Code Restriction tree number.  
Allow or deny digit strings not in tree.  
(0)-254  
ALOW DENY  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
430 China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
xxxx  
ALOW  
Digit sequence to be allowed unconditionally.  
xxxx y...y  
Digit sequence to be conditionally allowed and maximum  
number of digits that can follow.  
UPDT  
DENY  
(YES), NO  
xxxx  
Data is correct and NFCR tree can be updated.  
Digit sequence to be denied unconditionally.  
xxxx y...y  
(YES) NO  
Digit sequence to be conditionally denied and maximum  
number of digits that can follow.  
UPDT  
Data is correct and NFCR tree can be updated.  
LD 10 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
xxxx  
SCPW  
CLS  
Station Control Password. Length must match SCPL in  
LD 15.  
(OCBD) OCBA  
(Deny) allow Outgoing Call Barring.  
LD 11 - Allow Outgoing Call Barring for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
xxxx  
SCPW  
CLS  
Station Control Password. Length must match SCPL in  
LD 15.  
(OCBD) OCBA  
(Deny) allow Outgoing Call Barring.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 431  
Feature operation  
Busy Number Redial  
To activate Busy Number Redial, a switchhook flash is done, and the BNRA  
FFC is dialed. The number to be re-dialed is stored in the set’s storage area  
for Autodial. Confirmation tone is given if configured.  
When the user goes off-hook and does not dial within the number of  
seconds configured for the Autodial Delay timer (ADLD) the busy number  
is automatically re-dialed. If the DN is idle when retailed, the feature is  
deactivated, otherwise it remains available for 20 minutes. The feature  
can be deactivated manually by dialing the BNRD FFC, or the Deactivate  
Feature FFC. The user again hears confirmation tone. Deactivating the  
feature when it is not active will still cause confirmation tone to be heard,  
since the feature may have just timed out when going off-hook to dial the  
deactivation code.  
Customer Call Forward  
Customer Call Forward is activated by dialing the CCFA FFC. Confirmation  
tone is given if activation is successful. When Customer Call Forward  
is activated, the CFWAC feature is activated with the CFW DN set to the  
Reply DN.  
CCFW is deactivated by dialing the Customer Call Forward Deactivate  
FFC, or the Deactivate Feature FFC (it will also be deactivated by the  
activation of certain other features, see the Feature interactions section of  
this description).  
Outgoing Call Barring  
Outgoing Call Barring can be activated from a set with OCBA Class of  
Service. To activate OCB, the subscriber dials the OCBA FFC, the barring  
level desired, and the Station Control Password. An octothorpe must also  
be dialed from Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and analog (500/2500  
type) telephones. If activation is successful confirmation tone is given. If  
the feature is not activated overflow tone is given.  
The feature is deactivated by dialing the OCBD FFC, then the active level,  
and the Station Control Password. An octothorpe must also be dialed from  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones and analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
The subscriber may dial the OCBV FFC to verify that OCB is active.  
Confirmation tone is heard if OCB is active, otherwise overflow tone is heard.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
432 China - Flexible Feature Codes  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
433  
China - Supervised Analog Lines  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 433)  
"Operating parameters" (page 434)  
"Feature interactions" (page 435)  
"Feature packaging" (page 436)  
"Feature implementation" (page 436)  
"Feature operation" (page 437)  
Feature description  
The China - Supervised Analog Lines feature provides two types of call  
supervision signaling capabilities: battery reversal answer/disconnect  
supervision and hook flash disconnect supervision. These forms of  
supervision are provided to terminal devices connected to analog ports in  
the system.  
Battery Reversal Supervision  
Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision signaling is used for  
calls originating from the terminal device. It provides both far-end (the called  
party) answer supervision and far-end disconnect supervision signals to  
the terminal device. It does not apply to incoming calls terminating at the  
terminal device.  
In the idle state, the analog port in the system provides ground signal on  
the tip lead and battery on the ring lead. This polarity is maintained during  
dialing and ringing at the far end. When the far end answers, the battery  
and ground connections are reversed. The reverse battery is maintained  
while the call is established. When the far end disconnects, the battery and  
ground connections are reverted to the idle state to signal that the far end  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
434 China - Supervised Analog Lines  
has disconnected. If the terminal device disconnects first, the system sends  
the Deactivate Battery Reversal Scan Signal Distribution (SSD) message  
to the firmware after receiving the on-hook status to revert the polarity to  
its idle state.  
Two types of battery reversal are supported. Battery Reversal for Absolute  
Answer Only provides an answer supervision signal to the terminal device  
only when the system detects an absolute answer. Battery Reversal for  
Absolute and Assumed Answer provides an answer supervision signal to  
the terminal device even when an assumed answer is detected and the far  
end is not capable of indicating definite answer (for example, an outgoing  
call on an unsupervised loop start trunk).  
Hook Flash Disconnect Supervision  
Hook flash disconnect supervision is used for incoming calls terminating at  
the terminal device. The disconnect signal is indicated by the removal of  
the ground connection to the tip lead for a specific period of time, which  
is provided by firmware ranging from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to a  
maximum of 2.55 seconds. The analog port is held busy for incoming calls  
while hook flash is in progress.  
Operating parameters  
This feature applies to Intelligent Peripheral Equipment that support the  
Supervised Analog Line feature only.  
Disconnect supervision is not provided to the terminal device if the system  
does not receive any indication of the far end releasing.  
If the system does not receive any answer indication, and answer  
supervision is not extended to the terminal device following an assumed  
answer condition, disconnect supervision cannot be extended when the  
far end disconnects.  
If the Battery Reversal Supervision feature is configured for an analog  
line on an analog card that does not support battery reversal, the battery  
reversal SSD messages from the system software are ignored by the analog  
card firmware. In this case, no battery reversal signal is extended to the  
terminal device.  
If the Hook Flash Disconnect Supervision feature is configured for an  
analog line on an analog card that does not support hook flash, the hook  
flash SSD messages from the system software are ignored by the analog  
line card firmware. In this case, no hook flash signal is extended to the  
terminal device.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature interactions 435  
If the system initializes while an outgoing call originating from an analog line  
is established and battery reversal is activated, unprotected data for the  
call is lost. In this case, battery reversal remains activated when the call is  
cleared down by either party. However, the line status is reverted to normal  
when the next outgoing call is answered and then cleared down.  
If the hook flash timer is set equal to or greater than the on-hook timer,  
activation of the hook flash disconnect signal also causes the card to send  
an on-hook message and then an off-hook message to the system. In this  
case, if the user remains off-hook after the far end disconnects, dial tone  
is received and an outgoing call can be initiated.  
Battery reversal supervision is supported on the following cards:  
•
The Enhanced Extended Analog Line Card for China NTRA08AA or  
later vintage.  
•
•
The Off-Premise Station Line Card NT1R20AB or later vintage, and  
The Off-Premise Station Line Card for China NTRA06AB or later vintage.  
Hook flash disconnect supervision is supported on the following cards:  
•
•
The Off-Premise Station Line Card NT1R20AB or later vintage, and  
The Off-Premise Station Line Card for China NTRA06AB or later vintage.  
Feature interactions  
Call Transfer  
If more than one active call is extended to an analog line, the call type  
associated with an analog line is determined by the first active call. The call  
type is assumed to be incoming and hook flash supervision applies if a  
terminal device answers an incoming call from an idle state. If the terminal  
device performs a switch hook flash to put the first party on hold and  
initiates a consultation call, the Battery Reversal feature is not supported;  
no battery reversal answer signal is extended to the terminal device when  
the second party answers.  
If the first party disconnects while the terminal device is connected to  
the second party, no disconnect supervision is extended to the terminal  
device. However, hook flash disconnect supervision is extended to the  
terminal device when the second party disconnects (that is, a disconnect  
supervision signal is sent only when the last party connected to the terminal  
disconnects).  
If a terminal device originates an outgoing call, battery reversal answer  
supervision is extended when the called party answers. The polarity of the  
line remains reversed when the terminal device performs a switch hook  
flash and then initiates a consultation call to a second party. The analog  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
436 China - Supervised Analog Lines  
line is reverted to normal polarity when the terminal device completes  
the transfer and drops out or when the last of either the held party or the  
consultation party disconnects.  
Conference  
If a terminal device answers an incoming call and then initiates a conference,  
no battery reversal answer supervision signal is extended to the terminal  
device when new parties of the conference answer. However, a hook flash  
disconnect supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when the  
last party in the conference disconnects.  
If a terminal device initiates a conference, battery reversal answer  
supervision is extended to the terminal device when the first party answers.  
No polarity change is made when additional parties are added to the  
conference. The polarity is reverted to normal when the terminal device  
disconnects or when the last party in the conference disconnects.  
Multi-Party Operations  
As in the cases with Call Transfer and Conference, the call type of the first  
active call determines whether battery reversal or hook flash supervision  
applies. Also, supervision signaling is not supported for the second call.  
A disconnect supervision signal is extended only when the last party  
disconnects.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Enable battery reversal supervision." (page 436)  
Enable battery reversal supervision.  
2. "LD 10 - Enable hook flash disconnect supervision." (page 437)  
Enable hook flash disconnect supervision.  
LD 10 - Enable battery reversal supervision.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
NEW CHG  
500  
Description  
Add, or change.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature operation 437  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
...  
FTR  
OSP (1)  
Outgoing call supervision. Answer and disconnect  
supervision for outgoing calls with absolute and assumed  
answer indication. If the numeric parameter is not entered  
and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 1. Otherwise it  
remains unchanged.  
OSP 2  
XOSP  
Answer and disconnect supervision for outgoing calls with  
absolute answer supervision only.  
Enter XOSP to disable battery reversal answer and  
disconnect supervision.  
LD 10 - Enable hook flash disconnect supervision.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
NEW CHG  
500  
Description  
Add, or change.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
...  
FTR  
ISP 1...(75)...255  
Enable hook flash disconnect supervision with flash timer  
in 10 millisecond units. If the numeric parameter is not  
entered and the saved value is null, it is defaulted to 75.  
Otherwise it remains unchanged.  
XISP  
Enter XISP to disable hook flash disconnect supervision.  
Respond to the FTR prompt in LD 10 with OSP 1, and then with ISP  
1...(75)...255 to enable both battery reversal supervision and hook flash  
disconnect supervision.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
438 China - Supervised Analog Lines  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
439  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 439)  
"Operating parameters" (page 440)  
"Feature interactions" (page 440)  
"Feature packaging" (page 441)  
"Feature implementation" (page 441)  
"Feature operation" (page 443)  
Feature description  
The China – Toll Call Loss Plan feature provides the requirement of 7 dB  
loss for 2.0 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) toll calls from a system,  
acting as a Class 5 (C5) office. It is only applicable for a DTI2 trunk  
connection using MFC signaling to an analog (500/2500 type) telephone.  
Feature specific losses on the DTI2 card and 500/2500 line card are  
provided if the call is recognized as a toll call and the local party is using  
an analog (500/2500 type) telephone. The loss levels for toll calls are  
configured in LD 73 by using the TOLT and TOLL prompts.  
With this feature, when a toll condition is detected, loss levels are sent to  
the ONS line card. When the call is terminated, the original loss levels are  
sent to the ONS line card.  
The outgoing toll call is recognized by defining the toll digits as a Special  
Service List number in LD 18 and specifying it in the DTI2 Route Data  
Block. For incoming calls, the toll status is provided by the Multifrequency  
Compelled (MFC) signaling. When the toll status is determined, the  
appropriate pad values are used on the DTI2 card and 500/2500 line card.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
440 China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Operating parameters  
The Toll Loss Plan is only supported when a pure Intelligent Peripheral  
Equipment (IPE) Loss Plan for China is used. Existing pad levels for DTI2  
toll calls with Hybrid Loss Plan for China are unchanged.  
This feature is only supported for a Class 5 system.  
The Toll Loss Plan is only supported on DTI2 MFC trunks.  
If an initialization occurs, the toll call stays connected, but the toll status is  
lost. The pad levels are reinserted as if it is for a non-toll call.  
The Toll Loss Plan is not supported when a conference call is in progress.  
China specific IPE 500/2500, DTI2, and MFC line cards are required.  
Feature interactions  
Call Diversion (Call Transfer, Call Forward All Calls, Call Forward Busy,  
Call Forward, Internal Calls, Call Forward No Answer, Hunting)  
Toll pad switching is also provided after call diversion has been completed.  
When the toll call is diverted, the diverted party’s pad level is switched back  
to its original value (unless it is an OPS station using dynamic switching).  
The Toll Loss Plan is applied again for the new call as if it is a direct call.  
For Call Transfer, it is provided after the transferring party completes the  
transfer and drops out. For Call Forward or Hunting, it is provided when the  
forwarding or hunting call is answered.  
Conference  
Toll Loss Plan is not supported when a conference is in progress. When  
a local party connecting to a toll call makes a conference call, the pad  
levels on the ONS line card are switched back to their original (non-toll  
call) values. Then, the existing Conference algorithm takes care of the  
necessary pad switching. This would not alter the existing conference call in  
terms of loss levels.  
When a conference call joins in a toll call, the Toll Loss Plan is not effective.  
When a conference call involving a toll call becomes a two-party call, the  
Toll Loss Plan is applied on the set and DTI2 trunk.  
The conference pad switching algorithm is not changed for the Toll Loss  
Plan, since the 7 db requirement does not apply to a Conference call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature implementation 441  
Digitone Receiver Pads  
When a Digitone Receiver (DTR) is connected to the DTI2 call (receive  
only), the pad value to be used on the DTI2 pack is defined in LD 73. There  
is no interaction with this since the Toll Loss Plan is only supported on a  
DTI2 trunk with MFC signaling.  
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling Pads  
There is no interaction with this operation, since the Toll pad switching  
is only performed when the call is established and the Multifrequency  
Compelled signaling has terminated.  
Multi-Party Operations  
When a user toggles between one party and another, the Toll Loss Plan is  
inserted on the active call if it is a toll call. If the user toggles to a non-toll  
call, the Toll Loss Plan is removed.  
Feature packaging  
The China Toll (CHTL) package 292 must be provisioned to activate this  
feature.  
In addition the China – Toll Call Loss Plan feature requires:  
•
•
•
Multifrequency Compelled Signaling (MFC) package 128  
2 Mbps Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129  
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131 for the  
Special Service List functionality.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 18 - Define toll digits for China." (page 441)  
Define toll digits for China.  
2. "LD 16 - Enter the SSL number (defined in LD 18) in the Route Data  
Block of the DTI2 trunk." (page 442)  
Enter the SSL number (defined in LD 18) in the Route Data Block of  
the DTI2 trunk.  
3. "LD 73 - Enter the pad codes for a toll call on DTI2." (page 442)  
Enter the pad codes for a toll call on DTI2.  
LD 18 - Define toll digits for China.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW CHG  
Add, or change.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
442 China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Prompt  
TYPE  
SSL  
Response  
SSL  
Description  
Special Service List.  
1-15  
Enter Special Service List number.  
China national toll call.  
The SSDG entry is a toll number.  
0
SSDG  
- TOLL  
...  
YES  
00  
SSDG  
- TOLL N  
...  
China international toll call.  
YES  
The SSDG entry is a toll number.  
SSDG  
<CR>  
End entry.  
LD 16 - Enter the SSL number (defined in LD 18) in the Route Data Block of the DTI2 trunk.  
Prompt  
REQ  
TYPE  
...  
Response  
NEW CHG  
RDB  
Description  
Add, or change.  
Route Data Block  
1-15  
SSL  
Enter the SSL number defined in LD 18.  
LD 73 - Enter the pad codes for a toll call on DTI2.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW CHG PRT  
DTI2  
Description  
Add, change, or print.  
2.0 Mbps DTI data block.  
Pad category.  
TYPE  
FEAT  
PDCA  
TNLS  
DFLT  
...  
PAD  
1-16  
Pad category table.  
Terminal Number list.  
Default table.  
(NO) YES  
(1)-16  
TOLT  
Rx Tx  
(0) (0)  
Toll call pad data on DTI2 card, where:  
Rx = Receive, and  
Tx = Transmit.  
The default values are 0 dB receive, and 0 dB transmit.  
TOLL  
Rx Tx  
(16) (30)  
Toll call pad data on line card, where:  
Rx = Receive, and  
Tx = Transmit.  
The default values are 0 dB receive, and 7 dB transmit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 443  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
444 China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
445  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and  
Gateways Enhancements  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 445)  
"Operating parameters" (page 455)  
"Feature interactions" (page 456)  
"Feature packaging" (page 457)  
"Feature implementation" (page 458)  
"Feature operation" (page 471)  
Feature description  
This chapter describes the Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS)  
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Digits Manipulation and Gateways  
Enhancements features. The features are presented together because they  
share many common characteristics.  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements features allow  
the ANI to be built in a more flexible way when the call is originated from a  
set and from a route.  
ANI Definition  
The Automatic Number Identification (ANI) information is a string of digits  
sent to the Central Office (CO), which it uses to identify the calling subscriber  
for billing purposes, Malicious Call Trace (MCT) purposes, and for immediate  
information about the subscriber when reaching some vital service such as  
fire brigade, emergency medical care, or law enforcement officials. The ANI  
information is sent over the speech path whenever the CO requests it.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
446 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
ANI is sent on the following CIS trunks on the system:  
•
•
CIS three-wire analog trunk  
CIS digital trunk interface Dial Pulse (DP) and Multi-Frequency Shuttle  
(MFS)  
Shared functionality  
When configuring outgoing CIS routes, the feature is activated using the  
prompt ANIC to enable composition of a new ANI.  
Two similar ANI tables are configured in the customer data block. One is  
used when call is originated from a set. The second table is used when call  
is originated from a route.  
Up to 2000 entries can be configured in the ANI table for sets. Up to 512  
entries can be configured in the ANI table for routes.  
An ANI entry contains the following data:  
•
DNLG (DN Length): it gives the number of digits of the calling number  
that is used for building the ANI DN (for example calling party DN =  
342390 and DNLG = 4 will give an ANI DN = 2390).  
•
•
•
LEC: Local Exchange Code.  
ANDN: used as ANI DN if DNLG=0.  
ADDG: additional digits.  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation introduction  
The CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature enhances the system CIS ANI  
digits manipulation capabilities by increasing flexibility and ensuring greater  
accuracy. The feature modifies the length of outgoing ANI and it allows the  
building of outgoing ANI using the table configured in customer data block.  
CIS Gateway Enhancements introduction  
The purpose of the gateways enhancement feature is to enhance several  
gateways with Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) trunks.  
CIS gateways considered are with all route types with an emphasis on  
connectivity that can receive a Calling Number: R2MFC, ISDN interfaces  
and incoming CIS DTI2.  
ANI Digits Manipulation feature functionality  
The ANI may be built in two ways with the enhancements introduced by  
the CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature as described in the list below (see  
Figure 5 "Example of how ANI is built in call originating from a set (using  
enhanced functionality)" (page 447))  
1. The ANI may be built with the following modifications:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature description 447  
•
•
•
•
The length of the ANI information built by the software is configurable  
on a per route basis and may reach 15 digits (for LEC+ANI DN).  
The part of the ANI DN to be truncated (in case the truncation can’t  
be avoided) is the beginning (that is the most significant digits).  
The system has the option to work without LEC, that is the response  
to the prompt LEC in LD 16 is not mandatory anymore.  
In the case of LEC+ANI DN smaller than the programmed length,  
additional digit(s) (ADDG) is (are) added at the beginning of the ANI  
DN (between the ANI DN and the LEC), in compliance with the CIS  
standards. ADDG can be more than one digit long.  
2. Optionally, the ANI data may be retrieved from entries configured in LD  
15. It provides much more flexibility in building the ANI. An ANI entry  
number can be assigned to each circuit switched network set, BRI set  
and BCS DN key.  
Figure 5  
Example of how ANI is built in call originating from a set (using enhanced functionality)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
448 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation examples  
This section provides diagrams and tables that show how CIS ANI Digits  
Manipulation feature operates. Example 1 is presented in Table 3 "DN on  
key 1 is to be used in ANI" (page 448). Example 2 is shown in "Example 2 -  
DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI" (page 448).  
Example 1 - DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI  
Table 3  
DN on key 1 is to be used in ANI  
ANI entry  
Entry X  
Entry Y  
4
0
DNLG, length of DN to use in ANI  
LEC, Local Exchange Code  
ADDG, additional digits  
940  
89  
940  
8
7676  
ANDN, used as ANI DN if DNLG is 0  
Example 2 - DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI  
Table 4  
DN on key 1 is not to be used in ANI  
ANI entry  
Entry X  
Entry Y  
4
0
DNLG, length of DN to use in ANI  
LEC, Local Exchange Code  
ADDG, additional digits  
940  
89  
940  
8
7676  
ANDN, used as ANI DN if DNLG is 0  
Gateways Enhancement feature functionality  
The gateway enhancements are composed of the following new functionality,  
described in this section:  
•
Mapping of the received calling number to ANI:  
— Mapping CNI to ANI, ANI to CNI  
— Mapping CLID to ANI and OLI to ANI  
— Mapping ANI to ANI in gateway CIS to CIS  
•
Building ANI for interfaces without calling number  
Mapping of the received calling number to ANI To map any Calling  
number to ANI the idea is to be able to manipulate the received Calling  
Number when tandeming it into ANI. In a gateway situation the incoming  
trunk is the originator of the outgoing call. So the Calling Number is  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature description 449  
manipulated by assigning an ANI table entry to the incoming route. An ANI  
table entry is also assigned to route types whose connectivity does not give  
the possibility to receive a Calling Number. For these routes, the ANI table  
entry allows to build the outgoing ANI using only information pertaining  
to the incoming route.  
CIS Gateway Enhancement introduces a list of ANI entries applicable to  
incoming route considered for the gateway with CIS, or incoming and  
outgoing route. When package CIST is equipped, an ANI entry is attached  
to each applicable route. An entry for routes is configured with prompt:  
R_ENTRY.  
Some of the fields defined in ANI table entry were already existing in route  
configuration. ANI table entry fields that were already existing on route  
(RDNL, ANDN) are suppressed from the route. It must be noticed that  
prompt RDNL of Route Data Block is replaced by prompt DNLG in ANI  
table entry. A new prompt is added on Route data configuration to defined  
ANI table entry: ANIE. During upgrades, former Route Data Block prompt  
values are moved into an ANI table entry and this table entry is assigned  
to the route.  
Several routes can have the same tandeming information configured. The  
data has been moved from Route Data Block to Customer Data Block. In  
case no ANI table entry is configured, the default table entry (0) is used.  
ANI is built as follows:  
If outgoing route does not allow use of ANI table entry assigned on incoming  
route (ANIC prompt of outgoing CIS route is set to NO), Calling number is  
built as before. Notice that part of the received Calling Number (DNLG) and  
ANDN INC route are configured in ANI table entry of the incoming route.  
1. If outgoing route allows to use ANI table entry assigned on incoming  
route (ANIC is set to yes on CIS outgoing route), ANI is built as LEC inc  
route + ADDG inc route + (part of) received Calling Number or, when  
calling Number not available.  
With new implementation "part of received calling Number" indicates N  
least significant digits of received Calling Number, where N is the value  
configured against prompt DNLG in the ANI table entry associated to  
the incoming Route Data Block.  
2. LEC inc route + ADDG inc route + ANDN inc. route  
ANI has a predetermined size, configured on outgoing CIS route. It can  
happen that ANI built is smaller or longer than the ANI configured size. This  
is handled the same way as for ANI built when call originator is a set.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
450 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
When the ANIC of the outgoing route is set to yes, data from the ANI table  
entry configured for the incoming route is used, even if empty. Thus it is up  
to the craftsman to ensure that the ANI built using the ANI table entry is  
correct.  
Mapping CNI to ANI, ANI to CNI On MFC routes, prompt ANDN is  
currently defined. This prompt is removed and replaced by prompt ANIE  
which allows configuring the ANI table entry number.  
Both CNI and ANI contain a CAC field. The value and meaning of the field  
in both cases are not the same.  
On the gateway side of the R2MFC to CIS, the purpose of this mapping  
is to convert the 10 MFC CAC meanings into CIS CAC meanings, or to  
define a default CIS CAC value. For this, a conversion table is defined.  
Conversion tables are defined in LD 15. Up to 32 tables can be configured.  
A conversion table can be assigned on each MFC route. For this, the prompt  
CAC_CONV is added to the MFC incoming route configuration. If no CAC  
conversion table is configured on the MFC route, default table (number 0)  
will apply to the MFC incoming route.  
A CAC conversion entry contains the following data:  
•
CAC0 to CAC9: against CAC0 prompt is configured the CIS CAC value  
to be sent if an R2MFC CAC of value 0 has been received.  
•
DFLT: against this prompt is configured the CIS CAC value to be sent if  
the R2MFC CAC has not been received or is not in the correct range.  
When CNI has not been received at the time ANI is built, a default value  
must also be used. This default value is defined in the CAC Conversion  
table. On CIS trunks, 10 CAC values can be sent, from 0 to 9. Each one  
has a particular meaning (see "CAC conversion table entry 0 for R2MFC  
route" (page 451)).  
Default table is number zero and is configurable. After upgrade this table  
is defined in memory as shown in table below. The craftsman must be  
aware that modifying this default table after conversion will modify the CAC  
generated for all gateway cases where the incoming route had a CAC set  
to three (before upgrade).  
In this default table all fields are set to three, as it is the current CIS CAC  
default value. A value of three for CIS Category Code means the caller  
is residential, business or hotel subset with the access to local network  
and without access to automatic regional, toll, international network and to  
chargeable service numbers.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature description 451  
CAC conversion table entry 0 for R2MFC route  
MFC CAC  
CAC0  
CAC1  
....  
CIS CAC  
CIS CAC description  
3
3
3
3
3
3
CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT0  
CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT1  
CAC8  
CAC9  
Default  
CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT8  
CIS value corresponding to MFC CAC DGT9  
CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been  
received, or MFC CAC received is not in the MFC  
CAC list of this table  
MFC routes were given a CAC prompt on which was configured the CAC  
value of incoming route when tandeming to CIS. This data has no more  
utility on incoming MFC route as a CAC conversion table is configured  
against prompt CAC_CONV. Thus, CAC prompt is removed from MFC  
incoming routes. On upgrade, former CAC prompt value is moved into a  
CAC conversion table, and this table is assigned to the route.  
In the gateway side CIS to R2MFC, the purpose of this mapping is to  
convert the 10 CIS CAC meanings into R2MFC CAC value. For this, a  
conversion table is defined.  
Prior to upgrading, the CAC sent was defined in the R2MFC table (LD 94).  
In this R2MFC table, it is the same value for all non-tie incoming trunks. In  
LD 15, for CAC conversion table, the same range (1-10) and default value  
(6) than in LD 94 are used. The value 0 is also allowed, it means that the  
value defined in R2MFC table for incoming non-Tie trunk has to be used.  
CAC conversion tables must be defined by the craftsperson in LD 15. Up  
to 32 tables can be configured. Then a configured conversion table entry  
can be assigned on each incoming DTI2 CIS route. For this, new prompt  
CAC_CONV is added to the CIS incoming route configuration. If no CAC  
conversion table is configured on the CIS route, the default table entry  
number 0 will apply on CIS incoming routes.  
Default table entry is number 0 and is configurable. During upgrades, this  
table is defined in memory as shown in "CAC Conversion table entry 0 for  
CIS incoming DTI2 route" (page 452). As all values of default tables are set  
to 0, the R2MFC table is used until default table number 0 is configured.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
452 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
CAC Conversion table entry 0 for CIS incoming DTI2 route  
CIS CAC  
MFC CAC  
Description and CIS CAC meaning  
0
CAC0  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 0  
"Reserved"  
0
CAC1  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 1  
"Residential or business subset with the access  
to automatic regional, toll and international  
network"  
0
0
0
CAC2  
CAC3  
CAC4  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 2  
"Hotel subset with the access to automatic  
regional, toll international network"  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 3  
"Residential, business or Hotel subset with the  
access to local network only"  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 4  
"Business subset with the access to regional,  
toll, international network and to special service  
numbers; preferential access to regional and  
toll network"  
0
0
CAC5  
CAC6  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 5  
"Business subset of telecommunications  
administration with the access to automatic  
regional, toll, international network and to  
special service numbers free of charge"  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 6  
"Toll Coin box and public call paystation with the  
access to automatic regional and toll network  
also the general purpose coin box with the  
access to local and toll network (paying in cash)  
and the coin box with access to special services  
only"  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 453  
CIS CAC  
MFC CAC  
Description and CIS CAC meaning  
0
CAC7  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 7  
"Business or residential subset with automatic  
access to regional, toll and international network  
plus to chargeable service numbers"  
0
CAC8  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 8  
"Business subset for data, facsimile and  
electronic mail with automatic access to  
regional, toll and international network."  
0
0
CAC9  
DFLT  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 9  
"Local call coin box"  
MFC value corresponding to CIS CAC 0  
"Reserved"  
Mapping CLID to ANI and OLI to ANI The feature implements mapping  
of CLID on Euro-ISDN and enhances it on other ISDN interfaces.  
The ANIE prompt in LD 16 configures an ANI table entry for the trunk route.  
Building ANI for interfaces without calling number The title of this  
subsection refers to routes whose connectivity does not give the possibility  
to receive a calling number (DTI2, Analog,...).  
This case is similar to the situation where an Incoming route with calling  
number does not receive the calling number.  
Mapping ANI to ANI in gateway CIS DTI2 to CIS The feature CIS ANI  
Reception is developed concurrently to this one for incoming CIS DTI2  
routes (see CIS ANI Reception in this document). For the gateway DTI2  
CIS to CIS, on the outgoing CIS route the ANI is built using the ANI received  
on incoming route. The received ANI can be manipulated using ANI table  
entry configured on incoming CIS route.  
The CAC used on outgoing route is the one received in incoming ANI. This  
CAC is copied into outgoing ANI without any modifications. If no ANI has  
been received on incoming CIS route. The CAC used is the one configured  
against CAC_CIS prompt on incoming CIS route.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
454 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Examples of Gateways Enhancements  
The following pages contain examples of how to implement gateways  
enhancements.  
Table 5  
CAC conversion table, entry 1 content  
MFC CAC  
CAC0  
CAC1  
CAC2  
CAC3  
CAC4  
CAC5  
CAC6  
CAC7  
CAC8  
CAC9  
Default  
CIS CAC  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
3
Example 1 - Gateway call through node 3 to CO C In this example,  
Received CNI on route 320 is 1234, with CAC translated to DGT5. Outgoing  
ANI is 555 1 7476 4.  
Table 6  
Example 1 - Detail of built CAC  
LEC Outgoing  
Additional Digit  
ANI DN Incoming Category Code  
7476  
555  
1
4
Example 2 - Gateway call through node 2 to CO B In this example,  
received CNI on route 230 is 647678, with CAC translated to DGT 8.  
Outgoing ANI is 555 123 7678 1.  
Table 7  
Example 2 - Detail of built CAC  
LEC Incoming  
Additional digit  
DNLG*CNI  
Category Code  
555  
123  
7678  
1
Example 3 - Gateway call through node 1 to CO A In this example,  
received CLID on route 120 is 25. Outgoing ANI is 444 123456123 25 5.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating parameters 455  
Table 8  
Example 3 - Detail of built CAC  
LEC Incoming  
Additional digit  
123456123  
DNLG*CLID  
Category Code  
5
444  
25  
Operating parameters  
This section lists the operating parameters for CIS ANI Digits Manipulation  
and CIS Gateways Enhancements.  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation operating parameters  
The data in ANI is built only once at the beginning of the call. The data is not  
changed or re-downloaded for any kind of operation during a call. Therefore,  
if the call goes through any type of modification such as a transfer or call  
forward for instance, the ANI information sent when requested is of the  
original originator of the call.  
This feature does not allow the user to associate ANI entry to attendant  
consoles. When an outgoing call is originated by an attendant, the ANI  
message is built using the old mechanism.  
The ANI size flexibility is not supported by the analog trunks (E3W, X3W).  
For these type of trunks, the prompt ANSZ (LD 16) must be answered with  
seven. CIS standards recommend setting ANSZ to seven for CIS DTI2  
ANSZ prompt.  
CIS Gateways Enhancements operating parameters  
ANI is downloaded to the card only once and immediately after trunk  
seizure. Thus calling number can be tandemed into ANI only if received  
before trunk is seized. That means that the calling number must be received  
at the same time that the called number or before enough digits of the  
called number are received to seize the CIS trunk. In case of gateway ISDN  
interface/CIS calling number (CLID) is always received before or at the  
same time as the called number. In case of gateway R2MFC/CIS calling  
number (CNI) can be received after trunk has been seized. Then incoming  
MFC route must be configured to request CNI before enough digits of called  
number are received to seize CIS trunk.  
There is no cross checking of the ANI R_ENTRY associated with the route  
against the ANI R_ENTRY in the customer Data Block. If an ANI R_ENTRY  
is removed from the ANI table and the ANI R_ENTRY is stilled assigned to  
a route, ANI in this case is built using the default R_ENTRY, R_ENTRY  
number 0 and ERR9044 message is issued at call processing time.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
456 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
While default R_ENTRY number 0 has not been configured, all its fields are  
empty except ADDG whose default value is 8. Thus the ANI built using this  
table is a repetition of 8. It is strongly recommended to configure this default  
table as soon as ANIC prompt is set to yes on an outgoing CIS route.  
It is possible to associate an undefined ANI R_ENTRY to a route. Then,  
when constructing ANI if R_ENTRY is still undefined, default R_ENTRY  
number zero is used and ERR9044 message is issued at call processing  
time.  
Due to the independence between ANI table and outgoing CIS route, it is  
possible to define a LEC, or ANDN greater than ANI size configured on  
outgoing route. Then most significant digits is truncated. The way it is done  
is similar in case of call originated from a set or a trunk.  
There is no cross checking of the CAC Conversion table entries associated  
with a CIS or R2MFC route against the CAC Conversion table in the  
customer Data Block. If a CAC Conversion table entry is removed from the  
CAC Conversion table and this entry is still assigned to a route, CAC in this  
case is built using the default CAC Conversion table entry, CIS_ENT number  
0 for an incoming CIS route and MFC_ENT number 0 for an incoming MFC  
route. Additionally ERR9051 message is issued at call processing time.  
It is possible to associate an undefined CIS_ENT or MFC_ENT to a route.  
Then, when constructing CAC if CIS_ENT or MFC_ENT is still undefined,  
default CIS_ENT or MFC_ENT (number 0) is used and ERR9051 message  
is issued at call processing time.  
Feature interactions  
This section identifies feature interactions for CIS ANI Digits Manipulation  
and Gateways Enhancements.  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature interactions  
CIS Three Wire Analog Trunk  
CIS ANI digits manipulation feature modifies Automatic Number  
Identification.  
CIS Digital Trunk Interface  
CIS ANI digits manipulation feature modifies Automatic Number  
Identification.  
CIS MF Shuttle  
CIS ANI digits manipulation feature modifies Automatic Number  
Identification.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature packaging 457  
CIS Gateways Enhancements  
Some changes introduced in CIS ANI digits manipulation feature will impact  
on CIS Gateways Enhancements feature. These changes are listed below:  
•
•
The size of the ANI is configurable on a per outgoing CIS route basis.  
Valid responses for LEC, ADDG and ANDN programmed on the  
outgoing CIS route are modified.  
•
•
The additional digit(s) is/are inserted between LEC and ANI DN when  
necessary to complete the ANI DN.  
Prompt ANIC (ANI Composing) added in LD 16 is also used in CIS  
Gateways Enhancements.  
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature interactions  
CIS Three Wire Trunk Analog  
This development interacts with the feature CIS Three Wire Trunk Analog by  
changing how ANI is built in case of gateway from ISDN/DPNSS/R2MFC to  
CIS Analog.  
CIS Digital Trunk Interface  
The CIS Gateways Enhancements feature interacts with CIS Digital  
Trunk Interface by changing how ANI is built in case of gateway from  
ISDN/DPNSS/R2MFC to CIS Digital.  
CIS ANI Digits manipulation interaction  
These interactions are already described in "CIS ANI Digits Manipulation  
feature interactions" (page 456).  
Feature packaging  
No new packages are introduced for these features.  
The existing Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks (CIST) package  
221 is required for these features to be operable.  
CIS Multi Frequency Shuttle package is required if MF Shuttle signaling is  
to be used but is not mandatory for the CIS ANI digits manipulation and  
Gateways Enhancements functions.  
The CIS DTI2 feature (including MF Shuttle) requires:  
•
•
•
•
Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125  
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131  
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129  
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160  
CIS Analog Three Wire Trunks feature requires:  
•
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
458 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
•
•
•
•
•
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) package 160  
Flexible Tones and Cadences (FTC) package 125  
Trunk Fail Monitor (TFM) package 182  
IPE package (XPE) package 203 (required for outgoing X3W packs)  
Fast Tone and Digit Switch (FAST_TDS) package 87 (required for  
outgoing E3W package)  
Feature implementation  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature  
This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the  
CIS ANI Digits Manipulation feature. The "CIS Gateways Enhancements  
feature implementation" (page 466) section begins on "CIS Gateways  
Enhancements feature implementation" (page 466).  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure ANI Table for telephones" (page 459)  
Configure ANI Table for telephones.  
2. "LD 16 - Create or modify outgoing CIS route data block." (page 460)  
Create or modify outgoing CIS route data block.  
3. "LD 10 - Define ANI entry for analog (500/2500) sets." (page 462)  
Define ANI entry for analog (500/2500) sets.  
4. "LD 10 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for analog  
500/2500 sets." (page 463)  
Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for analog 500/2500 sets.  
5. "LD 11 - Configure ANI entry for Meridian 1 proprietary sets." (page 463)  
Configure ANI entry for Meridian 1 proprietary sets.  
6. "LD 11 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for digital sets."  
(page 464)  
Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for digital sets.  
7. "LD 27 - Configure ANI entry for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines." (page  
465)  
Configure ANI entry for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines.  
8. "LD 27 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for BRI sets."  
(page 466)  
Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for BRI sets.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature implementation 459  
9. "LD 15 - Configure the ANI route table and CAC conversion table."  
(page 466)  
Configure the ANI route table and CAC conversion table.  
10. "LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry in the Route Data Block for  
incoming R2MFC route." (page 469)  
Configure the ANI table entry in the Route Data Block for incoming  
R2MFC route.  
11. "LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for  
Incoming CIS DTI2 route." (page 469)  
Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming  
CIS DTI2 route.  
12. "LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN,  
incoming CIS analog, incoming" (page 470)  
Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN, incoming  
CIS analog, incoming DTI2 and DPNSS).  
13. "LD 88 - Configure the CAC for CIS signaling." (page 471)  
Configure the CAC for CIS signaling.  
LD 15 - Configure ANI Table for telephones  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data  
TYPE:  
...  
ANI  
Automatic Number Identification  
...  
...  
xx...xx  
YES (NO)  
ANLD  
CIS_ANI  
ANI listed directory number (for North American trunk)  
CIS ANI option.  
If CIS_ANI=YES, the next sub-prompts is prompted, allowing the  
configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message composing.  
If CIS_ANI=NO, the following sequence of subprompts is  
skipped.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
460 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
- S_SIZE  
(0)-2000  
Maximum number of ANI entries for sets that can be configured.  
If S_SIZE=0, next prompts are skipped.  
If <CR> is entered when REQ=NEW, it defaults to 0 and next  
prompts are skipped.  
The S_SIZE can’t be decreased if the entries between the old  
size and the new one are not empty.  
aa  
- S_ENTRY  
ANI entry for a set to be created or modified.  
Xaa  
ANI entry for a set to be deleted.  
Xaa Xbb  
ANI entries (aa-bb) for a set to be deleted.  
Prompted only if S_SIZE is greater than 0.  
ANI entries must be between 1 and S_SIZE.  
If REQ=NEW, this prompt and its subprompts are given only  
once. If REQ=CHG, they are repeated until S_ENTRY is  
answered with <CR>.  
- - DNLG  
- - LEC  
0-(4)-15  
Directory Number Length.  
Local Exchange Carrier.  
0-99...99  
X
Delete LEC.  
- - ADDG  
- - ANDN  
0-(8)-99...99  
0-99...99  
Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits long.  
Used as ANI DN if DN Length = 0.  
X
Delete ANDN.  
...  
...  
...  
LD 16 - Create or modify outgoing CIS route data block.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
CHG  
RDB  
TYPE  
Route Data Block  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature implementation 461  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
TKTP  
DID  
Direct Inward Dial.  
COT  
Central Office Trunk.  
Outgoing Route.  
...  
ICOG  
...  
OGT  
...  
CCBA  
CISR  
- ANSZ  
(NO) YES  
YES (NO)  
(7)-15  
Deny/Allow collect call blocking.  
CIS Route  
ANI information size. Response is length of LEC+ANI DN.  
For analog routes, the only valid response is seven (7).  
- ANIC  
(NO) YES  
ANI Composing  
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.  
If ANIC=NO, old ANI composing is used: if the originator of the  
call is a set, ANI message will consist of the CAC of the originator  
+ the LEC of the outgoing route + the DN of the originator or  
the ANDN of the outgoing CIS route, depending on the class of  
service (DNAA/DNAD) of the set. If the originator of the call is  
an incoming route, the components of the ANI message are  
retrieved from default ANI entries and/or from the data block of  
the outgoing CIS route ("CIS Gateways Enhancements feature  
implementation" (page 466))  
If the outgoing CIS route requires new ANI composing to be  
used (prompt ANIC=YES), the following is done:  
If no entry is associated to the calling set (ANIE=0), then old  
ANI composing is used.  
If an ANI entry is associated to the calling set (ANIE has a  
non-zero value), but the associated ANI entry is not configured,  
then old ANI composing is used.  
If an ANI entry is associated to the calling set (ANIE has a  
non-zero value), and the associated ANI entry is configured,  
then ANI table is used for building the ANI message: none of  
the components of the ANI message is retrieved from the data  
block of the outgoing CIS route.  
0-99...99  
- LEC  
Local Exchange Code of the route. It can be from 0 digit long up  
to ANSZ digit long. Prompted for outgoing CIS route. Used for  
building ANI message if ANIC is NO or if ANIC=YES but the ANI  
entry associated with the originator of the call is not configured.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
462 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Prompt  
Response  
X
Description  
Remove LEC.  
- ADDG  
0-(8)-99...99  
Additional digits used in ANI message if ANIC is NO or if  
ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the originator of  
the call is not configured.  
It is used to complete ANI DN if LEC+ANI DN consists of less  
than ANSZ digits.  
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.  
It can be from 1 digit long up to ANSZ digit long.  
0-99...99  
- ANDN  
Default ANI DN. It can be from 0 digit long up to ANSZ digit long.  
Prompted for outgoing CIS route.  
Used for building ANI message if ANIC=NO and DN of set is not  
allowed to be sent (CLS DNAD).  
Also used if ANIC=YES but the ANI entry associated with the  
originator of the call is not configured, and DN of set is not  
allowed to be sent (CLS DNAD).  
X
Remove ANDN.  
LD 10 - Define ANI entry for analog (500/2500) sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
Add new data.  
CHG  
500  
Change existing data.  
500 set.  
TYPE:  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
...  
...  
xxxx ccc  
(NO) YES  
aaaa  
aaaa  
DN  
Directory Number, CLID entry.  
Deny/Allow Multi Appearance Redirection Prime.  
Calling Party Name Display.  
Voice Mailbox.  
- MARP  
- CPND  
- VMB  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature implementation 463  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
- ANIE  
(0)-N  
ANI Entry: it is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.  
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the set. The old  
mechanism is used for building the ANI message.  
If ANIE is of 1-N:  
•
If ANIC = YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call  
takes place, then the components of the ANI message are  
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if  
configured.  
•
If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC = NO for  
the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the  
old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.  
...  
...  
...  
LD 10 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for analog 500/2500 sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
500  
TYPE:  
TN  
Type of data block for analog (500/2500) set.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
...  
...  
a..a  
0-(3)-9  
(0)-10  
SFLT  
Secretarial Filtering.  
CAC_CIS  
CAC_MFC  
CIS ANI Category Code.  
MFC CNI Category Code.  
LD 11 - Configure ANI entry for Meridian 1 proprietary sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
Add new data.  
CHG  
a...a  
Change existing data.  
TYPE:  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
464 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system, where l = loop,  
s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
...  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
...  
KEY  
xx AAA yyyy...  
ccc  
xx = key number.  
AAA = Key Function.  
yyyy = DN or other data related to key function.  
ccc = CLID entry.  
- MARP  
- CPND  
- VMB  
(NO) YES  
aaaa  
Deny/Allow Multi Appearance Redirection Prime.  
Calling Party Name Display.  
Voice Mailbox.  
aaaa  
- ANIE  
(0)-N  
ANI Entry:  
It is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.  
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key. The old  
mechanism is used for building the ANI message.  
If ANIE is of 1-N:.  
•
•
If ANIC=YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call  
takes place, then the components of the ANI message are  
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if  
configured.  
If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC=NO for  
the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the  
old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.  
LD 11 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for digital sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature implementation 465  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
Description  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
...  
...  
CAC_CIS  
CAC_MFC  
0-(3)-9  
(0)-10  
CIS ANI Category Code.  
MFC CNI Category Code.  
LD 27 - Configure ANI entry for Basic Rate Interface (BRI) lines.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
Add new data.  
CHG  
TSP  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
Administer Terminal Service Profile on Digital Subscriber Loop.  
...  
...  
xxxx  
xxxx ccc  
SPID  
DN  
Service Profile ID.  
Directory Number (DN) and Calling Line  
Identification (CLID) entry.  
xxxx = DN  
ccc = CLID  
aaaa  
- CT  
Call Types for DN  
aaaa = VCE or DTA.  
- MCAL  
- CLIP  
1-(4)-8  
Maximum Calls allowed per DN  
(YES) NO  
Allow/Deny Calling Line Identification Presentation for incoming  
calls.  
- PRES  
- ANIE  
(YES) NO  
(0)-N  
Allow/Deny Presentation of CLID to far end on outgoing calls.  
ANI entry. It is of (0)-N where N=S_SIZE in customer data block.  
If ANIE=0, no entry is associated with the DN key. The old  
mechanism is used for building the ANI message.  
If ANIE is 1-N:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
466 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
•
•
If ANIC=YES for the outgoing CIS route where the call  
takes place, then the components of the ANI message are  
retrieved from the ANI entry in Customer Data Block, if  
configured.  
If the given ANI Entry is not configured, or if ANIC=NO for  
the outgoing CIS route where the call takes place, then the  
old mechanism is used for building the ANI message.  
LD 27 - Configure the CAC for CIS and MFC signaling for BRI sets.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
DSL  
DSL  
Digital Subscriber Loop.  
Digital Subscriber Loop  
For Large Systems  
For Small Systems  
l s c dsl  
c u dsl  
...  
...  
CAC_CIS  
CAC_MFC  
0-(3)-9  
(0)-10  
CIS ANI category code.  
MFC CNI category code.  
CIS Gateways Enhancements feature implementation  
This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the CIS  
Gateways Enhancements feature.  
Feature implementation for R2MFC route  
In case of gateway R2MFC/CIS it must be noticed that to be tandemed CNI  
must be received on R2MFC route before outgoing CIS trunk is seized. This  
is possible using an up-front CNI request. Up-front CNI request is defined  
on R2MFC route by giving a non zero value to prompt NCNI. Configure the  
ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming CIS DTI2 route  
using LD 16.  
LD 15 - Configure the ANI route table and CAC conversion table.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
REQ = NEW, default table R_SIZE (0) is created.  
REQ = NEW, default table CACC(0) is created.  
REQ = NEW, R_SIZE defaults to number of ANI entries.  
for incoming route created during conversion.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature implementation 467  
Prompt  
TYPE:  
....  
Response  
ANI  
Description  
Automatic Number Identification  
....  
...  
xx...x  
ANLD  
ANI Listed Directory Number. Only included here for clarification  
if this prompt appears. Only applies to North American ANI.  
CIS_ANI  
...  
(NO) YES  
...  
Deny/Allow configuration of ANI entries for CIS ANI message.  
- R_ SIZE  
(1)-512  
Maximum number of ANI entries that can be configured for  
incoming routes.  
This maximum number is limited to 512 as it is the maximum  
number of routes. Entries must be empty to decrease R_SIZE.  
aa  
- R_ENTRY  
ANI entry for an incoming route to be created or modified.  
Xaa  
ANI entry for an incoming route to be deleted.  
Xaa Xbb  
<CR>  
ANI entries for an incoming route between aa and bb to be  
deleted.  
Exit.  
R_ENTRY is repeated until <CR> is entered. ANI entries must  
be between 0 and (R_SIZE-1). For REQ=NEW, only default  
table 0 is configurable. An R_ENTRY can be deleted even if still  
assigned on an incoming route.  
- - DNLG  
- - LEC  
0-(4)-15  
0-99..99  
DN Length  
Number of digits of the Calling Line ID (CLID), Originating Line  
Identifier (OLI), Calling Number Identification (CNI) to use in the  
ANI message, starting with the less significant digits.  
Local Exchange Code, 1 to 15 digits.  
X
Remove LEC.  
- - ADDG  
- - ANDN  
0-(8)-99...99  
Additional digits, 1 to 15 digits. Used to complete ANI Directory  
Number (ANDN) if Local Exchange Carrier (LEC)+ANDN is less  
than ANSZ digits defined in LD 16.  
0-99...99  
Used as ANI DN if calling number is not available or DNLG=0.  
Up to 15 digits may be entered.  
X
Remove ANDN.  
CACC  
(NO) YES  
Deny/Allow Calling Party Category Code (CAC) Conversion  
table option.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
468 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
-MFC_ENT  
<CR>  
CAC conversion table to convert MFC CAC into CIS CAC  
for use on R2MFC routes.  
aa  
CAC conversion table entry to be created or modified.  
CAC conversion table entry to be deleted.  
CAC conversion table entries between aa and bb to be  
Xaa  
Xaa Xbb  
deleted.  
<CR>  
Exit MFC CAC conversion table, gives CIS_ENT prompt.  
This prompt is repeated until <CR> is entered.  
It is prompted if CACC=YES.  
CAC conversion table entries must be between 0 and 31.  
For REQ=NEW, only default table 0 is configurable.  
An ENTRY can be deleted even if still assigned on an incoming  
route.  
-- CAC0  
-- CAC1  
-- CAC2  
-- CAC3  
-- CAC4  
-- CAC5  
-- CAC6  
-- CAC7  
-- CAC8  
-- CAC9  
-- DFLT  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
0-(3)-9  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT0  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT1  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT2  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT3  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT4  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT5  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT6  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT7  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT8  
CIS value corresponding to MFC DGT9  
CIS value used when MFC CAC has not been received, or MFC  
CAC received is not in the MFC CAC list of this table  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature implementation 469  
LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry in the Route Data Block for incoming R2MFC route.  
Prompt  
REQ  
TYPE  
...  
Response  
Description  
NEW  
RDB  
...  
Add new data.  
Route Data Block.  
...  
MFC  
- MFCI  
- MFCO  
...  
YES  
x
Configure Multifrequency Compelled signaling.  
MFC Incoming Table.  
MFC Outgoing Table.  
x
...  
ICOG  
IAO  
Incoming and Outgoing.  
Incoming.  
INC  
1
NCNI  
ANIE  
Request CNI after the defined number of digits are  
received. CNI is requested during incoming MFC call after  
the first digit of dialed number has been received.  
(0)-x  
ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt  
R_ENTRY, OVL 15).  
x = R_SIZE-1.  
R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be  
configured. (R-SIZE is defined in LD 15).  
CAC_CONV  
(0)-31  
CAC conversion table number for CIS Gateway. Configured  
against MFC_ENT in LD 15.  
Prompted only for non "outgoing only" R2MFC route.  
LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry and CAC conversion table for Incoming CIS DTI2 route.  
Prompt  
REQ  
TYPE  
...  
Response  
NEW  
RDB  
...  
Description  
Add new data.  
Route data block  
...  
DGTP  
...  
DTI2  
...  
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface.  
ICOG  
...  
INC  
Incoming route.  
...  
...  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
470 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
ANIE  
(0)-x  
ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt  
R_ENTRY, OVL 15).  
x = R_SIZE-1.  
R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be  
configured. (R-SIZE is defined in OVL 15).  
Default table entry is number 0.  
CISR  
YES  
...  
CIS Route  
...  
...  
- CAC_CONV  
(0)-31  
CAC conversion table number for CIS-to-R2MFC gateway,  
configured against CIS_ENT in CDB.  
Prompted only for incoming CIS DTI2 route.  
CIS ANI Category Code  
CAC_CIS  
0-(3)-9  
LD 16 - Configure the ANI table entry for all other route types (ISDN, incoming CIS analog,  
incoming DTI2 and DPNSS).  
Prompt  
REQ  
TYPE  
...  
Response  
NEW  
RDB  
...  
Description  
Add new data.  
Route Data Block.  
ISDN  
...  
YES  
...  
Enable ISDN  
...  
ICOG  
IAO  
Incoming and outgoing.  
ICT  
...  
Incoming.  
...  
ANIE  
(0)-x  
ANI table Entry for Route (configured under prompt R_ENTRY,  
LD 15).  
x= R_SIZE-1.  
R_Size is the maximum table entry number that can be  
configured.  
...  
...  
...  
CAC_CIS  
0-(3)-9  
CIS ANI Category Code  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 471  
LD 88 - Configure the CAC for CIS signaling.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
AUB  
...  
Authcode Data Block  
...  
CLAS  
...  
(0)-115  
...  
Classcode value assigned to authcode (NAUT).  
...  
NCOS  
CAC_CIS  
(0)-99  
0-(3)-9  
Network Class of Service group number.  
CIS ANI category code.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
472 CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
473  
CIS ANI Reception  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 473)  
"Operating parameters" (page 480)  
"Feature interactions" (page 480)  
"Feature packaging" (page 480)  
"Feature implementation" (page 481)  
"Feature operation" (page 485)  
Feature description  
The Commonwealth of Independent States (CIS) Automatic Number  
Identification (ANI) Reception feature allows the system to receive the  
Automatic Number Information from the CIS Central Office (CO) calling  
party on incoming local calls. The CIS Public Telephone Network does not  
provide ANI information on the incoming toll calls.  
The CIS ANI Reception feature works on the CIS Digital Trunk Interface  
(DTI) feature. It requires CIS DTI2 card, vintage NTCG01AC (Large  
Systems) or NTCG02AC (Small Systems).  
The ANI digits received from the CIS CO are used by the system as the  
R2MFC Calling Number Identification (CNI) digits. A list of uses for the  
ANI digits is found on page 1104. The ANI digits are also displayed on the  
display of the proprietary set or on the attendant console display.  
ANI Reception is performed in one of two ways:  
•
ANI request is issued automatically by the incoming local CIS DTI2  
trunk during the call setup.  
•
ANI request is issued by the incoming local CIS DTI2 trunk upon a  
manually solicited request from the proprietary set with display or from  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
474 CIS ANI Reception  
the attendant console. The request to receive the ANI information is  
invoked by pressing a calling number display key on the attendant  
console source key or on the proprietary set by pressing the display key  
followed by the trace key. Press trace key for active call for Proprietary  
sets and attendant consoles. The trace key can be used instead of the  
source key for Malicious Call Trace (MCT) for sets and consoles. An ANI  
request can also be made by 500/2500 sets by entering the Flexible  
Feature Code (FFC) assigned for MTRC in LD 57.  
Automatic ANI request  
The automatic ANI request is sent by the CDTI2 card to the CIS CO before  
the incoming local call is answered. If the incoming trunk operates in the  
decadic, or Dial Pulse (DP) mode, the ANI request is sent to the CIS CO  
after all dialed digits have been collected from the CIS CO (see Figure 6  
"Automatic ANI request for incoming local call (decadic dial pulse mode)"  
(page 476)). If the trunk operates in the MF Shuttle mode, the ANI request  
is sent after the end of the MF Shuttle dialing (see Figure 7 "Automatic  
ANI request for the MF shuttle call" (page 477) on Figure 7 "Automatic ANI  
request for the MF shuttle call" (page 477)). The ANI digits are uploaded to  
the system.  
The Automatic ANI request option may be used only in conjunction with the  
DN Size Feature. The DN Size Flexible (using the SSL tables) or Fixed  
should be defined for the incoming CIS DTI2 DID route before setting the  
automatic ANI option to "Yes".  
The ANI digits are used in the following way:  
•
They are tandemed as the Calling Line Identification (CLID) Originating  
Line Identifier on DPNSS (OLI) to the (ISDN) Integrated Services Digital  
Network/Digital Private Network Signalling System (DPNSS) gateways,  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) gateways  
•
•
They are mapped into the Multifrequency Compelled Signaling  
complying with CCITT R2 specification (R2MFC) Calling Number  
Identification R2MFC (CNI)  
They are displayed on the display of the proprietary sets and on the  
attendant consoles  
•
•
They are stored in the Call Detail Recorder  
They are sent through the Meridian Link and the ICCM link using the  
fields dedicated for the R2MFC CNI digits  
The translation of the dialed number which is received from the CIS CO  
is postponed until the CDTI2 card informs the system that the ANI digits  
have been received. If the ANI reception report does not arrive from the  
card, the call is treated after the ANI timer expires. The treatment for  
the call that failed to provide the automatic ANI is configured on the  
route data block level.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature description 475  
Solicited ANI request  
The solicited ANI request is issued upon a manual request from the Meridian  
1 proprietary set using the display key or from the attendant console using  
the trace key. The received ANI information is displayed on the display of  
the proprietary set or attendant console and it is also used for the CDR, call  
trace. If the request is performed using the Trace key, the MCT record is  
printed also on the MCT TTY. The system sends the ANI request message  
to the CDTI2 card when a user presses the DN key after the set has entered  
display mode using the Digit Display key or after the Trace key was pressed.  
The CDTI2 card performs the ANI interaction and uploads the received ANI  
to the system (see Figure 8 "Manually solicited ANI request" (page 478)).  
The ANI is stored in the unprotected trunk data block. The solicited ANI  
request may be performed an unlimited number of times during a single  
call. Each time, the new ANI replaces the previously received ANI (if there  
is one).  
When solicited ANI request is initiated using the Trace key, the Malicious  
Call Trace feature functionality remains unchanged, the ANI request is  
sent in addition to the normal MCT activities. The ANI information, when  
received from the card, is also printed on the MCT TTY as MCT ticket.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
476 CIS ANI Reception  
Figure 6  
Automatic ANI request for incoming local call (decadic dial pulse mode)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 477  
Figure 7  
Automatic ANI request for the MF shuttle call  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
478 CIS ANI Reception  
Figure 8  
Manually solicited ANI request  
ANI Gateways  
The ANI digits which are received from the CIS CO party as a response to  
the automatic ANI request are propagated to the system terminating party if  
it is capable of receiving the CNI digits.  
The ANI digits are propagated to the following terminating types:  
•
R2MFC trunks - the ANI to R2MFC CNI mapping is performed in  
the following way: all the ANI digits except for the ANI Calling Party  
Category Code (CAC) are used for the CNI composition, the ANI CAC is  
converted to the Multifrequency Compelled (MFC) CNI CAC according  
to the CAC conversion tables.  
•
ISDN trunks - Meridian Customer Defined Integrated Services Digital  
Network (MCDN), EuroISDN: European Integrated Services Digital  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature description 479  
Network (EURO), Q Signaling (QSIG), DPNSS - the ANI to CLID/OLI  
mapping is based on the R2MFC CNI to CLID mapping.  
•
CIS trunks - the ANI to ANI mapping is implemented in the framework  
of the CIS ANI Digits Manipulation and Gateways Enhancements  
feature described in this document. The ANI information that is  
received from the incoming CIS DTI2 trunks is used by the CIS  
Gateways Enhancements feature to compose the ANI information to be  
downloaded to the outgoing CIS trunks.  
ANI Digits Display  
The ANI digits are displayed on the display of the proprietary set or of the  
attendant console. The ANI digits are displayed starting from the left side of  
the display. The CAC display option is configured on the route data block  
level and it may be set to one of the following options (see Figure 9 "ANI  
Display options" (page 479)):  
•
•
•
display CAC before the ANI number  
display CAC after the ANI number  
do not display CAC  
The CAC digit is separated from the ANI number by the minus sign. When  
displaying ANI, there are several options available for CAC display. If ANI  
request is repeated several times during a single call, each time new ANI  
digits overwrite old ANI digits on the display. If the DN key that requested  
the ANI information is placed on hold when the ANI digits arrive from the  
CDTI2 card, the ANI digits are not displayed. In this case, when the call is  
returned from hold, the ANI digits are displayed.  
Figure 9  
ANI Display options  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
480 CIS ANI Reception  
ANI Digits in CDR  
The ANI digits are placed in the CDR at the place intended for the R2MFC  
CNI digits. The CAC may be stored in the CDR together with the ANI digits.  
The presentation of the CAC in the CDR is configured at the route data  
block level as shown in the dash list below. The CAC may be either:  
•
•
•
placed before the ANI digits  
placed after the ANI digits  
not placed in the CDR  
The CDR records containing ANI are generated only if the CDR options are  
configured in the customer data block (LD 15) as described in the CDR  
technical document.  
The feature does not change the CDR output formats. The ANI digits are  
stored in the CDR in the same way as the R2MFC CNI digits.  
Operating parameters  
This feature requires the CIS DTI2 card NTCG01 vintage AC for Large  
Systems, and the CIS DTI2 card NTCG02 vintage AC for Small Systems.  
Feature interactions  
CIS Digital Trunk Interface and CIS Multifrequency Shuttle (MFS)  
The feature is based on the CIS DTI2 interface features. The feature  
enhances the capabilities of CIS DTI2 but does not change previous  
functionality.  
Malicous Call Trace (MCT)  
The feature allows MCT to receive ANI digits on incoming local CIS DTI2  
calls. There is no MCT feature that can be activated from the system on the  
CIS CO. When the ANI digits are received from the CO, they are printed  
on the MCT TTY and displayed on the display of the set or console that  
activated the MCT feature.  
Feature packaging  
No new package is introduced for this feature. The following packages  
are required:  
•
•
•
•
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129  
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131  
Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks (CIST) package 221  
Optional - Malicous Call Trace (MCT) package 107  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 481  
Feature implementation  
This section contains the overlay procedures required to configure the ANI  
Reception feature.  
If Malicious Call Trace is used, turn to the Software Features Guide for  
detailed MCT implementation instructions.  
•
LD 73 - The response MFA - Multifrequency Advanced has been added  
to the CISFW prompt to support the ANI Reception and the Firmware  
Dial Tone Detection features on the NTCK01AC and NTCK02AC cards.  
When operating in the CIS mode, the NTCG01AA/02AA cards should be  
configured as DP, and the NTCG01AB/02AB cards should be configured  
as MFS.  
•
•
LD 14 - The CNA may be defined for the incoming DID DTI2 trunk if it  
is configured on the CDTI2 loop with the CIS Firmware version set to  
MultiFrequency Advanced in LD 73.  
LD 16 - Set the prompt CISR to YES to allow access to the CIS Route  
prompts.  
The following options are added for the CIS DTI2 routes:  
•
The Automatic ANI (AANI) option determines if the automatic ANI  
request should be sent to the CIS CO party at the end of dialing on  
incoming local calls. If the ANI information is required for gateway calls  
this option should be set to YES.  
•
The ANI Failure Treatment (ANFT) option defines the treatment for  
incoming calls which failed to provide ANI (see Note). The possible  
options are:  
— to provide the call to the required destination using the alternative  
ANI to indicate the ANI Reception failure  
— to drop the call  
— to transfer the call to the predefined intercept DN using the  
Alternative ANI to indicate the ANI Reception failure  
•
•
The Intercept DN (ITDN) prompt defines the intercept DN if the intercept  
treatment option is selected.  
The Alternative ANI is composed from the access code of the incoming  
CIS DTI2 DID route and the number of the incoming trunk within the  
route.  
The ANI TimeOut (ATO) timer which was used only for Outgoing CIS  
trunks is now also used for incoming CIS trunks to define timeout for  
the automatic ANI digits reception. The termination of the incoming  
call is delayed until either the ANI digits are received from the CDTI2  
card, the ANI failure report is received from the CDTI2 card or the ATO  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
482 CIS ANI Reception  
expires. The ATO timer should be set at least twice as large as the  
following ARD timer.  
•
•
•
ANI Request Duration (ARD) timer is added to the route timers, the  
timer defines how long the CDTI2 card waits for the ANI information  
after sending the ANI REQUEST line signal. When the ARD timer  
expires for the first time the CDTI2 card performs an additional attempt  
to request the ANI information from the CIS CO. If the timer expires after  
the second attempt the ANI reception failure is reported to the system.  
The ARD timer is downloaded to the CDTI2 firmware. The timer should  
not exceed half of the ATO timer.  
CAC Display (CACD) option defines how the Category Access Code  
(CAC) is displayed on the proprietary set or attendant console. The  
possible options are:  
— to display CAC before the ANI  
— to display CAC after the ANI or  
— not to display CAC  
CAC in CDR (CACC) option defines how the Category Access Code  
(CAC) is stored in the CDR. The possible options are to:  
— store CAC before the ANI  
— store CAC after the ANI  
— not store CAC.  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 73 - Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type  
definition." (page 482)  
Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type definition.  
2. "LD 14 - Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class  
of service for incoming Direct In" (page 483)  
Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class of service  
for incoming Direct Inward Dial (DID) CIS DTI2 trunks.  
3. "LD 16 - Define the CIS Route." (page 483)  
Define the CIS Route.  
LD 73 - Define Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as firmware type definition.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Digital Trunk Interface loops.  
TYPE  
DTI2  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature implementation 483  
Prompt  
FEAT  
CDTI2  
...  
Response  
LPTI  
Description  
Loop Timers and additional definitions.  
CDTI2/CSDTI2 card  
YES  
...  
CISFW  
MFA  
Multifrequency Shuttle protocol handling + ANI Reception +  
Firmware Dial Tone Detection capabilities are supported by the  
card.  
- MFSL  
(0)-3  
The MFS signals transmission level. The prompt appears when  
CISFW is set to MFS or MFA and the CISMFS package is  
equipped.  
The transmission level may be set to the following values:  
0 = -7.3 dB  
1 = -5.0 dB  
2 = -3.5 dB  
3 = 0 dB  
- 500L  
(0)-1  
ANI request tone (500 Hz) transmission level. The prompt  
appears when CISFW is set to MFA.  
The transmission level may be set to the following values:  
0 = -7.3 dB  
1 = -3.5 dB  
LD 14 - Add Calling Number Identification Allowed (CNA) as a class of service for incoming  
Direct Inward Dial (DID) CIS DTI2 trunks.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
...  
DID  
...  
Direct Inward Dial trunks.  
...  
CLS  
Class of Service.  
CNA  
Allow Calling Number Identification for incoming CIS DTI2 DID  
trunks.  
LD 16 - Define the CIS Route.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
484 CIS ANI Reception  
Prompt  
TYPE  
TKTP  
...  
Response  
RDB  
DID  
Description  
Route Data Block.  
Direct Inward Dial.  
...  
...  
DTRK  
- DGTP  
...  
YES  
DTI2  
...  
Digital Trunk Route  
Digital Trunk Type  
...  
ICOG  
...  
ICT  
Incoming Trunk.  
...  
...  
CNTL  
TIMR  
YES  
ARD  
Allows change to controls or timers.  
ANI Request Duration timer, defines duration of the ANI request  
signal. The timer is stored as increments of the 256 ms.  
512-(1024)-2048  
ATO  
TIMR  
ANI Timeout timer. Defines how long the system waits for the  
ANI information from the CIS CO. If timer expires before the ANI  
is uploaded from the CDTI2 card, the system treats the call as it  
is defined in the ANI Failure Treatment option.  
2048-(2560)-5120  
The ATO should be at least twice as large as the ARD.  
CIS Route  
CISR  
YES  
- CACD  
The option defines how the CAC is displayed on the display of  
the set or console. The option also controls presentation of the  
CAC in the messages to the auxiliary processors. The options  
are:  
(NO)  
BEF  
AFT  
NO = do not display CAC.  
BEF= display CAC before ANI.  
AFT= display CAC after ANI.  
- CACC  
Defines how CAC is stored in CDR.  
NO = do not store CAC  
(NO)  
BEF = store CAC before ANI  
AFT = store CAC after ANI  
BEF  
AFT  
- AANI  
The option defines if the Automatic ANI request should be sent  
to the CIS CO when the incoming calls are originated from the  
CIS CO to the trunks within this route.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature operation 485  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
(NO)  
NO = do not send automatic request.  
YES  
YES = send automatic request.  
- ANFT  
The prompt defines the ANI Failure Treatment option. It is  
prompted only if the AANI is set to YES. The possible options  
are:  
(CONT)  
FAIL  
Provide call to the required destination.  
Drop call.  
ITDN  
Transfer call to intercept DN.  
- - ITDN  
<DN>  
Intercept DN (up to 8 digits) defines the DN to transfer the  
incoming calls which failed to provide ANI. The prompt appears  
if the ANFT option is set to ITDN.  
Feature operation  
Manual ANI request is made by pressing a calling number display key on the  
attendant console or on the proprietary set followed by pressing the SCR  
key or by pressing the TRC key on the proprietary set or attendant console.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
486 CIS ANI Reception  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
487  
CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 487)  
"Operating parameters" (page 490)  
"Feature interactions" (page 490)  
"Feature packaging" (page 490)  
"Feature implementation" (page 491)  
"Feature operation" (page 492)  
Feature description  
The Commonwealth of Independent states (CIS) Toll Dial Tone Detection  
feature allows the system to detect a dial tone from a CIS Toll Central Office  
(CO) on outgoing toll calls. When received, the tone indicates that the CIS  
CO is prepared to collect dial pulse (decadic) digits from system for outgoing  
toll calls. The feature is implemented only for CIS DTI2 trunks.  
The CIS DTD feature introduces CIS toll out-pulsing criteria, which are  
terms that define conditions that need to be satisfied to allow the system to  
start the out-pulsing of the decadic digits on the outgoing Toll CIS DTI2 calls  
(see Figure 10 "CIS network block diagram" (page 488)).  
The criteria is composed as a combination of two events: dial tone detection  
and ANI interaction. It may include only dial tone detection, only ANI  
Interaction, dial tone or ANI, dial tone and ANI. The criteria is defined at the  
route data block level. The detection is performed by the CIS DTI2 cards  
(NTCG01AC and NTCG02 AC) and when the criteria is satisfied the system  
receives a report from the card. The system postpones the out-pulsing of  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
488 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection  
the digits until the report. If the report does not arrive before the ATO timer  
expiration, defined in LD 16, the out-pulsing may continue, or the call may  
be disconnected and busy tone provided to customer.  
Outgoing toll CIS DTI2 calls can be made using the indirect or direct  
connection method (see Figure 11 "Indirect outgoing toll call with dial tone  
detection" (page 489) and Figure 12 "Direct toll call with dial tone detection"  
(page 490)).  
Figure 10  
CIS network block diagram  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 489  
Figure 11  
Indirect outgoing toll call with dial tone detection  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
490 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection  
Figure 12  
Direct toll call with dial tone detection  
Operating parameters  
This feature requires the CIS DTI2 card NTCG01AC for Large Systems.  
Card NTCG02AC is used in Small Systems. These CIS DTI2 cards have  
increased functionality that allows detection of the CIS toll dial tone.  
Feature interactions  
CIS 2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (CIS DTI2)  
CIS DTD feature improves the reliability of outgoing CIS DTI2 toll calls by  
adding the ability to use the dial tone provided by the CIS CO as criteria to  
start out-pulsing the decadic digits to the toll CIS CO.  
Feature packaging  
No new package is introduced for this feature. The following packages  
are required:  
•
2 Mbit Digital Trunk Interface (DTI2) package 129  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature implementation 491  
•
•
International Supplementary Features (SUPP) package 131  
Commonwealth of Independent States Trunks (CIST) package 221  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 73 - Add Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as a CIS firmware type."  
(page 491)  
Add Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as a CIS firmware type.  
2. "LD 16 - Specify CIS route information." (page 491)  
Specify CIS route information.  
LD 73 - Add Multifrequency Advanced (MFA) as a CIS firmware type.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
DTI2  
LPTI  
YES  
Description  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
FEAT  
CDTI2  
...  
Digital Trunk Interface loops.  
Loop timers and additional definitions.  
CDTI2/CSDTI2 card  
...  
CISFW  
MFA  
Multifrequency Shuttle protocol handling + ANI Reception +  
firmware dial tone detection capabilities are supported. MFA  
capabilities are supported by CIS CDTI2 card (NTCG01AC for  
Large Systems, or NTCG02AC for Small Systems).  
LD 16 - Specify CIS route information.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data.  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
TKTP  
...  
RDB  
COT  
...  
Route Data Block.  
Central Office Trunk  
...  
ICOG  
...  
OGT  
...  
Outgoing only trunk.  
...  
CNTL  
(NO) YES  
Deny/Allow changes to controls or timers.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
492 CIS Toll Dial Tone Detection  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
- TIMR  
ATO 128-(4992)- ANI timeout timer in milliseconds. For CIS outgoing trunk routes  
65408  
this defines the time delay performed after the out-pulsing  
of the toll access code. During this delay further out-pulsing  
is temporarily halted until the special message from the card  
firmware confirms the satisfaction of the CIS Toll out-pulsing  
criteria. If the timer expires before satisfaction the behavior of  
the system depends on the COAT prompt. If COAT is set to  
YES the out-pulsing continues on timeout. If COAT is set to  
NO the call is dropped.  
...  
...  
...  
CISR  
- DTOC  
- CTOC  
YES  
CIS Route  
(NO) YES  
Deny/Allow Direct Toll Connection.  
CIS Toll Outpulsing Criteria.  
DTD Only.  
ANI And DTD.  
ANI Only.  
(DTDO)  
AADT  
ANIO  
AODT  
ANI Or DTD.  
- COAT  
(NO) YES  
NO = Drop Call when ATO timer expires.  
YES = Continue Outpulsing when ATO timer expires.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
493  
CLASS: Calling Number and Name  
Delivery  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 493)  
"Operating parameters" (page 513)  
"Feature interactions" (page 514)  
"Feature packaging" (page 518)  
"Feature implementation" (page 519)  
"Feature operation" (page 522)  
Feature description  
The Custom Local Area Signaling Service (CLASS) Calling Number and  
Name Delivery (CND) feature enables the system to send the calling  
number and/or calling name to a CLASS set when a call is presented to  
it, per the Bellcore CLASS CND standard. Once the system delivers the  
CLASS CND information, it is completely up to the CLASS set to determine  
how the information is to be displayed. The CLASS set can even choose  
to ignore certain information by not displaying it.  
A CLASS set is, by definition, any non-proprietary analog set with an  
integrated display and a Frequency Shift Key (FSK) modem receiver, or with  
a FSK modem receiver built-in display attachment. The CLASS sets are  
configured on the system as analog (500/2500 type) sets using LD 10, and  
are supported by the existing 500/2500 type peripheral line cards.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
494 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
The calling number and/or calling name data is delivered from the system  
to the CLASS sets using FSK signaling by a CLASS modem (CMOD) unit.  
The CMOD units are configured using LD 13. They are supported by an  
Extended CLASS Modem (XCMC) IPE line card, the NT5D60AA.  
Up to 255 CMOD units may be configured on a system that is equipped  
with the CLASS CND feature. Once configured, the CMODs are shared  
throughout a multi-customer system. When a call is presented to a CLASS  
set, an available CMOD is automatically allocated.  
Upon reaching the CND delivery interval, the appropriate CND information  
is delivered to the CLASS set. The CND delivery interval is the first silent  
interval, after ringing has been applied for a new call, that is greater  
than two seconds. The allocated CMOD unit is released when ringing  
resumes on the CLASS set after the CND delivery interval, or when the  
call is disconnected, answered, or redirected. If the call is disconnected,  
answered, or redirected before the CND delivery interval has been reached,  
then no CND information is delivered. If the call is disconnected, answered,  
or redirected while the CND information is being delivered, the CND delivery  
is immediately terminated. Figure 13 "System allocation when a CLASS set  
is idle" (page 494) to Figure 16 "System resource allocation after the CND  
delivery interval" (page 496) depict a typical call processing and system  
resource allocation scenario for a new call being presented on a CLASS set.  
Figure 13  
System allocation when a CLASS set is idle  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 495  
Figure 14  
System resource allocation when a new call begins to ring on the CLASS set  
Figure 15  
System resource allocation during the CND delivery interval  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
496 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
Figure 16  
System resource allocation after the CND delivery interval  
Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS sets  
In LD 10, the system administrator may configure a CLASS set to deliver  
both Calling Number Delivery, Calling Name Delivery, or both.  
To activate only Calling Number Delivery, the station set is to be configured  
with one of the following class of service:  
•
•
CLASS Calling Number Single Data Message Format Allow (CNUS) or  
CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Message Format Allow (CNUA)  
Subsequently, whenever a call is presented to that set, the software will  
deliver the date and time stamp information (see the "Date and time stamp  
information" (page 497) section which follows below) and the calling number  
information (see the "Calling number information" (page 497) section which  
follows on "Calling number information" (page 497)) per the Bellcore CLASS  
CND delivery standard.  
To activate only Calling Name Delivery, the station set is to be configured  
with the Calling Name Multiple Data Message Format Allow (CNAA) class of  
service. Subsequently, whenever a call is presented to that set, the system  
software will deliver the date and time stamp information and the calling  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature description 497  
name information (see the "Calling name information" (page 498) section  
on "Calling name information" (page 498)) per the Bellcore CLASS CND  
delivery standard.  
To activate both Calling Number Delivery and Calling Name Delivery, the  
station set is to be configured with both the CLASS Calling Number Multiple  
Data Message Format Allow (CNUA) and the CLASS Calling Name Multiple  
Data Message Format Allow (CNAA) class of service. Subsequently,  
whenever a call is presented to that set, the system software will deliver the  
date and time stamp information, the calling number information, and the  
calling name information, per the Bellcore CLASS CND delivery standard.  
Date and time stamp information  
The date and time stamp information delivered to a CLASS set is in the  
format mm dd hh mm, where mm is a two-digit number for the month, dd  
is a two-digit number for the day of the month, hh is a two-digit number for  
the military hour of the day, and mm is a two-digit number for the minute  
of the hour. It is up to the CLASS set to display the date and time stamp  
information.  
Calling number information  
For a non-ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to the  
CLASS set is the incoming In-Band ANI, or if no ANI is passed on, then the  
calling number unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.  
The calling number unknown indicator, per Bellcore CLASS CND delivery  
standard, refers to the ASCII "O" that is sent in place of the calling number.  
For an ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to the  
CLASS set is the CLID received from the incoming ISDN trunk (if the CLID  
is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is delivered). If the incoming  
CLID is defined as display denied (the originating set has Display Digit  
Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification Restriction  
active), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered instead of the  
calling number, or, if no CLID is passed on by the incoming trunk, then the  
calling number unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.  
The calling number privacy indicator, per Bellcore CLASS CND delivery  
standard, refers to the ASCII "P" that is sent in place of the calling number.  
For a station (set)-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to the  
CLASS set is one of the following:  
•
If the originating set has Display Digit Denied active (CLS = DDGD in  
LD 10 or 11), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered in  
place of the calling number.  
•
If the CLID entry of the originating DN specifies that it is to be identified  
by its internal DN (CLASS_FMT = DN in LD 15), then the originating  
DN is delivered.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
498 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
•
If the CLID entry of the originating DN specifies that it is to be identified  
by its local number (CLASS_FMT = LCL in LD 15), then the local public  
number associated with the originating DN is delivered, (if the CLID is  
longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is delivered). The local public  
number is composed by the ISDN CLID Enhancements feature, which  
forms the calling number by concatenating the customer defined home  
local number (HLCL in LD 15) and the originating DN.  
•
If the CLID entry of the originating DN specifies that it is to be identified  
by its national number (CLASS_FMT = NTN in LD 15), then the national  
public number associated with the originating DN is delivered (if the  
number is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is delivered). The  
national public number is composed by the ISDN CLID Enhancements  
feature, which forms the calling number by concatenating the customer  
defined home national number (entered using prompt HNTN and HLCL  
in LD 15) and the originating DN.  
•
If the originating set is assigned with an undefined CLID entry, then the  
originating DN is delivered.  
For a station (attendant)-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to  
the CLASS set is one of the following:  
•
If CLID entry 0 specifies that it is to be identified by its internal DN  
(CLASS_FMT = DN in LD 15), then the customer’s attendant DN (the  
ATDN in LD 15) is delivered.  
•
If CLID entry 0 specifies that it is to be identified by its local number  
(CLASS_FMT = LCL in LD 15), then the local public number associated  
with the customer’s Listed Directory Number 0 (the LDN0 in LD 15)  
is delivered (if the number is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is  
delivered).  
•
•
If CLID entry 0 specifies that it is to be identified by its national number  
(CLASS_FMT = NTN in LD 15), then the national public number  
associated with the customer’s Listed Directory Number 0 (the LDN0  
DN in LD Overlay) is delivered (if the number is longer than 10 digits,  
only the first 10 is delivered).  
If CLID entry 0 is not configured, then the customer’s attendant DN  
(the ATDN in LD Overlay) is delivered. The calling number for calls  
originated by an attendant is composed using CLID entry 0, as per the  
ISDN CLID Enhancements feature.  
Calling name information  
For a non-ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling name unknown indicator  
is delivered to the CLASS set in place of the calling name. The calling name  
unknown indicator, per Bellcore CLASS CND delivery standard, refers to  
the ASCI "O" that is sent in place of the calling name.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 499  
For an ISDN trunk-to-CLASS set call, the calling name delivered to the  
CLASS set is the calling name received from the incoming ISDN trunk (if the  
calling name is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 is delivered). If  
the calling name is defined as presentation denied (the originating set has  
Display Name Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification  
Restriction active), then the calling name privacy indicator is delivered in  
place of the calling number, or, if no calling number is passed on by the  
incoming trunk, then the calling name unknown indicator is delivered in  
place of the calling name. The calling name privacy indicator, per Bellcore  
CLASS CND delivery standard, refers to the ASCI "P" that is sent in place  
of the calling name.  
For a station (set)-to-CLASS set call, the calling name delivered to the  
CLASS set is one of the following:  
•
•
•
The calling name associated with the originating DN (if the calling name  
is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 is delivered).  
If no name is defined with the originating DN, then the calling name  
unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.  
If the originating set has Display Name Deny Class of Service  
(CLS=NAMD in LD 10 or 11), then the calling name privacy indicator is  
delivered in place of the calling name.  
For a station (attendant)-to-CLASS set call, the calling number delivered to  
the CLASS set is one of the following:  
•
The calling name associated with the customer’s attendant DN (if the  
calling name is longer than 15 characters, only the first 15 is delivered).  
•
If no name is associated with the customer’s attendant DN, then calling  
name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.  
Network engineering for CLASS sets  
In a system with a single group network, the network internal blocking  
is determined by the concentration ratio of equipped ports on Intelligent  
Peripheral Equipment and the number of interfaced loops or superloops.  
Depending on traffic engineering, a non-blocking network is achievable.  
In a multi-group system, intergroup junctors are required to switch calls  
between two network groups. Due to the concentration of time slots from  
a network group to that of intergroup junctors, blocking may occur. This is  
true for a multi-group system with or without CLASS sets. However, since  
the CLASS feature depends on a voice path to deliver Calling Name and  
Number Delivery (CND) to a set, excessive congestion at the intergroup  
junctor could block the delivery of CND and diminish the usefulness of the  
feature, as well as impact the grade of service of the existing equipment  
on the system.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
500 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
This engineering section examines the inter-group junctor blocking issue  
and provides recommend engineering rules to alleviate potential network  
congestion problems.  
In general, the engineering effort for CLASS feature can be classified into  
three categories:  
A new site following engineering rules (see "General engineering guidelines  
for non-Call Center applications" (page 505)) requires no inter group junctor  
traffic check-off.  
An existing or new site with relatively low intergroup junctor traffic, will  
require only one XCMC (Extended CLASS Modem Card) IPE pack that can  
serve all CLASS sets in a multi-group system.  
An existing site with heavy intergroup junctor traffic will require either moving  
trunks/sets around between network groups when only one XCMC pack is  
equipped or providing an XCMC pack (or packs) for each group.  
System multi-group network  
This section is only relevant to a system multi-group network. A single group  
system does not have intergroup junctors. Therefore, special engineering  
on the junctor is not applicable. The Cabinet system have network  
architectures that are different from other systems.  
It has a non-blocking network and does not require any network engineering,  
except to use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) CMOD (Class  
MODem) capacity table to find the number of modems needed.  
In general, intergroup junctor blocking is most severe when there are only  
two groups, since under typical traffic distribution assumptions, 50% of calls  
will stay in the originating group and 50% will terminate on the second group  
through junctors, unless a Community Of Interest (COI) is known and taken  
into consideration in engineering to minimize intergroup traffic.  
Under the assumption of even distribution of traffic, the percentage of traffic  
to an intergroup junctor will drop to 33.3% of the total group traffic for a  
three-group system. Similarly, the junctor traffic is 25% of group traffic for a  
four-group system and 20% for a five-group system.  
A simplified system with two-group network and CLASS sets is shown by  
Figure 17 "A system with a two-group network" (page 501).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature description 501  
Figure 17  
A system with a two-group network  
Note that traffic to a CLASS set can be originated from a non-CLASS set,  
another CLASS set or an incoming trunk. Since trunks have more traffic  
impact on junctor blocking, they are used to illustrate the feature operation,  
however, both sets and trunks can be traffic sources to CLASS sets.  
The maximum size system comprises of 5 network groups. Each group has  
32 loops of which 28 can be terminal loops, the rest are service loops (TDS  
loops for tones, conference and music).  
From Group 0 to Group 1, as shown in Figure 17 "A system with a  
two-group network" (page 501), there are 8 one-way junctors. Similarly,  
there are another 8 one way junctors from Group 1 to Group 0. For practical  
purposes, they can be treated as 8 two-way junctors. A two-way path is  
equal to a voice channel. A junctor has 30 voice traffic channels as on a  
loop. Each two-way channel represents a conversation path. A channel is  
also used to deliver the CND from the CMOD to a CLASS set.  
CLASS feature operation  
A call originated from Set A (or trunk A) seeks to terminate on a CLASS set  
B. When B starts to ring, A will hear ringback. A unit in CMOD (CLASS  
Modem) is assigned to collect originator’s CND information and waits for  
the CND delivery interval. After the first ring at B, a silence period (deliver  
interval) ensues, the CMOD unit begins to deliver CND information to the  
CLASS set.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
502 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
The CND information of a traffic source (A) is a system information, which is  
obtained by the system when a call is originated. During the two-second  
ringing period of the CLASS set B, A’s CND is delivered to CMOD through  
SSD messages (using a signaling channel only). When the CND information  
is sent from CMOD to CLASS set B, it is delivered through a voice path  
during the four-second silence cycle of set B. The CMOD unit is held for  
a duration of six seconds.  
If the XCMC (Extended CLASS Modem Card) IPE pack, which provides  
up to 32 CMOD units, is located in the IPE of Group 0, the CMOD unit in  
the pack will receive CND data through the SSD messages and use one  
of the voice channels of the intergroup junctor to deliver it to CLASS set B  
in Group 1.  
If the XCMC IPE pack is located in Group 1, the system will deliver SSD  
messages containing CND information to CMOD and then send it to Set  
B during the delivery interval through a voice path, which is an intragroup  
channel not involving an intergroup junctor.  
When CMOD units and CLASS sets are co-located in the same network  
group, there are no voice paths on the intergroup junctor required to deliver  
CND information; when they are equipped on different groups, intergroup  
junctors must carry CND traffic. The resource allocation algorithm will  
search for a CMOD unit located in the same group as the terminating  
CLASS set first before it attempts to use a CMOD unit from a different group.  
Intergroup junctor capacity  
The time slot allocation algorithm for intergroup junctors is somewhat  
different from regular network loops, however, it is a close approximation to  
use the network loop capacity for junctor capacity, since they each have 30  
traffic channels.  
In order for the connection between a CMOD unit and the remote set (on  
a different group) to meet the Grade Of Service (GOS) of the system for  
internal call setup, traffic on the loop and intergroup junctor should meet  
normal GOS requirements, that is 660 CCS per loop or junctor.  
If we let an intergroup junctor be loaded to 660 CCS like a loop, the total  
allowed traffic at eight junctors is 5280 CCS (=660x8). At 6 CCS per  
CLASS set, the allowed number of sets generating intergroup traffic is 880  
(=5280/6). If half of set traffic is intra-group, and the other half inter-group,  
the allowed number of CLASS sets in Group 1 is 1,760 (=880/0.5). On per  
loop basis, each loop can be equipped with 62 (=1760/28) CLASS sets.  
Similarly, a 3-group network is likely to have 1/3 of traffic remaining in the  
group, 1/3 of traffic going to the next group, and another 1/3 of calls going  
to the third group. By using this inverse proportion approach to breakdown  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature description 503  
traffic flow at junctors, the capacity of a network group in terms of CLASS  
sets is summarized in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on  
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503). The entry in the Table 9  
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity  
limitation)" (page 503) is the threshold for inter-group junctor traffic check-off.  
The table entry indicates that in a two group system, the second group  
is allowed to have 1760 CLASS sets or a combination of CLASS and  
equivalent sets without a need to move sets or trunks around to reduce  
inter-group junctor traffic. Due to higher traffic, an agent set or a trunk  
is counted to be equal to four regular sets. The conversion needs to be  
done before using Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on  
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503).  
If the number of equipped sets (CLASS or otherwise) or equivalent sets  
(sets converted from trunks and agent sets) is less than the threshold,  
the junctor traffic is expected to be low. There is no special engineering  
necessary for CLASS sets (other than providing required modems).  
Note that the junctor traffic issue can be ignored if each group is fully  
equipped with sufficient CMOD units to handle CLASS sets within the  
group. It is the attempt to use one XCMC pack to serve multiple groups that  
requires special attention to inter-group traffic. As long as CLASS service is  
not impacted by a traffic in-balance already existed in the system, it is not  
the objective of this engineering guideline to solve that problem.  
Once the threshold is exceeded, re-configuration of the system is necessary  
to reduce junctor congestion. The detailed engineering rules are given  
later in this document.  
Table 9  
Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity  
limitation)  
No. of Groups  
Sets/Group  
1760  
2
3
4
5
2933  
3520  
4080  
Convert a trunk or an agent set to four equivalent sets before applying Table  
9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity  
limitation)" (page 503)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
504 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
A single group system can have as many CLASS sets as each loop allows.  
The engineering of the system is not different from that of non-CLASS sets,  
since there is no intergroup junctor involved. The only engineering required  
is to find the required number of CMOD units from Table 10 "CMOD unit  
capacity" (page 504) to serve a given number of CLASS sets.  
Note that the capacity per group for multi-group systems assumes no  
trunking in that particular group (or trunks have been converted to equivalent  
sets). Therefore, the total system capacity, by taking into account trunks,  
agent sets and service circuits, will not be as large as a straight multiple of  
number of groups by the number of sets per group.  
The number of allowed CLASS sets per group in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS  
sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page  
503) is strictly a function of intergroup traffic (except for five-group systems).  
When a system becomes five-group, the junctor capacity is no longer a  
bottleneck under the assumption of even traffic distribution. The system  
capacity iscome unrealistic if it is purely based on the intergroup junctor  
capacity, therefore, other system resources, particularly the system CPU,  
need to be checked. The number 4080 is based on loop traffic (28 loops/7  
superloops), not junctor capacity.  
If a group comprises of both regular sets and CLASS sets, the total number  
of sets in the group should not exceed the quoted number in the table. If  
trunks and agent sets are included in the group, convert them to "equivalent  
sets" before using Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on  
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503). More details are  
described in the engineering guide.  
Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) shows the CMOD capacity. It  
provides the number of CMOD units required to serve a given number of  
CLASS sets with the desired grade of service. The required number of  
CMOD units should have a capacity range whose upper limit is greater than  
the number of CLASS sets equipped in a given configuration.  
The procedure to use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) is further  
illustrated in engineering examples starting on "Engineering examples for  
non-Call Center applications" (page 506).  
Table 10  
CMOD unit capacity  
1-2  
3-7  
2
8-27  
3
28-59  
4
60- 100  
5
101-  
150  
151-  
200  
207- 267  
8
CLASS Set  
7
1
6
CMOD Unit  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 505  
268-  
332  
333-  
401  
402-  
473  
474-  
548  
549-  
625  
626-  
704  
705-  
785  
786- 868  
CLASS Set  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
CMOD Unit  
CLASS Set  
869-  
953  
954-  
1039  
1040-1 1127-1 1215-1 1299-1 1389-1  
126  
1481-1572  
214  
298  
388  
480  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
CMOD Unit  
CLASS Set  
1573-1 1666-1 1760-1 1855-1 1950-2 2047-2 2143-2  
2241-2338  
665  
759  
854  
949  
046  
142  
240  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
CMOD Unit  
CLASS Set  
2339-2 2437-2 2536-2 2637-2 2736-2 2836-2 2937-3  
3038-3139  
436  
535  
635  
735  
835  
936  
037  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
CMOD Unit  
CLASS Set  
3140-3 3242-3 3345-3 3448-3 3551-3 3654-3 3768-3  
3862-3966  
241  
344  
447  
550  
653  
757  
861  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
CMOD Unit  
CLASS Set  
3967-4 4071-4 4176-4 4282-4 4387-4 4493-4 4599-4  
4705-4811  
070  
175  
281  
386  
492  
598  
704  
55  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
56  
CMOD Unit  
CLASS Set  
4812-4 4919-5 5026-5 5133-5 5240-5 5348-5 5456-5  
5564-5671  
918  
025  
132  
239  
347  
455  
563  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
CMOD Unit  
General engineering guidelines for non-Call Center applications  
In a non-call center application, there is no significant number of agent sets.  
Therefore, no agent set to regular set conversion is needed. The only type  
of port requiring special treatment is trunk.  
Configurations following engineering rules (no re-configuration  
required) The following engineering rules should be followed to avoid the  
need to re-configure a switch to accommodate the CLASS feature.  
1. Provide the number of CMOD units serving all CLASS sets in the system  
based on the capacity table (Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504)).  
2. Equip all CLASS sets in one network group.  
3. Equip the XCMC IPE pack on the network group with CLASS sets.  
If the system is a single group system, or if above rules are fully met, no  
further engineering is necessary. However, in case of an existing multi-group  
site upgrading to provide CLASS feature, we may need to re-configure the  
system in order to satisfy rule (2).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
506 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
When the above rules are not fully met, continue the system engineering by  
following the procedure in the next subsection.  
Re-configuration may be required (when engineering rules are not  
fully followed) When above rule (2) can not be satisfied in a new site or  
an existing one, the following guidelines are designed to minimize network  
blocking, and to determine whether a re-configuration (to move trunks and  
sets around) or to provide an XCMC pack per group is necessary.  
•
•
•
To use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) to estimate CMOD unit  
requirements, consider only CLASS sets (no trunks or non-CLASS sets).  
If CLASS sets are equipped in more than one group, locate the XCMC  
IPE pack in the group with most CLASS sets.  
Use Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group  
junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) to decide whether re-configuration  
is required. For a network group with trunks, regular sets and CLASS  
sets, convert trunks to sets by using the formula: 1 trunk = 4 sets (called  
equivalent sets), and then add up the total.  
Check threshold in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based  
on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503), if the number of  
equivalent sets is less than 1760 (for example, for a two-group system),  
there is no need to re-configure the system.  
If the number is greater than 1760, we need to move some of the CMOD  
units to a second XCMC IPE pack on another group (when CLASS sets  
are scattered in two groups), or move some sets or trunks from one  
group to another group to satisfy the threshold.  
The following examples will show some of the engineering details of dealing  
with various alternatives.  
To simplify discussion, the network group 0 has minor number of CLASS  
sets. The majority of CLASS sets are in group 1 (refer to Figure 17 "A  
system with a two-group network" (page 501)).  
Engineering examples for non-Call Center applications  
One XCMC pack serving a single group system No special engineering  
rule is needed for a single or half group system (CS 1000M SG, Meridian  
1 PBX 61C, and CS 1000M HG). Look up Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity"  
(page 504) to find the required number of CMOD units to serve the given  
CLASS sets. For example, to serve a CS 1000M SG with 400 CLASS sets,  
use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504) to find the number of CMOD  
units serving a range including 400 sets. The result is 10 units which can  
serve 333 to 401 CLASS sets.  
One XCMC pack serving a 2-group system  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature description 507  
1. Example 1: No re-configuration  
A 2-group system serving an office is expected to convert 400 analog  
sets to CLASS sets. Currently, 100 of them are located in group 0,  
where all incoming trunks are located, and the remaining 300 sets are in  
group 1. Assume that group 1 is also equipped with 800 non-CLASS  
sets. How many CMOD units are needed to serve this application and  
does the customer need to re-configure the switch (move sets and  
trunks between group 0 and group 1) to do the upgrade?  
Solution:  
The table lookup indicates that 400 CLASS sets need 10 CMOD units.  
Since one pack provides 32 units, one XCMC pack is sufficient for this  
customer.  
Group 1 is equipped with 300 CLASS sets which is greater than the 100  
sets in group 0, the pack should be installed in group 1.  
The total equipped ports in group 1 is 1100 (=800+300). For a 2-group  
system, the second group is allowed to have 1760 sets (from Table 9  
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity  
limitation)" (page 503)) without junctor traffic concerns, therefore, there  
is no need for the customer to re-configure the switch.  
2. Example 2: Re-configuration  
A similar application as in the last example, except that there are 1600  
non-CLASS sets and 100 trunks in group 1.  
Solution:  
The same number of CMOD units (10), since the number of CLASS sets  
in the system is the same.  
The number of total equivalent sets in group 1 is 2300 (=1600 +300  
+100x4) which is greater than the 1760 threshold in the Table 9  
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity  
limitation)" (page 503) for a 2-group system.  
The customer will have a number of alternatives to resolve the junctor  
blocking issue, depending on the situation:  
(1) move the 100 CLASS sets from group 0 to group 1, so all CLASS  
sets are served by the XCMC pack in group 1, or  
(2) move the 300 CLASS sets and the XCMC pack to group 0, or  
(3) move 540 non-CLASS sets (=2300-1760) from group 1 to group 0, or  
(4) move 100 CLASS sets from group 1 to group 0 and split the 10  
CMOD units to 5 for group 0 and 5 for group 1. However, this will  
require another XCMC pack to be equipped in group 0. The cost of this  
approach is not trivial. It can be justified only when growth plan indicates  
a need for a second pack in the near future anyway.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
508 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
The final decision depends on the specific situation of a site.  
General engineering guidelines for Call Center applications  
Configurations following engineering rules (no re-configuration  
required) The following engineering rules should be followed to avoid the  
need to re-configure a switch to accommodate the CLASS feature for call  
center environment.  
1. Convert an agent set to regular set by using 1 agent CLASS set = 4  
sets (called equivalent sets)  
2. Sum up the total number of regular CLASS sets and equivalent CLASS  
sets and find the number of CMOD units required based on the capacity  
table (Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504)).  
3. Equip CLASS agent sets in the group where trunks carrying incoming  
traffic to agent sets are located.  
4. Equip non-agent CLASS sets in the same group as the agent CLASS  
sets.  
5. Equip the XCMC IPE pack on the network group with CLASS sets.  
If the system is a single group system, or if above rules are fully met, no  
further engineering is necessary.  
In case of an existing multi-group site upgrading to provide CLASS feature,  
re-configuring the system may be necessary to satisfy rules (3) and (4).  
When above rules are not fully met, continue the system engineering by  
following the procedure in the next subsection.  
Configurations do not fully meet engineering rules (re-configuration  
may be required) When above rules can not be satisfied in a new site  
or an existing one, the following guidelines are designed to (1) minimize  
network blocking, (2) determine whether a re-configuration (to move trunks  
and sets around) is necessary, or (3) whether separate XCMC packs are  
necessary to serve the multi-group system.  
1. Convert an agent set to regular set by using 1 agent CLASS set = 4 sets.  
2. Sum up the total number of equivalent CLASS sets and find the number  
of CMOD units required based on the capacity table (Table 10 "CMOD  
unit capacity" (page 504)).  
3. Equip the XCMC IPE pack on the network group with most CLASS sets  
(or equivalent sets).  
4. Limit the number of agent CLASS sets to be 200 or less per group.  
5. Limit the number of regular CLASS sets in a group without XCMC pack  
to be 100 or less.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature description 509  
6. Convert trunks (1 trunk = 4 sets), and agent set (1 agent set = 4 sets)  
to equivalent sets before using Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per  
group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) to  
find junctor traffic threshold.  
7. If the threshold in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on  
inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) is greater than the  
total number of equivalent sets, traffic in the system is balanced, there is  
no need for further network engineering.  
8. If the number of equivalent set is greater than the threshold, one or all  
of the following engineering rules should be followed to reduce junctor  
traffic:  
a. Move sets (CLASS or non-CLASS) or trunks to another group to  
satisfy the above engineering rules.  
b. Equip XCMC pack in more than one group to serve local CLASS  
set traffic.  
9. When a trunk route is known to serve only agent sets, and these trunks  
and agent sets are in the same group, exclude them from the set count  
in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group  
junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503) threshold (for example, do not  
include trunks and agent sets with known COI to use Table 9 "Maximum  
CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)"  
(page 503); they do not generate traffic to junctors).  
The following examples will show some of the engineering details of dealing  
with various alternatives.  
To simplify discussion, the network group with most trunks is called group 0,  
consequently, a majority of CLASS sets, if not all, are in group 1. If most  
agent CLASS sets and XCMC pack are in group 0, there is no need for  
further engineering.  
Engineering examples for Call Center applications  
One XCMC pack serving a single group system No special engineering  
rule is needed for a single group system. Look up Table 10 "CMOD unit  
capacity" (page 504) to find the required number of CMOD units to serve  
the given CLASS sets. For example, to serve a CS 1000M SG or Meridian 1  
PBX 61C with 300 agent CLASS sets, use Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity"  
(page 504) to find the CMOD units that can serve 1200 equivalent sets  
(=300x4). The result is 20 units.  
One XCMC pack serving a 2-group system  
1. Example 1: No re-configuration required  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
510 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
A two-group system serving a call center is expected to upgrade 300  
analog sets (100 administrative sets and 200 agent sets) to CLASS  
sets. The 100 administrative sets are located in group 0, where are also  
located all incoming trunks. The 200 agent sets are in group 1, which  
will continue to be used as agent sets after upgrading. Assume that  
group 1 is also equipped with 500 non-CLASS sets. How many CMOD  
units are needed to serve this application and does the customer need  
to re-configure the switch (move sets and trunks between group 0 and  
group 1) to do the CLASS feature upgrade?  
Solution:  
The table lookup indicates that 900 equivalent CLASS sets  
(=100+200x4) need 17 CMOD units. Since one pack provides 32 units,  
one XCMC pack is sufficient for this customer.  
Group 1 is equipped with 200 agent CLASS sets or 800 equivalent  
sets which is greater than the 100 sets in group 0, the pack should be  
installed in group 1.  
The total equipped ports in group 1 is 1300 (=200x4+500). For a 2-group  
system, the second group is allowed to have 1760 sets (from Table 9  
"Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity  
limitation)" (page 503)) without junctor traffic concerns, therefore, there  
is no need for the customer to re-configure the switch.  
In addition, both "100 CLASS sets in a group without CMOD units (group  
0)", and" 200 agent CLASS sets in a group separate from incoming  
trunks (group 1)" statements are within engineering rules, therefore,  
no re-configuration is necessary.  
2. Example 2: Re-configuration required  
A similar application as in the last example, but there are 1600  
non-CLASS sets in group 1.  
Solution:  
The same number of CMOD units (17) is required, since the number of  
equivalent CLASS sets (900) in the system is the same.  
Equip the 17 CMOD units in group 1, since the XCMC pack should be  
equipped in the group with most CLASS (equivalent) sets.  
The number of total equivalent sets in group 1 is 2400 (=1600+200x4)  
which is greater than the 1760 threshold in Table 9 "Maximum CLASS  
sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page  
503) for a two-group system.  
The customer will have a number of alternatives to resolve the junctor  
blocking issue, depending on the situation:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature description 511  
Move the 100 CLASS sets from group 0 to group 1, or  
Equip the 200 CLASS agent sets and the XCMC pack in group 0, or  
Move 640 non-CLASS sets (=2400-1760) from group 1 to group 0 to  
avoid threshold violation, or  
Move 100 CLASS sets from group 1 to group 0 and split the 17 CMOD  
units to 10 for group 0 and 7 for group 1; however, this will require  
another XCMC pack to be equipped in group 0, or  
Move 160 trunks with COI to agent sets from group 0 to group 1, so that  
the total equivalent sets in group 1 iscome 1760 (=1600+(200-160)x4),  
since this way the 160 trunks and an equal number of agent sets will  
not generate traffic to junctors.  
The final decision depends on the specific situation of a site.  
3. Example 3: Mixed sets, trunks in both groups and re-configuration  
required  
A two-group system serving a call center is expected to equip 200  
administrative CLASS sets in group 0 and 400 CLASS agent sets in  
group 1. 500 trunks carrying incoming traffic to agents are located in  
group 0, 60 trunks serving local CO non-ACD traffic are equipped in  
group 1. Assume that group 1 is also equipped with 300 non-CLASS  
sets. Can this configuration meet engineering rules? How many CMOD  
units are needed?  
Solution:  
The equivalent CLASS sets in system = 200 + 400x4 = 1800. From  
Table 10 "CMOD unit capacity" (page 504), 27 CMOD units are needed.  
It requires the XCMC pack to be equipped in group 1.  
When we equip the XCMC pack in group 1, there are three violation  
of rules: (1) the number of CLASS sets in the group without CMOD  
units (group 0) is greater than 100, (2) the number of agent sets in a  
group without incoming trunks (group 1) is 400 which exceeds the 200  
per group limit, and (3) the violation of threshold in Table 9 "Maximum  
CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)"  
(page 503) for group 1 (=400x4+60x4+300=2140>1760). Several  
alternatives are available to make this configuration meeting engineering  
rules:  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
512 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
Move 100 CLASS sets and 400 incoming trunks from group 0 to group  
1; all above 3 violations are removed by this re-configuration: (1)  
CLASS sets in group 0 is 100, (2) 400 CLASS agent sets and 400  
incoming trunks with COI are in the same group (group 1), (3) the  
number of equivalent sets in group 1 for threshold check-off is reduced  
to 640 (=100+60x4+300=640) which is certainly within the limit (1760).  
However, it is impractical to put almost all trunks and agent sets in  
one group (group 1). With so many rule violations, the most realistic  
approach is to move 200 CLASS agent sets to group 0 and equip  
approximately 15 CMOD units in group 0 and 12 units in group 1.  
One XCMC pack serving a 3-5 group system Chances of groups larger  
than three requiring special engineering are slim, since the threshold (Table  
9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based on inter-group junctor capacity  
limitation)" (page 503)) limiting the number of sets per group is much higher.  
If the rule of co-locating CLASS sets and CMOD units in the same group  
is not fully met, as long as basic rule like putting XCMC pack in the group  
with most CLASS sets is followed, perhaps, no re-configuration between  
any two groups is necessary.  
However, if in doubt, isolate any two groups at one time, and go through the  
two-group engineering procedure to re-configure the system two groups at  
a time. Ignore the rest of system during the engineering process, except for  
calculating the total number of CMOD units, which should cover the need of  
all CLASS sets in the system. However, during a two-group engineering,  
only the number of CMOD units attributable to the two-group at hand should  
be used in calculations.  
Also remember to use 2933 (equivalent) sets per group for threshold  
check-off for the three-group system, and their respective number for four-  
and five-group systems (Table 9 "Maximum CLASS sets per group (based  
on inter-group junctor capacity limitation)" (page 503)).  
The complete check-off of set threshold between any two groups in a  
multi-group system can be represented by the following combinations (a  
number denotes the group number: for example, 1-2 represents group  
one-group 2):  
three-group: 1-2, 1-3, 2-3.  
four-group: 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, 3-4.  
five-group: 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 2-3, 2-4, 2-5, 3-4, 3-5, 4-5.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating parameters 513  
It should be noted that although CMOD units are equipped according to the  
traffic requirement of CLASS sets in a network group for the intergroup  
junctor traffic consideration, they are a system resource shared by the  
whole system.  
Operating parameters  
Dialed Number Identification System (DNIS) is not supported by the CLASS  
feature.  
This feature has been developed for the North American residential market,  
as well as for the small business, hospitality, schools and universities,  
nursing homes and hospitals, and mobile home markets.  
This feature applies to a standalone environment, and to an ISDN  
networking environment supporting CLID and a non-ISDN networking  
environment with or without In-Band Automatic Number Identification (ANI).  
If the CLASS Calling Number Delivery and CLASS Calling Name Delivery  
data to a CLASS set is lost, there is no indication, such as an error  
message, provided. The call is presented in the normal manner, as if the  
CLASS CND function has not been activated.  
A maximum of 10 digits can be delivered as the calling number, and a  
maximum of 15 characters can be delivered as the calling name. These are  
Bellcore limitations.  
The 16 port Analog Message Waiting line card (QPC789A) is not supported  
for CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery.  
Up to 255 CLASS modems can be configured on a system, and up to 32  
CLASS modem units can be configured on any Extended CLASS Modem  
card.  
No CLASS CND traffic measurement is supported.  
The CND delivery interval is the first silent interval, after ringing has been  
applied for a new call, that is greater than two seconds. If the ringing applied  
to the CLASS set uses a cadence with a ring-off cycle that is more than  
four seconds in duration, then the CLASS set might view the call as having  
been disconnected and might clear the CND display as a result. This is a  
CLASS set firmware limitation.  
Due to firmware limitations on some types of CLASS sets, after a call has  
been disconnected, the CND information associated with the disconnected  
call may still appear on the CLASS set’s display for several seconds. During  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
514 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
this time, the CLASS set cannot display new CND information. Though the  
system delivers the CND information pertaining to a new call, there is no  
guarantee that the CLASS set will display the delivered information.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Call Extension  
When an attendant extends a call to a CLASS set, the Calling Name and  
Number of the attendant is delivered to the CLASS set, and not that of  
the extended station.  
Automatic Wake Up  
When an Automatic Wake Up call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling  
Name Delivery activated, then the calling name unknown indicator is  
delivered in place of the calling number.  
Blind Transfer  
When a Meridian 1 proprietary set completes a Blind Transfer to a CLASS  
set, the Calling Name and Number of the transferring set is delivered to  
the CLASS set, and not that of the set being transferred. When an analog  
(500/2500 type) set completes a Blind Transfer to a CLASS set, the transfer  
is presented as a new call to the CLASS set. Therefore, the Calling Name  
and Number of the transferred set is delivered to the CLASS set.  
Call Forward All Calls  
When a call is redirected to a CLASS set using Call Forward All Calls, the  
Calling Name and Number of originating set, and not that of the forwarding  
set, is delivered to the CLASS set.  
Call Forward, Internal  
When a call is redirected to a CLASS set using Internal Call Forward, the  
Calling Name and Number of originating set, and not that of the forwarding  
set, is delivered to the CLASS set.  
Call Transfer  
When a Call Transfer has been completed, the Calling Name and Number  
of the transferred party will not be delivered.  
Calling Line Identification Restriction for ISDN BRI sets  
When an ISDN BRI set, with Calling Line Identification Restriction active,  
makes a nodal call to a CLASS set with Calling Name Delivery active, the  
calling name privacy indicator is delivered as the calling name.  
Conference/No Hold Conference  
When a set initiates a conference call to a CLASS set, the Calling Name  
and Number of the initiating set is delivered to the CLASS set.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature interactions 515  
Dial Intercom  
The CLASS Calling Name and Number class of service cannot be  
configured on Dial Intercom Group sets.  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
If a call is made to a CLASS set using DISA dialing, then the Calling Name  
and Number delivered to the CLASS set is that of the incoming trunk and  
not the DISA DN. This is consistent with the normal display function for  
DISA calls.  
Display of Calling Party Denied  
When a set with Display of Calling Party Denied active makes a nodal call  
to a CLASS set with Calling Number Delivery active, then the calling name  
privacy indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.  
Distinctive Ringing  
The normal delivery cycle for Calling Name and Number Delivery applies to  
calls presented to a CLASS set with distinctive ringing, that is, the Calling  
Name and Number Delivery information is delivered during the first silent  
period that is longer than two seconds.  
Flexible Numbering Plan (FNP) Enhancement  
For a customer equipped with the FNP package 160, the calling number  
delivered to the CLASS set can be of any length, up to 10 digits.  
For a customer not equipped with FNP, the following apply:  
•
For a station (set or attendant) making a call to a CLASS set, if the local  
public number is to be delivered to the CLASS set as the calling number  
of the calling station, then the system software will pad or truncate the  
calling number to be exactly seven digits long.  
•
For a station (set or attendant) making a call to a CLASS set, if the  
national number is to be delivered to the CLASS set as the calling  
number of the calling station, then the system software will pad or  
truncate the calling number to be exactly 10 digits long.  
•
For an incoming trunk call to a CLASS set, the incoming Calling Number  
Identification/Automatic Number Identification that is passed to the  
CLASS set be of any length, up to 10 digits.  
Group Call  
When a set makes a Group Call to a CLASS set with Calling Number  
Delivery active, the calling number unknown indicator is delivered in place  
of the calling number.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
516 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
When a set makes a Group Call to a CLASS set with Calling Name Delivery  
active, the calling name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling  
name.  
Hotline  
Hunt  
When a Hotline call is made to a CLASS, then the Calling Name and  
Number is delivered in the same manner as when a call is presented to  
the CLASS set using normal dialing.  
When a call is redirected to a CLASS set using Hunt, the Calling Name and  
Number of originating set, and not that of the redirecting set, is delivered to  
the CLASS set.  
Incremental Software Management  
While no new License limit is introduced by the CLASS feature, each  
CLASS modem unit TN is counted against the system TN limit and is  
reflected in the overlay banner.  
Feature Group D  
When an incoming Feature Group D trunk call is presented to a CLASS set  
with Calling Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the  
CLASS set is one of the following:  
•
If the Feature Group D trunk route is configured so as to not show  
the incoming ANI (SHAN = NO in LD 19), the calling number privacy  
indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.  
•
•
If no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator is  
delivered in place of the calling number.  
Otherwise, the incoming Feature Group D trunk ANI is directly delivered.  
In-Band ANI  
When an incoming In-Band ANI trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with  
Calling Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the CLASS  
set is one of the following:  
•
If no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator is  
delivered in place of the calling number.  
•
Otherwise, the incoming In-Band ANI is directly delivered.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Feature interactions 517  
Integrated Services Digital Network  
When an incoming Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) trunk call is  
presented to a CLASS set with Calling Number Delivery active, the calling  
number delivered to the CLASS set is one of the following:  
•
If the incoming CLID is defined as display denied (the originating set has  
Display Digit Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification  
Restriction active), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered  
in place of the calling number, or, if no CLID is passed in from the  
incoming trunk, then the calling number unknown indicator is delivered  
in place of the calling number.  
•
•
If no CLID is passed on by the incoming trunk, then the calling number  
unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.  
Otherwise, the CLID received from the incoming ISDN trunk is directly  
delivered. If the CLID is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is  
delivered.  
When an incoming ISDN trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling  
Name Delivery active, the calling name delivered to the CLASS set is one  
of the following:  
•
If the calling name is defined as presentation denied (the originating  
set has a Display Name Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line  
Identification Restriction active), then the calling name privacy indicator  
is delivered instead of the calling name.  
•
•
If no calling name is passed on by the incoming trunk, then the calling  
name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.  
Otherwise, the calling name received from the incoming ISDN trunk is  
directly delivered. If the calling name is longer than 15 characters, only  
the first 15 is delivered.  
Meridian 911  
When an incoming M911 trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling  
Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the CLASS set is  
one of the following:  
•
If no ANI is passed on, then the calling number unknown indicator is  
delivered in place of the calling number.  
•
Otherwise, the incoming ANI is directly delivered.  
Private Line Service  
When a Private Line Service call is made to a CLASS, then the Calling  
Name and Number is delivered in the same manner as when a call is  
presented to the CLASS set using normal dialing.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
518 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
VIP Automatic Wakeup  
When an attendant makes a VIP Automatic Wakeup call to a CLASS, then  
the Calling Name and Number is delivered in the same manner as when the  
attendant makes a call to the CLASS set using normal dialing.  
Virtual Network Services (VNS)  
When an incoming VNS trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling  
Number Delivery active, the calling number delivered to the CLASS set is  
one of the following:  
•
If the incoming CLID is defined as display denied (the originating set has  
Display Digit Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line Identification  
Restriction active), then the calling number privacy indicator is delivered  
in place of the calling number.  
•
•
If no CLID is passed on by the incoming VNS trunk, then the calling  
number unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling number.  
Otherwise, the CLID received from the incoming VNS trunk is directly  
delivered. If the CLID is longer than 10 digits, only the first 10 is  
delivered.  
When an incoming VNS trunk call is presented to a CLASS set with Calling  
Name Delivery active, the calling name delivered to the CLASS set is one  
of the following:  
•
If the calling name is defined as presentation denied (the originating  
set has a Display Name Denied, Calling Party Privacy, or Calling Line  
Identification Restriction active), then the calling name privacy indicator  
is delivered in place of the calling name.  
•
•
If no calling name is passed on by the incoming VNS trunk, then the  
calling name unknown indicator is delivered in place of the calling name.  
Otherwise, the calling name received from the incoming VNS trunk is  
directly delivered. If the calling name is longer than 15 characters, only  
the first 15 is delivered.  
Feature packaging  
The following packages are required for the CLASS Calling Name and  
Number Delivery feature:  
•
•
•
Calling Party Name Display (CPND) package 95  
CLASS Calling Number Delivery (CNUMB) package 332  
CLASS Calling Name Delivery (CNAME) package 333 and  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature implementation 519  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure the CLASS CLID parameters in the Customer Data  
Block." (page 519)  
Configure the CLASS CLID parameters in the Customer Data Block.  
2. "LD 10 - Configure the CLASS Calling Name and Calling Number  
Delivery Class of Service for Analog (50" (page 520)  
Configure the CLASS Calling Name and Calling Number Delivery Class  
of Service for Analog (500/2500 type) sets.  
3. "LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem  
units may be configured per system)." (page 521)  
Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may  
be configured per system).  
LD 15 - Configure the CLASS CLID parameters in the Customer Data Block.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change or delete existing data.  
Networking data.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
NET  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
...  
CLID  
CLID option.  
(NO)  
NO = (the default) do not configure a CLID table. In this case,  
the remaining prompts are not generated, and no CLID is sent  
for the customer.  
YES  
YES = configure a CLID table for the customer.  
Number of CLID entries required.  
- SIZE  
...  
0-(256)-4000  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
520 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
aaaa  
Xaaaa  
- ENTRY  
aaaa = CLID entry to be configured.  
Xaaaa = CLID entry to be deleted.  
Xaaaa Xbbbb  
<CR>  
Xaaaa Xbbbb = CLID entries to be deleted.  
aaaa and bbbb must be a value between 0 and (SIZE-1).  
The action for the entry is saved to system memory after the  
CLID entry has been completely configured. If an existing  
CLID entry is changed, the message "ENTRY aaaa SAVED" is  
displayed. If a CLID entry or CLID entries is/are deleted, the  
message "ENTRY aaaa DELETED" or "ENTRIES aaaa-bbbb  
DELETED" is displayed.  
...  
0-9999999  
X
- LSC  
Local steering code, 1-7 digits.  
X = delete digits.  
- - CLASS_F (DN)  
Send internal DN to a CLASS set as the calling number.  
Send local number to a CLASS set as the calling number.  
MT  
LCL  
Send National Number to a CLASS set as the calling number.  
NTN  
ENTRY aaaa SAVED  
Displayed message. Refer to the ENTRY prompt description.  
ENTRY aaaa DELETED  
ENTRIES aaaa-bbbb DELETED  
...  
You may print the CLASS_FMT information included in the CLID using LD  
21.  
You may print or count the station sets class of service using LD 81. This  
information would typically be used for billing purposes, to bill set users for  
calls according to the assigned class of service.  
LD 10 - Configure the CLASS Calling Name and Calling Number Delivery Class of Service for  
Analog (500/2500 type) sets.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature implementation 521  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
x..x yyyy  
DN  
Directory Number for this set (x..x) and CLID entry associated  
with this set (ENTRY configured in LD 15).  
(CNUD)  
CNUA  
CNUS  
(CNAD)  
CNAA  
CLASS Calling Number Delivery Denied.  
CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Format Allowed.  
CLASS Calling Number Single Data Format Allowed.  
CLASS Calling Name Delivery Denied.  
CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data Format Allowed.  
Refer to the section "Configure CND Class of Service on CLASS  
sets" (page 496) for details.  
These Class of Service entries are not valid for a Dial Intercom  
Group (DIG) set  
CLS  
...  
LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may be configured  
per system).  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CMOD  
1-127  
CLASS modem unit.  
DMOD  
Default Model number for this route for Small System and Media  
Gateway 1000B.  
TN  
Terminal number  
Note: Since the CLASS modem unit uses the octal-density  
Extended CLASS Modem Card (XCMC), up to 32 units can be  
configured on any XCMC card.  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
While no new License limit is introduced by the CLASS feature, each  
CLASS modem unit TN is counted against the system TN limit and is  
reflected in the overlay banner.  
You can print the CMOD unit information using LD 20.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
522 CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
523  
CLASS: Visual Message Waiting  
Indicator  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 523)  
"Operating parameters" (page 527)  
"Feature interactions" (page 528)  
"Feature packaging" (page 529)  
"Feature implementation" (page 529)  
"Feature operation" (page 531)  
Feature description  
The Custom Local Area Signaling Service (CLASS) Visual Message Waiting  
Indicator (VMWI) feature allows a CLASS set to receive a visual indication  
that messages are waiting. The visual indicator may be in the form of a  
lighting or flashing Light Emitting Diode (LED), or a special message on a  
liquid crystal display, or both. The type of visual indicator depends on the  
firmware of the CLASS set being used.  
For a non-Class set, lighting the Message Waiting Lamp through a high  
voltage message (Voltage Message Waiting) is still supported and operates  
in the same way as it did before.  
The visual indication message (an "ON/OFF" CLASS VMWI specific  
message) is delivered from the system to the CLASS sets using Frequency  
Shift Keying (FSK) signaling based on Bellcore specifications, using a  
CLASS modem (CMOD) unit. The CMOD units are configured using LD 13.  
Once configured, the CMOD units are shared throughout a multi-customer  
system. When an FSK message is presented to a CLASS set, an available  
CMOD unit is automatically allocated.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
524 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator  
After all messages are retrieved, the visual indicator is cleared. The CLASS  
VMWI feature will not be able to turn off the message waiting indicator  
until the CLASS set has returned to the idle state, even though all of the  
messages have been retrieved by the user.  
The CLASS VMWI feature supports the Bellcore Single Data Message  
Format (SDMF) and Multiple Data Message Format (MDMF) messaging.  
These formats are configured in the system database using LD 10. To use  
SDMF, a Class of Service of CNUS is required. For MDMF, a Class of  
Service of CNUA and/or CNAA is required.  
The following description outlines the general functionality of the CLASS  
VMWI feature.  
The following scenarios affect the sending of an ON or OFF message  
indicator to a CLASS set.  
If the CLASS set is idle:  
•
the ON/OFF message is sent immediately to the set.  
If the CLASS set is busy:  
•
as soon as the CLASS set becomes idle (goes on-hook), the system  
immediately sends the VMWI message to the set.  
If the CLASS set or CMOD unit is disabled (using LD 32 or 30), or no  
CMOD unit is available:  
•
the CLASS VMWI feature will automatically abort the VMWI message.  
The CLASS set is then checked every 10 seconds, for up to 2 1/2  
hours, until the set is detected to be idle. At that time, the system will  
immediately deliver the VMWI message.  
If a CLASS set is in the middle of receiving a VMWI message, and the  
CLASS set goes off-hook:  
•
the VMWI message is aborted. The CLASS set is checked every 10  
seconds, for up to 2 1/2 hours, until the set is detected to be idle. At that  
time, the system will immediately deliver the VMWI message.  
Note that, if the CLASS VMWI feature is waiting to send an "ON/OFF"  
message and another "ON/OFF" message is requested, only the last  
"ON/OFF" message is actually sent to the CLASS set.  
The CLASS VMWI feature supports Nortel and third party CLASS sets, if  
these sets are Bellcore VWMI compliant.  
The following figures depict a typical feature operation and system resource  
allocation scenario for a CLASS Visual Message Waiting Indication being  
presented to a CLASS set. Note that the representation is for an ON  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature description 525  
message being delivered to the CLASS set. The same operation and  
system resource allocation applies for an OFF message being sent, except  
that the contents of the message would be different.  
Figure 18  
CLASS set is in idle state  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
526 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator  
Figure 19  
CLASS VMWI ON message in the process of being delivered to the CLASS set  
Figure 20  
CLASS VMWI has been delivered to the CLASS set  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating parameters 527  
Operating parameters  
This feature has been developed for the North American residential market,  
as well as for the small business, hospitality, schools and universities,  
nursing homes and hospitals, and mobile home markets.  
When a craftsperson uses LD 10 to administer a service change to a  
CLASS set, if the system software identifies, during overlay wrap-up, that  
the CLASS VMWI feature is waiting to send a visual indication to the set  
being serviced, a SCH1099 message is generated, indicating that the VMWI  
pending message is lost and no retry is attempted. The service change  
itself does not trigger any messages to the set.  
Some CLASS sets, like Nortel’s M9000 series of sets, support both voltage  
and CLASS (FSK) Message Waiting. However, once the CLASS set is  
configured in LD 10, then the system will no longer send voltage messages  
to the set.  
If a CLASS set that previously used FSK messaging to receive Visual  
Message Waiting Indication has the Class of Service changed to be a  
non-CLASS set that uses Voltage Message Waiting, the visual indicator will  
not operate correctly. The following will occur:  
•
Voltage Message Waiting will work if the set is returned to the no  
message waiting state (visual indicator is dark) before switching over  
from FSK to voltage.  
•
Voltage message waiting will not work if the set is left at the message  
waiting state (visual indicator is lit) before switching from FSK to voltage.  
It is up to the craftsperson to ensure that a CLASS set is correctly configured  
to support the CLASS VMWI feature.  
Up to 255 CMOD units may be configured on a system. Once configured,  
the CMOD units are shared throughout a multi-customer system. When  
an FSK message is transmitted to a CLASS set, an available CMOD unit  
is automatically allocated.  
If a CLASS set with a lit message waiting indicator retrieves all of its  
messages, the CLASS VMWI feature will not be able to turn off the message  
waiting indicator until the CLASS set has returned to the idle state.  
Lamp audit does not apply to the CLASS VMWI feature.  
There is a 2 1/2 hours time limit for a retry in the case of a pending message.  
Up to 255 CLASS modem units can be configured on a system, and up  
to 32 CLASS modem units can be configured on any Extended CLASS  
Modem card.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
528 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Console  
When a CLASS set that is on a call with the attendant goes on-hook, the  
call will not be released until the attendant releases the call. The CLASS  
VMWI feature will wait until the call is actually disconnected before sending  
the VMWI message to the CLASS set that had already gone on-hook  
Call Party Control Incoming  
When a CLASS set on an active call is placed in Call Party Control Incoming  
(CPCI) state, the set will not be presented with any other incoming call. The  
CLASS VMWI feature will not send the VMWI message to the CLASS set to  
turn the visual indication ON or OFF, until the set releases the active call.  
Make Set Busy  
When a CLASS set is in the Make Set Busy state, the set will not be  
presented with incoming calls. Although no incoming calls are presented to  
the set, VMWI message can still be sent to the CLASS set to turn the visual  
indication ON or OFF, as long as the set is in the idle and on-hook state.  
Meridian Mail  
The CLASS VMWI feature makes use of Meridian Mail by having the  
Meridian Mail functionality communicate with the system to inform the  
CLASS set to turn the visual message waiting indicator ON or OFF. The  
system software determines the appropriate type of protocol based on the  
configuration of the CLASS set, and sends it to the set to turn the visual  
message waiting indicator ON or OFF.  
Message Waiting  
In order to support the CLASS VMWI functionality on a CLASS set, the  
Message Waiting feature has been enhanced to turn the message waiting  
indicator ON or OFF on the CLASS set through FSK signalling.  
In addition, the CLASS VMWI feature can interwork with Stuttered Dial Tone.  
The Stuttered Dial Tone functionality (which is part of the Flexible Tones  
and Cadences feature) provides an audible indication, rather than a visual  
one, that a message is waiting. It is configured separately from the CLASS  
VMWI feature, using the Class of Service (CLS) prompt in LD 10. If the LPA  
(Lamp Allowed) response is entered, then a CLASS visual indication is sent.  
If the LPD (Lamp Denied) response is entered, then Stuttered Dial Tone is  
sent instead. Note that the Stuttered Dial Tone and CLASS visual indication  
are mutually exclusive. A CLASS set may receive either Visual or Stuttered  
Dial Tone as a message waiting indicator, but not both.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 529  
Permanent Hold  
When a CLASS set is placed on permanent hold, the set is still treated as  
though it is presented with a telephone call. The CLASS VMWI feature will  
not send the VMWI message to the CLASS set to turn the visual indication  
ON or OFF, until the set actually goes on-hook or the call is not presented to  
the set. At this time, VMWI message is sent to the CLASS set to update  
the visual message waiting status.  
Set Relocation  
When a CLASS set is relocated, the CLASS VMWI feature will lose the  
message when the set finishes the relocation. An SCH1099 error message  
is printed to indicate that the CLASS VMWI message is lost and no  
automatic retry is attempted.  
Feature packaging  
The following packages are required for the CLASS VMWI feature:  
•
•
•
Message Waiting Center (MWC) package 46  
CLASS Calling Number Delivery (CNUMB) package 332, or  
CLASS Calling Name Delivery (CNAME) package 333, and  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Configure a CLASS set as an analog (500/2500 type) set, and  
configure the required Class of " (page 529)  
Configure a CLASS set as an analog (500/2500 type) set, and configure  
the required Class of Service for the set.  
2. "LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem  
units may be configured per system)." (page 530)  
Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may  
be configured per system).  
LD 10 - Configure a CLASS set as an analog (500/2500 type) set, and configure the required  
Class of Service for the set.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change existing data.  
Telephone type  
Terminal number  
500  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
530 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
xx  
CUST  
...  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
xxxx  
DN  
...  
Directory Number for the set  
CLS  
Class of Service for the CLASS set  
MWA  
LPD  
Message Waiting Allowed.  
Visual Indication (Lamp) Denied.  
At least one of the following CLASS CLS must be allowed.  
CNUA  
CNUS  
CNAA  
CLASS Calling Number Multiple Data Format Allowed.  
CLASS Calling Number Single Data Format Allowed.  
CLASS Calling Name Multiple Data Format Allowed.  
...  
LD 13 - Configure the CLASS modem unit (up to 255 CLASS modem units may be configured  
per system).  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add new data  
Change existing data.  
TYPE  
CMOD  
1-127  
CLASS modem unit.  
DMOD  
Default Model number for this route for Small System and Media  
Gateway 1000B.  
TN  
Terminal number  
Since the CLASS modem unit uses the octal-density Extended  
CLASS Modem Card (XCMC), up to 32 units can be configured  
on any XCMC card  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
You may print the CMOD unit information using LD 20.  
Feature maintenance and diagnostics  
LD 30 and LD 32  
LD 30 and LD 32 handle CLASS VMWI messaging, in the case that a  
CMOD unit or a CLASS set is in the state of being disabled. Any CLASS  
VMWI message that is in progress is aborted. A check every 10 seconds,  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 531  
for up to 2 1/2 hours, is done on the CLASS set until another CMOD unit is  
found or the CLASS set is enabled, before a VMWI message is actually sent  
to the set to perform visual indication.  
LD 77  
LD 77 is used to monitor CLASS VMWI messaging.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
532 CLASS: Visual Message Waiting Indicator  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
533  
CLID Name Enhancement and CLID B  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
534 CLID Name Enhancement and CLID B  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
535  
CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong  
(A-CLID)  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 535)  
"Operating parameters" (page 538)  
"Feature interactions" (page 539)  
"Feature packaging" (page 540)  
"Feature implementation" (page 540)  
"Feature operation" (page 541)  
Feature description  
With the Calling Line Identification on Analog Trunks (A-CLID) feature and  
the DXUT-A card (NTRB37AA), on an incoming Central Office (CO) call, the  
system can extract information such as:  
•
•
•
Calling Party Number  
Calling Party Name  
Reason for absence of Calling Party Number or Name (if necessary)  
The A-CLID information is treated similar to ISDN CLID for delivery to other  
modules and applications in the system, including the display on digital  
telephones and consoles at the local node and other network nodes (if any).  
You can enable or disable A-CLID on an individual trunk port basis.  
The A-CLID information passes to the terminating party, which includes:  
•
Trunks — ISDN (PRI/BRI/QSIG), R2MFC (DTI/DTI2, Analog)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
536 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)  
— Calling Party Number information can be tandemed over all ISDN  
and R2MFC interfaces  
— Calling Party Name information can be tandemed only on SL1 and  
QSIG ISDN interfaces. R2MFC does not support name information.  
•
•
Terminals — attendant consoles, telephones (CLASS, 2208 with display,  
2216, 2616, 2317, 5317, M3902, M3903, M3904, M3905)  
Applications — CallPilot, Customer Controlled routing, Meridian Mail,  
Meridian Link, Symposium Call Center Server (calling party number  
only)  
Figure 21 "System structure for CLID delivery" (page 537) describes the  
feature operation.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Feature description 537  
Figure 21  
System structure for CLID delivery  
Table 11 "Format of CLI information" (page 538) shows the display format  
for different combinations of analog CLI information.  
If you do not receive the calling number ("P" or "O" is received as the reason  
for absence), the display shows the P/O route access code number and  
member number.  
If you do not receive the calling name ("P" or "O" is received as the reason  
for absence), then the display shows "PRIVATE" or "UNAVAILABLE".  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
538 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)  
If you do not receive either the calling name, or its reason for absence, then  
the display shows "UNAVAILABLE".  
Table 11  
Format of CLI information  
Reason for  
Absence of  
Calling  
Reason for  
Absence of  
Calling Name  
Display Format  
Calling Number  
Calling Name  
Number  
-
-
491893021  
JOHN SMITH  
JOHN SMITH  
491893021  
-
-
"O "  
"O "  
"O "  
"P "  
PAY PHONE  
PAY PHONE  
O-8015-1  
-
-
-
-
-
-
UNAVAILABLE  
O-8015-1  
-
"O "  
UNAVAILABLE  
O-8015-1  
-
-
UNAVAILABLE  
P-8015-1  
PRIVATE  
-
"P "  
"P "  
P-8015-1  
P = Private  
O = Other  
Operating parameters  
The A-CLID feature is only for incoming loop start trunks (both supervised  
and non-supervised) in Hong Kong.  
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunks do not support the A-CLID feature.  
A-CLID requires one mode: On-hook data transmission with ring.  
If you initialize the system while the CLID information is transferring from the  
DXUT-A card to software:  
•
•
you lose all CLID information not sent.  
you lose the unestablished call (a call is established after the software  
receives the complete CLID information).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature interactions 539  
If the call is established, and you initialize the system, the call is restored.  
However, maintaining the displayed information is not guaranteed.  
If system initialization occurs after the A-CLID call is in the agent queue, the  
ACD module must display the CLID information after the call is established.  
If the cyclic redundancy check (CRC) fails, the call terminates without  
displaying the CLID ("UNAVAILABLE" and "O-Route access code number -  
Member number" for name and number display).  
If data transmission stops halfway, the call terminates without displaying  
the CLID ("UNAVAILABLE" and "O-Route access code number - Member  
number" for name and number displays).  
The system can receive, process, and display alphanumeric characters as  
CLI information. No CLI information displays if the CO transmits information  
in another format.  
A maximum display of 20 digits and 27 characters is possible with this  
feature.  
When the call is tandemed to an ISDN/MFC trunk, only the first 16 digits  
of A-CLID passes on.  
This feature does not change the functionality of R2-MFC trunks. R2-MFC  
trunks display the route access code number when the CLI information is  
not available, and not the member number.  
If the system receives unrecognized messages or parameter types, the call  
terminates without displaying the CLID ("UNAVAILABLE" and "O-Route  
access code number - Member number" for name and number displays).  
The A-CLID feature delays the occurrence of the first ring. The terminating  
set rings when the complete FSK message is received, or the software  
times out waiting for the FSK message.  
When a DISA call is abandoned, the CO trunks is busy for a short period of  
time before disconnecting. This is characteristic of CO trunks.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Call Extension  
If an attendant extends a call from an incoming A-CLID CO trunk, the  
terminating set receives the analog CLI information.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
540 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)  
CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery  
The analog CLI information is given to the XCMC service pack to provide  
number and name display to analog CLASS telephones. The CLASS  
telephones can only display the CLI information when the incoming CO call  
is auto-terminated on that telephone.  
For calls terminating on a CLASS set, only the:  
•
•
calling party number and name information display.  
first 15 characters of the information display.  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)  
If a user connects to the system through Direct Inward System Access  
(DISA) dialing, the incoming trunk information is passed, not the DISA DN  
information.  
Information Notification Service for Japan  
The A-CLID feature does not work with the Information Notification Service  
for Japan (INS-J) feature.  
Private Line Service  
A-CLID information does display on the telephone.  
Feature packaging  
This feature requires Analog Calling Line Identification (ACLI) package 349.  
Feature implementation  
Use the Calling Line Identification Allowed (CLIA) Class of Service (CLS) in  
LD 14 to activate the A-CLID feature on an individual port basis.  
If EXUT is configured on a DXUT-A card pack, and the ACLI package is  
equipped, then the default CLS is Calling Line Identification Denied (CLID)  
for all incoming CO trunks to that card.  
LD 14 - Configure analog CLI.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
CHG  
Change existing data block.  
NEW x  
Add new data block to the system. Follow NEW with a  
value of 1-255 to create that number of consecutive trunks.  
TYPE  
....  
COT  
....  
Central Office Trunk data block.  
Enhanced Extended CO trunk card.  
Loop start  
XTRK  
....  
EXUT  
....  
SIGL  
LOP  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature operation 541  
Prompt  
....  
Response  
Description  
....  
CLS  
Class of Service options for trunks.  
Calling Line Identification Allowed  
CLIA  
(CLID)  
Calling Line Identification Denied (default)  
....  
....  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
542 CLID on Analog Trunks for Hong Kong (A-CLID)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
543  
Collect Call Blocking  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 543)  
"Operating parameters" (page 545)  
"Feature interactions" (page 546)  
"Feature packaging" (page 548)  
"Feature implementation" (page 549)  
"Feature operation" (page 553)  
Feature description  
In Brazil an automatic long distance collect call service called DDC is  
available. The Collect Call Blocking feature enables a system administrator  
to block DDC calls on incoming Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and Public  
Exchange/Central Office trunks (analog or DTI2). Under the following  
conditions, the system sends a special answer signal to the Central Office  
to indicate to the Central Office that collect calls cannot be accepted:  
•
•
The Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 is enabled  
The incoming route has CCB enabled using the CCB prompt in the  
Route Data Block, and  
•
The call is answered by a CCB user (that is, Collect Call Blocking  
Allowed Class of Service or option).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
544 Collect Call Blocking  
Classes of Service and prompts have been introduced to inhibit specific  
users from receiving collect DID and Central Office calls. These can be  
configured for the following:  
•
•
analog (500/2500 type) telephones and Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones through the Collect Call Blocking Allowed/Denied  
(CCBA/CCBD) Class of Service.  
Attendant and Network Alternate Route Selection calls on a per  
customer basis through CCBA/CCBD option.  
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) queues through the CCBA prompt.  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) through the CCBA prompt.  
Tandem calls dialed with Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) (Trunk  
Steering Code, Distant Steering Code) through the CCBA prompt.  
•
Tandem non-CDP calls through the CCBA prompt in the Route Data  
Block from the outgoing trunk route.  
The system sends the CCB answer signal in place of the regular signal  
for incoming DID/CO calls from routes with CCB enabled, when a call is  
answered by a CCB user. If the call is a collect call, the CO will disconnect  
the call.  
Figure 22  
Collect Call Blocking answer signal compared to regular answer signal  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operating parameters 545  
Operating parameters  
The Collect Call Blocking feature supports both analog and DTI2 trunks,  
and the following Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) cards:  
•
•
•
the NTCK16BB Extended Flexible COT Trunk Card (XFCOT) with  
firmware flash timing  
the NT8D14BA Enhanced Extended Universal Trunk Card (EXUT)  
containing the Centrex Switchhook Flash function in the firmware, and  
the NT8K14AK Extended Universal Trunk Card (XUT) which may be  
used if the Centrex Switchhook Flash is configured with software timing.  
The Collect Call Blocking answer signal can only be sent in cases where  
answer supervision is provided by the system.  
Once the modified answer signal is sent to the CO, the system has no  
control over how the call is handled by the CO.  
If a CCB user answers a call from a CO/DID route with Collect Call Blocking  
activated, the CCB answer signal is sent to the CO for all incoming DID and  
CO calls. For analog trunks, the user will experience clicking on the line  
and a temporary break is speechpath (0.5 to 2.5 seconds) while the CCB  
answer signal is being sent.  
If the XFCOT and EXUT cards do not have flexible firmware timing, the  
CCB flash portion of the CCB answer signal is ignored by firmware, and the  
regular answer signal is returned to the CO. However, software controlled  
signaling can be done with EXUT cards.  
In a standalone environment, all input from a set (except from the Release  
key) is ignored while the Collect Call Blocking answer signal is being sent.  
Collect Call Blocking is applied to attendants on a customer basis only; it  
cannot be applied on a tenant basis.  
The answer signal returned for a call from a route with CCB enabled and that  
is Network Attendant Service (NAS) routed is determined by the customer  
option on the source node. Thus, NAS routing can be configured across  
any Meridian Customer Defined Network environment, but the source node  
determines the answer supervision sent to the CO.  
Call Detail Recording (CDR) record timing begins on the first answer of the  
CCB answer sequence. For this reason, CDR records is generated for  
incoming calls to CCB users across routes on which CCB is enabled. If  
the call is collect, and is dropped, a CDR record of approximately CCB1 +  
CCB2 length is generated.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
546 Collect Call Blocking  
For data calls, all calls is answered with the CCB answer signal, if CCB is  
enabled. This may have an effect on data protocols, while CCB signaling  
is taking place.  
If firmware timing is used (FWTM = YES in Overlay14) for sending the  
CCB flash, the CCB2 timer is downloaded to the card before sending the  
firmware flash. If the CCB2 timer is changed in the Route Data Block, either  
the card has to be enabled or the switch has to be initialized to get the new  
CCB2 timer downloaded to the card.  
Feature interactions  
Automatic Answerback  
The Automatic Answerback (AAB) feature, when assigned to a Meridian 1  
proprietary telephone, allows any incoming call to a single-appearance  
Prime Directory Number (PDN) to be answered automatically. If an  
incoming DID or CO call terminates on a set with the AAB feature enabled,  
the call is automatically answered after one ring. If the set has a CCBA  
Class of Service, the CCB answer signal is provided in the place of the  
regular answer signal.  
Automatic Call Distribution  
Collect Call Blocking can be enabled on an ACD queue basis. Hence, if  
an incoming CO or DID call is answered by an ACD agent, the answer  
supervision signal that is returned to the CO is determined by the value of  
the CCBA prompt in LD 23. While the CCB answer signal is being sent, the  
same limitations apply to ACD as apply to sets with CCBA Class of Service.  
Automatic Call Distribution Interflow  
If an ACD call from a route with CCB enabled is diverted to an interflow DN,  
and answer supervision has not already been provided, the answer signal  
returned to the CO depends on the source ACD queue. The CCB answer  
signal is returned to the CO if the source ACD queue has CCB enabled.  
Automatic Call Distribution Night Call Forward  
During Night Call Forward (ACD) call processing, the source ACD queue is  
removed or overwritten. Therefore, the CCB treatment given is based on  
the queue the call happens to be in at the time the call is answered.  
Automatic Call Distribution Night RAN Route Announcement  
If an ACD call from a route with CCB enabled is diverted to a Night RAN  
route (defined by NRRT in the ACD block), the CCB signal returned to the  
CO depends on the source ACD queue. If the source ACD queue has CCB  
enabled, the CCB answer signal is sent to the CO.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature interactions 547  
Automatic Call Distribution Overflow  
If an ACD call from a route with CCB enabled is diverted to an overflow ACD  
DN and answer supervision has not already been provided, the answer  
signal returned to the CO depends on the source ACD queue from where  
the call came. If the source ACD queue has CCB enabled, the CCB signal  
is sent to the CO.  
Autoterminate  
If an incoming DID or CO call from an autoterminate trunk terminates on a  
set or ACD queue with a CCBA Class of Service, the CCB answer signal  
is provided in place of the regular answer signal.  
Basic Rate Interface (BRI) Sets  
For BRI sets CCBA/CCBD Class of Service cannot be programmed.  
Therefore, it is not possible to prevent BRI sets from accepting DDC collect  
calls.  
Central Answering Position  
The answer signal returned to the CO for calls that get answered by a Central  
Answering Position (CAP) is determined by the source ACD configuration  
and not the customer option (CCBA/CCBD in LD 15) on the source node.  
Centralized Attendant Service  
The answer signal returned to the CO for calls that get answered by a  
Centralized Attendant Service is determined by the customer option  
(CCBA/CCDB in LD 15) on the source node.  
Centrex Switchhook Flash  
A Centrex Switchhook Flash cannot be invoked by another feature while the  
CCB answer signal is being sent.  
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced  
If a station activates Malicious Call Trace (MCT) while the CCB answer  
signal is being sent, MCT activation is ignored. This also applies to the case  
when MCT is activated from a remote node.  
Meridian Mail  
Because Meridian Mail is configured using ACD queues, the same  
interactions exist as in the ACD case. When Meridian Mail sends a call  
answer message to the system, the CCB configuration in the source ACD  
queue is used to determine if a CCB answer signal should be sent to  
the Central Office. All mail boxes using the same ACD queue to access  
Meridian Mail will get the same CCB treatment.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
548 Collect Call Blocking  
If some of the mail boxes are allowed to receive collect calls, this may be a  
problem. A possible solution is to configure two ACD queues on the system  
to access Meridian Mail. One queue would have collect calls allowed and  
the second queue would have collect calls denied.  
Network Automatic Call Distribution  
The answer signal returned to the CO for a network ACD call from a route  
with CCB enabled is determined by the source ACD queue. If the source  
ACD queue has CCB enabled, the CCB answer signal is returned in place  
of the regular answer signal.  
Pilot DN  
If an incoming DID or CO call has CCB enabled and is routed to a pilot  
DN, the answer signal returned to the CO is determined by the CCB  
configuration of the terminating station.  
Private Line Service  
If an incoming DID or CO call from a private line trunk terminates on a set  
with a CCBA Class of Service, the CCB answer signal is provided in place  
of the regular answer signal.  
Recorded Announcement  
A Recorded Announcement (RAN) route is defined as having CCBA YES or  
NO, which is used if Coordinated Dialing Plan (CDP) or ACD queues were  
not used to get to the RAN route. If the call is routed through ACD/CDP to  
terminate on RAN, the CCB treatment will depend upon the CCB data of the  
ACD/CDP, and not of the RAN route.  
Tandem to Unsupervised Trunk  
If an incoming DID or CO call tandems to an unsupervised trunk before  
it terminates, the answer signal is sent by timeout. Therefore, any CCB  
tandem calls made to unsupervised trunks will not have the CCB answer  
signal sent until the timeout occurs.  
Trunk Hook Flash  
If a station activates Trunk Hook Flash (THF) while the CCB answer signal  
is being sent, THF activation is ignored.  
Feature packaging  
Collect Call Blocking (CCB) package 290 must be provisioned to activate  
this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature implementation 549  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 16 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on a route and configure timers."  
(page 549)  
Enable Collect Call Blocking on a route and configure timers.  
2. "LD 14 - Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards." (page  
550)  
Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards.  
3. "LD 15 - Allow Collect Call Blocking for attendants." (page 551)  
Allow Collect Call Blocking for attendants.  
4. "LD 10 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones." (page 551)  
Enable Collect Call Blocking for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
5. "LD 11 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 551)  
Enable Collect Call Blocking for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
6. "LD 23 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on ACD queues." (page 552)  
Enable Collect Call Blocking on ACD queues.  
7. "LD 24 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on DISA blocks." (page 552)  
Enable Collect Call Blocking on DISA blocks.  
8. "LD 87 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on CDP Steering codes." (page  
552)  
Enable Collect Call Blocking on CDP Steering codes.  
LD 16 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on a route and configure timers.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ROUT  
RDB  
xx  
Route Data Block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Route number  
0-511  
0-127  
aaa  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Trunk type. Must be COT, DID, FEX, or WAT for CCB.  
TKTP  
...  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
550 Collect Call Blocking  
Prompt  
M911_ANI  
...  
Response  
Description  
NO  
M911 route. Must be set to NO to enable CCB.  
ISDN  
...  
NO  
ISDN route. Must be set to NO to enable CCB.  
ICOG  
IAO ICT OGT  
Incoming and outgoing, incoming, or outgoing. Must be  
either IAO or ICT to enable CCB.  
Must be either IAO or OGT to get the CCBA prompt for  
outgoing calls.  
...  
CNTL  
...  
(NO) YES  
(NO) YES  
Change to controls or to timers.  
CCB  
Collect Call Blocking enabled or disabled on incoming  
route. CCB package 290 is required. Enter YES to obtain  
CCB timer prompts.  
CCB1  
CCB2  
512-(1536)-4992  
500-(1520)-2550  
Collect Call Blocking delay timer 1 in milliseconds. Input  
rounded to the next multiple of 128 milliseconds.  
Collect Call Blocking delay timer 2 in milliseconds. Input  
rounded to the next multiple of 10 milliseconds. If any CCB  
route members (trunks) are using firmware timing (FWTM  
= YES in LD 14), changes to the CCB2 timer value will not  
take effect until the new timer value is downloaded to the  
card. This can be done by enabling the card or initializing  
the switch.  
CCBA  
(NO) YES  
Collect Call Blocking allowed or denied for outgoing route.  
LD 14 - Setup the firmware timing for XFCOT and EXUT cards.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
TYPE  
TN  
DID COT FEX  
WAT  
Trunk Type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
XTRK  
EXUT  
XCOT  
Type of card.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature implementation 551  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
FWTM  
(NO) YES  
Firmware timing for flash. Enter YES to enable firmware  
timing.  
xx  
CUST  
RTMB  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Route number and Member Number  
0-511 1-4000  
0-127 1-4000  
YES  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Answer supervision required.  
SUPN  
LD 15 - Allow Collect Call Blocking for attendants.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
FTR  
Features and options  
Customer number  
For Large Systems  
For Small Systems  
0-99  
0-31  
- OPT  
CCBA  
Allow Collect Call Blocking.  
CCBD = Default  
LD 10 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
500  
TYPE:  
TN  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
...  
CLS  
(CCBD) CCBA  
(Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.  
LD 11 - Enable Collect Call Blocking for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ:  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
a...a  
TYPE:  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
552 Collect Call Blocking  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
...  
CLS  
(CCBD) CCBA  
(Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.  
LD 23 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on ACD queues.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ACDN  
...  
ACD  
xx  
ACD data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
ACD Directory Number.  
xxxx  
CCBA  
(NO) YES  
(Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.  
LD 24 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on DISA blocks.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
TYPE  
CUST  
...  
DIS  
xx  
DISA data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
xxxxxxx  
DN  
DISA Directory Number.  
...  
CCBA  
(NO) YES  
(Deny) allow CCB answer signal to be sent.  
LD 87 - Enable Collect Call Blocking on CDP Steering codes.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
NEW  
CHG  
Add.  
Change.  
xx  
CUST  
FEAT  
TYPE  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Coordinated Dialing Plan.  
Steering code type.  
CDP  
TSC DSC  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 553  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
CCBA  
(NO) YES  
(Deny) allow Collect Call Blocking.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
554 Collect Call Blocking  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
555  
Conference Warning Tone  
Enhancement  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 555)  
"Operating parameters" (page 556)  
"Feature Interactions" (page 556)  
"Feature packaging" (page 556)  
"Feature implementation" (page 556)  
"Feature operation" (page 558)  
Feature description  
The Conference Warning Tone Enhancement feature was developed to  
meet the Italian requirements to distinguish between a conference warning  
tone and a true intrusion. A Conference Warning Tone warns users that  
they are involved in a conference connection. An Intrusion Tone warns  
users involved in a conference of an intrusion into their connection.  
Prior to this development, the Intrusion Tone was also used as a Conference  
Warning Tone, and the two tones could only be distinguished by their  
cadences, not by their tone frequency. With this feature, a separate  
Conference Warning Tone can be defined, with its tone and cadence defined  
in LD 56. This tone and cadence can only be programmed in Flexible Tones  
and Cadences (FTC) table 0.  
The Conference Warning Tone can be enabled or disabled using the CWFT  
prompt in LD 97. When the tone is enabled, a permanent speech path  
connection is placed from the tone circuit to the conference circuit to provide  
the tone to all parties connected in a conference. The tone and cadence  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
556 Conference Warning Tone Enhancement  
for the Conference Warning Tone can be programmed to be distinctively  
different from the tone and cadence produced by the Intrusion Tone given  
by such features as Barge-In, Break-In, or Busy Verify.  
Operating parameters  
This feature only applies to the Cabinet system.  
The Conference Warning Tone will only be contained and defined within  
FTC Table 0. All other FTC tables will not contain any references to the  
Conference Warning Tone and this tone cannot be copied to any other FTC  
table by a numbered response to the DFLT (Default to existing FTC tone  
table) prompt in LD 56. Since existing code does not allow FTC table 0 to  
be deleted, there is no danger of deleting the Conference Warning Tone.  
For cadence tables, table numbers above 15 should be chosen for the  
Conference Warning Tone, because cadence tables numbers below 15 are  
influenced by Software Controlled table numbers.  
Feature Interactions  
Tones and Cadences  
There are no changes to the limitations to cadence numbers entry values.  
The same restriction still applies.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Feature implementation  
Note: When upgrading from a CS 1000S to a CS 1000E in Release 5.0,  
if CFWT in LD 56 has a value other than 0, then conference warning  
tones is enabled following the upgrade. After the upgrade, the CFWT  
prompt is not available in LD 97. The conference warning tone must be  
enabled/disabled and configured in LD 56.  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
•
•
•
"LD 56 - Configure Conference Warning Tone" (page 557)  
Configure Conference Warning Tone.  
"LD 97 - Enable Conference Warning Tone" (page 557)  
Enable Conference Warning Tone.  
"LD 34 - Enable Conference Warning Tone" (page 557)  
Enable Conference Warning Tone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 557  
LD 56 - Configure Conference Warning Tone  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
FTC  
Description  
Modify existing data.  
TYPE  
TABL  
Flexible Tones and Cadences data block.  
0
FTC table number 0. Only table number 0 can be used to  
make changes to the Conference Warning Tone.  
...  
RING  
HCCT  
NO  
Modify the ringing feature definitions.  
YES  
Modification of the hardware controlled cadence tone  
definitions allowed.  
...  
- EEST  
- CFWT  
- - XTON  
NO  
End-to-end Signaling type.  
Conference Warning Tone.  
0-(3)-255  
The Conference Warning Tone number. A tone number  
provided by the tone circuit.  
- - XCAD  
0-(19)-255  
The Conference Warning Tone cadence number. Cadence  
number must have been previously set up within LD 56 by  
responding to the TYPE prompt with FCAD.  
LD 97 - Enable Conference Warning Tone  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Modify existing data.  
TYPE  
CPAD  
XCTP  
Conference/TDS/MF Sender card parameters.  
Conference pad values.  
(0)  
1
Use software pad values.  
Use pad values defined by switch settings.  
DTMF  
CFWT  
0-(14)-255  
Tone table of the first Dual-tone Multifrequency digit to be  
used.  
(NO) YES  
(Disable) enable Conference Warning Tone.  
Note: For CS 1000E Release 5.0 and later, LD 34 must be  
used to Enable/Disable Conference Warning Tone.  
LD 34 - Enable Conference Warning Tone  
Description  
Command  
ENLX l  
Enable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1.  
Disable Conf/TDS/MFS card on loop l and l + 1.  
DISX l  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
558 Conference Warning Tone Enhancement  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
559  
Conference  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 559)  
"Operating parameters" (page 560)  
"Feature interactions" (page 561)  
"Feature packaging" (page 570)  
"Feature implementation" (page 571)  
"Feature operation" (page 572)  
Feature description  
Conference adds additional parties to an established call. The maximum  
is three or six, depending on the Conference feature assigned to the  
conference call originator. Not all conference parties have to be local to the  
system, although one party must be an internal Directory Number (DN)  
to uphold the conference connection. The attendant can also establish  
six-party conferences.  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones require a separate Conference 3 or  
Conference 6 key/lamp pair. M2317 sets establish conference calls by  
means of a softkey. Analog (500/2500 type) telephones use the switchhook  
to establish a three-party conference.  
The six-party Conference (C6A) Class of Service enables analog (500/2500  
type) telephones to establish a six-party conference, which operates the  
same as a three-party conference, with the exception of Conference Control  
operation.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
560 Conference  
Conference Control disconnects an unwanted third party (trunk only) from a  
three-party conference. Analog (500/2500 type) telephone users implement  
this feature by means of switchhook flash. Telephones with the six-party  
conference capability implement Conference Control by dialing SPRE + 87.  
It is recommended that all analog (500/2500 type) telephones have either the  
three-party conference (C6D) Class of Service or the six-party Conference  
(C6A) Class of Service to avoid confusion when using Conference Control.  
Operating parameters  
Due to the possibility of getting annoying noise (squealing, for example)  
when two or more trunks are involved in a conference, it is strongly  
recommended that no more that two trunks be involved in the process.  
At least one party in the conference must be a telephone on the local  
system for the duration of the conference call.  
Attendant Administration does not support the implementation of six-party  
conference for analog (500/2500 type) telephones. An error message is  
displayed if an attempt is made to remove Transfer Allowed (XFA) Class of  
Service for analog (500/2500 type) telephones with a C6A Class of Service.  
A Transfer allowed (XFA) Class of Service is required for a three-party  
conference (C6D) and is also a prerequisite for the six-party conference  
Class of Service (C6A) on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Dial access of Conference Control is provided only for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones with a C6A Class of Service.  
The number of time slots is limited to 30 per conference loop. For Small  
Systems, a maximum of five simultaneous conferences, each consisting of  
six conference users, is supported per conference loop.  
Double conferences are blocked to avoid conference chains (that is, set  
A and set B are on an established call. The user of set B presses the  
Conference key to call set C. Any attempt by set C to initiate another  
conference is blocked if set B has not yet completed the conference).  
While the originating side of a call is linked to a transfer or conference key  
(that is, the originator of a transfer/conference call has not yet completed  
the transfer/conference), the terminating side cannot initiate a transfer or  
conference. Conference calls cannot be transferred.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature interactions 561  
A warning tone is available for conference calls. When the option is enabled,  
the tone lets callers know that they are entering a conference call. The  
switch for this option is preset to disable the warning tone. For information  
on the switch settings for the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, refer to Circuit  
Card Reference (NN43001-311).  
Feature interactions  
500/2500 Line Disconnect  
If one of the parties in the conference is connected to a 500/2500 port that is  
in turn connected to a Voice Response Unit (VRU), dial tone is provided to  
the 500/2500 port when all the other parties in the conference disconnect.  
This feature enhancement applies in the same way to Call Transfer and  
Hunting.  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Meridian 1  
The use of the Conference key does not activate the AC15 Recall: Transfer  
from Meridian 1 feature. Conference call is not supported because it is not  
possible to have two parties on the same trunk.  
AC15 Recall: Timed Reminder Recall  
The conference feature is sometimes used to perform a transfer when  
a controlling party establishes a call, the controlling party establishes a  
conference with a third party and releases, and a call is established between  
the two remaining parties.  
If an established call is extended over a trunk to initiate a conference call,  
this conference call cannot be set up if this trunk has answer supervision  
and the called extension has not answered. The AC15 Timed Reminder  
Recall feature cannot be activated by using the conference feature to extend  
a call over an AC15 TIE trunk, because the AC15 TIE trunk must have  
answer supervision and the called extension must be ringing.  
AC15 Recall: Transfer from Norstar  
It is not possible in any situation with Transfer from Norstar to establish a  
three-party conference. It is not possible for an AC15 trunk to initiate a  
consultation if it is involved in a conference.  
Advice of Charge for EuroISDN  
If a set is participating in a conference, no charge is displayed for that set.  
Whenever an ISDN CO trunks that provides Advice of Charge (AOC) is  
added to a conference, the call charging information, received from the  
network, accumulates against the set that initiates the call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
562 Conference  
Once the last set involved in a conference call disconnects, a search is  
made of all trunks remaining in the conference call to determine which trunk  
has been established in the call for the longest period of time. This trunk  
becomes the chargeable TN. Once this trunk disconnects, the process is  
repeated so a new chargeable TN can be located.  
Attendant Barge-In  
Attendant Busy Verify  
Conference Control cannot be activated if an attendant has used Barge-In  
or Busy Verify during a conference that involves a trunk.  
Attendant Break-In  
If the attendant cannot break in to a conference call because the call is  
supporting the maximum number of callers, busy tone continues and the  
Break-In key lamp flashes.  
Attendant Console  
Three-party Conference (C6D) allows analog (500/2500 type) telephones on  
established calls to flash the switchhook and Dial 0 to talk to the attendant.  
Six-party conference users follow the same sequence, but the conference  
loop is seized and the call is treated as a conference call. When only two  
parties remain from the conference, the call is returned to a simple call if  
neither of the remaining parties is an attendant console.  
Attendant Overflow Position  
An Attendant Overflow Position (AOP) call answered on an AOP DN may  
be conferenced with another DN.  
Autodial Tandem Transfer  
The Autodial Tandem Transfer feature is blocked during Conference and  
No Hold Conference calls.  
Automatic Redial  
When an Automatic Redial (ARDL) call is not accepted by the calling party,  
the Conference (A03 or A06) key is ignored.  
B34 Codec Static Loss Plan Downloading  
B34 Dynamic Loss Switching  
When a conference connection is established, no pads are switched in on  
the trunk side; any extra loss that is required is provided by the conference  
circuit based on an algorithm which takes into account the number of lines  
and trunks.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 563  
Call Forward All Calls  
On analog (500/2500 type) telephones, Call Forward All Calls can be  
activated or canceled during a conference call.  
Call Forward by Call Type  
Calls modified by Conference receive Call Forward by Call Type treatment  
for the conferenced telephone. If party A calls party B, and B tries to  
conference in party C, the forwarding DN and Class of Service are that of C.  
For example, Joan and Bob are in conversation, and they try to conference  
in Mack. Mack is not at his desk, so the attempted conference call is sent to  
the destination associated with Mack’s telephone.  
Call Page Network Wide  
A station set or attendant console that conferences an external Call Page  
Network Wide (PAGENET) uncontrolled call is not blocked. However, an  
external PAGENET controlled call is blocked.  
Call Park  
A parked call can be accessed after Conference is activated  
Call Party Name Display  
When pressed during an active call, or to set up a conference, the  
Conference, Connect, or Join Parties key clears the display. The telephones  
involved in the conference have blank displays. If the conference returns  
to a two-way only call, each telephone displays the DN and name of the  
other telephone.  
Call Pickup  
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call. Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones can activate Call Pickup if an idle Directory Number  
(DN) key is available. The conference call must be put on hold before  
pressing the idle DN key to pick up the call.  
Call Pickup Network Wide  
Call Pickup Network Wide may be used to pickup an enquiry call from a  
conference, subject to the same limitations as apply to Call Transfer.  
Call Transfer  
Conference can be used to transfer calls, eliminating the need for a separate  
Call Transfer key/lamp pair on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones. Calls in  
the ringing state cannot be transferred with Conference. The third party  
must answer before the transfer can be completed.  
A conference can also be established after initiating a Call Transfer  
operation. After the third party answers, pressing the Conference key  
establishes a three-way conference.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
564 Conference  
When a switchhook flash transfers calls on analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones with three-party conference (C6A) Class of Service, the  
transferring party goes on hook, leaving the other two parties established.  
Telephones with a C6A Class of Service involved in a conference having  
more than three parties must add the last party to the conference, then flash  
the switchhook and go on hook to complete the transfer.  
Called Party Disconnect Control  
Trunks with Called Party Disconnect Control allowed are treated as trunks  
without disconnect supervision when conferenced.  
Calling Party Name Display Denied  
Call Party Name Display, and thus the Calling Party Name Display Denied  
enhancement, do not apply to conference calls.  
Calling Party Privacy  
The Calling Party Privacy (CPP) feature will pass the Privacy Indicator to the  
terminating set to inhibit the display of the Calling Party Name and Number  
if the Conference feature is used for the purpose of performing a transfer.  
Camp-On, Forced  
Telephones involved in Conference calls cannot be camped on to. Overflow  
tone is returned to telephones attempting Forced Camp-On.  
Centrex Switchhook Flash  
Centrex Switchhook Flash (THF) allows conference calls through the CO. It  
can be invoked only if there is an established call connected to an outside  
trunk. If the telephone is engaged in internal conference calls, THF cannot  
be used.  
Charge Account and Calling Party Name  
Conference calls produce multiple Call Detail Recording (CDR) records.  
Whenever a new trunk is added to a conference, the connection between  
the connected telephone and the trunk is recorded, and a connection to the  
conference loop is established. This causes CDR to generate a start record  
with the telephone and trunk identified as the involved parties. As trunks are  
removed from a conference, CDR end records are produced. These records  
may identify different telephones or conferences as the local parties.  
China - Attendant Monitor  
If any party involved in a monitored call attempts to activate conference,  
monitoring is immediately deactivated. With Attendant Monitor active, the  
attendant cannot create a conference without first disabling the Attendant  
Monitor feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Feature interactions 565  
China - Supervised Analog Lines  
If a terminal device answers an incoming call and then initiates a conference,  
no battery reversal answer supervision signal is extended to the terminal  
device when new parties of the conference answer. However, a hook flash  
disconnect supervision signal is extended to the terminal device when the  
last party in the conference disconnects.  
If a terminal device initiates a conference, battery reversal answer  
supervision is extended to the terminal device when the first party answers.  
No polarity change is made when additional parties are added to the  
conference. The polarity is reverted to normal when the terminal device  
disconnects or when the last party in the conference disconnects.  
China - Toll Call Loss Plan  
Toll Loss Plan is not supported when a conference is in progress. When  
a local party connecting to a toll call makes a conference call, the pad  
levels on the ONS line card are switched back to their original (non-toll  
call) values. Then, the existing Conference algorithm takes care of the  
necessary pad switching. This would not alter the existing conference call in  
terms of loss levels.  
When a conference call joins in a toll call, the Toll Loss Plan is not effective.  
When a conference call involving a toll call becomes a two-party call, the  
Toll Loss Plan is applied on the set and DTI2 trunk.  
The conference pad switching algorithm is not changed for the Toll Loss  
Plan, since the 7 db requirement does not apply to a Conference call.  
Controlled Class of Service  
If Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is activated at a telephone involved in  
a conference call, established Central Office or toll calls are not affected.  
The CCOS restriction level is applied immediately, and no new calls can be  
initiated from the conference. The telephone remains in the CCOS active  
state after the conference is terminated.  
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced  
If Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is activated at a telephone on a  
conference call, established Public Exchange/Central Office or toll calls are  
not affected. The CCOS restriction level is applied immediately; however,  
no new calls can be initiated from the conference. That telephone remains  
in the CCOS state after the end of the conference.  
Dial Access to Group Calls  
The Conference feature cannot be applied to a Group Call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
566 Conference  
Dial Intercom  
If an analog (500/2500 type) telephone is part of a Dial Intercom Group  
(DIG), the user of the telephone can conference only with another user  
whose telephone is within the same Dial Intercom Group (DIG).  
Digital Private Signaling System 1 (DPNSS1) Executive Intrusion  
Executive Intrusion is denied if the requested party is established in a local  
conference, or if the requested party is involved in an enquiry call. These  
limitations may apply to the unrequested party depending on the connection  
being used between the requested and unrequested parties.  
End-to-End Signaling  
The attendant console and the telephone receiving Attendant End-to-End  
Signaling cannot both activate End-to-End Signaling simultaneously.  
Group Call  
Neither Call Transfer nor Conference can be initiated during a Group Call. If  
an analog (500/2500 type) telephone user flashes the switchhook during an  
established Group Call, the user is dropped from the call.  
Held Call Clearing  
Active Conference calls are cleared by an on-hook or Release key action.  
Conference calls being held are cleared by an on-hook action only, and not  
by a Release key action. In either case, all other parties on the conference  
remain connected.  
Hot Line  
A Flexible Hot Line (non-enhanced) telephone cannot place conference  
calls, but an Enhanced Hot Line telephone can activate the conference  
feature. If the Hot Line restriction option is set, the conference call can  
terminate only to other Hot Line telephones. If the restriction option is not  
set, the conference call can terminate to any type of telephone.  
ISDN QSIG/EuroISDN Call Completion  
A Call Completion request cannot be made on a conference call attempt.  
ISDN QSIG Name Display  
An incoming QSIG call with name display presentation allowed is  
conferenced locally. When a conferee drops out of the conference, calling  
party’s name information is displayed and is passed on to another conferee.  
Name display information remains until the last local set remains on the call.  
With presentation restricted, the calling party’s name information is not  
displayed as conferees leave the call.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Feature interactions 567  
In-Band Automatic Number Identification  
If an agent activates the Conference feature while active on an In-Band  
Automatic Number Identification (IANI) call, the display is cleared. The  
display remains clear while the Conference call is active. If the conferenced  
party releases first, the ANI number appears on the agent’s display.  
Malicious Call Trace  
When a station or console that is on the conference loop activates the  
MCT feature, the trace record shows only the conference loop number and  
conference number as the ORIGTN, and the Terminal Number (TN) of the  
station or console that activated the feature as the TERTN. No information  
on the other parties in the conference is given.  
Malicious Call Trace - Enhanced  
If MCT is activated during a conference, the trace record shows the  
conference number and the conference loop number. Trace records are  
printed for each party involved in the conference. The originator of the call’s  
trace record is printed first.  
Meridian Mail Conference Control  
Three- and six-party conference allows 2500 telephones to disconnect from  
Meridian Mail by dial access during a conference call.  
A 2500 telephone on an established call flashes the switchhook to place  
the existing call on Consultation Hold. After receiving special dial tone,  
the user dials the third party. If the third party does not answer, the call is  
forwarded to Meridian Mail. If the 2500 telephone flashes the switchhook  
again, a three-party conference is established, including Meridian Mail. If  
the user does not flash the switchhook at this time, Privacy is in effect and  
the user can disconnect from Meridian Mail by dial access before returning  
to the original call. This can be done if the user is in conference or on a  
simple two-party call.  
To disconnect from Meridian Mail, press octothorpe (#) to stop the recorded  
greeting, octothorpe (#) to stop recording your message, and 83 to  
disconnect. To disconnect from any other message system connected to  
the system, press 3 to stop the recorded message and the asterisk (*) to  
disconnect.  
Meridian 911  
When a call is answered, and then conferenced, the trunk priority is lost (the  
conference consultation call is an internal call and treated as low priority by  
the software). This operation is the same for normal calls and 911 calls.  
Meridian 911 - Call Abandon  
M911 abandoned calls cannot be conferenced.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
568 Conference  
Message Registration  
The party that originates a call is charged. The charge cannot be moved  
to another party using Conference.  
Multi-Party Operations  
Current Conference feature for analog (500/2500 type) telephones with C6A  
is not affected by conference with TSA Class of Service.  
Multi-Party Operations - Call Join  
The Call Join feature allows a user of a system or digital telephone to  
conference in or transfer a third party to a party held on the user’s telephone,  
without having to dial the third party. The user can then hang up.  
Multi-Party Operations -Three-Party Service  
Multi-Party Operations Enhancements  
The patience tone or the Misoperation ringback is not applied to a  
conference party.  
Music  
With basic Music on Hold, when a call is placed on consultation hold  
while a Conference is being established, music does not play. Enhanced  
Music (EMUS) package 119 is required for music on consultation hold.  
See the "Music, Enhanced" feature description in Features and Services  
Fundamentals (NN43001-106), Book 2.  
Music, Enhanced  
The held party receives Music when the Conference key is pressed, while  
the conference is being established, and whenever the conference is  
reduced to two parties with one party on Hold. Once the conference is  
established, Music is no longer provided.  
A Six-party Conference operates the same as a Three-party Conference.  
Network and Executive Distinctive Ringing  
If a new party is to be included in an established conference, the ringing that  
is applied to the set of the new party depends on the sets of the established  
parties. The system scans the trunks and sets of the conferees for a trunk  
marked as distinctive or a set designated as executive. The ringing cadence  
of the new set depends on the highest index found by the scan.  
Network Intercom  
A Conference call may involve a mixture of intercom and regular DN keys.  
No Hold Conference  
This feature can be enabled at any time that a regular Conference-6 feature  
can be activated.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Feature interactions 569  
Off-Hook Alarm Security  
The Off-Hook Alarm Security (OHAS) line lockout treatment occurs when a  
telephone associated with an OHAS DN initiates a Conference call and the  
ASTM expires. Only the Conference initiator receives the OHAS treatment;  
other conferees remain in Conference. If the initiator of the Conference  
call presses the Conference key, the OHAS DN is conferenced in with the  
other conferees.  
On Hold on Loudspeaker  
It will not be possible to conference the loudspeaker call to another party.  
Override  
A conference call cannot be entered by using Override.  
Override, Enhanced  
Telephones involved in conference calls cannot be force camped on or  
Priority Overridden. Overflow (fast busy) tone is returned to telephones  
attempting either Forced Camp-On or Priority Override.  
Paging  
Paging trunks cannot be conferenced.  
Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)  
Whenever a PPM trunk is added to a conference, a CDR Start record is  
generated, if CDR is equipped on the trunk. The PPM pulse counts from the  
trunk are accumulated against the party who initiated the call. If a party who  
adds a PPM trunk to the conference disconnects while the conference is still  
in progress, read requests are sent to the PPM trunk to read the residual  
count. Then, the onboard counter is cleared, the residual count is added to  
the temporary meter, and the contents of the temporary meter are added to  
the terminal meter. A CDR Transfer (X) record is then printed against this  
party, and the temporary meter is cleared. The party that is charged is the  
one that has been in conference the longest. When a trunk with disconnect  
supervision disconnects, a CDR End record is immediately printed. For  
trunks that do not provide a disconnect signal, their CDR records are not  
printed until the last party disconnects from the conference.  
Privacy Override  
The Conference feature can be used to add other parties to a Privacy  
Override connection.  
Recorded Announcement Trunk  
A Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunk cannot be Conferenced.  
Recorded Telephone Dictation  
Dictation trunks cannot be conferenced.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
570 Conference  
Ring Again  
This feature cannot be activated during a conference call.  
Station Activity Records  
For a set with Class of Service Call Detail Monitoring Allowed (CDMA)  
involved in a call with a trunk, a Station Activity Record is produced only  
when that set conferences in the first party. Conferencing of all subsequent  
parties does not generate a "D" record. An additional "D" record is produced  
when the last conferee with Class of Service CDMA connected to the trunk  
goes on hook. This does not affect any other CDR record generation during  
a conference.  
Trunk Access from any Station  
A switchhook flash on analog (500/2500 type) telephones results in special  
dial tone. Dialing SPRE + 4 (TAFAS access code) then picks up an incoming  
Trunk Access from any Station (TAFAS) call. A second switchhook flash  
reconnects the user to the original conference call. The call picked up by  
TAFAS is put on Consultation Hold. No other action can be taken with a call  
picked up in this way during an established conference call.  
Trunk Barring  
The originator of a conference call can connect only to a barred route on  
a consultation basis. A switchhook flash from an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone results in a reestablished connection with the Originating Trunk  
Connection. The user of a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone must release  
the barred connection to return to the Originating Trunk connection, or the  
conference containing the Originating Trunk connection; operating the  
Conference key on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone has no effect. An  
attendant may return to the Originating Trunk Connection, or the conference  
containing the Originating Trunk Connection, by releasing the barred  
connection. This is done by pressing the RLS DEST key; pressing the  
Conference key has no effect.  
Trunk to Trunk Connection  
Trunk to Trunk Connection allows external trunks to remain established in a  
call, provided that all external trunks involved have disconnect supervision.  
With respect to charging costs associated with a conference call, once the  
last set involved in the conference call disconnects, a search is made of all  
remaining trunks in the call to determine which call is established in the call  
for the longest period of time. This trunk is the chargeable Terminal Number  
(TN). This process is repeated to find the next chargeable TN.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is included in base system software.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 571  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 10 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for analog (500/2500  
type) telephones." (page 571)  
Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for analog (500/2500 type)  
telephones.  
2. "LD 11 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones." (page 571)  
Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephones.  
LD 10 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
500  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(XFD) XFA  
(C6D) C6A  
(Deny) allow transfer Class of Service.  
(Deny) allow six-party conference (C6A requires an XFA  
Class of Service).  
LD 11 - Enable Conference 3 or Conference 6 for Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx AO3 AO6  
Add a Conference 3 or Conference 6 key.  
xx = key number.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
572 Conference  
Feature operation  
To add a new party to an established call on a Meridian 1 proprietary  
telephone, follow these steps:  
Procedure 2  
Add a new party to an established call on a Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
Step Action  
1
Press Conference.  
The first party is on hold and you receive a dial tone.  
2
Dial the number of the new party.  
When the new party answers, you may talk privately.  
3
4
Press Conference to include all parties in the call.  
To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),  
repeat steps 1-3.  
—End—  
If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, press Rls  
to disconnect. To return to the call, press the key beside the fast flashing  
indicator.  
To add a new party to an established call on an analog (500/2500 type)  
telephone, follow these steps:  
Procedure 3  
Add a new party to an established call on an analog (500/2500 type) telephone  
Step Action  
1
Flash the switchhook.  
You hear three beeps followed by dial tone. The first party is on hold.  
2
Dial the telephone number of the person to be included in your call.  
When the call is answered, you may talk privately with the new party.  
3
4
Flash the switchhook to include all parties in the call.  
To add more parties to the conference (up to six, including yourself),  
repeat steps 1-3.  
If you make a mistake while dialing or receive a busy signal, flash  
the switchhook to return to the original caller.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Feature operation 573  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
574 Conference  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
575  
Console Operations  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 575)  
"Operating parameters" (page 576)  
"Feature interactions" (page 576)  
"Feature packaging" (page 576)  
"Feature implementation" (page 577)  
"Feature operation" (page 577)  
Feature description  
Console Operations consists of Console Presentation and Queue  
Thermometer.  
Console Presentation  
This part of the feature makes it possible to present a call to a certain  
Incoming Call Indicator (ICI) key only to specified consoles of a customer or  
an Attendant Console Group (ACG).  
Those consoles are configured (LD 15 option PSA/PSD) to have  
presentation status for the ICI key to handle the following call treatments:  
•
If a call is not automatically presented to an idle console, it is indicated  
on the appropriate ICI key on all consoles within the customer or ACG  
(LD 15 option MTI/CUI).  
•
When all attendants with presentation status for a certain ICI key within  
a group, customer or ACG are in position busy, then a call to that ICI key  
is presented to any other console within the group or only presented to  
the last console that is not in Night Service in a group (LD 15 option  
RECA/RECO).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
576 Console Operations  
•
When a ACG is in Night Service, a call to that ACG is redirected to the  
customer or trunk night DN, or to a night ACG (LD 15 option NCA/NCD).  
Queue Thermometer  
This part of the feature applies to a special console which has four  
single-digit numeric displays. Each display can be configured to show the  
number of attendant calls in queue for specified ICI keys of a customer  
or an ACG (LD 15 option MTI/CUI).  
A queue thermometer display can also be configured to show the number  
of calls to those ICI keys that are not individually displayed on any other  
display of that console.  
Optionally, this sum may exclude calls to ICI keys to which inter-attendant  
calls, recalls and metered calls are presented (LD 15 option DRT/DRE).  
Operating parameters  
Console Presentation  
When Multi-tenant Service (MTS) is in use, the following limitations apply  
when using Console Operations:  
•
•
•
All attendants must belong to an ACG  
All attendants must belong to only one ACG, and  
No attendants must belong to ACG 0.  
Feature interactions  
Console Presentation  
Departmental Listing Directory Number  
Departmental Listing Directory Number is a way of directing attendant calls.  
The feature has some similarities to MTS, but it overrides Multi-tenant  
Service (MTS) and is therefore not affected by Console Presentation.  
Listed Directory Numbers, Network Wide  
Console Operation makes it possible for each console to select which ICI  
call types is presented to the console. Network wide LDN does not work  
with the Console Presentation feature because it is not supported by NAS.  
Console Operation can, however, be configured with two additional LDNs.  
The queue thermometer indicates how many calls are in the queue for a  
certain ICI key. An ICI key can correspond to more than one ICI type. Even  
though the ICI type of a call may be different with or without this feature  
active, it will not interact with queue thermometer operations.  
Feature packaging  
Console Operations (COOP) package 169.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature operation 577  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Configure the Console Presentation feature." (page 577)  
Configure the Console Presentation feature.  
2. "LD 15 - Configure the Queue Thermometer feature." (page 577)  
Configure the Queue Thermometer feature.  
Console Presentation  
LD 15 - Configure the Console Presentation feature.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
...  
Response  
NEW CHG  
ATT_DATA  
Description  
Add, or change.  
Attendant console options  
- OPT  
(PSD) PSA  
(CUI) MTI  
Presentation Status selection allowed (denied) on attendant  
consoles.  
ICI lamps show Multi-tenant Service (MTS) Attendant  
Console Group (AGP) information for incoming calls.  
(RECO) RECA  
Attendant calls is redirected when there is no presentation  
status to other consoles in the console group; RECO when  
all consoles are busy, RECA when all but one console is  
busy.  
(NCD) NCA  
When an Attendant Console Group is in Night Service,  
redirection of attendant calls is allowed (denied).  
Queue Thermometer  
LD 15 - Configure the Queue Thermometer feature.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
...  
Response  
NEW CHG  
CDB  
Description  
Add, or change.  
Customer Data Block.  
- OPT  
(DRE) DRT  
Queue thermometer includes (excludes) Inter-Attendant  
calls, Recalls and Metered calls.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
578 Console Operations  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
579  
Console Presentation Group Level  
Services  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 579)  
"Operating parameters" (page 580)  
"Feature interactions" (page 580)  
"Feature packaging" (page 581)  
"Feature implementation" (page 581)  
"Feature operation" (page 583)  
Feature description  
A Console Presentation Group (CPG) is a subset of the consoles configured  
for a customer. A CPG handles attendant calls from one or more tenants  
and incoming trunk calls on one or more routes. CPG improves functions for  
the following CPG Level Services:  
•
•
•
Attendant Overflow Positions (AOP)  
AOP DN and waiting time threshold can be specified for each CPG.  
Call Waiting Indication  
Count thresholds, timers, and buzz options can be defined for each CPG.  
Incoming Call Identification (ICI)  
ICI keys can be defined for each CPG. Attendants see only those ICI  
definitions for their own CPG.  
•
•
Listed Directory Numbers (LDN)  
Each CPG allows four LDNs.  
Night Service (NSVC)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
580 Console Presentation Group Level Services  
Each CPG can go into Night Service mode independent of the other  
groups.  
•
Recorded Announcement (RAN)  
Each CPG can have its own recorded overflow announcements.  
Operating parameters  
Console Presentation Group (CPG) services and Departmental Listed  
Directory Numbers (DLDN) are mutually exclusive at the customer level.  
That is, DLDNs can be equipped on the same system with Console  
Presentation Groups (CPGs), but not enabled for the same customer group  
at the same time.  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Administration  
Attendants can dial the access code and activate the Administration mode.  
In this mode, they can modify the configuration of any telephone for this  
customer.  
Attendant Secrecy  
The Secrecy option specified for a customer applies to all attendants for  
that customer.  
Attendant Supervisory Console  
The supervisory console specified for a customer belongs to one CPG. In  
the Supervisory mode, ICI indicators show only the information for ICIs in  
that CPG. Thresholds specified in the Customer Data Block apply only to  
the CPG where that console resides, and do not effect any other CPG.  
Call Park  
Parked calls recall to the attendant who parked them. If that attendant  
console goes into Position Busy mode, the call recalls to an attendant in the  
same CPG as the original.  
If the attendant goes into Night Service while a call is parked, the recall  
is presented to the Night DN defined for that CPG. If an attendant goes  
into Night Service while the recall is in the attendant queue, it stays in the  
attendant queue until the call is abandoned.  
Tenant access checking between the set (A) who picks up a parked call and  
the party (B) who parked the call, is enforced as follows:  
•
•
If B is a set, tenant-to-tenant access must be allowed between A and B.  
If B is an attendant, A and B must belong to the same CPG for  
tenant-to-tenant access.  
•
If access is denied, set A (who intends to pick up the access-denied  
parked call) receives a blocking tone.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 581  
Network-Wide Listed Directory Number  
CPG does not work with the network part of Network-Wide Listed Directory  
Number (LDN) because CPG is not supported by Network Attendant  
Service, which the network part requires. This feature does, however,  
provide two additional LDNs for each Console Presentation Group.  
Night Key for Direct Inward Dialing Digit Manipulation  
The Day/Night can be activated with the DRC key by any attendant in the  
Console Presentation group.  
Feature packaging  
Console Presentation Groups (CPGS) package 172 requires:  
•
Multi-Tenant Service (TENS) package 86  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 93 - Enable Console Presentation Group (CPG)." (page 581)  
Enable Console Presentation Group (CPG).  
2. "LD 93 - Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group." (page 581)  
Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group.  
3. "LD 93 - Assign tenants to an attendant group number." (page 582)  
Assign tenants to an attendant group number.  
4. "LD 93 - Assign a route to an attendant group number." (page 582)  
Assign a route to an attendant group number.  
5. "LD 93 - Add Console Presentation Group features." (page 582)  
Add Console Presentation Group features.  
LD 93 - Enable Console Presentation Group (CPG).  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CPGS  
TENS  
xx  
Multi-Tenant data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Enable CPG Level Services.  
YES  
LD 93 - Assign attendant consoles to a presentation group.  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
REQ  
CHG  
Change.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
582 Console Presentation Group Level Services  
Prompt  
TYPE  
Response  
CPG  
Description  
Console Presentation Group data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Attendant Console Group number.  
Attendant console numbers.  
xx  
CUST  
AGNO  
ANUM  
0-63  
1-63 1-63  
LD 93 - Assign tenants to an attendant group number.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
TYPE  
CUST  
TEN  
TCPG  
xx  
Tenant to Console Presentation Group data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Tenant number.  
1-511  
0-63  
AGNO  
Attendant Console Group number.  
LD 93 - Assign a route to an attendant group number.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
TYPE  
CUST  
ROUT  
RCPG  
xx  
Route to Console Presentation Group data block.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Route number  
0-511  
0-127  
0-63  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
Attendant Console Group number.  
AGNO  
LD 93 - Add Console Presentation Group features.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
NEW CHG  
CPGP  
xx  
Description  
Add, or change Multi-Tenant Service for a customer.  
Console Presentation Group level parameters.  
Customer number, as defined in LD 15  
Console Presentation group number.  
Listed DN 0.  
TYPE  
CUST  
CPG  
1-63  
xxxx  
LDN0  
NIT1  
xxxx  
First Night Service by Time of Day (NTOD) DN.  
Hour minute for First NTOD DN.  
Second NTOD DN.  
TIM1  
NIT2  
hhmm  
xxxx  
TIM2  
hhmm  
Time for Second NTOD.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 583  
Prompt  
NIT3  
Response  
xxxx  
Description  
Third NTOD DN.  
TIM3  
hhmm  
Time for Third NTOD DN.  
Fourth NTOD DN.  
xxxx  
NIT4  
TIM4  
hhmm  
Time for Fourth NTOD.  
Incoming Call Indicators (ICI).  
Attendant queuing threshold.  
Attendant overflow DN.  
xx aaa  
ICI  
AQTT  
AODN  
CWCL  
CWTM  
CWBZ  
0-(30)-255  
xxxx  
(0)-255 (0)-255  
(0)-511 (0)-511  
Number of waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound.  
Time for waiting calls, lower threshold and upper bound.  
Call Waiting Buzz.  
(NO) YES  
(NO) YES  
The first field provides a two-second buzz when the upper  
CWCL or CWTM threshold is exceeded.  
The second field provides a buzz when the first call enters the  
queue.  
Feature operation  
No specific operating procedures are required to use this feature.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
584 Console Presentation Group Level Services  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
585  
Context-sensitive soft keys  
Feature description  
Context-sensitive soft keys provide dynamic functionality to the IP Phones  
similar to that currently supported on the M39xx digital telephone series.  
Context-sensitive soft keys are located directly below the LCD screen on  
the IP Phone. The soft key label above each key dynamically changes  
depending on the call processing state.  
Two new soft keys, Callers List and Redial List, appear in the default idle  
state when an IP phone is registered on a Signaling Server with Personal  
Directory (PD) server enabled.  
The Call Server adds up to ten additional Context-sensitive soft keys on  
the IP Phones. See Table 13 "Call features" (page 586) for a list of the  
call features with its corresponding soft key position. The functionality and  
labeling of soft keys on an IP Phone is defined by the Call Server using  
the key map download message. The context-sensitive soft key feature is  
enabled on the IP Phone and cannot be turned on or off.  
See"Using call features" (page 590)for examples of IP Phone screens in  
different call states.  
Soft keys configuration  
The default order and position of the soft keys change depending on the  
features that are configured by a system administrator. For each feature  
that is not configured, the corresponding soft key does not appear in the  
applicable screen. If a soft key is not configured, the remaining soft keys  
shift up to fill the empty soft key position.  
The set of soft keys must be configured in set data block for IP terminal  
in LD 11.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
586 Context-sensitive soft keys  
Table 12  
LD 11 - Configure soft keys  
Prompt  
REQ  
TYPE  
CUST  
TN  
Response  
Description  
NEW  
xxxx  
xx  
Configure a new soft key  
Type of telephone  
Customer number  
...  
...  
KEY  
x aaa yyy (cccc or D)  
xx = Key number  
aaa = Key name or function  
(SCR/MCR/PVN/PVR/SCN  
yyyy = DN  
cccc = CLID table entry of (0)-N,  
where N = the value entered at the  
SIZE prompt in LD 15 minus 1.  
D = the character "D". When the  
character D is entered, the system  
searches the DN keys from key 0 and  
up to find a DN key with a CLID table  
entry. The CLID associated with the  
found DN key is then used.  
...  
Table 13  
Call features  
Key Number  
Feature Name  
Call Transfer (TRN)  
Description  
17  
Use the Call Transfer feature to transfer a call to  
a third-party. You can consult with the third-party  
privately before completing the transfer.  
18  
19  
Three-party conference (A03) or The conference feature adds additional parties  
Six-party conference (A06)  
to an established call. The maximum is three  
or six, depending on the conference feature  
assigned to the conference call originator. A  
system administrator manually configures the  
feature for Three- or Six-party conference call  
using LD 11.  
Call Forward (CFW)  
Call Forward automatically forwards incoming  
calls to another destination, within or outside the  
system.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating parameters 587  
Key Number  
Feature Name  
Description  
20  
Ring Again (RGA)  
After a busy tone is received, the Ring Again  
feature alerts the caller once the line becomes  
free.  
21  
Call Park (PRK)  
Call Park places a call in a parked state, similar  
to hold, where it can be retrieved by an Attendant  
Console or telephone. A parked call must have  
an access ID, also known as a Park DN.  
22  
23  
Ringing Number Pickup (RNP)  
Speed Call (SCU/SCC) or  
An incoming call on one telephone can be  
picked up on another telephone. A system  
administrator defines the call pickup group.  
A call is made using a one-, two-, or three-digit  
System Speed Call (SSU/SSC) code. Your system administrator defines the  
Speed Call code and Speed Call lists.  
Note: The soft key label on your telephone can  
appear as SpcUsr or SpdCtl depending on  
how Key 23 in LD 11 is defined by your System  
Administrator.  
24  
25  
26  
Privacy Release (PRS)  
Charge Account (CHG)  
Call Party Number (CPN)  
In multiple appearance, single call arrangements,  
the Privacy Release feature allows another  
appearance of the Directory Number (DN) to  
enter the call. Privacy is then reestablished until  
Privacy Release is activated again.  
After a Charge Account number is used, the  
entire call is billed to that DN. The number can  
be entered before or during a call. The Charge  
Account feature is not supported for internal  
calls.  
This feature is used in conjunction with Call  
Detail Recording (CDR). A Charge Account call  
is billed directly to a specific account or charge  
number instead of a DN.  
Operating parameters  
Features are added or removed by a system administrator using LD 11.  
The default order and position of soft keys is determined by the number of  
features configured on your IP Phone.  
The following IP Phones support the context-sensitive soft key feature:  
•
•
•
•
IP Phone 2001  
IP Phone 2002 and 2004—Phase II  
IP Phone 2007  
IP 2050 Softphone  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
588 Context-sensitive soft keys  
•
•
•
IP Phone 1110, 1120E, 1140E, and 1150E  
IP Phone 2033  
WLAN Handsets 2210, 2211, and 2212  
Feature restrictions  
Context-sensitive soft keys are supported on the Survivable Remote  
Gateway (SRG) in normal mode only.  
Feature interactions  
When the Context-sensitive soft keys on the IP Phone are used by a  
Call-Server-based application such as Corporate Directory or a Signaling  
Server-based application such as Personal Directory, the soft keys are  
defined by the active application. The application controls the soft labels  
that are displayed. The IP Phone returns to the Context-Sensitive Soft Key  
labeling upon completion of the application.  
During an abnormal call-processing operation, the IP Phone advances to  
the Reorder state screen and the Reorder tone is sounded. For example, if  
an invalid extension is entered, the Reorder state screen appears on the  
display with the message Release and try again.  
CallPilot-related soft keys are only available if the CallPilot voice mailbox  
is accessed from an IP Phone by using the inbox key instead of directly  
dialing a CallPilot DN.  
The IP Phone 2033 and some third-party IP Phones have only three soft  
keys . The firmware handles the translation from four soft keys to three  
soft keys.  
Feature packaging  
The Context-sensitive soft key feature is included in the base system  
software.  
Feature implementation  
The features listed in the "Soft keys configuration" (page 585) list can be  
added or removed by a system administrator using LD 11.  
The Callers List and Redial List feature keys are not configurable in LD  
11 because the Personal Directory feature is not a Call-Server-based  
application. These keys are available from the call-processing default idle  
state of the IP Phone if the Personal Directory (PD) server is enabled.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature operation 589  
Feature operation  
The following table identifies what is displayed on the IP Phone LCD screen  
when in a specific call state.  
Table 14  
Call state screens  
Action  
Display  
Call state  
Default Idle  
Key map download message is sent For IP Phone 2001, 2002, 1110,  
to the telephone and the default idle 1120E, and 2033, the default idle  
state appears.  
state is Fwd Caller Redial  
For IP Phone 2004, 2007, 2050,  
1140E, and 1150E, the default  
idle state is Forward Callers  
Redial  
For WLAN Handsets 2210, 2211,  
and 2212, there are only four  
characters available for each soft  
key label.  
Note: Depending on your  
telephone type and the number  
of characters available for each  
soft key label on the LCD screen,  
some soft key labels can appear  
differently than what is identified  
in this document. For example,  
Forward appears as Fwd on an IP  
Phone 2001 with a six- character  
soft key label.  
Dial Tone  
Predial  
Lift the handset or press the line  
(DN) key to get a dial tone. The dial  
tone screen appears.  
SpcUsr Pickup Charge CParty  
CLEAR DELETE CANCEL  
Press the dialpad from the idle state  
to advance the display to the predial  
screen.  
Dialing  
There are no soft keys needed.  
Extension number is displayed.  
Ringing  
The calling telephone receives  
ringback tone from the called  
telephone.  
Extension and calling name are  
displayed. For example, 7466  
John Smith  
Destination Busy  
Activate RING AGAIN?  
Busy  
If the destination number is busy,  
the display advances to the busy  
state screen.  
RingAgn  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
590 Context-sensitive soft keys  
Action  
Display  
Call state  
Release and try again  
Reorder  
If an invalid number is dialed, the  
reorder state screen appears.  
Established (Active)  
Call  
After a call is established there are Layer 1:  
two layers of soft keys available.  
Press the More key to toggle  
Conf Trans Park More...  
between these layers.  
Layer 2:  
PrivRls Charge CParty  
More...  
Note: Some soft keys such as the SpcUsr key are not configured by  
default. The System Administrator will configure as needed.  
Using call features  
Table 15  
Examples of IP Phone screens in different call states  
Feature  
Action  
Display  
Enter Forward Number appears  
Call Forward  
Press the Forward key from the  
on the display line.  
default idle state.  
CFWD  
Call Forward Number  
Edit  
Enter the forward number.  
Press CFWD or Enter new #  
The arrow continues to flash until  
you press the >Forwar soft key.  
The telephone is returned to the  
default idle state of  
>Forwar Callers Redial  
with an arrow beside >Forwar  
After pressing CFW the user has  
40 seconds to complete the CFW  
otherwise it will timeout.  
Call Forward cancelled  
Cancel Call Forward  
Busy  
Press the >Forwar soft key from  
the idle screen state.  
Destination Busy  
A busy tone is received.  
Activate RING AGAIN?  
Note: The Ring Again feature times  
out if the feature is not activated.  
The telephone returns to the idle  
state.  
>RingAg Forward Callers  
Redial  
Ring Again  
Activate—screen 1  
Press RingAgn.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using call features 591  
Feature  
Action  
Display  
Ring again ready,  
Select a line RING AGAIN  
Ring Again  
Activate—screen 2  
After the busy party is free, the IP  
Phone sends a short alerting tone.  
>RingAg Forward Callers  
Redial  
Forward Callers Redial  
Cancel Ring Again  
Press the >RingAgn soft key to  
cancel and return to the idle state.  
Conference  
Press the Conf soft key.  
The conference transfer dial tone  
screen appears:  
Layer 1: >Conf SpcUsr Pickup  
More...  
(available from the  
Established (Active)  
call state)  
Layer 2: Charge CParty  
More...  
Enter a number. After the call is  
answered, press the >Conf soft key.  
Transfer  
Press the Trans soft key.  
The transfer number editing state  
screen appears:  
Layer 1: Trans SpcUsr Pickup  
More...  
Layer 2: Charge CParty  
More...  
Enter a number and press the  
>Trans key for the telephone to  
return to the idle state screen.  
Speed Call  
From the dial tone state, press the Press the SpcUsr soft key. Enter  
SpcUsr soft key.  
the speed call code. The telephone  
advances to the ringing state.  
Note: How this key is configured in  
LD 11 determines whether you see  
SpcUsr or SpdCtl.  
Dial Edit Copy Del appears on  
the screen  
Callers  
Redial  
Press the Callers soft key from  
the idle screen state. Press the up  
or down arrow on the telephone  
dialpad.  
Dial Edit Copy Del appears on  
the screen  
Press the Redial soft key from  
the idle screen state. Press the up  
or down arrow on the telephone  
dialpad.  
Note: The IP Phone must be registered on the Signaling Server with the  
Personal Directory (PD) server enabled for the Callers and Redial soft  
key features to be available. The function of the Callers and Redial list  
views are controlled by the PD server which can be configured in LD 117.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
592 Context-sensitive soft keys  
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys  
The following table identifies the soft keys in CallPilot as they relate to the  
IP Phone dialpad. CallPilot soft keys can be used instead of the telephone  
dialpad.  
Note: CallPilot-related soft keys are only available if the CallPilot voice  
mailbox is accessed from an IP Phone by using the inbox key instead  
of directly dialing a CallPilot DN.  
Table 16  
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys  
Feature  
Layer 1:  
Play  
Equivalent on telephone  
Action on CallPilot  
Press the Play key to listen to Press 2 on the dialpad.  
a message.  
Delete  
Call  
Press the Delete key to delete Press 7, 6 on the dialpad.  
the current message.  
Press the Call key to call the  
sender of a message.  
Press 9 on the dialpad.  
Press # on the dialpad.  
More...  
Use the More key to toggle to  
layer 2.  
Layer 2:  
Stop  
Press the Stop key to pause  
playback of a message.  
Conference  
Press the Conf key to  
conference another caller  
to your voice mailbox.  
Note: This is not a CallPilot  
soft key but a Call Server  
feature key. This feature gives  
someone else access to your  
mailbox.  
Reply  
Press the Reply key to the  
message.  
Press 7, 1 on the dialpad.  
Press 7, 5 on the dialpad.  
More...  
Use the More key to toggle to  
layer 3.  
Layer 3:  
Compose  
Press the Compose (Comp)  
key to compose a new  
message.  
Forward  
Press the Forward (FORWRD) Press 7, 3 on the dialpad.  
key to forward a message.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CallPilot voice-mailbox-related soft keys 593  
Feature  
Equivalent on telephone  
Action on CallPilot  
Goodbye  
Press the Goodbye (Bye)  
key to exit the voice message  
system.  
Press 8, 3 on the dialpad.  
More...  
Use the More key to toggle  
back to layer 1.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
594 Context-sensitive soft keys  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
595  
Controlled Class of Service  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 595)  
"Operating parameters" (page 595)  
"Feature interactions" (page 596)  
"Feature packaging" (page 597)  
"Feature implementation" (page 597)  
"Feature operation" (page 599)  
Feature description  
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) alters the Class of Service  
restriction levels on telephones that have been defined as CCOS  
controlling telephones. This applies to Meridian 1 proprietary telephone  
users designated as CCOS controllers. While CCOS is active, Public  
Exchange/Central Office or toll calls made from these telephones cannot be  
completed without first being routed through an attendant.  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephones designated as CCOS controlling  
telephones are assigned a CCOS key/lamp that is used to activate or cancel  
the system-defined CCOS restriction level on individual DNs.  
Operating parameters  
Controlling telephones can be any Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.  
CCOS controlling telephones must refer to the Prime Directory Number  
(PDN) when activating or canceling CCOS on other telephones.  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
596 Controlled Class of Service  
Feature interactions  
Authorization Code  
The Authorization Code overrides a telephone’s CCOS restriction level.  
Conference  
If CCOS is activated at a telephone involved in a conference call, established  
Central Office or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS restriction level is  
applied immediately, and no new calls can be initiated from the conference.  
The telephone remains in the CCOS active state after the conference is  
terminated.  
Flexible Feature Codes  
If Electronic Lock (ELK) is activated, the CCRS Class of Service is used  
whether Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) is active or not. ELK takes  
precedence over CCOS. If ELK is deactivated, the set is treated as per  
existing operation.  
When FFC ELKA and a password is entered, this set will use the CCRS  
Class of Service configured in LD 15. The CCRS Class of Service will  
always be used whether or not CCOS is currently controlling the set’s  
Class of Service. When FFC ELKD and a password is entered, the set will  
use the appropriate Class of Service associated with this set. If CCOS is  
enabled for the set, the associated customer Class of Service is used (that  
is, CCRS, ECC1, or ECC2). If CCOS is not enabled for this set, the set’s  
own Class of Service is used.  
When FFC ELK is deactivated, the set reverts back to the Class of Service  
as it should be without FFC ELK, instead of always reverting back to the set’s  
Class of Service (that is, if CCOS is enabled, it will use the customer’s Class  
of Service; if CCOS is not enabled, it will use the set’s Class of Service).  
Hot Line  
When a Hot Line DN is on a telephone that has Controlled Class of Service  
activated, Hot Line calls ignore the imposed Class of Service if the System  
Speed Call (SSC) package is present and the Hot Line list is given an  
adequate Network Class of Service (NCOS) for the override  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
CCOS restriction levels are activated or canceled on controlled telephones  
through their Prime Directory Number (PDN). When the PDN of a Meridian  
1 proprietary telephone is made CCOS active, all DNs on that telephone are  
also restricted. If the DN is a PDN on other telephones, those telephones  
are also restricted (if they have CCSA Class of Service).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Feature implementation 597  
Room Status  
You can change the access limitations for room telephones from the BGD or  
from a telephone equipped with a Room Status key (RMK).  
Scheduled Access Restrictions  
During normal hours, CCOS limitations override normal telephone  
limitations. During off-hour periods or times when a Scheduled Access  
Restrictions (SAR) LOCK is in effect, however, Scheduled Access  
Restrictions apply. When the LOCK or off-hour period ends, CCOS  
limitations continue to apply until they are removed or SAR becomes  
effective again. Whether a CCOS controller or electronic lock is used to  
activate CCOS, there is no indication to the user when Scheduled Access  
Restrictions are in effect, overriding CCOS limitations. A telephone defined  
in LD 10 or 11 or a trunk defined in LD 14, which is assigned an SAR  
group number, has its Class of Service defined by the SAR schedule of its  
SAR group.  
Station Category Indication  
The Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) feature has priority over SCI. A  
station’s SCI category is suppressed when CCOS is active, and calls to the  
attendant DN carry the CCOS class defined in the database.  
Feature packaging  
The (CCOS) package must be equipped to activate the Controlled Class of  
Service feature.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Enable CCOS for a customer." (page 598)  
Enable CCOS for a customer.  
2. "LD 11 - Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones." (page 598)  
Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
3. "LD 10 - Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones." (page 598)  
Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
4. "LD 11 - Change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on Meridian  
1 proprietary telephones." (page 599)  
Change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on Meridian 1  
proprietary telephones.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
598 Controlled Class of Service  
LD 15 - Enable CCOS for a customer.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
CCS  
Controlled Class of Service options  
Customer number  
For Large Systems  
For Small Systems  
0-99  
0-31  
- CCRS  
UNR  
CUN  
CTD  
TLD  
SRE  
FRE  
FR1  
FR2  
Unrestricted.  
Conditionally unrestricted.  
Conditionally toll-denied.  
Toll-denied.  
Semi-restricted.  
Fully restricted.  
Fully restricted 1.  
Fully restricted 2.  
LD 11 - Allow CCOS on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(CCSD), CCSA  
(Deny) allow CCOS.  
LD 10 - Allow CCOS on analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
500  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(CCSD) CCSA  
(Deny) allow CCOS.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Feature operation 599  
LD 11 - Change CCOS controlling telephone assignments on Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where c =  
card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx COS  
Assign CCOS controlling key.  
Feature operation  
To activate CCOS, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
Press CCOS.  
Note that this is a toggle: If CCOS is already active, pressing the key  
will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to  
determine if CCOS is already active.  
2
3
Dial the Prime Directory Number (PDN) of the telephone to be  
changed and press CCOS.  
Press Rls.  
—End—  
To deactivate CCOS, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Press CCOS.  
Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original Class of  
Service and press CCOS.  
3
Press Rls.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
600 Controlled Class of Service  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
601  
Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 601)  
"Operating parameters" (page 601)  
"Feature interactions" (page 602)  
"Feature packaging" (page 602)  
"Feature implementation" (page 602)  
"Feature operation" (page 605)  
Feature description  
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) allows a controller or  
attendant console to alter the Class of Service (CLS) restriction levels of  
other Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) telephones. The feature allows  
two customer-defined levels of restriction. In addition, the CCOS key can be  
assigned to an attendant console as a programmable key.  
Operating parameters  
Controlling telephones can be any Meridian 1 proprietary telephone.  
A CCOS controlling telephone must refer to the Prime DN when activating  
or canceling CCOS on other telephones.  
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) agents cannot be restricted by CCOS.  
This feature is applicable only when the CLS lamp is lit on the controlling  
telephone.  
The CLS key on an attendant console can be used only on an idle loop.  
(The loop lamp is lit; source and destination lamps are dark.)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
602 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced  
Feature interactions  
Attendant Administration  
This feature cannot change Controlled Class Service Restrictions (CCRS),  
ECC1 or ECC2, but can assign CLS keys to certain telephones.  
Attendant Supervisory Console  
When the attendant is in the supervisory mode, CCOS programming is  
prohibited.  
Authorization Codes  
The Authorization Code can override a telephone’s CCOS restriction level.  
Conference  
If CCOS is activated at a telephone on a conference call, established Public  
Exchange/Central Office or toll calls are not affected. The CCOS restriction  
level is applied immediately; however, no new calls can be initiated from the  
conference. That telephone remains in the CCOS state after the end of  
the conference.  
Coordinated Dialing Plan  
The internal DN is used for programming the CLS level for Coordinated  
Dialing Plan (CDP) from the controlling telephone.  
Multiple Appearance Directory Number  
All CCOS restriction levels are activated and canceled from the Prime  
Directory Number (PDN) for CCOS controlling telephones. The PDN for a  
Meridian 1 proprietary telephone is made CCOS active, and all DNs for that  
telephone are restricted as well. If that DN is a PDN on other telephones,  
they are also restricted (if they have CCSA Class of Service).  
Pre-translation  
The DN used to program the CCOS should be the actual DN before  
pre-translation. When programming CCOS, the DN entered is not  
pre-translated.  
Feature packaging  
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) package 173 requires:  
•
Controlled Class of Service (CCOS) package 81.  
Feature implementation  
Task summary list  
The following is a summary of the tasks in this section:  
1. "LD 15 - Define the Class of Service limitations for the system." (page  
603)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
Feature implementation 603  
Define the Class of Service limitations for the system.  
2. "LD 11 - Assign keys for the controller telephone." (page 604)  
Assign keys for the controller telephone.  
3. "LD 10 - Configure controlled analog (500/2500 type) telephones."  
(page 604)  
Configure controlled analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
4. "LD 11 - Configure the controlled Meridian 1 proprietary telephones."  
(page 604)  
Configure the controlled Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
5. "LD 12 - Assign ECCS keys for attendant console." (page 604)  
Assign ECCS keys for attendant console.  
LD 15 - Define the Class of Service limitations for the system.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
TYPE:  
CUST  
CCS  
Controlled Class of Service options  
Customer number  
0-99  
0-31  
Range for Large System and CS 1000E system.  
Range for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B.  
CCOS limitations.  
- CCRS  
(UNR)  
CTD  
CUN  
FRE  
FR1  
FR2  
SRE  
TLD  
Unrestricted service.  
Conditionally Toll Denied.  
Conditionally Unrestricted.  
Fully Restricted.  
Fully Restricted level 1.  
Fully Restricted level 2.  
Semi-Restricted.  
Toll Denied.  
xxx  
- ECC1  
- ECC2  
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 1.  
xxx = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FRE, FR1, FR2, SRE, TLD.  
xxx  
Enhanced Controlled Class of Service, Level 2.  
xxx = (UNR), CTD, CUN, FRE, FR1, FR2, SRE, TLD.  
Input limitations apply when CCSA is active. When CCSA is inactive, the telephone has the CLS  
assigned in LD 10/11.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
604 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced  
LD 11 - Assign keys for the controller telephone.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx COS  
Key number for CCOS key on controller telephone.  
LD 10 - Configure controlled analog (500/2500 type) telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
500  
Telephone type.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(CCSD) CCSA  
(Deny) allow CCOS.  
LD 11 - Configure the controlled Meridian 1 proprietary telephones.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
a...a  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
c u  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
CLS  
(CCSD) CCSA  
(Deny) allow CCOS.  
LD 12 - Assign ECCS keys for attendant console.  
Prompt  
REQ  
Response  
CHG  
Description  
Change.  
2250  
TYPE  
Attendant console type.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Feature operation 605  
Prompt  
Response  
Description  
TN  
Terminal number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
KEY  
xx COS  
Key number for CCOS controller key on attendant console.  
xx = key number (must be greater than 1).  
Feature operation  
To activate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS) from a Meridian 1  
proprietary telephone with the feature currently inactive, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
Press CCOS to begin the activation sequence.  
Note that this is a toggle: if CCOS is already active, pressing the key  
will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to  
determine if CCOS is already active.  
2
3
Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The  
controlling telephone’s display, if equipped, shows the DN of the  
changed telephone and a 0 (zero).  
To select ECC1, dial # 1.  
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The controlling telephone’s  
display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 1.  
To select ECC2, dial # 2.  
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The controlling telephone’s  
display, if equipped, shows the DN of the changed telephone and a 2.  
4
Press Rls.  
—End—  
To activate ECCS from an attendant console, follow these steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
Select an idle loop key.  
Press CCOS.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
606 Controlled Class of Service, Enhanced  
Note that this is a toggle: If CCOS is already active, pressing the key  
will change the CCOS state to inactive. Check the CCOS lamp to  
determine if CCOS is already active.  
3
4
5
Dial the PDN of the telephone to be changed and press CCOS. The  
console’s display shows the DN of the changed telephone. A 0 (zero)  
is displayed if the telephone is active in the original CCOS mode.  
If the telephone does not have CCOS or ECCS active, the console  
does not acknowledge that you have successfully entered a valid  
CCOS DN.  
To select ECC1, dial # 1.  
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The console’s display shows  
the DN of the changed telephone and a 1.  
To select ECC2, dial # 2.  
Note that the octothorpe (#) is required. The console’s display shows  
the DN of the changed telephone and a 2.  
Press Rls.  
—End—  
To deactivate Enhanced Controlled Class of Service (ECCS), follow these  
steps:  
Step Action  
1
2
3
Select an idle loop key.  
Press CCOS.  
Dial the PDN of the telephone to be returned to its original Class of  
Service and press CCOS.  
4
Press Rls.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
607  
Converged Office  
The multimedia strategy of many CS 1000 customers is based on deploying  
the Microsoft® Office Communicator soft clients and Live Communications  
Server. This strategy enables the introduction of multimedia capabilities  
using popular instant messenger (IM) clients without the need to install and  
support additional desktop software.  
The Nortel Converged Office feature combines the business-grade  
telephony of the Communication Server 1000 with the real-time multimedia  
communication and the remote call control provided by Microsoft® Office  
Live Communications Server 2005 and Microsoft® Office Communicator  
2005 products.  
For a complete description of this product, refer to Nortel Converged Office  
Fundamentals (NN43001-525).  
On the Call Server, package 408, Multimedia Systems Convergence  
(MS_CONV) must be unrestricted. Class of Service (CLS) Remote Call  
Control (T87D/T87A) must be allowed in LD 11. For more information, see  
Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
608 Converged Office  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
609  
Corporate Directory  
Contents  
This section contains information on the following topics:  
"Feature description" (page 609)  
"Operating parameters" (page 610)  
"Feature interactions" (page 611)  
"Feature packaging" (page 611)  
"Feature implementation" (page 611)  
"Feature operation" (page 612)  
Feature description  
A Corporate Directory database is created from Telephony Manager (TM)  
information. This database is downloaded and stored on the system.  
The Corporate Directory feature extends the use of this database to IP  
Phones. Access to Corporate Directory is provided through the Directory  
key.  
Corporate Directory is not supported on the IP Phone 2001, IP Audio  
Conference Phone 2033, and IP Phone 1110.  
Corporate Directory provides an alphabetical list of entries using last names  
(system generated). Users can:  
•
•
•
search by name  
view additional information on each entry  
dial from the Corporate Directory  
The system administrator can configure TM to download the directory  
database manually, or automatically, to the system.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
610 Corporate Directory  
For information on the Corporate Directory feature for M3900  
series telephones, refer to Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals  
(NN43001-567).  
Operating parameters  
The following telephones support the Corporate Directory feature:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP Phone 2002  
IP Phone 2004  
IP Phone 2007  
IP Phone 1120E  
IP Phone 1140E  
IP Phone 1150E  
IP Softphone 2050 or MVC 2050  
WLAN Handset 2210  
WLAN Handset 2211  
WLAN Handset 2212  
WLAN Handset 6120  
WLAN Handset 6140  
To access Corporate Directory from the telephone, the user must have the  
Corporate Directory Allowed (CRPA) Class of Service defined in LD 11.  
When Corporate Directory is being updated with new data, the user cannot  
access Corporate Directory.  
The TM 3.1 Corporate Directory utility gathers data from the TM 3.1  
databases and downloads it to the system. To use the Corporate Directory  
utility, TM 2.0 or later must be installed. For more information, refer to  
Telephony Manager 3.1 Installation and Commissioning (NN43050-300).  
Call Server memory requirements  
The Call Server memory usage for Corporate Directory is the same for both  
IP Phones and Digital Telephones.  
The equations for approximating Call Server memory usage for Corporate  
Directory are:  
1. Call Server hard disk space needed (bytes) = Number of directory  
entries * Average length of all entries *2  
2. Call Server RAM needed to store database (bytes) = (Average length of  
all entries + 20) * 1.25 * Number of directory entries  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature implementation 611  
For a sample database where the average length is 29.5 characters, see  
Table 17 "Memory requirements based on database size" (page 611) for the  
Call Server memory requirements.  
Table 17  
Memory requirements based on database size  
Call Server Hard disk  
Call Server  
Database size  
space needed  
RAM needed  
(rounded to nearest 1000)  
(rounded to next 0.5 MB)  
16 000  
32 000  
48 000  
64 000  
80 000  
96 000  
113 000  
1 MB  
2 MB  
3 MB  
4 MB  
5 MB  
6 MB  
7 MB  
1.5 MB  
2.0 MB  
3.5 MB  
4.0 MB  
5.5 MB  
6.0 MB  
7.0 MB  
Feature interactions  
Call Transfer  
Conference  
The Corporate Directory lookup feature works during Call Transfer and  
Conference operations.  
Feature packaging  
This feature is packaged under Corporate Directory (CDIR) package 381.  
Feature implementation  
You can change the Call Server configuration while IP Phone users are  
logged on to Corporate Directory. The changes only take effect when the  
user logs off and then logs on again to the Corporate Directory.  
LD 11 - Configure CRPA/CRPD Class of Service.  
Prompt  
REQ:  
TYPE:  
TN  
Response  
NEW CHG  
a...a  
Description  
Add new data, or change existing data.  
Telephone type. Type ? for a list of possible responses.  
Terminal Number  
l s c u  
c u  
Format for Large System and CS 1000E system,  
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u = unit.  
Format for Small System and Media Gateway 1000B where  
c = card and u = unit.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
612 Corporate Directory  
Prompt  
...  
Response  
Description  
CLS  
(CRPD) CRPA  
Enable or disable the Corporate Directory feature for this  
TN.  
Feature operation  
Refer to "Accessing the Corporate Directory" (page 612) to access the  
Corporate Directory on the IP Phones.  
Accessing the Corporate Directory  
Step Action  
1
2
3
4
Press the Directory key to view a list of available applications.  
Highlight Corporate Directory, and then press the Select soft key.  
Go through the Status Query process.  
Enter a name, and select Search.  
You can enter special characters in the search parameters. The  
special characters include some symbols (for example, plus sign [+]  
and dash [-]) and international characters.  
5
6
To enter special characters, press the Up navigation key.  
The special characters are displayed.  
Use the navigation keys to review the special characters available.  
The Corporate Directory may not be available for the following  
reasons:  
•
•
•
The Corporate Directory is locked. The message "Try again  
Later" displays.  
The Corporate Directory file is not available. The message  
"Directory unavailable" displays.  
The Class of Service is not configured.  
7
To exit the Corporate Directory, press the Quit key or the Directory  
key.  
—End—  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Feature operation 613  
Special characters  
The special character set includes all characters from the extended portion  
of the ASCII character set. The extended ASCII character set that supports  
the IP Phone’s current language is the character set that appears in the  
edit mode. The special character set contains up to 130 characters. It is  
displayed in six lines with 24 characters on each line. Use the navigation  
keys to scroll through the list or to move through a 24-character line.  
The special charactor set does not include upper and lowercase letters or  
numerals. Use the keypad of the IP Phone to define these characters.  
Search/Edit screen features  
Review Table 18 "Search and Edit screen features" (page 613)for more  
information on the Search/Edit screen features.  
Table 18  
Search and Edit screen features  
To...  
Select this key...  
Delete  
Backspace one character.  
Cancel  
Close the Corporate Directory.  
Switch the next character to either uppercase or lowercase.  
Case  
Search  
Search for directory entries. Results are displayed in either a List View  
screen or No Match screen.  
More  
Switch pages.  
Number 1-9  
Toggle characters.  
Up/Down  
Display a screen to enter special characters.  
navigation  
Use the Up and Down navigation keys to navigate through the lists of  
available special characters.  
Right/Left  
navigation  
Move cursor location.  
When reviewing special characters, use these keys to select a character in  
the line display.  
Choose  
Text  
Select a special character. This option is available when reviewing the  
special characters.  
Close the special character display. No special character is selected. The  
display returns to the default Search/Edit screen.  
Corporate Directory views  
There are two search results screens available for the IP Phones:  
•
ListView (default view)  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
614 Corporate Directory  
•
CardView—not available for IP Phone 2002  
If a search was successful and entries were found in the directory, the first  
match displays on the screen.  
If there is no match to the search query, you can choose to either start a  
new search or change the information in the initial search.  
ListView  
The ListView screen shows a list of names where the user selects the name  
they want to call from the list using the navigation keys.  
CardView  
The Card view provides the following information about the name found in  
the directory: name, telephone number, and department name. Cardview  
is not available for IP Phone 2002.  
Table 19  
ListView and CardView screen features  
Press this key...  
To...  
Up or Down  
Scroll through the list of directory entries that match your  
search criteria.  
Right  
On the IP Phone 2004 and IP Softphone 2050, change view  
to Card view, where the name, telephone number, and  
department are displayed.  
Left  
Dial  
In Card view only, return to List view.  
Dial the selected DN.  
•
•
If there is no DN number associated with the directory  
entry, a message displays ("No number in directory").  
If there is no available DN key, a message displays ("No  
available line"). When displayed, select Done to return  
to the List view or Card view.  
NewFind  
Resume  
Return to the Search/Edit screen.  
Return to the Search/Edit screen with the previously  
entered name displayed.  
Appears on both views.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
NN43001-106 02.04 Standard  
Release 5.5 9 May 2008  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nortel Communication Server 1000  
Features and Services Fundamentals — Book 2 of 6 (C)  
Copyright © 1994–2008, Nortel Networks  
All Rights Reserved.  
Publication: NN43001-106  
Document status: Standard  
Document version: 02.04  
Document date: 9 May 2008  
To provide feedback or to report a problem with this document, go to http://www.nortel.com/documentfeedback  
Sourced in Canada  
LEGAL NOTICE  
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing  
NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice  
Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.  
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Washer 07 616 760 User Manual
Miller Electric Welding System PipePro 304 User Manual
MTD Log Splitter 242 622 000 User Manual
National Instruments Network Card NI 9485 User Manual
National Instruments Switch 1191 User Manual
NEC Cordless Telephone Dterm Analog Cordless Telephone User Manual
Nikon Camera Lens AF S Nikkor User Manual
Nokia Digital Photo Frame SU 7 User Manual
Panasonic Camcorder 3CCD HD User Manual
Panasonic Wheelchair ER2031 2051 User Manual